Test and Measurement

Division

Operating Manual

SIGNAL GENERATOR
SME02
1038.6002.02

SME03
1038.6002.03

SME03E
1038.6002.13

SME03A
1038.6002.53

SME06
1038.6002.06

Printed in the Federal

Republic of Germany

1039.1856.12-14- 1
SME Tabbed Divider Overview

Tabbed Divider Overview

Certificate of quality
List of R & S Representatives
Safety Instructions

Contents

Data Sheet

EC Certificate of Conformity

Tabbed Divider

1 Chapter 1: Preparation for Use

2 Chapter 2: Manual Operation

3 Chapter 3: Remote Control

4 Chapter 4: Maintenance

5 Chapter 5: Performance Test

6 Annex A: Interfaces

7 Annex B: List of Error Messages

8 Annex C: List of Commands

9 Annex D: Programming Example

10 Index

1039.1856.12 RE E-1
SME Contents

Contents
1 Preparation for Use ............................................................................................. 1.1

1.1 Putting into Operation........................................................................................................... 1.1

1.1.1 Supply Voltage ............................................................................................................ 1.1

1.1.2 Switching On/Off the Instrument................................................................................. 1.1
1.1.3 Initial Status ................................................................................................................ 1.2
1.1.4 Setting Contrast and Brightness of the Display .......................................................... 1.2
1.1.5 RAM With Battery Back-Up ........................................................................................ 1.2
1.1.6 Preset Setting ............................................................................................................. 1.3
1.2 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 1.3

1.3 Fitting the Options................................................................................................................. 1.4

1.3.1 Opening the Casing .................................................................................................... 1.4

1.3.2 Overview of the Slots .................................................................................................. 1.5
1.3.3 Option SM-B1 - Reference Oscillator OCXO.............................................................. 1.5
1.3.4 Option SM-B2 - LF Generator..................................................................................... 1.6
1.3.5 Options SM-B3, SM-B8 and SM-B9 - Pulse Modulator 1.5, 3 and 6 GHz .................. 1.7
1.3.6 Option SM-B4 - Pulse Generator ................................................................................ 1.7
1.3.7 Option SM-B5 - FM/PM Modulator.............................................................................. 1.7
1.3.8 Option SM-B6 - Multifunction Generator..................................................................... 1.9
1.3.9 Option SME-B11 - DM-Coder ..................................................................................... 1.9
1.3.10 Option SME-B12 - DM Memory Extension ............................................................... 1.11
1.3.11 Option SME-B19 - Rear Panel Connections for RF and LF ..................................... 1.11
1.3.12 Options SME-B41 - FLEX Protocol - and SME-B42 - POCSAG .............................. 1.11
1.3.13 Cabling of the 50-MHz Reference (REF50).............................................................. 1.12
1.4 Mounting into a 19" Rack ................................................................................................... 1.12
2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 2.1

2.1 Explanation of Front and Rear Panel................................................................................... 2.1

2.1.1 Elements of the Front Panel ....................................................................................... 2.1

[Link] Display......................................................................................................... 2.1
[Link] Controls ....................................................................................................... 2.3
[Link] Inputs/Outputs ........................................................................................... 2.11
2.1.2 Elements of the Rear Panel...................................................................................... 2.13
2.2 Operating Concept .............................................................................................................. 2.18

2.2.1 Display ...................................................................................................................... 2.18

2.2.3 Basic Operating Steps .............................................................................................. 2.19
[Link] Calling the Menus...................................................................................... 2.19
[Link] Selection and Change of Parameters ....................................................... 2.20
[Link] Triggering Action ....................................................................................... 2.21
[Link] Quick Selection of Menu (QUICK SELECT).............................................. 2.21
[Link] Use of [FREQ] and [LEVEL] Keys ............................................................. 2.22
[Link] Use of [RF ON / OFF] and [MOD ON / OFF] Keys.................................... 2.22
[Link] Changing Unit of Level .............................................................................. 2.22

1039.1856.12 3 E-13
Contents SME

[Link] Correction of Input..................................................................................... 2.23

2.2.4 Sample Setting for First Users.................................................................................. 2.23
2.2.4 List Editor .................................................................................................................. 2.28
[Link] Select and Generate - SELECT LIST........................................................ 2.29
[Link] Deletion of Lists - DELETE LIST ............................................................... 2.30
[Link] Edition of Lists ........................................................................................... 2.31
[Link] Pattern Setting to Operate the List Editor.................................................. 2.35
2.2.5 Save/Recall - Storing/Calling of Instrument Settings .............................................. 2.39
2.3 Menu Summary.................................................................................................................... 2.40

2.4 RF Frequency....................................................................................................................... 2.41

2.4.1 Frequency Offset ...................................................................................................... 2.42

2.5 RF Level................................................................................................................................ 2.43

2.5.1 Level Offset............................................................................................................... 2.45

2.5.2 Interrupt-free Level Setting ....................................................................................... 2.45
2.5.3 Switching On/Off Internal Level Control.................................................................... 2.46
2.5.4 Internal Level Control - Bandwidth Selection ............................................................ 2.47
2.5.5 User Correction (UCOR)........................................................................................... 2.47
2.5.6 EMF .......................................................................................................................... 2.49
2.5.7 [RF ON / OFF]-Key ................................................................................................... 2.49
2.5.8 Reset Overload Protection (only SME02 and SME03) ............................................. 2.49
2.6 Modulation ........................................................................................................................... 2.50

2.6.1 Modulation Sources .................................................................................................. 2.50

[Link] Simultaneous Modulation .......................................................................... 2.51
[Link] Alternate Switching Off of Modulations ..................................................... 2.51
[Link] [MOD ON/OFF] Key .................................................................................. 2.52
2.6.2 Analog Modulation .................................................................................................... 2.53
[Link] LF-Generator ............................................................................................. 2.53
[Link] Amplitude Modulation ................................................................................ 2.54
[Link] Frequency Modulation ............................................................................... 2.56
[Link].1 FM Deviation Limits ................................................................. 2.57
[Link].2 Preemphasis ........................................................................... 2.57
[Link] Phase Modulation...................................................................................... 2.58
[Link].1 PM Deviation Limits................................................................. 2.59
[Link] Pulse Modulation ....................................................................................... 2.60
[Link].1 Pulse Generator ...................................................................... 2.60
[Link] Stereo Modulation ..................................................................................... 2.63
[Link] VOR- / ILS-Test Signals ............................................................................ 2.64
[Link].1 VOR Modulation ...................................................................... 2.65
[Link].2 ILS-Glide Slope Modulation (ILS-GS)...................................... 2.68
[Link].3 ILS-Localizer Modulation (ILS-LOC)........................................ 2.72
[Link].4 Marker Beacon ........................................................................ 2.76
2.6.3 Digital Modulation ..................................................................................................... 2.78
[Link] Data Generator.......................................................................................... 2.79
[Link] PRBS Generator........................................................................................ 2.80
[Link] DM Memory Extension, Option SME-B12 ................................................. 2.81
[Link].1 Recording a Data Sequence from an External Source ........... 2.84
[Link] External Data Sources .............................................................................. 2.86
[Link] GMSK Modulation ..................................................................................... 2.87
[Link] GFSK Modulation ...................................................................................... 2.89
[Link] QPSK Modulation ...................................................................................... 2.91

1039.1856.12 4 E-13
SME Contents

[Link] FSK Modulation ......................................................................................... 2.94

[Link] 4FSK Modulation ....................................................................................... 2.97
[Link] FFSK Modulation..................................................................................... 2.100
[Link] Radiocommunication Service ERMES .................................................... 2.102
[Link] Radiocommunication Service FLEX........................................................ 2.107
[Link] Radiocommunication Service ReFLEX25 ............................................... 2.116
[Link] Radiocommunication Service POCSAG ................................................. 2.127
2.7 LF-Output ........................................................................................................................... 2.132

2.8 Sweep ................................................................................................................................. 2.134

2.8.1 Setting the Sweep Range (START, STOP, CENTER and SPAN) ......................... 2.134
2.8.2 Selecting the Sweep Run (SPACING LIN, LOG).................................................... 2.135
2.8.3 Operating Modes (MODE) ...................................................................................... 2.135
2.8.4 Trigger Input ........................................................................................................... 2.136
2.8.5 Sweep Outputs ....................................................................................................... 2.136
2.8.6 RF-Sweep ............................................................................................................... 2.138
2.8.7 LEVEL Sweep......................................................................................................... 2.140
2.8.8 LF-Sweep................................................................................................................ 2.141
2.9 LIST Mode .......................................................................................................................... 2.143

2.9.1 Operating Modes (MODE) ...................................................................................... 2.143

2.9.2 Inputs/Outputs ........................................................................................................ 2.144
2.10 Memory Sequence............................................................................................................. 2.148

2.11 Utilities................................................................................................................................ 2.152

2.11.1 IEC-Bus Address (SYSTEM-GPIB) ........................................................................ 2.152

2.11.2 Parameter of the RS232 Interface (SYSTEM-RS232) ........................................... 2.153
2.11.3 Suppressing Indications and Deleting Memories (SYSTEM-SECURITY) .............. 2.154
2.11.4 Indication of the IEC-Bus Language (LANGUAGE)................................................ 2.155
2.11.5 Reference Frequency Internal/External (REF OSC)............................................... 2.155
2.11.6 Phase of the Output Signal (PHASE) ..................................................................... 2.156
2.11.7 Password Input With Functions Protected (PROTECT) ......................................... 2.157
2.11.8 Calibration (CALIB) ................................................................................................. 2.158
2.11.9 Indications of Module Variants (DIAG-CONFIG) .................................................... 2.162
2.11.10 Voltage Indication of Test Points (DIAG-TPOINT) ................................................. 2.163
2.11.11 Indications of Service Data (DIAG-PARAM)........................................................... 2.164
2.11.12 Test (TEST) ............................................................................................................ 2.164
2.11.13 Assigning Modulations to the [MOD ON/OFF] Key (MOD-KEY)............................. 2.165
2.11.14 Setting Auxiliary Inputs/Outputs (AUX-I / O) ........................................................... 2.166
2.11.15 Switching On/Off Beeper (BEEPER) ...................................................................... 2.167
2.11.16 Installation of Software Option ................................................................................ 2.168
2.12 The Help System................................................................................................................ 2.169

2.13 Status.................................................................................................................................. 2.169

2.14 Error Messages.................................................................................................................. 2.170

1039.1856.12 5 E-13
Contents SME

3 Remote Control.................................................................................................... 3.1

3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3.1

3.2 Brief Instructions................................................................................................................... 3.1

3.2.1 IEC-Bus....................................................................................................................... 3.1

3.2.2 RS-232 Interface......................................................................................................... 3.2
3.3 Switchover to Remote Control............................................................................................. 3.2

3.3.1 Remote Control via IEC Bus ....................................................................................... 3.3

[Link] Setting the Device Address ......................................................................... 3.3
[Link] Indications during Remote Control .............................................................. 3.3
[Link] Querying the Error Status............................................................................ 3.3
[Link] Return to Manual Operation ........................................................................ 3.3
3.3.2 Remote Control via RS-232-Interface......................................................................... 3.4
[Link] Setting the Transmission Parameters ......................................................... 3.4
[Link] Indications during Remote Control .............................................................. 3.4
[Link] Return to Manual Operating ........................................................................ 3.4
3.4 Messages ............................................................................................................................... 3.4

3.4.1 Interface Message ...................................................................................................... 3.4

3.4.2 Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) ........................................... 3.5
3.5 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages................................................................... 3.5

3.5.1 SCPI Introduction........................................................................................................ 3.5

3.5.2 Structure of a Command ............................................................................................ 3.6
3.5.3 Structure of a Command Line..................................................................................... 3.8
3.5.4 Responses to Queries ................................................................................................ 3.8
3.5.5 Parameter ................................................................................................................... 3.9
3.5.6 Overview of Syntax Elements ................................................................................... 3.11
3.6 Description of Commands.................................................................................................. 3.12

3.6.1 Notation..................................................................................................................... 3.12

3.6.2 Common Commands................................................................................................ 3.14
3.6.3 ABORt System.......................................................................................................... 3.17
3.6.4 CALibration-System .................................................................................................. 3.18
3.6.5 DIAGnostic-System .................................................................................................. 3.21
3.6.6 DISPLAY-System...................................................................................................... 3.24
3.6.7 FORMat-System ....................................................................................................... 3.25
3.6.8 MEMory System........................................................................................................ 3.26
3.6.9 OUTPut-System........................................................................................................ 3.26
3.6.10 OUTPut2 System ...................................................................................................... 3.28
3.6.11 SOURce-System ...................................................................................................... 3.29
[Link] SOURce:AM Subsystem ........................................................................... 3.30
[Link] SOURce:CORRection Subsystem ............................................................ 3.32
[Link] SOURce:DM Subsystem ........................................................................... 3.34
[Link] SOURce:ERMes Subsystem..................................................................... 3.50
[Link] SOURce:FLEX Subsystem ....................................................................... 3.55
[Link] SOURce:FM Subsystem ........................................................................... 3.63

1039.1856.12 6 E-13
SME Contents

[Link] SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem ............................................................. 3.65

[Link] SOURce:ILS Subsystem ........................................................................... 3.68
[Link] SOURce:LIST Subsystem ......................................................................... 3.75
[Link] SOURce:MARKer Subsystem ................................................................... 3.78
[Link] SOURce:MBEacon Subsystem ................................................................. 3.80
[Link] SOURce:PHASe Subsystem..................................................................... 3.81
[Link] SOURce:PM Subsystem ........................................................................... 3.82
[Link] SOURce:POCSag Subsystem .................................................................. 3.84
[Link] SOURce:POWer Subsystem .................................................................... 3.88
[Link] SOURce:PULM Subsystem ...................................................................... 3.91
[Link] SOURce:PULSe Subsystem ..................................................................... 3.92
[Link] SOURce:REFLex25 Subsystem ............................................................... 3.93
[Link] SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem ............................................................. 3.99
[Link] SOURce:STEReo Subsystem ................................................................. 3.100
[Link] SOURce:SWEep Subsystem .................................................................. 3.103
[Link] SOURce:VOR Subsystem....................................................................... 3.106
3.6.12 SOURce0|2 System ................................................................................................ 3.109
[Link] SOURce0|2:FREQuency Subsystem ...................................................... 3.109
[Link] SOURce 0|2:FUNCtion-Subsystem......................................................... 3.111
[Link] SOURce2:MARKer-Subsystem............................................................... 3.112
[Link] SOURce2:SWEep-Subsystem ................................................................ 3.113
3.6.13 STATus-System...................................................................................................... 3.115
3.6.14 SYSTem-System .................................................................................................... 3.117
3.6.15 TEST-System ......................................................................................................... 3.122
3.6.16 TRIGger-System ..................................................................................................... 3.124
3.6.17 UNIT-System .......................................................................................................... 3.129
3.7 Instrument Model and Command Processing ................................................................ 3.130

3.7.1 Input Unit................................................................................................................. 3.130

3.7.2 Command Recognition ........................................................................................... 3.131
3.7.3 Data Set and Instrument Hardware ........................................................................ 3.131
3.7.4 Status Reporting System ........................................................................................ 3.131
3.7.5 Output Unit.............................................................................................................. 3.132
3.7.6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization........................................... 3.132
3.8 Status Reporting System.................................................................................................. 3.133

3.8.1 Structure of an SCPI Status Register ..................................................................... 3.133

3.8.2 Overview of the Status Registers ........................................................................... 3.135
3.8.3 Description of the Status Registers ........................................................................ 3.136
[Link] Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) ............ 3.136
[Link] IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)................................... 3.137
[Link] Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE) . 3.137
[Link] STATus:OPERation Register .................................................................. 3.138
[Link] STATus:QUEStionable Register ............................................................. 3.139
3.8.4 Application of the Status Reporting Systems.......................................................... 3.140
[Link] Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure ....................... 3.140
[Link] Serial Poll ................................................................................................ 3.140
[Link] Parallel Poll.............................................................................................. 3.141
[Link] Query by Means of Commands............................................................... 3.141
[Link] Error Queue Query.................................................................................. 3.141
3.8.5 Resetting Values of the Status Reporting Systems ................................................ 3.142
3.9 Fast Restore Mode ............................................................................................................ 3.143

1039.1856.12 7 E-13
Contents SME

4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting...................................................................................... 4.1

4.1 Maintenance........................................................................................................................... 4.1

4.1.1 Cleaning the Outside .................................................................................................. 4.1

4.1.2 Storage ....................................................................................................................... 4.1
4.1.3 Exchange of the Lithium Batteries .............................................................................. 4.1
[Link] Exchange of RAM Battery ........................................................................... 4.2
[Link] Exchange of XMEM Battery ........................................................................ 4.4
4.2 Functional Test ...................................................................................................................... 4.5
5 Performance Test ................................................................................................ 5.1
5.1 Test Instruments and Utilities .............................................................................................. 5.1

5.1.1 Test Systems to Measure Modulation Characteristics................................................ 5.3

[Link] Standard Test System ................................................................................. 5.3
[Link] Test System with Audio Analyzer ................................................................ 5.3
[Link] Test System for Broadband FM .................................................................. 5.4
[Link] Test System for Pulse Modulation............................................................... 5.4
[Link] Test System for GFSK ................................................................................ 5.5
[Link] Test System Extension by Down Conversion.............................................. 5.5
5.2 Test Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 5.6

5.2.1 Display and Keyboard ................................................................................................. 5.6

5.2.2 Frequency Setting....................................................................................................... 5.6
5.2.3 Settling Time............................................................................................................... 5.8
5.2.4 Reference Frequency ............................................................................................... 5.10
5.2.5 Harmonics Suppression/Subharmonics ................................................................... 5.10
5.2.6 Suppression of Nonharmonics.................................................................................. 5.11
5.2.7 SSB Phase Noise ..................................................................................................... 5.12
5.2.8 Broadband Noise ...................................................................................................... 5.14
5.2.9 Residual FM.............................................................................................................. 5.14
5.2.10 Residual AM.............................................................................................................. 5.15
5.2.11 Output Level.............................................................................................................. 5.15
5.2.12 Output Reflection Coefficient .................................................................................... 5.17
5.2.13 Interrupt-free Level Setting (ATTEN FIXED) ............................................................ 5.18
5.2.14 Overvoltage Protection (SME02 and SME03 only) ................................................... 5.19
5.2.15 Level Monitoring at Input EXT1................................................................................. 5.19
5.2.16 Modulation Depth of AM ........................................................................................... 5.20
5.2.17 AM Frequency Response ......................................................................................... 5.20
5.2.18 AM Distortion Factor ................................................................................................. 5.21
5.2.19 Residual PhiM with AM ............................................................................................. 5.21
5.2.20 Level Monitoring at Input EXT2 (Option SM-B5) ...................................................... 5.22
5.2.21 FM Deviation Setting................................................................................................. 5.22
5.2.22 FM Frequency Response.......................................................................................... 5.23
[Link] FM Frequency Response up to 100 kHz................................................... 5.23
[Link] FM Frequency Response up to 2 MHz...................................................... 5.23
5.2.23 FM Distortion Factor ................................................................................................. 5.24
5.2.24 FM Preemphasis....................................................................................................... 5.24
5.2.25 Residual AM with FM ................................................................................................ 5.24
5.2.26 Carrier frequency Deviation with FM......................................................................... 5.25

1039.1856.12 8 E-13
SME Contents

5.2.27 FM Stereo Modulation............................................................................................... 5.25

5.2.28 PhiM Deviation Setting.............................................................................................. 5.26
5.2.29 PhiM Frequency Response....................................................................................... 5.26
5.2.30 PhiM Distortion Factor .............................................................................................. 5.27
5.2.31 Internal Modulation Generator .................................................................................. 5.27
5.2.32 Pulse Modulation (Option SM-B3/B8/B9).................................................................. 5.28
[Link] ON/OFF - Ratio ......................................................................................... 5.28
[Link] Dynamic Characteristics............................................................................ 5.28
5.2.33 GFSK Modulation (Option SME-B11) ....................................................................... 5.29
[Link] Spectrum ................................................................................................... 5.29
[Link] Deviation Error........................................................................................... 5.31
5.2.34 QPSK Modulation ..................................................................................................... 5.32
[Link] Spectrum ................................................................................................... 5.32
[Link] Vector Error (NADC Standard IS-54) ........................................................ 5.33
5.2.35 GMSK Modulation..................................................................................................... 5.34
[Link] Spectrum ................................................................................................... 5.34
[Link] Phase Error ............................................................................................... 5.35
5.2.36 FFSK Modulation ...................................................................................................... 5.37
5.2.37 LF Generator (Option SM-B2) .................................................................................. 5.37
[Link] Frequency Error......................................................................................... 5.37
[Link] Frequency Response ................................................................................ 5.38
5.2.38 Pulse Generator (Option SM-B4).............................................................................. 5.38
5.2.39 Multi-Function Generator (Option SM-B6) ................................................................ 5.40
[Link] Frequency Error, Distortion Factor and Level............................................ 5.40
[Link] Frequency Response ................................................................................ 5.40
[Link] Distortion Factor and Crosstalk Attenuation Stereo .................................. 5.41
[Link] Pilot Tone Level......................................................................................... 5.41
5.2.40 Memory Extension (Option SME-B12)...................................................................... 5.42
[Link] Read/Write Check via the IEC/IEEE Bus .................................................. 5.42
[Link] Dibit Synchronization ................................................................................. 5.43
[Link] External Triggering .................................................................................... 5.43
5.3 Performance Test ................................................................................................................ 5.44
Annex A ..................................................................................................................7B.1

IEC/IEEE Bus Interface ..................................................................................................................7B.1

Characteristics of the Interface..............................................................................................7B.1

Bus Lines ...............................................................................................................................7B.1
Interface Messages ...............................................................................................................7B.3
RS-232-C Interface .........................................................................................................................7B.4

Interface characteristics.........................................................................................................7B.4
Signal lines ............................................................................................................................7B.4
Transmission parameters .........................................................................................7B.5
Interface functions .................................................................................................................7B.5
Handshake................................................................................................................7B.6

1039.1856.12 9 E-13
Contents SME

Annex B ..................................................................................................................8C.1

List of Error Messages...........................................................................................................8C.1

SCPI-Specific Error Messages ..............................................................................................8C.1
SME-Specific Error Messages...............................................................................................8C.5

Annex D ..................................................................................................................9D.1

1. Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic.................................................................9D.1

2. Initialization and Default Status.................................................................................9D.1
2.1. Initiate Controller.......................................................................................................9D.1
2.2. Initiate Instrument .....................................................................................................9D.1
3. Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands ......................................................9D.2
4. Switchover to Manual Control ...................................................................................9D.2
5. Reading out Instrument Settings ..............................................................................9D.2
6. List Management ......................................................................................................9D.3
7. Command synchronization .......................................................................................9D.3
8. Service Request........................................................................................................9D.4

1039.1856.12 10 E-13
SME Contents

Tables
Table 2-1 Input sockets for the different types of modulation ................................................... 2.50
Table 2-2 Status messages in the case of a deviation ............................................................. 2.51
Table 2-3 Modulations which cannot be operated simultaneously............................................ 2.52
Table 2-4 Modulation generators as component parts ............................................................. 2.53
Table 2-5 Radio network data ................................................................................................... 2.86
Table 2-6 LIST mode; Example of a list.................................................................................. 2.143
Table 2-7 MEMORY SEQUENCE; Example of a list .............................................................. 2.148
Table 3-1 Common Commands................................................................................................ 3.14
Table 3-2 Device Response to *OPT?...................................................................................... 3.15
Table 3-3 Synchronization with *OPC?, *OPC? And *WAI ..................................................... 3.132
Table 3-4 Overview of the status register ............................................................................... 3.136
Table 3-5 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register ............................................. 3.137
Table 3-6 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register................................. 3.138
Table 3-7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register ............................ 3.139
Table 3-8 Resetting instrument functions ............................................................................... 3.142
Table 5-1 Test Instruments and Utilities ..................................................................................... 5.1
Table 5-2a,b Changeover limits of the SME .................................................................................... 5.6
Table 5-3 Test report ................................................................................................................ 5.44

Figures
Fig. 1-1 SME, View from the top ............................................................................................... 1.5
Fig. 2-1,a to c Front panel view, display............................................................... 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 2.10
Fig. 2-1 Rear panel view ........................................................................................................ 2.12
Fig. 2-3 Design of the display................................................................................................. 2.18
Fig. 2-4 MODULATION-AM menu ......................................................................................... 2.19
Fig. 2-5 Display after AM setting............................................................................................ 2.25
Fig. 2-6 Display after pattern setting ...................................................................................... 2.27
Fig. 2-7 OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu ............................................................. 2.28
Fig. 2-8 SELECT-LIST-selection window............................................................................... 2.29
Fig. 2-9 DELETE-LIST selection window.............................................................................. 2.30
Fig. 2-10 Edit function EDIT/VIEW .......................................................................................... 2.31
Fig. 2-11 Block function FILL: Input window ............................................................................ 2.32
Fig. 2-12 Edit function INSERT: Input window ......................................................................... 2.34
Fig. 2-13 Edit function DELETE: Input window ........................................................................ 2.35
Fig. 2-14 Starting point of the pattern setting ........................................................................... 2.36
Fig. 2-15, a to c Pattern setting - Edition of a list ................................................................................ 2.38
Fig. 2-16 Menu FREQUENCY (preset setting) ........................................................................ 2.41
Fig. 2-17 Example of a circuit with frequency offset ................................................................ 2.42
Fig. 2-18 Menu LEVEL (preset setting) POWER RESOLUTION is set to 0.01 dB.................. 2.43
Fig. 2-19 Example of a circuit with level offset......................................................................... 2.45
Fig. 2-20 Menu LEVEL - ALC (preset setting) ......................................................................... 2.46
Fig. 2-21 Menu LEVEL - UCOR - OPERATION side............................................................... 2.47
Fig. 2-22 Menu UCOR - LEVEL-EDIT side.............................................................................. 2.48
Fig. 2-23 Menu LEVEL-EMF .................................................................................................... 2.49
Fig. 2-24 Menu MODULATION-AM (preset setting) ................. 2.54
Fig. 2-25 Menu MODULATION-FM (preset setting) ................................................................ 2.56
Fig. 2-26 Dependency of the FM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set ........................ 2.57
Fig. 2-27 Menu MODULATION - PM (preset setting) .............................................................. 2.58
Fig. 2-28 Dependency of the PM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set ........................ 2.59
Fig. 2-29 Signal example 1: single pulse, TRIGGER MODE = AUTO..................................... 2.60
Fig. 2-30 Signal example 2: double pulse, TRIGGER MODE = EXT, SLOPE = POS............. 2.61
Fig. 2-31 Menu MODULATION-PULSE (preset setting).......................................................... 2.61
Fig. 2-32 Menu MODULATION-STEREO (preset setting)....................................................... 2.63
Fig. 2-33 Menu MODULATION-VOR (preset setting).............................................................. 2.65
Fig. 2-34 Menu MODULATION-ILS-GS (preset setting).......................................................... 2.68

1039.1856.12 11 E-13
Contents SME

Fig. 2-35 Menu MODULATION-ILS-LOC (preset setting) ....................................................... 2.72

Fig. 2-36 Menu MODULATION-MKR-BCN (preset settings) ................................................... 2.76
Fig. 2-37 Menu DIGITAL MOD-GMSK, edit page.................................................................... 2.79
Fig. 2-38 Signal example with respect to DM delay and delays of level control ...................... 2.80
Fig. 2-39 Selection of the memory extension in submenu SELECT LIST... ............................ 2.81
Fig. 2-40 Submenu DIGITAL MOD-GMSK-CONFIG XMEM... ................................................ 2.82
Fig. 2-41 Menu DIGITAL-MOD-GMSK (preset setting) ........................................................... 2.87
Fig. 2-42 Menu DIGITAL MOD-GFSK (preset setting) ............................................................ 2.89
Fig. 2-43 Menu DIGITAL MOD - QPSK (preset setting) ......................................................... 2.91
Fig. 2-44 Submenu DIGITAL-MOD-QPSK-CLOCK...(preset setting)...................................... 2.92
Fig. 2-45 Menu DIGITAL MOD - FSK (preset setting) ............................................................. 2.94
Fig. 2-46 Menu DIGITAL MOD - 4FSK (preset setting) ........................................................... 2.97
Fig. 2-47 Menu DIGITAL MOD - FFSK (preset setting) ......................................................... 2.100
Fig. 2-48 Menu DIGITAL MOD - ERMES (preset setting) ..................................................... 2.102
Fig. 2-49 Menu DIGITAL MOD - FLEX, options SME-B41, SME-B11, SM-B12.................... 2.107
Fig. 2-50 Menu DIGITAL MOD - ReFLEX.............................................................................. 2.119
Fig. 2-51 Menu DIGITAL MOD-POCSAG.............................................................................. 2.127
Fig. 2-52 Menu LF OUTPUT (preset setting) ........................................................................ 2.132
Fig. 2-53 Signal example sweep: MODE = AUTO, BLANK TIME = NORMAL ..................... 2.137
Fig. 2-54 Signal example sweep: MODE = SINGLE, BLANK TIME = LONG ........................ 2.137
Fig. 2-55 Menu SWEEP - FREQ............................................................................................ 2.138
Fig. 2-56 Menu SWEEP - LEVEL .......................................................................................... 2.140
Fig. 2-57 Menu SWEEP - LF GEN......................................................................................... 2.141
Fig. 2-58 Signal example LIST mode: MODE = EXT-STEP .................................................. 2.145
Fig. 2-59 Menu LIST - OPERATION page............................................................................. 2.145
Fig. 2-60 Menu List - EDIT page............................................................................................ 2.147
Fig. 2-61 Menu MEM SEQ -OPERATION-page (preset setting) ........................................... 2.150
Fig. 2-62 Menu MEM SEQ - EDIT page ................................................................................ 2.151
Fig. 2-63 Menu UTILITIES -SYSTEM -GPIB ......................................................................... 2.152
Fig. 2-64 Menu UTILITIES - SYSTEM - RS232..................................................................... 2.153
Fig. 2-65 Menu UTILITIES - SYSTEM-SECURITY................................................................ 2.154
Fig. 2-66 Menu UTILITIES - REF OSC (preset setting)......................................................... 2.155
Fig. 2-67 Menu UTILITIES - PHASE (preset setting)............................................................. 2.156
Fig. 2-68 Menu UTILITIES - PROTECT (preset setting) ....................................................... 2.157
Fig. 2-69 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - VCO SUM ................................................................... 2.158
Fig. 2-70 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - LEV PRESET .............................................................. 2.159
Fig. 2-71 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - PULSE GEN................................................................ 2.160
Fig. 2-72 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - QPSK .......................................................................... 2.161
Fig. 2-73 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - CONFIG........................................................................ 2.162
Fig. 2-74 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - TPOINT ........................................................................ 2.163
Fig. 2-75 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - PARAM ......................................................................... 2.164
Fig. 2-76 Menu UTILITIES - MOD KEY (preset setting) ........................................................ 2.165
Fig. 2-77 Menu UTILITIES - AUX I/O..................................................................................... 2.166
Fig. 2-78 Menu UTILITIES - BEEPER ................................................................................... 2.167
Fig. 2-79 Menu UTILITIES - INSTALL, fitted with options ..................................................... 2.168
Fig. 2-80 Menu STATUS page............................................................................................... 2.169
Fig. 2-81 ERROR page .......................................................................................................... 2.170
Fig. 3-1 Tree structure of the SCPI command systems............................................................ 3.6
Fig. 3-2 Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus .............. 3.130
Fig. 3-3 The status -register model....................................................................................... 3.133
Fig. 3-4 Overview of the status register ................................................................................ 3.135
Fig. 4-1 Shielding cover of controller and front panel modulel.................................................. 4.3
Fig. 4-2 Position of the RAM battery on the PCB...................................................................... 4.3
Fig. 4-3 Position of the XMEM battery ...................................................................................... 4.5
Fig. 4-4 UTILITIES-TEST menu. .............................................................................................. 4.5
Fig. 5-1 Spectrum with GFSK .................................................................................................. 5.29
Fig. 5-2 Spectrum with QPSK .................................................................................................. 5.33
Fig. 5-3 Spectrum with GMSK ................................................................................................. 5.34

1039.1856.12 12 E-13
 Before putting the product into operation for
the first time, make sure to read the following

Safety Instructions

Rohde & Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer
its customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required
for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Compliance with
these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system. This product has been
designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s
plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe
operation, observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these safety instructions, Rohde & Schwarz will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is
designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in
any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used
for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The
manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its operating manual and
within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the products requires technical skills and knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that the
products be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the
required skills. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be
indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation.

Symbols and safety labels

Attention!
Observe Weight Danger of Warning!
Ground Electrostatic
operating indication for electric Hot PE terminal Ground
terminal sensitive
instructions units >18 kg shock surface
devices

Device fully
Supply Direct
Standby Alternating Direct/alternating protected by
voltage current
indication current (AC) current (DC/AC) double/reinforced
ON/OFF (DC)
insulation

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 1
 Safety Instructions

Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation. In these safety
instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by Rohde & Schwarz,
including instruments, systems and all accessories.

Tags and their meaning

DANGER This tag indicates a safety hazard with a high potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
WARNING This tag indicates a safety hazard with a medium potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION This tag indicates a safety hazard with a low potential of risk for the user
that can result in slight or minor injuries.
ATTENTION This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage
to the product.
NOTE This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention
to operating the product but which does not lead to damage.
These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist. It is therefore
essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the
associated documentation and the associated product. The use of tags in connection with unassociated
products or unassociated documentation can result in misinterpretations and thus contribute to personal
injury or material damage.

Basic safety instructions

1. The product may be operated only under product must be disconnected from the
the operating conditions and in the supply network. Any adjustments,
positions specified by the manufacturer. Its replacements of parts, maintenance or
ventilation must not be obstructed during repair must be carried out only by technical
operation. Unless otherwise specified, the personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz.
following requirements apply to Only original parts may be used for
Rohde & Schwarz products: replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g.
prescribed operating position is always with power switches, power transformers,
the housing floor facing down, IP protection fuses). A safety test must always be
2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage performed after parts relevant to safety
category 2, use only in enclosed spaces, have been replaced (visual inspection, PE
max. operation altitude max. 2000 m. conductor test, insulation resistance
Unless specified otherwise in the data measurement, leakage current
sheet, a tolerance of ±10% shall apply to measurement, functional test).
the nominal voltage and of ±5% to the
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods,
nominal frequency.
the use of substances that induce an
2. Applicable local or national safety allergic reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel)
regulations and rules for the prevention of such as aluminum cannot be generally
accidents must be observed in all work excluded. If you develop an allergic
performed. The product may be opened reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent
only by authorized, specially trained sneezing, red eyes or respiratory
personnel. Prior to performing any work on difficulties), consult a physician immediately
the product or opening the product, the to determine the cause.

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 2
 Safety Instructions

4. If products/components are mechanically 10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth

and/or thermically processed in a manner connection either in the feed line or in the
that goes beyond their intended use, product itself is not permitted. Doing so can
hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust result in the danger of an electric shock
such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be from the product. If extension cords or
released. For this reason, the product may connector strips are implemented, they
only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal must be checked on a regular basis to
purposes, by specially trained personnel. ensure that they are safe to use.
Improper disassembly may be hazardous to
11. If the product has no power switch for
your health. National waste disposal
disconnection from the AC supply, the plug
regulations must be observed.
of the connecting cable is regarded as the
5. If handling the product yields hazardous disconnecting device. In such cases, it
substances or fuels that must be disposed must be ensured that the power plug is
of in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine easily reachable and accessible at all times
oils that must be replenished regularly, the (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
safety instructions of the manufacturer of Functional or electronic switches are not
the hazardous substances or fuels and the suitable for providing disconnection from
applicable regional waste disposal the AC supply. If products without power
regulations must be observed. Also switches are integrated in racks or systems,
observe the relevant safety instructions in a disconnecting device must be provided at
the system level.
the product documentation.
12. Never use the product if the power cable is
6. Depending on the function, certain products
damaged. By taking appropriate safety
such as RF radio equipment can produce
an elevated level of electromagnetic measures and carefully laying the power
cable, ensure that the cable cannot be
radiation. Considering that unborn life
damaged and that no one can be hurt by
requires increased protection, pregnant
women should be protected by appropriate e.g. tripping over the cable or suffering an
electric shock.
measures. Persons with pacemakers may
also be endangered by electromagnetic 13. The product may be operated only from
radiation. The employer is required to TN/TT supply networks fused with max.
assess workplaces where there is a special 16 A.
risk of exposure to radiation and, if
necessary, take measures to avert the 14. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are
danger. dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all
the way into the socket. Otherwise this can
7. Operating the products requires special result in sparks, fire and/or injuries.
training and intense concentration. Make
certain that persons who use the products 15. Do not overload any sockets, extension
are physically, mentally and emotionally fit cords or connector strips; doing so can
enough to handle operating the products; cause fire or electric shocks.
otherwise injuries or material damage may 16. For measurements in circuits with voltages
occur. It is the responsibility of the Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g.
employer to select suitable personnel for appropriate measuring equipment, fusing,
operating the products. current limiting, electrical separation,
8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be insulation) should be taken to avoid any
ensured that the nominal voltage setting on hazards.
the product matches the nominal voltage of 17. Ensure that the connections with
the AC supply network. If a different voltage information technology equipment comply
is to be set, the power fuse of the product with IEC 950/EN 60950.
may have to be changed accordingly.
18. Never remove the cover or part of the
9. In the case of products of safety class I with housing while you are operating the
movable power cord and connector, product. This will expose circuits and
operation is permitted only on sockets with components and can lead to injuries, fire or
earthing contact and protective earth damage to the product.
connection.

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 3
 Safety Instructions

19. If a product is to be permanently installed, matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
the connection between the PE terminal on spare parts list). Batteries and storage
site and the product's PE conductor must batteries are hazardous waste. Dispose of
be made first before any other connection them only in specially marked containers.
is made. The product may be installed and Observe local regulations regarding waste
connected only by a skilled electrician. disposal. Do not short-circuit batteries or
storage batteries.
20. For permanently installed equipment
without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or 28. Please be aware that in the event of a fire,
similar protective devices, the supply circuit toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that
must be fused in such a way that suitable may be hazardous to your health may
protection is provided for users and escape from the product.
products.
29. Please be aware of the weight of the
21. Do not insert any objects into the openings product. Be careful when moving it;
in the housing that are not designed for this otherwise you may injure your back or other
purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into parts of your body.
the housing. This can cause short circuits
30. Do not place the product on surfaces,
inside the product and/or electric shocks,
vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons
fire or injuries.
of weight or stability are unsuitable for this
22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's
ensure that no overvoltage (such as that installation instructions when installing the
caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the product and fastening it to objects or
product. Otherwise the operating personnel structures (e.g. walls and shelves).
will be endangered by electric shocks.
31. Handles on the products are designed
23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not exclusively for personnel to hold or carry
protected against penetration of water, the product. It is therefore not permissible
unless otherwise specified (see also safety to use handles for fastening the product to
instruction 1.). If this is not taken into or on means of transport such as cranes,
account, there exists the danger of electric fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is
shock or damage to the product, which can responsible for securely fastening the
also lead to personal injury. products to or on the means of transport
24. Never use the product under conditions in and for observing the safety regulations of
which condensation has formed or can form the manufacturer of the means of transport.
in or on the product, e.g. if the product was Noncompliance can result in personal injury
moved from a cold to a warm environment. or material damage.
25. Do not close any slots or openings on the 32. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the
product, since they are necessary for sole responsibility of the driver to drive the
ventilation and prevent the product from vehicle safely. Adequately secure the
overheating. Do not place the product on product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or
soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or other damage in the event of an accident.
inside a closed housing, unless this is well Never use the product in a moving vehicle if
ventilated. doing so could distract the driver of the
vehicle. The driver is always responsible for
26. Do not place the product on heat-
the safety of the vehicle; the manufacturer
generating devices such as radiators or fan
assumes no responsibility for accidents or
heaters. The temperature of the
collisions.
environment must not exceed the maximum
temperature specified in the data sheet. 33. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is
integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product,
27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be
do not use any other settings or functions
exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep
than those described in the documentation.
batteries and storage batteries away from
Otherwise this may be hazardous to your
children. If batteries or storage batteries are
health, since the laser beam can cause
improperly replaced, this can cause an
irreversible damage to your eyes. Never try
explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace
to take such products apart, and never look
the battery or storage battery only with the
into the laser beam.

1171.0000.42-02.00 Sheet 4
 Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de
la primera puesta en funcionamiento las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad

Informaciones de seguridad

Es el principio de Rohde & Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al día con los estandards de
seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los
equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes.
Nuestra sección de gestión de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. Este producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el comprobante de conformidad
adjunto según las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los
estandards técnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento
libre de peligros, deberá el usuario atenerse a todas las informaciones, informaciones de seguridad y
notas de alerta. Rohde&Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas
referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la indústria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de
ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda ser dañada. El uso del
producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante
queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de
consecuencias a causa del maluso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las
instrucciones del correspondiente manual del uso y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido (ver
hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso de los productos hace
necesarios conocimientos profundos y el conocimiento del idioma inglés. Por eso se deberá tener en
cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso de los productos a personas péritas o debidamente
minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de
seguridad para el uso de productos de R&S, encontrará la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente.

Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad

¡Cuidado!
Informaciones
Ver manual Elementos de
para Peligro de ¡Advertencia! Conexión a Conexión
de Conexión construción
maquinaria golpe de Superficie conductor a masa
instrucciones a tierra con peligro de
con uns peso corriente caliente protector conductora
del uso carga
de > 18kg
electroestática

El aparato está
Corriente Corriente protegido en su
potencia EN Indicación Corriente
continua continua/alterna totalidad por un
MARCHA/PARADA Stand-by alterna AC
DC DC/AC aislamiento de
doble refuerzo

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 1
 Informaciones de seguridad

Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda
clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se
tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán
ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en otro
capítulo de esta documentación y que también son obligatorias de seguir. En las informaciones de
seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por Rohde&Schwarz bajo la
denominación de „producto“, entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así como toda clase de
accesorios.

Palabras de señal y su significado

PELIGRO Indica un punto de peligro con gran potencial de riesgo para el
[Link] de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas.
ADVERTENCIA Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo mediano para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas .
ATENCIÓN Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo pequeño para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta heridas leves o
pequeñas
CUIDADO Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia
dañarlo.
INFORMACIÓN Indica una situación en la que deberían seguirse las instrucciones en el
uso del producto, pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un
daño del mismo.

Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el ámbito de la
comunidad económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición. Por eso se
debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en
combinación con la correspondiente documentación y solamente en combinación con el producto
correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en combinación con productos o
documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por
consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.

Informaciones de seguridad elementales

1. El producto solamente debe ser utilizado 2. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en
según lo indicado por el fabricante referente cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de
a la situación y posición de funcionamiento trabajo y de prevención de accidentes. El
sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se producto solamente debe de ser abierto por
convino de otra manera, es para los personal périto autorizado. Antes de efectuar
productos R&S válido lo que sigue: trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deberá este
como posición de funcionamiento se define ser desconectado de la corriente. El ajuste,
principialmente la posición con el suelo de la el cambio de partes, la manutención y la
caja para abajo , modo de protección IP 2X, reparación deberán ser solamente
grado de suciedad 2, categoría de efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por
sobrecarga eléctrica 2, utilizar solamente en R&S. Si se reponen partes con importancia
estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m para los aspectos de seguridad (por ejemplo
sobre el nivel del mar. el enchufe, los transformadores o los
A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la fusibles), solamente podrán ser sustituidos
hoja de datos, se aplicará una tolerancia de por partes originales. Despues de cada
±10% sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5% recambio de partes elementales para la
sobre la frecuencia nominal. seguridad deberá ser efectuado un control de

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 2
 Informaciones de seguridad

seguridad (control a primera vista, control de peligro a causa de la radiación

conductor protector, medición de resistencia electromagnética. El empresario está
de aislamiento, medición de medición de la comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de
corriente conductora, control de trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de
funcionamiento). exposición a radiaciones aumentadas de
3. Como en todo producto de fabricación riesgo aumentado para evitar riesgos.
industrial no puede ser excluido en general 7. La utilización de los productos requiere
de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos instrucciones especiales y una alta
que puedan generar alergias, los llamados concentración en el manejo. Debe de
elementos alergénicos (por ejemplo el ponerse por seguro de que las personas que
níquel). Si se producieran en el trato con manejen los productos estén a la altura de
productos R&S reacciones alérgicas, como los requerimientos necesarios referente a
por ejemplo urticaria, estornudos frecuentes, sus aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y
irritación de la conjuntiva o dificultades al emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
respirar, se deberá consultar inmediatamente pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos.
a un médico para averigurar los motivos de El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de
estas reacciones. seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el
4. Si productos / elementos de construcción son manejo de los productos.
tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de 8. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto
forma mecánica o térmica, pueden generarse se deberá tener por seguro de que la tensión
elementos peligrosos (polvos de sustancia preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a
de metales pesados como por ejemplo la del la red de distribución. Si es necesario
plomo, berilio, níquel). La partición elemental cambiar la preselección de la tensión
del producto, como por ejemplo sucede en el también se deberán en caso dabo cambiar
tratamiento de materias residuales, debe de los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto.
ser efectuada solamente por personal
especializado para estos tratamientos. La 9. Productos de la clase de seguridad I con
partición elemental efectuada alimentación móvil y enchufe individual de
inadecuadamente puede generar daños para producto solamente deberán ser conectados
la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente
directivas nacionales referentes al de contacto de seguridad y con conductor
tratamiento de materias residuales. protector conectado.

5. En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de 10. Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupción
peligro o combustibles en la aplicación del intencionada del conductor protector, tanto
producto que debieran de ser transferidos a en la toma de corriente como en el mismo
un tratamiento de materias residuales, como producto ya que puede tener como
por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente
ser repuestos en periodos definidos, o por el producto. Si se utilizaran cables o
aceites para motores, deberan ser tenidas en enchufes de extensión se deberá poner al
cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del seguro, que es controlado su estado técnico
fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o de seguridad.
combustibles y las regulaciones regionales 11. Si el producto no está equipado con un
para el tratamiento de materias residuales. interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se
Cuiden también de tener en cuenta en caso deberá considerar el enchufe del cable de
dado las prescripciones de seguridad distribución como interruptor. En estos casos
especiales en la descripción del producto. deberá asegurar de que el enchufe sea de
6. Ciertos productos, como por ejemplo las fácil acceso y nabejo (medida del cable de
instalaciones de radiación HF, pueden a distribución aproximadamente 2 m). Los
causa de su función natural, emitir una interruptores de función o electrónicos no
radiación electromagnética aumentada. En son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si
vista a la protección de la vida en desarrollo los productos sin interruptor están integrados
deberían ser protegidas personas en construciones o instalaciones, se deberá
embarazadas debidamente. También las instalar el interruptor al nivel de la
personas con un bypass pueden correr instalación.

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 3
 Informaciones de seguridad

12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el 20. En caso de que los productos que son
cable eléctrico. Asegure a través de las instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin
medidas de protección y de instalación protector implementado, autointerruptor o
adecuadas de que el cable de eléctrico no similares objetos de protección, deberá la
pueda ser dañado o de que nadie pueda ser toma de corriente estar protegida de manera
dañado por él, por ejemplo al tropezar o por que los productos o los usuarios estén
un golpe de corriente. suficientemente protegidos.
13. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento 21. Por favor, no introduzca ningún objeto que
en redes de distribución TN/TT aseguradas no esté destinado a ello en los orificios de la
con fusibles de como máximo 16 A. caja del aparato. No vierta nunca ninguna
clase de líquidos sobre o en la caja. Esto
14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de
puede producir corto circuitos en el producto
corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca
y/o puede causar golpes de corriente, fuego
el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la
o heridas.
toma de corriente. Si no tiene en
consideración estas indicaciones se arriesga 22. Asegúrese con la protección adecuada de
a que se originen chispas, fuego y/o heridas. que no pueda originarse en el producto una
sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una
15. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los
tormenta. Si no se verá el personal que lo
cables de extensión o los enchufes de
utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de
extensión ya que esto pudiera causar fuego
corriente.
o golpes de corriente.
23. Los productos R&S no están protegidos
16. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente
contra el agua si no es que exista otra
con una tensión de entrada de Ueff > 30 V se
indicación, ver también punto 1. Si no se
deberá tomar las precauciones debidas para
tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de
impedir cualquier peligro (por ejemplo
golpe de corriente o de daños en el producto
medios de medición adecuados, seguros,
lo cual también puede llevar al peligro de
limitación de tensión, corte protector,
personas.
aislamiento etc.).
24. No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las
17. En caso de conexión con aparatos de la
que pueda producirse y se hayan producido
técnica informática se deberá tener en
líquidos de condensación en o dentro del
cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de
producto como por ejemplo cuando se
la EC950/EN60950.
desplaza el producto de un lugar frío a un
18. Nunca abra la tapa o parte de ella si el lugar caliente.
producto está en funcionamiento. Esto pone
25. Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio
a descubierto los cables y componentes
del producto, ya que estas son necesarias
eléctricos y puede causar heridas, fuego o
para la ventilación e impiden que el producto
daños en el producto.
se caliente demasiado. No pongan el
19. Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un producto encima de materiales blandos como
lugar, se deberá primero conectar el por ejemplo sofás o alfombras o dentro de
conductor protector fijo con el conductor una caja cerrada, si esta no está
protector del aparato antes de hacer suficientemente ventilada.
cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y la
26. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que
conexión deberán ser efecutadas por un
produzcan calor, como por ejemplo
electricista especializado.
radiadores o calentadores. La temperatura
ambiental no debe superar la temperatura
máxima especificada en la hoja de datos.

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 4
 Informaciones de seguridad

27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser 31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven
expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego. solamente de ayuda para el manejo que
Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del solamente está previsto para personas. Por
alcance de los niños. Si las baterías o los eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la
acumuladores no son cambiados con la sujecion en o sobre medios de transporte
debida atención existirá peligro de explosión como por ejemplo grúas, carretillas
(atención celulas de Litio). Cambiar las elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. El
baterías o los acumuladores solamente por usuario es responsable de que los productos
los del tipo R&S correspondiente (ver lista de sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios
piezas de recambio). Baterías y de transporte y de que las prescripciones de
acumuladores son deshechos problemáticos. seguridad del fabricante de los medios de
Por favor tirenlos en los recipientes transporte sean tenidas en cuenta. En caso
especiales para este fín. Por favor tengan en de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden
cuenta las prescripciones nacionales de cada causarse daños en personas y objetos.
país referente al tratamiento de deshechos.
32. Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un
Nunca sometan las baterías o acumuladores
vehículo, queda en la responsabilidad
a un corto circuito.
absoluta del conductor que conducir el
28. Tengan en consideración de que en caso de vehículo de manera segura. Asegure el
un incendio pueden escaparse gases tóxicos producto dentro del vehículo debidamente
del producto, que pueden causar daños a la para evitar en caso de un accidente las
salud. lesiones u otra clase de daños. No utilice
nunca el producto dentro de un vehículo en
29. Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de
movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al
un incendio pueden desprenderse del
conductor. Siempre queda en la
producto agentes venenosos (gases, líquidos
responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la
etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud.
seguridad del vehículo y el fabricante no
30. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, asumirá ninguna clase de responsabilidad
vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus por accidentes o colisiones.
características de peso o de estabilidad no
33. Dado el caso de que esté integrado un
sean aptas para él. Siga siempre las
producto de laser en un producto R&S (por
instrucciones de instalación del fabricante
ejemplo CD/DVD-ROM) no utilice otras
cuando instale y asegure el producto en
instalaciones o funciones que las descritas
objetos o estructuras (por ejemplo paredes y
en la documentación. De otra manera pondrá
estantes).
en peligro su salud, ya que el rayo laser
puede dañar irreversiblemente sus ojos.
Nunca trate de descomponer estos
productos. Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser.

1171.0000.42-02.00 página 5
 Certified Quality System

DIN EN ISO 9001 : 2000

DIN EN 9100 : 2003
DIN EN ISO 14001 : 1996
DQS REG. NO 001954 QM/ST UM

QUALITÄTSZERTIFIKAT CERTIFICATE OF QUALITY CERTIFICAT DE QUALITÉ

Sehr geehrter Kunde, Dear Customer, Cher Client,

Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines you have decided to buy a Rohde & vous avez choisi d‘acheter un produit
Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes entschie- Schwarz product. You are thus as- Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez
den. Hiermit erhalten Sie ein nach sured of receiving a product that is donc d‘un produit fabriqué d‘après
modernsten Fertigungsmethoden manufactured using the most modern les méthodes les plus avancées. Le
hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach methods available. This product was développement, la fabrication et les
den Regeln unseres Management- developed, manufactured and tested tests respectent nos normes de ges-
systems entwickelt, gefertigt und in compliance with our quality manage- tion qualité.
geprüft. ment system standards. Le système de gestion qualité de
Das Rohde & Schwarz Management- The Rohde & Schwarz quality manage- Rohde & Schwarz a été homologué
system ist zertifiziert nach: ment system is certified according to: conformément aux normes:

DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000 DIN EN ISO 9001:2000

DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN 9100:2003 DIN EN 9100:2003
DIN EN ISO 14001:1996 DIN EN ISO 14001:1996 DIN EN ISO 14001:1996
 EC Certificate of Conformity

Certificate No.: 9502004

This is to certify that:

Equipment type Order No. Designation

SME02/03/06 1038.6002.02/.03/.06 Signal Generator

SME03A 1038.6002.53 "
SME03E 1038.6002.13 "
SME42 1038.6002.42 "
SME22/23/24 1038.6002.22/.23/.24 Power Signal Generator

SME-B11 1036.8720.02/.22 DM Coder

SME-B12 1039.4090.02 8MB Memory Extension

complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States

- relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits

(73/23/EEC revised by 93/68/EEC)

- relating to electromagnetic compatibility

(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC)

Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:

EN61010-1 : 1991
EN50081-1 : 1992
EN50082-1 : 1992

Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1995

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München

Munich, 1998-01-26 Central Quality Management FS-QZ / Becker

1038.6002.00 CE E-3
 EC Certificate of Conformity

Certificate No.: 9502055

This is to certify that:

Equipment type Order No. Designation

SM-B1 1036.7599.02 Reference Oszillator

SM-B2 1036.7947.02/08 LF Generator
SM-B3 1036.6340.02 Pulse Modulator
SM-B4 1036.9310.02 Pulse Generator
SM-B5 1036.8489.02 FM/PHIM Modulator
SM-B6 1036.7760.02/08 Multifunction Generator
SM-B8 1036.6805.02 Pulse Modulator
SM-B9 1039.5100.02 Pulse Modulator
SM-B50 1104.8410.02 Fast CPU

complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States

- relating to electromagnetic compatibility

(89/336/EEC revised by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC)

Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:

EN50081-1 : 1992
EN50082-1 : 1992

Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 1995

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG

Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München

Munich, 1998-01-26 Central Quality Management FS-QZ / Becker

1104.8410.02 CE E-1
 Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our
Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone
support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the
operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment.

Up-to-date information and upgrades

To keep your Rohde & Schwarz equipment always up-to-date,
please subscribe to our electronic newsletter at
[Link]
or request the desired information and upgrades via email from your Customer Support
Center (addresses see below).

Feedback
We want to know if we are meeting your support needs. If you have any comments
please email us and let us know [Link]@[Link].

USA & Canada Monday to Friday (except US public holidays)

8:00 AM – 8:00 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST)
Tel. from USA 888-test-rsa (888-837-8772) (opt 2)
From outside USA +1 410 910 7800 (opt 2)
Fax +1 410 910 7801
E-mail [Link]@[Link]

East Asia Monday to Friday (except Singaporean public holidays)

8:30 AM – 6:00 PM Singapore Time (SGT)
Tel. +65 6 513 0488
Fax +65 6 846 1090
E-mail [Link]@[Link]

Rest of the World Monday to Friday (except German public holidays)

08:00 – 17:00 Central European Time (CET)
Tel. from Europe +49 (0) 180 512 42 42
From outside Europe +49 89 4129 13776
Fax +49 (0) 89 41 29 637 78
E-mail CustomerSupport@[Link]

1007.8684.14-04.00
 Supplement B
to Operating Manual
SIGNAL GENERATOR
SME

Correction of Data Sheet, Number 757.0358.23

Models SME03 and SME03E

Amplitude modulation:
1)
AM distortion factor at 1 kHz
Applies to levels ≤ 7dBm

Model SME06
Instead of the values quoted in the data sheet, the following specifications of the SME06 apply:
Amplitude modulation:
1)
Modulation frequency response (m = 60 %)
20 Hz (DC) to 50 kHz ............................................ < 1 dB (f ≤ 3GHz)
20 Hz (DC) to 10 kHz ............................................ < 1 dB (f > 3GHz)

Model SME03A and SME models fitted with option SM-B50

Model SME03A and SMExx models fitted with Option SM-B50 are equipped with a high-speed
processor which improves the values specified for the setting times. The following specifications are
valid:
Frequency
Setting time (to within
-7
<1x10 for f >130 MHz and
<73 Hz für f <130 MHz)
after IEC/IEEE-bus delimiter .......................................... <3 ms

Level
Setting time (IEC/IEEE bus)
with electronic level setting ............................................ <2 ms

Sweep
Selectable step time......................................................... 2 ms to 5 s

List mode
Max. number of channels ................................................ 4000

1 )
Does not apply to non-interrupting level setting (ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED)

1039.1856.12-13 B E-7
SME Putting into Operation

1 Preparation for Use

1.1 Putting into Operation

Before putting the SME into operation, please make sure that
• the covers of the casing are put on and screwed,
• the ventilation openings are free,
• no signal voltage levels exceeding the permissible limits are applied at the inputs,,
• the outputs of the instrument are not overloaded or connected incorrectly.

If these points are not observed, the instrument might be damaged.

1.1.1 Supply Voltage

The SME can be operated at a.c. systems from 90 to 132 V and 180 to 265 V at system frequencies
from 47 to 440 Hz. The power supply socket is situated at the rear of the instrument. The instrument
automatically sets itself to the voltage applied within the permissible voltage ranges. It is not necessary
to set the instrument to a certain supply voltage.

1.1.2 Switching On/Off the Instrument

Switch on/off: À Press power switch at the top/bottom

Power switch When the instrument is switched off, the
Fuse holder marking "O" is visible at the top of the
Power supply socket power switch.
The power switch can remain switched on permanently. Switching
off is only necessary when the instrument is to be completely
disconnected from the mains.
Power switch at the rear
of the instrument

STBY Standby check LED Switch on: À Press switch.

The instrument is ready for operation.
ON
Switch off: À Release switch.
The instrument assumes the STANDBY
mode.

On/off switch at the front of the instrument

1038.6002.02 1.1 E-13

SME Putting into Operation

1.1.3 Initial Status

Upon switching on, the instrument either automatically assumes the status which was set when it was
switched off (parameter POWER-ON STATE PREVIOUS SETTING in LEVEL-LEVEL menu) or the RF
output is disconnected (POWER-ON STATE RF OFF).
If the instrument need not to be operated from the initial status any further, a defined default status
should be established by pressing the [PRESET] key prior to further settings.

STANDBY Mode
In the STANDBY mode the optional reference oscillator (option SM-B1) remains switched on, which
increases frequency accuracy.

Frequency accuracy after switching on when the oven-controlled reference oscillator is fitted
(option SM-B1)
When switching on from the STANDBY mode, the specified frequency accuracy is reached immediately.
If the power switch was switched off, the reference oscillator needs some minutes of warm-up time to
reach its nominal frequency. During this period of time, the output frequency does not yet reach its final
value either. In the status line in the header field of the display the message "OVEN COLD" is displayed
for this time.

1.1.4 Setting Contrast and Brightness of the Display

Brightness control
Contrast control

Contrast and brightness of the display can be set by means of the contrast and brightness controls
situated below the display.

1.1.5 RAM With Battery Back-Up

The SME has a static read-write memory (CMOS-RAM) with battery back-up, in which 50 different
complete settings of the instrument can be stored (cf. Chapter 2, section "Storing and Calling of
Instrument Settings"). In addition, all data and/or lists the user enters himself, such as for list mode,
memory sequence, user correction of the level and data sequences with digital modulation, are stored in
the RAM. Further, all data of the calibrations running within the instrument in the SME are stored in the
RAM (cf. Chapter 2, section "Calibration").

A lithium battery with a service life of approx. 5 years serves to supply the RAM with power. When the
battery is discharged, the data stored will be lost. Exchanging the battery is described in Chapter 4.

1038.6002.02 1.2 E-13

Functional Test SME

1.1.6 Preset Setting

A defined setting status is achieved by pressing the [PRESET] key.

Preset Status:

RF frequency 100 MHz

RF level -30 dBm
Reference frequency internal, adjustment off
Offsets 0
Modulations switched off
Transient-free level setting switched off, level attenuator mode: AUTO
Internal level control level ALC: ON
User correction level UCOR: OFF
PLL bandwidth auto
LF output switched off
Sweep switched off
List mode switched off
Memory sequence switched off
Suppression of indications system security: unaltered
Protection of calibration data protection lock: unaltered
Settings stored unaltered
Data, lists etc. stored unaltered
IEC-bus address unaltered
Beeper unaltered

All parameters and circuit states, even those of operating modes which are not activated, are preset by
means of Preset.

The presettings going beyond the above list can be seen from the menu representations as of Section
2.4 which each indicate the Preset setting status.

1.2 Functional Test

On switching on the instrument and permanently during operation, the SME carries out a self test. The
ROM contents as well as the battery of the non-volatile RAM are checked on switching on the
instrument and the RAM contents with every calling the memory. The most important instrument
functions are automatically monitored during operation.

If an error is detected, the message "ERROR" is displayed in the status line. For further identification of
the error, press the [ERROR] key. Thereupon a description of the error/s is displayed (cf. Chapter 2,
section "Error Messages"). Return to the menu exited by pressing the [RETURN] key.

If required, the self tests can be induced purposefully. See Chapter 4, section "Functional Test".
Further, internal test points can be polled by the user and the results be read out and displayed. See
Chapter 2, section "Voltage Indication of Test Points".

1038.6002.02 1.3 E-13

SME Fitting the Options

1.3 Fitting the Options

Due to its variety of options, the SME offers the possibility of providing the instrument with the
equipment exactly corresponding to the application. Newly fitted options are automatically recognized
and the relevant parameters added in the menu.

After every change of the instrument configuration, the CMOS RAM has to be cleared as the storage
data shift:
À Switch off the instrument
À Switch the instrument on again with the [RESET] key pressed

The internal calibration routines PULSE GEN, YFOM, ALLAMP now have to be called up again to
restore the cleared calibration values.
These routines are accessible via menu UTILITIES-CALIB (see also Chapter 2, section "calibration").
The calibration routines have to be carried out in the following order:
1. YFOM
2. ALLAMP
3. PULSE GEN (if installed)

1.3.1 Opening the Casing

Remove paneling À Remove four screws in the two tilt feet at the rear of the instrument.
À Remove the upper paneling towards the top and rear.
À Turn the instrument.
À Remove the lower paneling towards the top and rear.
Open ventilation ducts When an option is fitted at a slot which has not been used up to now,
the appropriate ventilation duct of the plexiglas plate at the left in the
casing frame must be opened. The openings are pre-punched so that
the respective part is easy to break out.

1038.6002.02 1.4 E-13

Fitting the Options SME

1.3.2 Overview of the Slots

A3 A4 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A12 A2

X28 X29

A15 Option SM-B1

A2 = power supply A8 = digital synthesis

A3 = front unit A9 = summing loop
A4 = option A10 = output section, 1.5 GHz
A5 = option A11 = output section 3 GHz/6 GHz
A6 = option A11 = option
A7 = reference/step synthesis A15 = attenuator

Fig. 1-1 SME, View from the top

1.3.3 Option SM-B1 - Reference Oscillator OCXO

Fitting the option À Fasten the option at the back end of the lateral opening by means of
the screw threads provided there.
À If slots A5 and A6 are both occupied, one of these modules must be
removed temporarily.
À Feed ribbon cable W710 through the rear square cut-out to the
motherboard, insert into connector X22 and snap in the locking.
À Feed coaxial cable W710 from socket X711 of the option through
the second cut-out along the rear transverse panel to connector
X74 at the A7 module, reference/step synthesis, via the
motherboard and insert there. Fasten the cable at the transverse
panel using the cable ties attached.
Set tuning voltage and calibrate The crystal oscillator was factory-tuned to nominal frequency and the
OCXO appropriate tuning voltage indicated on the cover of the module. The
calibration value now has to be calculated from this value and
transferred to the memory of the signal generator.

1038.6002.02 1.5 E-13

SME Fitting the Options

Calculate calibration value The tuning voltage is generated by a 12b-bit-D/A converter which is
scaled such that a tuning voltage of 12 volts is generated with
calibration value (CALIBRATION DATA) 4000.
The calibration value is thus calculated from the tuning voltage (Vtun)
as follows
CALIBRATION DATA = Vtun × 4000 / 12

For checking purposes, the voltage at pin 16 of plug X22 on the

motherboard can be remeasured and corrected if necessary. A check
by means of frequency measurement may only be made after a
warm-up of 2 hours and against a calibrated reference.

Store calibration value À Call menu UTILITIES-CALIB-REF OSC.

À Enter the calculated calibration voltage with CALIBRATION DATA
by means of the rotary knob or keypad.
À Select STORE CALIBRATION DATA
À Terminate entry using the [SELECT] key
The new calibration value is stored in the EPROM.
Note: The flash EPROM does not permit the deletion of individual
data. Thus new memory space is occupied for each calibration.
If there is no memory space available any more, the EPROM
must be cleared by an authorized service shop and be written
into anew. Thus a calibration should only be made if necessary

1.3.4 Option SM-B2 - LF Generator

Fitting as 1st generator As 1st generator, the LF generator is fitted at one of the rear slots A5,
A6 or A12.

À Withdraw jumper X29 at the front top of the motherboard.

À Plug jumper X3 at position 2-3 (on the right) on the option (to the
right of multipoint connector X50).

Fitting as 2nd generator If there already is a generator at one of the slots A5, A6 or A12, the LF
generator is mounted at slot A4.

À Withdraw jumper X28 on the motherboard.

À Plug jumper X3 at position 1-2 on the option.

1038.6002.02 1.6 E-13

Fitting the Options SME

1.3.5 Options SM-B3, SM-B8 and SM-B9 - Pulse Modulator 1.5, 3 and 6 GHz
When fitting this option, the RF characteristics of the instrument change to such an extent that the
output level has to be calibrated. This requires calibrated test instruments , a control processor and
service kit SM-Z2. For this reason, fitting should be carried out at an authorized R&S service shop.
Fitting is described in the service manual (stock number 1039.1856.24).

1.3.6 Option SM-B4 - Pulse Generator

The pulse generator is fitted within module A4, pulse modulator.

Fitting the option À Open module A4.

À Fasten the pulse generator board by means of 4 screws.
À Plug in connectors W10 and W11.
À Screw on cover again.
À Establish the following RF connections at the pulse generator:

Cable From To Signal

W43 A4-X43 Rear panel VIDEO

W44 A4-X44 Rear panel SYNC

À Cable 50-MHz reference, cf. Section 1.3.13

Calibrating pulse generator À Call menu UTILITIES/ CALIB /PULSE GEN

À Select action CALIBRATE ➤ and activate using the [SELECT] key
À The start and end of the calibration are displayed. Calibration only
takes a few seconds.
Note: The calibration data are stored in the RAM, thus the calibration
can be repeated as often as required.

1.3.7 Option SM-B5 - FM/PM Modulator

The FM/PM modulator is fitted at slot A6.

Fitting the option À Withdraw cable W89 from X99 of the summing loop and use again.
À Establish the following connections:

Cable From To Signal

W89 A8-X89 A6-X67 FDSYN

W65 A6-X65 A7-X71 REF100
W67 A6-X69 A9-X99 FDFM

1038.6002.02 1.7 E-13

SME Fitting the Options

Adjustment Option SM-B5 loads the internal modulation generators so that their
output voltage decreases by approx. 1%. This causes a modulation
error which can be corrected by the adaptation of the corresponding
adjustments. This requires service kit SM-Z2 (stock no.:
1039.3520.02).

Standard generator À Press key [PRESET].

À Set LFGEN1 in menu MODULATION / AM / AM SOURCE INT.
À Set the voltage at pin A6 of the plug of the module to 1 V (crest
voltage) using R298 (AF LEVEL) .

Option SM-B2, À Press the [PRESET] key.

LF generator
À Set LFGEN2 in menu MODULATION / AM / AM SOURCE INT.
À Set the voltage at pin A7 of the plug of the module to 1 V (crest
voltage) using R55 (1Vp DDS ADJ).

Option SM-B6, À Press the [PRESET] key.

Multifunction generator
À Set LFGEN2 in menu MODULATION / AM / AM SOURCE INT.
À Set the voltage at pin A7 of the plug of the module to 1 V (crest
voltage) using R380 (DAC1 AMPL ADJ).
À Press the [PRESET] key.
À Set the following in menu MODULATION / VOR :
- MODE NORM
- VAR DEPTH 0%
- SUBCARRIER DEPTH 0%
- COM/ ID STATE ON
- COM/ ID DEPTH 100%
À Set the voltage at pin A7 of the plug of the module to 1 V (crest
voltage) using R465 (DAC2 AMPL ADJ).

1038.6002.02 1.8 E-13

Fitting the Options SME

1.3.8 Option SM-B6 - Multifunction Generator

The multifunction generator is fitted at one of rear slots A5, A6 or A12.

À Undo the board locking on both sides of the motherboard.

À Plug the PCB on one of the slots.
À Lock modules again
À Remove jumper X29 at the front top of the motherboard
À Cable 50-MHz reference, cf. Section 1.3.13

1.3.9 Option SME-B11 - DM-Coder

The data coder is fitted into module A8, digital synthesis.

À Open module A8.

À Fasten the DM coder board by means of 4 screws.
Caution: The four insulating washers supplied have to be placed
between the spacers on module A8 and PCB of the
option.
À Plug in connector W1, W2 and W3.
À Screw on cover again.

After fitting the module, the amplitude content and the delay for the DQPSK modulation must be
calibrated following the calibrations mentioned in Section 1.3.

Amplitude content À Allow the SME to warm up.

À Set 836 MHz in the FREQUENCY menu.
À Select PRBS in the DIGITAL MOD / DQPSK / SOURCE menu.
À Select TRIM ON in menu UTILITIES / CALIB / DQPSK
AMPLITUDE.
À Select the following in menu UTILITIES / DIAG / TPOINT
- TEST POINT 704
- STATE ON
The diagnostic point of the ALC control voltage can be switched on.
À Adjust the voltage at this test point to 0 ±4 mV using potentiometer
R297 on module A7, digital synthesis. Adjustment element R297
(LEVEL) can be accessed from the bottom of the instrument without
dismantling the module.

1038.6002.02 1.9 E-13

SME Fitting the Options

Delay compensation À Allow the SME to warm up.

À Connect the spectrum analyzer (see Section 5, item 2) to the RF
output of the SME.
À SME settings
- Menu FREQUENCY 836 MHz
- Menu LEVEL 0 dBm
- Menu DIGITAL MOD / DQPSK data source PRBS .
À Settings at the spectrum analyzer:
- Center frequency 836 MHz
- Span 300 kHz
- Resolution bandwidth 3 kHz
- Video bandwidth 100 Hz.
À Check spectrum
The spectrum should observe the following tolerance limits (the
reference level is at the center frequency)

Offset frequency Level

0 kHz 0 dB (reference level)

30 to 50 kHz < -40 dB

> 50 kHz < -50 dB

À Select DELAY in menu UTILITIES / CALIB / DQPSK.

À Adjust the delay such that the spectrum has symmetric spurious
sidebands which are as low as possible and observes the tolerance
limits.
Note: The delay data are stored in the RAM, thus the calibration
can be repeated as often as required.
If the value for the delay thus found is different from the DEFAULT
SETTING stored with R&S, the new value can also be transferred to
the EPROM (see note in Section 1.3.3, however)
À Select OVERWRITE DEFAULT SETTING in menu UTILITIES /
CALIB / DQPSK.

1038.6002.02 1.10 E-13

Fitting the Options SME

1.3.10 Option SME-B12 - DM Memory Extension

The memory extension is mounted on one of rear slots A5, A6 or A12.

À Undo the board locking on both sides of the motherboard.

À Plug the PCB on one of the slots A5, A6, or A12.
À Fix the board locking.

1.3.11 Option SME-B19 - Rear Panel Connections for RF and LF

The SME can be retrofitted to include rear panel connections for RF and LF for mounting it into a 19"
rack using option SME-B19. The mounting instructions are attached to the option.

1.3.12 Options SME-B41 - FLEX Protocol - and SME-B42 - POCSAG

Options SME-B41 and SME-B42 are software options. They can be enabled by a keyword. The
keyword is printed on a label which is part of the equipment supplied and has to be stuck to the rear of
SME.
A prerequisite for installing the options is that option SME-B11 (DM Coder, hardware: VAR ≥ 4, REV ≥1)
and SME-B12 (Memory Extension, hardware: VAR ≥ 2, REV ≥ 2) as well as a firmware version ≥1.95
are part of SME.

Enabling option À Call up menu UTILITIES-INSTALL and then press key [SELECT].
À Select OPTION TO INSTALL and then press key [SELECT].
À Select option (FLEX or POCSAG) to be installed and then press key
[SELECT].
À Enter the 6-digit keyword into the entry field INSTALLATION KEY
and then press [ENTER]
À Switch off unit and then switch on again.

After installation, the new option can be checked in the module list in menu UTILITIES-DIAG-CONFIG

1038.6002.02 1.11 E-13

SME Fitting the Options

1.3.13 Cabling of the 50-MHz Reference (REF50)

Instrument without options Cable From To

W72 A7-X72 A8-X81

Cable From To
Instrument with option
multifunction generator W172 A7-X72 A5--X53

W72 A5-X51 A8-X81

Cable From To
Instrument with option
pulse generator W41 A7-X72 A4-X41

W72 A4-X42 A8-X81

Cable From To
Instrument with options
multifunction generator W172 A7-X72 A5-X53
and pulse generator
W41 A5-X51 A4-X41

W72 A4-X42 A8-X81

1.4 Mounting into a 19" Rack

Caution: Ensure free air inlet at the perforation of the side walls and air outlet at the rear of the
instrument in rack mounting.

The SME can be mounted into a 19" rack by means of rack adapter ZZA-94 (stock no. 396.4905.00).
The mounting instructions are attached to the adapter.

1038.6002.02 1.12 E-13

SME Front Panel

2 Operation

2.1 Explanation of Front and Rear Panel

2.1.1 Elements of the Front Panel

[Link] Display
(cf. Fig. 2-1, A Front panel view, display)

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FM

FREQUENCY AM FM1 DEVIATION 1.00 kHz

LEVEL FM FM1 SOURCE OFF LFGEN1 EXT1 EXT2
MODULATION PM LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4k 1k 3k 15k Hz
DIGITAL MOD PULSE
LF OUTPUT FM2 DEVIATION 2.00 kHz
SWEEP FM2 SOURCE OFF LFGEN2 EXT1 EXT2
LIST LFGEN2 FREQ 27.500 0 kHz
MEM SEQ LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI
UTILITIES
HELP EXT1 COUPLING AC DC
EXT2 COUPLING AC DC

The display shows in the see as well

Section 2.2.1,
Header field: - the current frequency and level
Display
settings.
- status messages.
- error messages.
Menu field: - the main menu and the submenus
selected with the current settings.

Parameters can be selected and changed in the

menus indicated.

1038.6002.02 2.1 E-13

SME Front Panel

1 2 3 4

SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz...3.0 GHz SME 03 1038.6002.03

DATA
DATA INPUT

G
FREQ 7 8 9 n dBµV
FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm
LEVEL 4 5 6
M
CLOCK

µ µV

SAVE k
1 2 3 m EXT 1
mV
FREQUENCY

Ï
LEVEL OPERATING - x1
RC L 0 . ENTER dB(m)
MODULATION
DIGITAL MOD Move cursor EXT 2
MENU / VARIATION
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP RETURN SELECT
LIST SELECT Next menu
LF
MEM SEQ
RETURN Previous menu
UTILITIES
HELP
VERSION: 1.33
× Ø RF 50 W

QUICK SELECT
STBY !
ASSIGN MENU1 MENU2 M0D RF
PRESET ERROR STATUS HELP LOCAL MAX 50 W
0N/0FF 0N/0FF REVERSE POWER
ON

MADE IN GERMANY

9 8 7 6 5

Fig. 2-1,a Front panel view, display

1038.6002.02 2.2 E-13

SME Front Panel

[Link] Controls
(cf. Fig. 2-1, B front panel view, controls)

2 DATA INPUT

Parameter field
see as well
Parameters RF frequency and RF level can be entered
FREQ Section [Link],
directly by means of the parameter keys, alternatively
Use of [FREQ] and
to menu operation. Further, complete instrument
LEVEL
settings can be stored and called. [LEVEL] Keys
SAVE
FREQ Opens the setting of the RF frequency via Section 2.4,
value input or variation by means of a rotary RF Frequency
RCL
knob. The current menu is maintained. Section 2.5,
Return to the menu by means of the RF Level
[RETURN] key. (Setting of the RF frequency
also in the FREQUENCY menu). Section 2.2.5,
Storing and Calling of
LEVEL Opens the setting of the RF level via value Instrument Settings
input or variation by means of a rotary knob.
The current menu is maintained. Return to
the menu by means of the [RETURN] key.
(Setting of the RF level also in the LEVEL
menu).
SAVE Opens the storing of the current instrument
setting. Memory selection is effected by
entering a number (1 to 50) and is finished by
means of the [ENTER] key.
RCL Opens the calling of an instrument setting
stored. Memory selection is effected by
entering a number (1 to 50) and is finished by
means of the [ENTER] key.

Numeric input field

7 8 9
Numeric values, decimal point and minus sign can be see as well
entered by means of the digital keys., Section 2.2.2,
4 5 6 Basic Operating Steps
0...9 Enters the digit.
1 2 3 ì Enters the decimal point

Ï
- -/← Enters the minus sign.
0 .
Deletes the last input (digit, sign or decimal
point) - key [BACKSPACE].

1038.6002.02 2.3 E-13

SME Front Panel

1 2 3 4

SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz...3.0 GHz SME 03 1038.6002.03

DATA
DATA INPUT

G
FREQ 7 8 9 n dBµV
FREQ
100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm
LEVEL M
CLOCK

4 5 6 µ µV

SAVE k
1 2 3 m EXT 1
mV
FREQUENCY

Ï
LEVEL OPERATING - x1
RC L 0 . ENTER dB(m)
MODULATION
DIGITAL MOD Move cursor EXT 2
MENU / VARIATION
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP
RETURN SELECT
LIST SELECT Next menu
MEM SEQ LF
UTILITIES RETURN Previous menu
HELP
VERSION: 1.33
× Ø RF 50 W

QUICK SELECT
STBY !
M0D RF
ASSIGN MENU1 MENU2 PRESET ERROR STATUS HELP LOCAL MAX 50 W
0N/0FF 0N/0FF REVERSE POWER
ON

MADE IN GERMANY

9 8 7 6 5
Fig. 2-1,b Front panel view, controls

1038.6002.02 2.4 E-13

SME Front Panel

2 DATA INPUT

Unit keys with enter function

The unit keys terminate the input of values and specify see as well
G the multiplication factor for the respective basic unit. Section 2.2.2,
n dBµV
The basic units are displayed next to the input field Basic Operating
M while numbers are entered. In the case of level Steps
µ µV
settings, the unit keys specify the unit.
k Section [Link],
m mV G/n dBµV Selects giga/nano, with RF level Change Unit of Level
x1 dBµV, with LF level dBu.
ENTER dB(m)
M/µ µV Selects mega/micro, with level µV.
k/m MV Selects kilo/milli, with level mV.
1x
Enter dB(m) Terminates entries in the basic
unit and value inputs without unit.
Selects with level dBm
Selects with level offset and level
step width dB.
In order to change to another level unit, simply press
the unit key desired. Parameter LEVEL must be
activated, e.g. by pressing the [LEVEL] key.

3 MENU/VARIATION

Menu keys

The menu keys access the menus and settings within see as well
RETURN SELECT
the menus. Section 2.2.2,
Basic Operating Steps
RETURN Returns the menu cursor to the
next higher menu level.
× Ø SELECT Acknowledges the choice marked
by the menu cursor
⇐ Moves the digit cursor to the left by
one position in the marked value
indication.
Moves the menu cursor to the left
by one position in a 1-out-of-n
selection.
⇒ Moves the digit cursor to the right
by one position in the marked value
indication.
Moves the menu cursor to the right
by one position in a 1-out-of-n
selection.

1038.6002.02 2.5 E-13

SME Front Panel

1 2 3 4

SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz...3.0 GHz SME 03 1038.6002.03

DATA
DATA INPUT

G
FREQ 7 8 9 n dBµV
FREQ
100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm
LEVEL 4 5 6 M
CLOCK

µ µV

SAVE k
1 2 3 m EXT 1
mV
FREQUENCY

Ï
LEVEL OPERATING - x1
RC L 0 . ENTER dB(m)
MODULATION
DIGITAL MOD Move cursor EXT 2
MENU / VARIATION
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP
RETURN SELECT
LIST SELECT Next menu
MEM SEQ LF
UTILITIES RETURN Previous menu
HELP
VERSION: 1.33
× Ø RF 50 W

QUICK SELECT
STBY !
M0D RF
ASSIGN MENU1 MENU2 PRESET ERROR STATUS HELP LOCAL MAX 50 W
0N/0FF 0N/0FF REVERSE POWER
ON

MADE IN GERMANY

9 8 7
6 5
Fig. 2-1,b Front panel view, controls

1038.6002.02 2.6 E-13

SME Front Panel

3 MENU/VARIATION

Rotary knob

The rotary knob moves the menu cursor over the See as well
positions of a menu level to choose from or varies the Section 2.2.2,
value of a parameter. The variation is either effected in Basic Operating Steps
steps of one or in a step width that can be specified at Section 2.2.3,
will. Sample Setting for First
Users

See Section [Link], page 2.11, Inputs/Outputs.

RF Switches on/off the RF signal. See as well

M0 D
0 N/ 0F F
RF
0 N/0FF ON/OFF Section [Link],
Use of [RF ON/OFF]
MOD Switches on/off the modulation
ON/OFF selected in the UTILITIES MOD and [MOD ON/OFF]
KEY menu. Keys

PRESET ERROR STATUS H ELP LOCA L

PRESET Establishes a defined instrument See as well

status. Section 1.1.7,
Preset Setting
ERROR* Indicates error and caution
messages. Section 2.12,
Help System
STATUS* Indicates the instrument status.
Section 2.13,
HELP* Indicates context-sensitive auxiliary
Status
text.
Section 2.14,
LOCAL Switches the instrument from the
Error Messages
REMOTE mode (remote control) to
the LOCAL mode (manual control). Section 3,
Remote Control
* Exit the menus using the [RETURN] key.

1038.6002.02 2.7 E-13

SME Front Panel

1 2 3 4

SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz...3.0 GHz SME 03 1038.6002.03

DATA
DATA INPUT

G
FREQ 7 8 9 n dBµV
FREQ
100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm
LEVEL 4 5 6 M
CLOCK

µ µV

k
SAVE 1 2 3 m EXT 1
mV
FREQUENCY

Ï
LEVEL OPERATING - x1
RC L 0 . ENTER dB(m)
MODULATION
DIGITAL MOD Move cursor EXT 2
MENU / VARIATION
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP
RETURN SELECT
LIST SELECT Next menu
MEM SEQ LF
UTILITIES RETURN Previous menu
HELP
VERSION: 1.33
× Ø RF 50 W

QUICK SELECT
STBY !
M0D RF
ASSIGN MENU1 MENU2 PRESET ERROR STATUS HELP LOCAL MAX 50 W
0N/0FF 0N/0FF REVERSE POWER
ON

MADE IN GERMANY

9 8 7 6 5

.Fig. 2-1,b Front panel view, controls

1038.6002.02 2.8 E-13

SME Front Panel

Brightness and contrast of the display can be set using See as well
the rotary knobs. Section 1.1.5,
Setting of Contrast and
Contrast
Brightness of the
Brightness Display

8 QUICK SELECT
QUICK SELECT

ASSGIN MENU 1 ME NU 2

See as well
The menu-quick-selection keys permit fast access to
Section 2.2.2, Basic
two menus selected.
Operating Steps
ASSIGN Stores the current menu as menu1
when the MENU1 key is pressed
afterwards or as menu2 when the
MENU2 key is pressed afterwards.
MENU1 Activates menu1 stored.
MENU2 Activates menu2 stored.

9 Switching On/Off

STBY
The On/Off switch switches the instrument from the see as well
standby mode to the ready-for-operation status.
ON Section 1.1.3,
Prerequisite: The power switch at the rear of the
Switching On/Off the
instrument must be switched on.
Instrument
STBY LED is illuminated in the standby
Section 2.1.2,
mode.
Elements of the Rear
Panel, Power Switch

1038.6002.02 2.9 E-13

SME Front Panel

1 2 3 4

SIGNALGENERATOR 5 kHz...3.0 GHz SME 03 1038.6002.03

DATA
DATA INPUT

G
FREQ 7 8 9 n dBµV
FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm
LEVEL M
CLOCK

4 5 6 µ µV

SAVE k
1 2 3 m EXT 1
mV
FREQUENCY

Ï
LEVEL OPERATING - x1
RC L 0 . ENTER dB(m)
MODULATION
DIGITAL MOD Move cursor EXT 2
MENU / VARIATION
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP
RETURN SELECT
LIST SELECT Next menu
MEM SEQ LF
UTILITIES RETURN Previous menu
HELP
VERSION: 1.33
× Ø RF 50 W

QUICK SELECT
!
STBY M0D RF
ASSIGN MENU1 MENU2 PRESET ERROR STATUS HELP LOCAL MAX 50 W
0N/0FF 0N/0FF REVERSE POWER
ON

MADE IN GERMANY

9 8 7 6 5
Fig. 2-1,c Front panel view, inputs/outputs

1038.6002.02 2.10 E-13

SME Front Panel

[Link] Inputs/Outputs
(Cf. Fig. 2-1, C Front panel view, Inputs/Outputs)
4

See as well
DATA Input external data signal for digital
Section 2.6.3,
modulation. Input resistance 1 kΩ, Digital Modulation
DATA
TTL-level.
Output* data signal with operating
mode internal. Level: TTL
CLOCK
CLOCK Input* external clock-pulse signal for Section 2.6.3,.
digital modulation. Input resistance Digital Modulation
EXT 1 1 kΩ, TTL-level.
Output* clock-pulse signal with
operating mode internal. Level:TTL
EXT 2 EXT1 Input external modulation signal,
alternatively for AM or FM (PM).
Input resistance >100 kΩ.
LF Nominal voltage: Us = 1 V
Max. permissible overvoltage: ± 15 V
EXT2 Input external modulation signal for
RF 50 W FM (PM).
Input resistance >100 kΩ.
Nominal voltage: Us = 1 V
max. permissible overvoltage: ± 15 V
LF Output** LF signal of the internal LF- Section 2.7,
generators LF Gen 1 and LF Gen 2. LF outputs
Source resistance < 10 Ω.
Section [Link],
RF Output RF signal.
Use of [ON/OFF] and
Source resistance 50 Ω
[MOD ON/OFF] Key
* When fitted with option DM-Coder, SME-B11
** Options: SM-B2, SM-B6

1038.6002.02 2.11 E-13

Rear Panel SME

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TRIGGER REF
X-A XIS MARKER BLANK LF

TUNE

BURST PULSE
100-240 VAC
2,7-1,1 A
50-400 Hz

DATA SYNC

CLOCK VIDEO

RS 232

RF EXT1 EXT2 IEC625 IEEE488

21 20 19 18 17

Fig. 2-2 Rear panel view

1038.6002.02 2.12 E-13

SME Rear Panel

2.1.2 Elements of the Rear Panel

(Cf. Fig. 2-2, Rear panel view)
10

X-AXIS MARKER BLAN K

Outputs for control and triggering in the sweep and list See as well
operating modes. Section 2.8,
Sweep
X-AXIS Level: 0 to 10 V.
MARKER Level: TTL Section 2.9,
LIST Mode
BLANK Level: TTL

11

LF Cut-out, provided to relocate the LF output

at the front to the rear of the instrument.
LF

12

TRIGGER Input to trigger sweep, memory sequence, See as well

LIST mode and DM memory extension. respective section as
TRIGGER Level: TTL to menus and
Section 2.11.14,
Input/Output Settings
(AUX I/O)

13

BURST Signal input/output for digital modulation. See as well

Signal output for synchronization with data Section 2.6.3,
BURST signal generated internally. Level TTL. Digital Modulation
Signal input in the external operating mode
to control level bursts. Level TTL.
DATA
DATA Cut-out, provided to relocate the data
input/output at the front to the rear of the
CLOCK
instrument.
CLOCK Cut-out, provided to relocate the clock
input/output at the front to the rear of the
instrument.

1038.6002.02 2.13 E-13

Rear Panel SME

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TRIGGER I
REF
X -A X IS MARKER BLANK LF
0

TUNE

BURST PULSE
100-240 VAC
2,7-1,1 A
50-400 Hz

DATA SYNC

CLOCK VIDEO

RS 232

RF EXT1 EXT2 IEC625 IEEE488

21 20 19 18 17

Fig. 2-2 Rear panel view

1038.6002.02 2.14 E-13

SME Rear Panel

14

See as well
REF Output of the internal 10-MHz reference
Section 2.11.5,
signal with reference internal.
Reference Frequency
REF Source resistance 50 Ω. Int/Ext
Input for external reference frequency with
reference external. Adjustable to external
TUNE reference frequencies from 1 MHz to 16
MHz in 1-MHz steps.
Input resistance 200 Ω.
TUNE Tuning input for the internal reference
frequency. Voltage range ±10 V, pulling
range ±1.10-6.

15

PULSE Input to trigger the pulse generator or to See as well

directly control the pulse modulation. Section [Link],
PULSE Level: TTL. Pulse Modulation
Input resistance 50 Ω/10kΩ, selectable
Max. permissible overvoltage: ±15 V
SYNC
SYNC Output SYNC signal with pulse modulation.
Level: TTL
VIDEO
VIDEO Output video signal with pulse modulation.
The signal is synchronous with the RF
pulse.
Level: TTL

16

See as well
Power switch
Section 1.1.1,
On when pressed at the top
Supply Voltage Section
Section 1.1.3,
Switching On/Off the
Power supply connection Instrument

17

RS-232 RS-232 interface See as well

used for software update, the loading of Chapter 3,
RS 2 3 2 calibration data, and remote control. The Remote Control
pin assignment corresponds to the pin
assignment of a PC.

1038.6002.02 2.15 E-13

Rear Panel SME

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TRIGGER I
REF
X -A X IS MARKER BLANK LF
0

TUNE

BURST PULSE
100-240 VAC
2,7-1,1 A
50-400 Hz

DATA SYNC

CLOCK VIDEO

RS 232

RF EXT1 EXT2 IEC625 IEEE488

21 20 19 18 17

Fig. 2-2 Rear panel view

1038.6002.02 2.16 E-13

SME Rear Panel

18

IEC625 IEEE488

IEC 625 IEC-Bus (IEEE 488) See as well

Chapter 3,
IEEE 488 Remote-control interface
Remote Control

19

EXT2 Cut-out, provided to relocate the EXT2

input at the front to the rear of the
instrument.
EXT2

20

EXT1 Cut-out, provided to relocate the EXT1

input at the front to the rear of the
instrument.
EXT1

21

RF Cut-out, provided to relocate the RF output

at the front to the rear of the instrument.

RF

1038.6002.02 2.17 E-13

Display SME

2.2 Operating Concept

2.2.1 Display

1 FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

2 FM

FREQUENCY AM FM1 DEVIATION 1.00 kHz

LEVEL FM FM1 SOURCE OFF LFGEN1 EXT1 EXT2
MODULATION PM LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4k 1k 3k 15k Hz
DIGITAL MOD PULSE
3
LF OUTPUT FM2 DEVIATION 2.000 0 kHz
SWEEP FM2 SOURCE OFF LFGEN2 EXT1 EXT2
LIST LFGEN2 FREQ 27.500 0 kHz
MEM SEQ LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI
UTILITIES
HELP EXT1 COUPLING AC DC
EXT2 COUPLING AC DC

Main menu Submenu Setting menu

1 Header field Menu cursor

2 Status line Digit cursor
3 Menu fields Select mark

Fig. 2-3 Design of the display

Header field (1)The header field of the display indicates frequency and level of the RF output signal. In
the RF-sweep operating mode, the start and stop frequencies are displayed in two
lines one above the other. The start and stop levels are indicated in the LEVEL-sweep
operating mode correspondingly.
Status line (2) The status line below describes operating mode and operating state of the instrument.
Error messages and notes for caution are also displayed in the status line.
Menu fields (3)The indication fields below the header field are reserved for the menu representations.
The image contents of these fields change as a function of the menu selected. The
field at the left-hand display margin is occupied with the main menu, the topmost level
of the menu structure. The main menu is always faded in.
Each further field adjacent at the right contains submenus.
The field ending with the right-hand display margin shows the setting menu. In this
menu all setting values and setting states connected with the menu selected are
indicated. When accessing submenus, the higher-order menus remain in the display.
The current menu path is evident through the select marks.
Menu cursor The menu cursor shows the user at which position in the menu he is.
The position of the menu cursor is evident from the inverse notation of
the term (white characters on a black background)
Digit cursor As an underscore, the digit cursor marks the position which can be
varied by means of the rotary knob in a value indication.
Select mark The frame around a term marks current menus or valid settings in the
setting menu.

1038.6002.02 2.18 E-13

SME Display

2.2.2 Basic Operating Steps

The operating principle is explained in this section. For better understanding, please read sections
"Display" (Section 2.2.1) and "Sample Setting for First Users" (Section 2.2.3) in addition.

To operate the instrument, menus are called in the display. All setting possibilities and the current
setting status are evident from the menus. All settings can be made by accessing the menus.

RF frequency and RF level can also be set without menu operation using keys [FREQ] and [LEVEL].
RF signal and modulation can also be switched on/off without menu operation using keys [RF ON/OFF]
and/or [MOD ON/OFF].

[Link] Calling the Menus

Accessing the menus is effected using rotary knob [VARIATION], [SELECT] key and [RETURN] key.
Rotary knob Rotary knob [VARIATION] moves the menu cursor over the positions of a menu level
to be selected.
If a scrollbar is visible at the left-hand margin of a menu, the menu is larger than the
screen window. If the menu cursor is moved to the margin of the screen window, the
covered lines become visible.

[SELECT] key The [SELECT acknowledges the selection marked by means of the menu cursor.

[RETURN] key The [RETURN] key

- returns the menu cursor to the next higher menu level.
The menu cursor is shifted to the left into the preceding column of the menu
structure.
- resets the menu cursor from frequency or level value indication in the header field
into the menu field to the menu called last.
- closes the display pages called using keys [STATUS], [HELP] and [ERROR]
again.
Settings are accessed in the setting menus ending with the right-hand display margin.

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL

- 30.0 dBm

AM

FREQUENCY AM AM DEPTH 100.0 %

LEVEL FM AM SOURCE INT OFF LFGEN1 LFGEN2
MODULATION PM AM SOURCE EXT OFF EXT1
DIGITAL MOD PULSE AM EXT COUPLING AC DC
LF OUTPUT AM POLARITY NORM INV
SWEEP
LIST LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4k 1k 3k 15k Hz
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES LFGEN2 FREQ 27.500 0 kHz
HELP LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI

Fig. 2-4 MODULATION-AM menu

1038.6002.02 2.19 E-13

Basic Operating Steps SME

[Link] Selection and Change of Parameters

Select parameter À Set the menu cursor to the name of the parameter desired using the rotary
knob, e.g. to AM DEPTH in the AM menu, Fig. 2.4..
Change setting À Via value input or using rotary knob.
value
via value inputs À Press the first digit of the new value or minus sign.
The old value is deleted, the entry is indicated in the marked field.
À Enter further digits.
À Terminate the input using a unit key or, in the case of inputs in the base unit
or in the case of inputs without unit, using the [1x/Enter] key.
The menu cursor wraps back to the appropriate parameter.

using rotary knob À Press the [SELECT] key.

À The menu cursor changes from the parameter selected in the left-hand
column of the setting menu to the setting value on the right, e.g. from AM
DEPTH to 30%, Fig. 2-4.
À Set the underscore to the position of the setting value to be varied using
keys [Ø] [×].
À Turn the rotary knob.
The position underscored is varied in steps of 1.
Note: RF frequency and RF level can also be varied in a step width which
can be defined arbitrarily using the rotary knob. In the respective
setting menu (FREQUENCY or LEVEL) the step width is entered as
KNOB STEP USER and the KNOB STEP set from DECIMAL to
USER. To point to the fact that the step width has been converted to
the value programmed, the underscore as a symbol of the digit
cursor disappears in the respective value indication.

1-out-of-n selection À Select parameters.

À Press the [SELECT] key.
The menu cursor changes from the parameter selected in the left-hand
column of the setting menu to the current selection on the right, e.g. from
LFGEN1 FREQ to 0.4 kHz, Fig. 2-4.
À Set the menu cursor to the position desired within the 1-out-of-n selection
using the rotary knob or cursor keys [⇐] [⇒].
À Press the [SELECT] key.
The setting is made.
The selection mark which has marked the setting valid up to now wraps to
the new position.
À Press the [RETURN] key.
The menu cursor wraps back to the respective parameter

1038.6002.02 2.20 E-13

SME Basic Operating Steps

Quick selection of The quick selection of a parameter reduces the number of operating steps if
a parameter several parameters are set successively. The menu cursor can directly be set
further from line to line in the column of the setting values by pressing the
[SELECT] key.
The menu cursor wraps from the setting value of a parameter to the setting
value of the parameter in the next line.

The column of the setting values can be exited at each position by pressing
the [RETURN] key.

[Link] Triggering Action

Lines in the setting menu which are marked with the "Ð" symbol at the end of the line qualify an action
which can be carried out. Instruction SEARCH ONCE Ð in the LEVEL-ALC menu, e.g., switches on
level control for level calibration for a short period of time.

Trigger action À Set the menu cursor to the respective instruction.

À Press the [SELECT] key.
The action is triggered.
While the action is carried out, the instruction remains framed by the
selection mark.

[Link] Quick Selection of Menu (QUICK SELECT)

The keys of the QUICK SELECT control field are used to call selected menus quickly by one keystroke.

Store menus À Establish the desired operating status of the current menu.
À Press the [ASSIGN] key.
À Press key [MENU1] or [MENU2].
The current menu is stored as menu1 or menu2. That is to say, 2 menus
can be stored in total.
Call menus À Press key [MENU1] or [MENU2].
Menu1 or menu2 stored is displayed. Exactly the operating status which was
current at the point of time of storing is reconstructed.

1038.6002.02 2.21 E-13

Basic Operating Steps SME

[Link] Use of [FREQ] and [LEVEL] Keys

RF frequency and RF level can be set without menu operation as well using direct keys [FREQ] and
[LEVEL]. The input value considers the offset, see Sections 2.4 and 2.5.

Key [FREQ]/ [LEVEL] À Press the [FREQ] or [LEVEL] key.

The frequency and/or the level indication in the header field of the display
is marked.
The current menu at the display is maintained.
À Alter the value via a value input or the rotary knob.
À Press the [RETURN] key.
The menu cursor wraps to the position marked last in the menu.

[Link] Use of [RF ON / OFF] and [MOD ON / OFF] Keys

RF signal and modulation can be switched on/off without menu operation as well using direct keys
[RF ON / OFF] and/or [MOD ON / OFF] (see Section [Link], [MOD ON/OFF] key as well).

Key [RF ON / OFF] À Press the [RF ON / OFF] key.

The RF output signal is switched on/off.
IEC-bus command: :OUTP:STAT ON

Key [MOD ON / OFF] À Press the [MOD ON / OFF] key.

The modulation is switched on/off.
A direct IEC-bus command is not available. The modulations have to be
switched on and off in the respective modulation submenus.

[Link] Changing Unit of Level

For the level, the unit of the value set can be changed without a new value input.

Change level unit À Activate LEVEL parameter.

- Press the [LEVEL] key or
- set the menu cursor in the LEVEL menu to the setting value of the
AMPLITUDE parameter.
À Press the unit key with the desired level unit.
The level is indicated in the desired unit.

1038.6002.02 2.22 E-13

SME Sample Setting for First Users

[Link] Correction of Input

Digital entries can be corrected by one of the unit/Enter keys before terminating the input.

Key [-/ ] Ï The backspace key deletes the value entered digit by digit. When the last
digit is deleted, the previous value is displayed.

Key [RETURN] Pressing the [RETURN] key deletes the entire entry and results in the
previous value being indicated again.

For a subsequent new input in the setting menu, the first digit of the new
value is to be entered.
For a subsequent new input via the [FREQ] or [LEVEL] keys, the respective
key has to be pressed again.

Key [FREQ]/ [LEVEL] In the case of a frequency or level input by means of the [FREQ] or [LEVEL]
keys, pressing the [FREQ] and/or [LEVEL] key again deletes the entire input.

2.2.4 Sample Setting for First Users

First users most quickly become familiar with the operation of the instrument if they execute the pattern
setting of this section.

First frequency and level of the RF output signal are set via keys [FREQ] and [LEVEL] in the DATA
INPUT field:

- Frequency 250 MHz

- Level 10 dBm

Operating steps Explanations

PRESET
Reset the instrument to the defined
state.

DA TA INPUT Set the frequency to 250 MHz. The

menu cursor marks the permanent
M
FREQ 2 5 0 frequency indication.
µ d BµV

DA TA INPUT Set the level to 10 dBm. The menu

cursor marks the permanent level
LEV EL 1 x1
0 ENTER
indication.

Reset the menu cursor to the menu

RETURN
field.

1038.6002.02 2.23 E-13

Sample Setting for First Users SME

The output signal is to be amplitude-modulated next.

- AM modulation depth 15.5 %
- AM signal 3-kHz sine

Operating steps Explanations

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select MODULATION menu.

À Set menu cursor to MODULATION
. using the rotary knob and
SELECT
MODULATION subsequently press
. [SELECT] key.
The submenu is displayed

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select AM submenu

The AM setting menu is displayed.
.
SELECT
AM
.

MENU / VARIATION Select AM DEPTH parameter.

The menu cursor marks the setting
. value.
AM DEPTH
.

Enter modulation depth 15.5 % and

DA TA INPUT
acknowledge.
1 . x1
5 0 ENTER The menu cursor is reset to AM
DEPTH.

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select AM SOURCE INT.

The menu cursor marks the current
. 1-out-of-n selection.
SELECT
AM SOURCE INT
.

1038.6002.02 2.24 E-13

SME List Editor

Operating steps Explanations

M ENU / V ARIATION M ENU / V ARIATION Select LF generator 1 as modulation

source.
. The selection mark marks LFGEN1.
LFGEN1 SELECT
AM is faded in the status line as a
. hint that AM is switched on.

Reset menu cursor to AM SOURCE

RETURN
INT.

MENU / VARIATION Select parameter LFGEN1 FREQ.

The menu cursor marks the current
. frequency selection.
LFGEN1 FREQ
.

DATA INPUT Set the frequency of LF generator 1

to 3 kHz.
k
3
m The selection mark marks 3 kHz.

The indications on the display are

represented in Fig. 2-5.

The AM modulation setting is completed.

FREQ
250. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL
- 10.0 dBm

AM

FREQUENCY AM AM DEPTH 15.5 %

LEVEL FM AM SOURCE INT OFF LFGEN1 LFGEN2
MODULATION PM AM SOURCE EXT OFF EXT1
DIGITAL MOD PULSE AM EXT COUPLING AC DC
LF OUTPUT AM POLARITY NORM INV
SWEEP
LIST LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4k 1k 3k 15k Hz
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES LFGEN2 FREQ 1.000 0 kHz
HELP LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI

Fig. 2-5 Display after AM setting

1038.6002.02 2.25 E-13

List Editor SME

Subsequently to the above setting, 420 MHz as new RF frequency and 12.5 kHz as the step width for
the RF frequency variation are set in the following. Parameter quick select is used, which reduces the
number of operating steps.

Operating steps Explanations

RETURN
Reset the menu cursor to the main
RETURN
menu in 2 steps.

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select FREQUENCY menu.

The frequency setting menu is
. displayed.
FREQUENCY SELECT
.

MENU / VARIATION Select FREQUENCY parameter.

The menu cursor marks the setting
.
value.
FREQUENCY
.

DA TA INPUT Enter frequency 420 MHz and

M
acknowledge.
4 2 0 µ

MENU / VARIATION Set menu cursor to the setting value

of parameter KNOB STEP USER.
.
KNOB STEP USER
.

DA TA INPUT Enter step width 12.5 kHz.

k
1 2 . 5 m

MENU / VARIATION Set menu cursor to parameter KNOB

STEP
.
KNOB STEP
.

1038.6002.02 2.26 E-13

SME List Editor

Operating steps Explanations

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select USER (user-defined step

width).
The selection mark marks USER.
. USER . SELECT

This results in step width 12.5 kHz

being used in the case of variation
using the rotary knob.

Reset the menu cursor to the main

RETURN RETURN menu in 2 steps.

FREQ 420. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL

10.0 dBm

AM

FREQUENCY FREQUENCY 420.000 000.0 MHz

LEVEL OFFSET 0.0 Hz
MODULATION
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT KNOB STEP USER 12.500 0 kHz
SWEEP KNOB STEP DECIMAL USER
LIST EXCLUDE FROM RCL ON OFF
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES
HELP

Fig. 2-6 Display after pattern setting

1038.6002.02 2.27 E-13

List Editor SME

2.2.4 List Editor

The SME offers the possibility to generate lists. Lists are used for setting sequences (LIST mode or
memory sequence), as data source for digital modulations or for level correction which can be defined
by the user (UCOR). They consist of elements which are defined by an index and at least one
parameter per index. Each list is marked by a separate name and can be selected via this name. The
lists are accessed in the menus assigned in each case, e.g. to the settings sequences of frequency and
level value pairs in the LIST menu. However, the lists are always generated and processed in the same
way and the procedures are hence explained in detail by the example of the memory sequence mode
(menu MEM SEQ) in this section. A pattern setting at the end of this section allows the user to become
familiar with the operation of the list editor.

Setting menus providing list processing are structured in two pages:

The first page, called OPERATION page in the following contains the general configuration parameters
for processing a list. Further, the general list functions such as selecting and deleting the list as well as
calling an editing mode are provided. The second page, the EDIT page, is automatically displayed when
calling an edit function and serves to enter and modify the parameters of the list.

The OPERATION page has a similar arrangement with all list editors. As an example, the OPERATION
page of the MEM SEQ menu is shown:

Menu selection: MEM SEQ

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT-SINGLE EXT-STEP

LEVEL
MODULATION RESET SEQUENCE
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX 1
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ SELECT LIST... CURRENT: MSEQ2
UTILITIES DELETE LIST...
HELP FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW

Fig. 2-7 OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu

The settings for MODE, CURRENT INDEX, etc. are irrelevant for the general description of the list
editors and are described in greater detail in Section 2.10, MEMORY SEQUENCE mode.

The last three menu lines of the OPERATION page always exist and are reserved for selecting and
deleting lists as well as for calling the edit functions (and hence the EDIT page)

SELECT LIST Opens a selection window in which a list can be selected from the existing lists or a
new, empty list can be generated. In this line the active list is always displayed.

DELETE LIST Opens a selection window in which the list to be deleted can be selected..

1038.6002.02 2.28 E-13

SME List Editor

FUNCTION Selection of the edit function for processing the lists. The EDIT page is
automatically called through the selection (cf. Section [Link]).
FILL Filling a list with elements.
INSERT Insertion of elements into a list.
DELETE Deletion of elements of a list.

[Link] Select and Generate - SELECT LIST

SELECT LIST opens a selection window in which either an existing list can be selected or a new, empty
list can be generated (cf. Fig. 2-8). By pressing the [RETURN] key, the selection window is closed
without changing the setting.

Select list À Mark the list desired using the rotary knob.
À Press [SELECT] key.
The selected list is included in the instrument setting. The selection window
is closed. The selected list is displayed under CURRENT.

Generate list À Mark CREATE NEW LIST ➤ using rotary knob.

À Press [SELECT] key.
A new empty list is automatically generated which can be filled using
functions FILL or EDIT. The selection window is closed. The new list is
displayed under CURRENT.

No modification À Press [RETURN] key.

of the setting

Selection: DELETE

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE CREATE NEW LIST

LEVEL EXECUTE SINGLE MODE MSEQ1 199
MODULATION RESET MSEQ2 100
DIGITAL MOD MSEQ3 1
LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX MSEQ4 123
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ SELECT LIST...
UTILITIES DELETE LIST...
HELP FUNCTION

Fig. 2-8 SELECT-LIST-selection window

1038.6002.02 2.29 E-13

List Editor SME

CREATE NEW LIST Ð Generating a new list. The name of the list cannot be selected freely in the
case of manual control. A definite list name is automatically generated in the
following form:
MSEQ<n>, with <n> ∈ {0..9}, e.g. MSEQ1 (with Memory Sequence)
This applies correspondingly to the other operating modes. In the case of
LIST mode, LIST1 would be generated for example. If a list is created via IEC
bus, an arbitrary list name can be given (cf. Section 3). Unrestricted access is
also possible by means of the selection window.

MSEQ2 100 The list currently set is marked in the selection window by means of the
selection mark, here SEQ2. In addition to the list name, the length of the list
is given, here 100 elements.

[Link] Deletion of Lists - DELETE LIST

DELETE LIST opens a selection window in which the list to be deleted can be selected.. The lists are
represented together with their name and their length (cf. Fig. 2-9). By pressing the [RETURN] key the
selection window is exited without deleting a list.

Delete list À Mark desired list using the rotary knob.

À Press [SELECT] key.
The prompt "enter [SELECT to delete list/sequence?" is displayed
ÀPress [SELECT] key.
The list is deleted. If the prompt is acknowledged with the [RETURN] key,
however, the list is not deleted. The selection window is automatically
closed due to the acknowledgment of the prompt.

Selection: DELETE LIST

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE MSEQ1 199

LEVEL MSEQ2 100
MODULATION RESET SEQUENCE MSEQ3 1
DIGITAL MOD MSEQ4 123
LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ SELECT LIST...
UTILITIES DELETE LIST...
HELP FUNCTION

Fig. 2-9 DELETE-LIST selection window

1038.6002.02 2.30 E-13

SME List Editor

[Link] Edition of Lists

Due to the selection of an edit mode on the OPERATION page the EDIT page is automatically activated.
When the EDIT/VIEW function is selected, the largest possible section of the list is displayed (cf. Fig.
2-10). In the case of block functions FILL, INSERT and DELETE, an input window is additionally
displayed (cf. Fig. 2-11 to 2-13).
Functions SELECT LIST and FUNCTION are available on the EDIT page as on the OPERATION page.
Return to the OPERATION page is effected by pressing the [SELECT] key twice.

Single-value function EDIT/VIEW

By selecting the EDIT/VIEW function, the entire list can be viewed or modifications of single values be
carried out.
If the cursor marks a value in the INDEX column of the list, the EDIT mode is exited by pressing the
[RETURN] key. The menu cursor then marks FUNCTION again.
There is no separate function for storing the list. This means that every modification of the list is
transferred to the internal data set and has an effect on exiting the EDIT/VIEW function.

Selection: FUNCTION EDIT/VIEW

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SELECT LIST... CURRENT: MSEQ2

LEVEL FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW
MODULATION -INDEX - FREE 2041 - LEN 2055 MEMORY DWELL
DIGITAL MOD 0001 09 50 ms
LF OUTPUT 0002 02 50 ms
SWEEP 0003 01 60 ms
LIST 0004 23 60 ms
MEM SEQ 0005 09 85 ms
UTILITIES 0006 10 85 ms
HELP 0007 08 85 ms
0008 11 85 ms

Fig. 2-10 Edit function EDIT/VIEW

INDEX Position in the list

FREE Space available. FREE 2041 means that space for 2041 parameter elements
is available in the list memory in total.

LEN Occupied space. LEN 2055 means that the current list occupies 2055
elements in the list memory.

MEMORY DWELL Identification of the column below. The number of parameter columns is
different for the various list editors. The list editor for digital modulation data
possess three parameter columns (DATA, BURST and LEVEL
ATTENUATION).

1038.6002.02 2.31 E-13

List Editor SME

Select parameters À Mark the index associated to the parameter using the rotary knob or directly
enter the value of the index via the numeric keys.
À Press [SELECT] key.
Parameter MEMORY is marked. If the second parameter DWELL is to be
marked, press the [SELECT] key again.
Modify parameters À Vary the value of the parameter selected using the rotary knob or enter the
value directly using numeric keys.
Note: The binary coder data of the digital modulations which cannot be
varied are an exception. Further, all numeric keys except for "0" and
"1" are ineffective in these cases.
À Press the [ENTER] key or unit keys.
The value is included in the data set. The menu cursor marks the value of
the next column. In the last column, the menu cursor then marks the next
line of column MEMORY.
À Press the [RETURN] key.
The menu cursor wraps back to the INDEX column. The EDIT mode is
exited by repeatedly pressing the [RETURN] key (cf. Section [Link]).

Block function FILL

Using function FILL, a parameter, e.g. MEMORY, is overwritten with constant or linearly
increasing/decreasing values within a defined range. The input window is exited by pressing the
[RETURN] key without a modification being carried out.
If the filler range exceeds the end of the list, the list is automatically extended.
The list entry, in the example for MEMORY, with index [AT +n] is calculated as follows from the
information AT, RANGE, starting value (MEMORY) and WITH INCREMENT:

MEMORY[AT+n] = starting value (MEMORY)+ n · increment | (0 ≤ n ≤ RANGE1)

Selection: FUNCTION-FILL

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SELECT LIST... FILL AT 10 RANGE 1

LEVEL FUNCTION PARAMETER MEMORY DWELL
MODULATION -INDEX - FREE 2041 - LEN 2055
DIGITAL MOD 0001 MEMORY 1
LF OUTPUT 0002 WITH INCREMENT 0
SWEEP 0003
LIST 0004
MEM SEQ
0005
UTILITIES
0006
HELP
0007
0008 EXECUTE

Fig. 2-11 Block function FILL: Input window

1038.6002.02 2.32 E-13

SME List Editor

FILL AT Setting the filling range.

AT Lower limit (index)
RANGE Number of the elements to be inserted

PARAMETER Selection on which of the parameters the filling function is to have an effect.
This menu option is eliminated if the list only includes elements with one
parameter.

MEMORY Input of the starting value for the parameter selected. This option is only
OR DWELL displayed if a selection has been made under PARAMETER MEMORY or
DWELL.

WITH INCREMENT Input of the increment between two successive values. If 0 is entered as
increment, a filling procedure with constant values is achieved. This option is
only displayed if a selection has been made under PARAMETER MEMORY or
DWELL.
Note: In the case of some types of lists, e.g. digital modulation data, indicating
an increment is eliminated since there are binary data. In these cases
line WITH INCREMENT is eliminated.

EXECUTE Ð Starts the filling sequence. After the function has been executed, the input
window is automatically exited. The current index points to the first element
after the processed range.

Filling a list After selection of function FILL, the menu cursor marks FILL AT.
À Press the [SELECT] key.
The menu cursor marks the value at AT.
À Vary index value using the rotary knob or enter using the numeric keys and
the [ENTER] key.
À Press the [SELECT] key.
The menu cursor marks the value at RANGE.
À Vary value using the rotary knob or enter using the numeric keys and the
[ENTER] key.
À Press the [SELECT] key.
The menu cursor marks MEMORY or DWELL in input line PARAMETER.
À Select MEMORY using the rotary knob (if not yet marked) and press the
[SELECT] key.
The menu cursor marks the value in input line MEMORY.
À Vary starting value for column MEMORY using the rotary knob or enter
using the numeric keys and the [ENTER] key.
À Press the [SELECT] key
The menu cursor marks the value in input line WITH INCREMENT.
À Vary the value of the increment desired using the rotary knob or enter using
the numeric keys and the [ENTER] key.
À Press the [RETURN] key.
À Mark the action EXECUTE Ð
À Press the [SELECT] key.
The filling sequence is initiated. After the function has been carried out, the
input window is automatically exited. The menu cursor marks FUNCTION.
The EDIT page shows the end of the range that has been filled right now.

1038.6002.02 2.33 E-13

List Editor SME

Block function INSERT

Function INSERT inserts the desired number of elements with constant or linearly
increasing/de-creasing values before the element with the given starting index. All elements which had
been stored from the starting index are shifted to the end of the range to be inserted.

Input is effected analogously to filling a list.

By pressing the [RETURN] key the input window is exited without a modification being effected. The
menu cursor then marks FUNCTION.

The list entry, in the example for MEMORY, with index [AT +n] is calculated as follows from the
information AT, RANGE, starting value (MEMORY) and WITH INCREMENT:

MEMORY[AT+n] = starting value (MEMORY) + n · Increment | (0≤n≤RANGE-1)

Selection: FUNCTION INSERT

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SELECT LIST... INSERT AT 10 RANGE 2

LEVEL FUNCTION
MODULATION -INDEX - FREE 2041 - LEN 2055 MEMORY 1
DIGITAL MOD 0001 WITH INCREMENT 0
LF OUTPUT 0002 DWELL 100ms
SWEEP 0003 WITH INCREMENT 0.0ms
LIST 0004
MEM SEQ 0005
UTILITIES 0006
HELP 0007
0008 EXECUTE

Fig. 2-12 Edit function INSERT: Input window

INSERT AT Input of the starting index and the number of the elements to be inserted.
AT Starting index before which the insert operation is to be effective.
RANGE Number of the elements to be inserted

MEMORY Input of the starting value for MEMORY.

DWELL Input of the starting value for DWELL.

WITH INCREMENT Input of the increment between two successive values for MEMORY or
DWELL. If 0 is indicated as increment, constant values are achieved to be
inserted RANGE times.
Note: In the case of some types of lists, e.g. digital modulation data, indicating
an increment is eliminated since there are binary data. In these cases
all lines WITH INCREMENT are eliminated.

EXECUTE Ð Starts the inserting sequence. After the function has been executed, the input
window is automatically exited. The menu cursor marks FUNCTION. The EDIT
page shows the beginning of the range that has moved forward.

1038.6002.02 2.34 E-13

SME List Editor

Block function DELETE

Function DELETE deletes the elements of the range indicated. This does not leave a gap in the list but
the remaining elements move forward. If the given range exceeds the end of the list, deletion until the
end of the list is effected.

Input is analog to filling a list.

By pressing the [RETURN] key, the input window is exited without a modification being carried out. The
menu cursor then marks FUNCTION.

Selection: FUNCTION DELETE

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SELECT LIST... DELETE AT 10 RANGE 2

LEVEL FUNCTION
MODULATION -INDEX - FREE 2041 - LEN 2055 EXECUTE
DIGITAL MOD 0001
LF OUTPUT 0002
SWEEP 0003
LIST 0004
MEM SEQ 0005
UTILITIES 0006
HELP 0007
0008

Fig. 2-13 Edit function DELETE: Input window

DELETE AT Input of the block of the list to be deleted

AT Lower limit (INDEX)
RANGE Number of elements to be deleted.

EXECUTE Ð Starts the deletion. After the function has been executed, the input window is
automatically exited. The menu cursor marks FUNCTION. The EDIT page
shows the beginning of the range that has moved forward.

[Link] Pattern Setting to Operate the List Editor

The user can become familiar with the operation of the list editor by means of the following pattern
setting in the MEM SEQ menu. A list has to be generated and filled with values by using the
single-value function EDIT/VIEW:

• Memory location number of the first element 20

• Dwell time of the first element 15s
• Memory location number of the second element 1.
When the setting has been terminated, return to the OPERATION page of the MEM SEQ menu.

1038.6002.02 2.35 E-13

List Editor SME

At the beginning of the operation sequence, menu MEM SEQ is called. First a list MSEQ0 has to be
generated and then activated. The menu cursor marks a parameter of the setting menu on the
OPERATION page (c.f. Fig. 2-14).

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT-SINGLE EXT-STEP

LEVEL
MODULATION RESET SEQUENCE
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX 1
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ SELECT LIST... CURRENT: MSEQ2
UTILITIES DELETE LIST...
HELP FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW

Fig. 2-14 Starting point of the pattern setting

Operating steps Explanations

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select the SELECT LIST menu item.

.
SELECT LIST... SELECT
.

MENU / VARIATION
A new list MSEQ0 is generated. The
MENU / VARIATION
menu cursor is reset to SELECT
LIST...
CREATE NEW LIST SELECT

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select the FUNCTION menu item.

.
FUNCTION SELECT
.

1038.6002.02 2.36 E-13

SME List Editor

MENU / VARIATION MENU / VARIATION Select single-value function

EDIT/VIEW.
The EDIT page of the MEM SEQ
. EDIT/VIEW . SELECT menu is called. The menu cursor
marks the index of the first element
of list MSEQ0.

Set the menu cursor to the memory

SELECT location number value of the first
element (c.f. Fig. 2-15,A).

Enter MEMORY 20.

DA TA INPUT
The menu cursor automatically wraps
1x
2 0 to the DWELL value of the first
ENTER
element (Fig. 2-15,B). The default
value is 100 ms.

Enter DWELL 15 s.
DA TA INPUT
The menu cursor automatically wraps
1x
1 5 to the MEMORY value of the second
ENTER
element.

Enter MEMORY 1.
DA TA INPUT
The menu cursor automatically wraps
1x
1 to the DWELL value of the second
ENTER
element (default value is 100 ms).

Reset the menu cursor to the index.

RETURN

Reset the menu cursor to the

RETURN FUNCTION menu item of the EDIT
page of menu MEM SEQ (c.f. Fig. 2-
15,C).

Reset the menu cursor to the

RETURN FUNCTION menu item of the
OPERATION page of menu MEM
SEQ.

Note: With the return to the OPERATION page the operation of the list editor is finished. In the list
mode (menu LIST), function LEARN ➤ must be activated subsequently to ensure that the
settings are transferred to the hardware.

1038.6002.02 2.37 E-13

List Editor SME

Fig. 2-15, a to c Pattern setting - Edition of a list

1038.6002.02 2.38 E-13

SME Save/Recall

2.2.5 Save/Recall - Storing/Calling of Instrument Settings

50 complete instrument settings can be stored in memory locations 1 to 50.

Operating steps Explanations

DATA INP UT Store current instrument setting in

1x memory location 12.
SAVE 1 2
ENTER

DATA INP UT Call instrument setting of memory

1x location 12.
RCL 1 2
ENTER

The digital display during a save or recall entry is faded in a window.

Memory location 0 has a special function. Here the instrument setting which was current prior to the last
memory recall and prior to a preset setting is automatically stored. This permits the resetting of
instrument settings which have inadvertently been deleted using Recall 0.

If an instrument setting is stored in which a sweep was switched on, the sweep is started using the
recall.

The parameter EXCLUDE FROM RCL in the FREQUENCY and LEVEL-LEVEL menus determines
whether the saved RF frequency and RF level are loaded when an instrument setting is loaded, or
whether the current settings are maintained.

Store IEC-bus command: "*SAV 12"

Call IEC-bus command: "*RCL 12"

Notes: – The contents of lists, as they are used for the LIST mode or for user correction (UCOR), is
not saved in the SAVE memory. It is stored under the respective list name and can be
called. If instrument settings are called which go back to list data such as level setting using
UCOR, the current list contents is used. If this has been altered, it is not identical to the list
contents at the point of storing any more.

– Memory Sequence is dealt with in Section 2.10.

- Model SME03A and units that are equipped with option SM-B50, comprise the "Fast Restore"
mode for very fast loading of stored device settings. This mode can be called up only
during remote control (see section 3, "Fast Restore Mode".)

1038.6002.02 2.39 E-13

Menu Summary SME

2.3 Menu Summary

FREQUENCY

LEVEL LEVEL
ALC
UCOR
EMF

MODULATION AM
FM (Option SM-B5)
PM (Option SM-B5)
PULSE (Option SM-B3/B8/B9)
STEREO (Option SM-B5/B6)
VOR (Option SM-B6)
ILS-GS (Option SM-B6)
ILS-LOC (Option SM-B6)
MKR-BCN (Option SM-B6)

DIGITAL MOD GMSK (Option SME-B11 )

GSFK (Option SME-B11)
QPSK (Option SME-B11)
GSK (Option SME-B11)
4FSK (Option SME-B11)
FFSK (Option SME-B11)
ERMES (Option SME-B11 and SME-B12)
FLEX (Option SME-B11, SME-B12 and SME-B41)
POCSAG (Option SME-B11, SME-B12 and SME-B42)
LF OUTPUT REFLEX (Option SME-B11, SME-B12 and SME-B43)

SWEEP FREQ
LEVEL
LFGEN (Option SM-B2/SM-B6)

LIST

MEM SEQ

UTILITIES SYSTEM GPIB

REF OSC RS232
PHASE SECURITY
PROTECT LANGUAGE
CALIB VCO SUM
DIAG CONFIG LEV PRESET
TEST TPOINT PULSE GEN (Option SM-B4)
MOD KEY PARAM REF OSC
AUX I/O QPSK (Option SME-B11)
BEEPER LEVEL

HELP

1038.6002.02 2.40 E-13

SME RF Frequency

2.4 RF Frequency

The frequency of the RF output signal can be set directly using the [FREQ] key (cf. Section [Link]) or
by accessing menu FREQUENCY.
In the FREQUENCY menu, the frequency of the RF output signal is indicated under FREQUENCY.
In the case of frequency settings effected in the FREQUENCY menu, the value entered directly is the
frequency of the RF output signal.
The input value of frequency settings opened by means of the [FREQ] key considers the offset in
calculation (cf. next Section). This offers the possibility of entering the desired output frequency of
possibly series-connected instruments such as mixers in the menu.

Note: Further settings: Frequency sweep Menu SWEEP

LF frequency Menu MODULATION
Menu LF-OUTPUT
int./ext. reference frequency Menu UTILITIES-REF OSC
Phase of the output signal Menu UTILITIES-PHASE

Menu selection: FREQUENCY

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY FREQUENCY 100. 000 000 0 MHz

LEVEL OFFSET 0.0 Hz
MODULATION
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT KNOB STEP USER 1. 000 000 0 MHz
SWEEP KNOB STEP DECIMAL USER
LIST EXCLUDE FROM RCL ON OFF
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES
HELP

Fig. 2-16Menu FREQUENCY (preset setting)

FREQUENCY Input value of the RF frequency considering the OFFSET input value. The
frequency of the RF output signal is determined by input values FREQUENCY
and OFFSET (cf. Section 2.4.1 Frequency Offset).
IEC-bus command SOUR:FREQ 100E6

OFFSET Input value of the frequency offset, e.g., of a series-connected mixer (cf.
Section 2.4.1, Frequency Offset).
IEC-bus command SOUR:FREQ:OFFS 0

KNOB STEP USER Input value of the step width for frequency variation using the rotary knob. The
RF frequency is varied in the step width entered if KNOB STEP is set to USER.
IEC-bus command SOUR:FREQ:STEP 1MHz

1038.6002.02 2.41 E-13

RF Frequency SME

KNOB STEP DECIMAL: Variation step width corresponding to the position of the digit
cursor.
USER: "User Defined", variation step width as entered under KNOB
STEP USER .

EXCLUDE FROM RCL OFF The saved frequency is loaded as well when instrument settings
are loaded with the [RCL] key or with a memory sequence.
IEC-bus command SOUR:FREQ:RCL INCL
ON The RF frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are
loaded, the current frequency settings are maintained.
IEC-bus command SOUR:FREQ:RCL EXCL

2.4.1 Frequency Offset

The SME offers the possibility of entering an offset (OFFSET) of possibly series-connected instruments
in the FREQUENCY menu. The indication/input value of FREQ in the header field considers this input
and represents the frequency value of the RF signal at the output of these instruments (cf. Fig. 2-17).

The entry values FREQUENCY and OFFSET in the menu FREQUENCY or FREQ in the header line are
related to the RF output frequency as follows :

FREQ - OFFSET = output frequency (= FREQUENCY).

An offset entry causes no modification of the RF output frequency but only a modification of the display
value in the FREQ field in the header line, ie FREQ in the header line indicates the offset-associated
frequency and FREQUENCY in the menu FREQUENCY the RF output frequency. The status line
indicates FREQ-OFFST.

The offset setting also remains effective with the frequency sweep.

Input value
OFFSET
(FREQUENCY menu)
L.O.
SME
× Ø
Mixer
FREQ in the header field
RF output frequency
(FREQUENCY in the FREQUENCY menu)

Fig. 2-17 Example of a circuit with frequency offset

1038.6002.02 2.42 E-13

 SME RF Level

2.5 RF Level

The RF output level can be set directly using the [LEVEL] key (cf. Section [Link]) or by accessing the
LEVEL menu.

In the LEVEL-LEVEL menu, the set RF output level is indicated under AMPLITUDE. A two-line level
display appears for digital modulation or digital standard. The upper line indicates the average power
(LEVEL), the lower line the peak envelope power (PEP) of the modulated RF output signal.

The input value of level settings effected in the LEVEL-LEVEL menu directly corresponds to the RF
output level.

The input value of the level settings opened using the [LEVEL] key mathematically considers the offset
of an attenuation/amplification element which is possibly series-connected (cf. Section 2.5.1). This offers
the possibility of entering the desired level at the output of series-connected instruments, the SMIQ then
alters the RF output level correspondingly. The offset can also be entered in the LEVEL-LEVEL menu.

dBm, dBµV, mV and µV can be used as level units. The 4 unit keys are directly labeled with these units.
In order to change to another level unit, simply press the desired unit key.

Notes: - The message ERROR is displayed in the status line if the level set in the overrange is
not reached.
- For digital modulation or digital standard, a WARNING message appears in the status
line if the set LEVEL or the displayed PEP are overranged. If the set level cannot be
generated as an overrange value, ERROR will be displayed.
- Further settings: Level sweep menu SWEEP

Menu selection: LEVEL – LEVEL

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY LEVEL AMPLITUDE -30.0 dBm

LEVEL ALC OFFSET 0.0 dBm
MODULATION UCOR LIMIT +16 dBm
DIGITAL MOD EMF ATTENUATOR MODE AUTO FIXED
LF OUTPUT ATTEN FIXED RANGE -50 dBm TO -30 dBm
SWEEP KNOB STEP USER 1.0 dB
LIST KNOB STEP DECIMAL USER
MEM SEQ POWER RESOLUTION 0.1 0.01 dB
UTILITIES POWER-ON STATE RF OFF PREVIOUS SETTING
HELP EXCLUDE FROM RCL ON OFF

Fig. 2-18 Menu LEVEL (preset setting) POWER RESOLUTION is set to 0.01 dB

AMPLITUDE Input value of the RF level at the RF output connector.

IEC/IEEE-bus command SOUR:POW 30
OFFSET Input value of the level offset of the RF output level compared to the input
value of the RF level indicated in the LEVEL header field. Input in dB (cf.
Section 2.5.1, Level Offset). The status line indicates LEV-OFFST.
IEC/IEEE-bus command SOUR:POW:OFFS 0

1038.6002.02 2.43 E-13

RF Level SME

LIMIT Input value of level limitation. This value indicates the upper limit of the level at
the RF output connector. If a level above this limit is attempted to be set, a
warning is displayed in the status line.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:LIM 16 dBm

ATTENUATOR MODE AUTO Normal operation. The attenuator switching mechanically switches
in steps of 5 dB, the switching points being fixed.
IEC-bus command :OUTP:AMOD AUTO
FIXED Level settings are effected without switching the attenuator (cf.
Section 2.5.2, Interrupt-free Level Setting).
IEC-bus command :OUTP:AMOD FIX

ATTEN FIXED RANGE Indication of the level range in which the level is set without interruption in the
"ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED" operating mode.

KNOB STEP USER Input value of the step width for level variation using the rotary knob. The RF
level is varied in the step width entered if KNOB STEP is set to USER.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:STEP 1

KNOB STEP DECIMAL Variation step width according to the position of the digit cursor.
USER User Defined, variation step width as entered under KNOB STEP
USER.

POWER RESOLUTION Selection of resolution of LEVEL display. For level range -99.9 dBm to +16
dBm the resolution for the level display can be set to 0.1 dB or 0.01 dB.

POWER-ON STATE Selection of the state the RF output is to assume after power-on of the unit
RF OFF Output is switched off
PREVIOUS SETTING Same state as before switch-off
IEC-bus command :OUTP:PON ON

EXCLUDE FROM RCL OFF The saved RF level is loaded as well when instrument settings are
loaded with the [RCL] key or with a memory sequence.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:RCL INCL
ON The RF level is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded,
the current level settings are maintained.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:RCL EXCL

1038.6002.02 2.44 E-13

SME RF Level

2.5.1 Level Offset

The SME offers the possibility of entering the offset (OFFSET) of a possibly series-connected
attenuator/amplification element in the LEVEL-LEVEL menu. The indication/input value in the LEVEL
header field considers this input (see below) and represents the level value of the signal at the output of
the series-connected instrument (cf. Fig. 2-19).

The entry values AMPLITUDE and OFFSET in the menu LEVEL or LEVEL in the header line are related
to the RF output level as follows:
LEVEL - OFFSET = output level (= AMPLITUDE)

An offset entry causes no modification of the RF output frequency but only a modification of the display
value in the LEVEL field in the header line, ie LEVEL in the header line indicates the offset-associated
level and AMPLITUDE in the menu LEVEL the RF output level. The status line indicates LEV-OFFST.
The offset is to be entered in dB.

The offset setting also remains effective in the ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED operating mode and with
level sweep.

Input value
OFFSET
(LEVEL menu)
SME
× Ø
Attenuation/
Amplification
RF output signal LEVEL in the header field
(AMPLITUDE in the LEVEL menu)

Fig. 2-19 Example of a circuit with level offset

2.5.2 Interrupt-free Level Setting

In the ATTENUATOR MODE FIXED operating mode, level settings are carried out without interruption.
An electronic attenuation setting is used instead of the interrupting attenuator.
If the normal variation range of 23 dB is violated, the level under/overrange warning is displayed. In
these ranges, level accuracy and spectral purity are no longer guaranteed.

1038.6002.02 2.45 E-13

RF Level SME

2.5.3 Switching On/Off Internal Level Control

Menu LEVEL-ALC offers access to settings for level control.

Level control can be deactivated and various bandwidths of the level control can be switched on.

Switching off level control (ALC STATE OFF) switches over the internal level control into a
sample-and-hold operation. In this operating mode, level control is automatically switched on for a short
period of time after every level and frequency setting, and then the level control is held at the value
achieved. Switching off the level control is used with multi-transmitter measurements to achieve a larger
intermodulation ratio.

Bandwidth setting influences the AM noise of the output signal. The bandwidth of the level control has
the same effect as a filter of the same bandwidth.

Menu selection: LEVEL - ALC

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY LEVEL STATE OFF ON

LEVEL ALC SEARCH ONCE
MODULATION UCOR BANDWIDTH AUTO 100k 500k Hz
DIGITAL MOD EMF
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES
HELP

Fig. 2-20 Menu LEVEL - ALC (preset setting)

STATE ON Normal state. Internal level control is permanently switched on.

IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:ALC ON
OFF Internal level control is deactivated. In this state no AM and no digital
modulation with AM content is possible.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:ALC OFF

SEARCH ONCE Ð Manual short-time switching on of the level control for level calibration in the
ALC STATE OFF operating mode.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:ALC ON;ALC OFF

1038.6002.02 2.46 E-13

SME RF Level

2.5.4 Internal Level Control - Bandwidth Selection

BANDWIDTH Selection of the bandwidth of the level control.

AUTO The bandwidth is automatically adapted to the operating conditions.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:ALC:BAND:AUTO ON
100 kHz Bandwidth narrow. This setting improves AM noise with carrier offset
>100 kHz. However, the AM bandwidth is restricted..
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:ALC:BAND 100kHz;BAND:AUTO OFF
500 kHz Full bandwidth
IEC-bus command SOUR:POW:ALC:BAND 500kHz;BAND:AUTO OFF

2.5.5 User Correction (UCOR)

Function "User Correction" can be used to create and activate lists in which arbitrary RF frequencies are
assigned level correction values.
Up to 10 lists with a total of 160 correction values can be compiled. For frequencies which are not
included in the list the level correction is determined by means of interpolation of the nearest correction
values.
When user correction is switched on, the LEVEL indication is completed by the indication UCOR (User
Correction) in the header field of the display. The RF output level is the sum of both values.
LEVEL + UCOR = output level
If the offset setting is used at the same time, the LEVEL indication value is the difference of the input
values AMPLITUDE and OFFSET of the menu LEVEL.
AMPLITUDE − OFFSET = LEVEL
The user correction is effective in all operating modes if switched on.

Menu selection: LEVEL - UCOR

LEVEL - 27.0 dBm

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz UCOR + 1.9 dB

FREQUENCY LEVEL STATE OFF ON

LEVEL ALC
MODULATION UCOR
DIGITAL MOD EMF
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES
SELECT LIST... CURRENT: UCOR1
HELP
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW

Fig. 2-21 Menu LEVEL - UCOR - OPERATION side

1038.6002.02 2.47 E-13

RF Level SME

STATE Switching on/off user correction.

IEC-bus command SOUR:CORR ON

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list(cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor)
IEC-bus command SOUR:CORR:CSET "UCOR1"

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor)

IEC-bus command SOUR:CORR:CSET:DEL "UCOR2"

FUNCTION Selection of the editing mode to process the selected list

IEC-bus commands SOUR:CORR:CSET:DATA:FREQ 100 MHz, 102
MHz,...
SOUR:CORR:CSET:DATA:POW 1dB, 0.8dB,...

LEVEL - 27.0 dBm

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz UCOR + 1 .9 dB

FREQUENCY LEVEL SELECT LIST... CURRENT: UCOR1

LEVEL ALC FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW
MODULATION UCOR INDEX - FREE 70 - LEN 10 FREQUENCY UCOR1
DIGITAL MOD EMF 005 105.000 000 0 MHz + 1.9 dB
LF OUTPUT 006 107.000 000 0 MHz + 1.2 dB
SWEEP 007 108.000 000 0 MHz + 1.3 dB
LIST 008 109.000 000 0 MHz + 1.5 dB
MEM SEQ 009 111.000 000 0 MHz + 1.6 dB
UTILITIES 010 112.000 000 0 MHz + 1.9 dB
HELP 011 113.000 000 0 MHz + 2.0 dB
012 114.000 000 0 MHz + 2.1 dB

Fig. 2-22 Menu UCOR - LEVEL-EDIT side

1038.6002.02 2.48 E-13

SME RF Level

2.5.6 EMF
The signal level can also be set and indicated as the voltage of EMF (open-circuit voltage).
EMF is displayed in the header field of the display after the unit of the level indication.

Menu selection: LEVEL - EMF

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL 14.1 mVemf

FM

FREQUENCY LEVEL STATE OFF ON

LEVEL ALC
MODULATION UCOR
DIGITAL MOD EMF
LF OUTPUT
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES
HELP

Fig. 2-23 Menu LEVEL-EMF

STATE ON Voltage value of the level is the voltage of EMF.

OFF Voltage value of the level is voltage at 50 Ω (preset setting).

2.5.7 [RF ON / OFF]-Key

The RF output signal is switched on and off again using the [RF ON / OFF] key. This does not influence
the current menu. When the output signal is switched off, the message "RF OFF" is displayed in the
LEVEL indication of the header field. If RF OFF is displayed, the 50-Ω source resistance is maintained.
IEC-bus command :OUTP OFF

2.5.8 Reset Overload Protection (only SME02 and SME03)

SME02 and SME03 are protected against overload by an external signal which is fed into the RF output.
If an external signal is too high, the overload protection responds. This state is indicated by means of
the message "RF OFF" in the LEVEL indication in the header field and the message "OVERLOAD" in
the status line.
À Reset the overload protection by pressing the [RF ON / OFF] key.
IEC-bus command :OUTP:PROT:CLE
SMT06 is not protected against overvoltage, the IEC/IEEE-bus command being ignored.

1038.6002.02 2.49 E-13

Modulation Sources SME

2.6 Modulation

The SME offers the following modulations:

• Amplitude modulation (AM)
• Frequency modulation (FM) *
• Phase modulation (PM) *
• Pulse modulation (PULSE) *
• FM-stereo modulation (STEREO) * *
• VOR/ILS modulation (VOR, ILS-GS, ILS-LOC, MKR BCN) *
and the digital modulations:
• GMSK, GFSK, QPSK, FSK, FFSK, 4FSK and *
• Radiocommunication services ERMES, FLEX, REFLEX and POCSAG. *
Internal or external modulation sources can be used for all modulations.

2.6.1 Modulation Sources

Internal Modulation Sources

Internal modulation generators LF GEN1 and LF GEN2 are available for AM, FM and PM depending on
the equipment. For a more detailed description, cf. Section [Link], LF Generator.
For internal pulse modulation, the instrument can be equipped with a pulse generator (option SM-B4).
For a more detailed description, cf. Section [Link].1, Pulse Generator.
A PRBS generator with selectable sequence lengths and a data generator are available for the digital
modulations (cf. Section 2.6.3, Digital Modulation).

External Modulation Sources

The appropriate input sockets to the different modulations in the case of external supply can be taken
from table 2-1. DM (digital modulation) stands for GMSK, GFSK, QPSK, FSK, FFSK and 4FSK. External
AM, FM and PM can be AC or DC-coupled.

Table 2-1 Input sockets for the different types of modulation

Inputs

Modulation EXT1 EXT2 PULSE DATA CLOCK BURST

AM X
FM1 X X
FM2 X X
PM1 X X
PM2 X X
PULSE X
DM X X X

* Only with option

1038.6002.02 2.50 E-13

SME Modulation Sources

The external modulation signal must show a voltage of Vs = 1 V (Veff = 0.707 V) in order to maintain the
modulation depth or deviation indicated. Deviations of more than ±3 % are signaled in the status line by
means of the following messages (cf. table 2-2).

Table 2-2 Status messages in the case of a deviation from the rated value at the external modulation
input

Message Deviation

EXT1-HIGH Voltage at EXT1 too high

EXT1-LOW Voltage at EXT1 too low

EXT2-HIGH Voltage at EXT2 too high

EXT2-LOW Voltage at EXT2 too low

EXT-HI/HI Voltage at EXT1 and EXT2 too high

EXT-LO/LO Voltage at EXT1 and EXT2 too low

EXT-HI/LO Voltage at EXT1 too high and EXT2 too low

EXT-LO/HI Voltage at EXT1 too low and EXT2 too high

[Link] Simultaneous Modulation

Basically, every combination of AM, FM, pulse modulation and a digital modulation (GMSK, GFSK,
QPSK, FSK, FFSK or 4FSK) is possible. Instead of FM, phase modulation (PM) can be switched on as
well. There are only restrictions for modulations of the same kind and for the multiple use of the 2nd LF
generator (cf. table 2-3).
Two-tone AM is possible by simultaneously switching on the external and internal source.
Two-tone FM or two-tone PM is possible by simultaneously switching on FM1 and FM2 or PM1 and
PM2. For FM1 and FM2 (PM1 and PM2) separate deviations can be set and separate sources switched
on.

Note: With two-tone modulation please observe that the set deviation or modulation depth is valid for
one signal and the sum deviation or sum modulation depth is determined by adding both
signals. This results in overmodulation if the maximal value for deviation or modulation depth is
exceeded.

[Link] Alternate Switching Off of Modulations

Due to the multiple use of some functional modules in the instrument some modulations cannot be set
at the same time (cf. table 2-3). In the case of manual control, incompatible modulations deactivate one
another, a short-time warning is displayed in the status line.

Note: The IEC-bus control according to SCPI forbids the mutual influence of types of modulation on
one another. In the case of remote control, an error message is outputted when the attempt is
made to switch on incompatible types of modulation (cf. annex B).

1038.6002.02 2.51 E-13

Modulation Sources SME

Table 2-3 Modulations which cannot be operated simultaneously

AM AM AM FM FM1 FM2 FM2 PM1 PM1 PM2 PM2 Stereo VOR ILS MCR
INT1 INT2 EXT1 INT1 EXT1,2 INT2 EXT1, INT1 EXT1,2 INT2 EXT1, BCN
2 2

AM INT1 X X X

AM INT2 X X X X

AM EXT1 x x X

FM1 INT1  X X X X

FM1 EXT1,2  X X X X

FM2 INT2  X X X X X X X X

FM2 EXT1,2  X X X X X

PM1 INT1 X X X X  X

PM1 EXT1,2 X X X X  X

PM2 INT2 X X X X  X X X X

PM2 EXT1,2 X X X X  X

Stereo X X X X X X X X X X

VOR X X x X X X X X

ILS X X x X X X X X

MKR-BCN X X X X X X X X

x
X Mutual switching off in the case of manual control


in the VOR-(ILS..) menu AM EXT can be added as an own parameter
Switching off by means of 1-out-of-n selection

[Link] [MOD ON/OFF] Key

The modulations can directly be switched on/off using the key [MOD ON/OFF] or by accessing the
MODULATION menu. When switching on using the [MOD ON/OFF] key, the modulation sources which
are set in the modulation menus are used.

The [MOD ON/OFF] key can either be effective for all modulations or for a selected modulation. The
selection for which modulation the [MOD ON/OFF] key is effective is made in the UTILITIES-MOD KEY
menu (cf. Section " Assigning Modulation to [MOD ON/OFF] Key").

When selecting a certain type of modulation, each pressing the [MOD ON/OFF] key switches on or off
the modulation selected.

In the case of selection "all modulations", the [MOD ON/OFF] key has the following effect:
• At least one modulation is active:
Pressing the [MOD ON/OFF] key switches off all active modulations. Which modulations were active
is stored.
• No modulation is active:
Pressing the [MOD ON/OFF] key switches on the modulations which were last switched off using the
[MOD ON/OFF] key.

1038.6002.02 2.52 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

2.6.2 Analog Modulation

[Link] LF-Generator
The SME is equipped with a fixed-frequency generator as internal modulation source as a standard. The
generator supplies sinusoidal signals of the frequencies of 0.4, 1, 3 and 15 kHz.
In addition to the standard equipment, the SME can be equipped with the following optional
LF modulation sources:
• LF-generator, option SM-B2
• Multifunction generator, option SM-B6

It is possible to fit two optional modulation sources unless option SM-B3, pulse modulator, is fitted. If two
options are fitted, the access to the internal standard generator is eliminated. The different possibilities
of modulation generator fitting are visible from table 2-4:

Table 2-4 Modulation generators as component parts

LF-Generator 1 LF-Generator 2

Standard generator ---

Standard generator Option SM-B2, LF-generator

Standard generator Option SM-B6, multifunction generator

Option SM-B2, LF-generator Option SM-B2, LF-generator

Option SM-B2, LF-generator Option SM-B6, multifunction generator

The selection of the waveform and frequency of the internal modulation signals can be made in one of
the modulation menus ( AM, FM, PM) as well as in the LF-output menu.

Notes: - In conformance to the possibilities of the modulation generator options fitted, there are
differences in the modulation menus for AM, FM and PM.
- The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
LFGEN SHAPE NOI and LF sweep.

1038.6002.02 2.53 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

[Link] Amplitude Modulation

Menu MODULATION-AM offers access to settings for amplitude modulation.

Notes: - In the level range from 7 to 13 dBm, the specified AM data are only guaranteed for a
linearly decreasing modulation depth with a rising level. When a modulation depth is set
that is too high, "WARNING" is displayed in the status line or the message "WARN -221
Settings conflict; modulation forces peak level into overrange" is displayed after
pressing the ERROR key.

- Modulations AM, VOR, ILS and MKR BCN deactivate one another. AM SOURCE INT =
LFGEN2 and STEREO deactivate one another as well.

Menu selection: MODULATION- AM

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM AM DEPTH 30.0 %

LEVEL FM AM SOURCE INT OFF LFGEN1 LFGEN2
MODULATION PM AM SOURCE EXT OFF EXT1
DIGITAL MOD PULSE AM EXT COUPLING AC DC
LF OUTPUT AM POLARITY NORM INV
SWEEP
LIST LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4k 1k 3k 15k Hz
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES LFGEN2 FREQ 1.000 0 kHz
HELP LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI

Fig. 2-24 Menu MODULATION-AM (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B2, LF-generator
(LFGEN2)

AM DEPTH Input value of the modulation depth..

IEC-bus command SOUR:AM 30PCT

AM SOURCE INT Selection of the internal source.

IEC-bus command SOUR:AM:SOUR INT1; STAT ON

AM SOURCE EXT Selection of the external source.

IEC-bus command SOUR:AM:SOUR EXT; STAT ON

AM EXT COUPLING Selection of the kind of coupling AC or DC with external supply (input EXT1).
IEC-bus command SOUR:AM:EXT:COUP AC

1038.6002.02 2.54 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

AM POLARITY Selection of the polarity of amplitude modulation.

NORM A positive modulation voltage generates a higher output level.
INV The AM polarity is inverted.
IEC-bus command SOUR:AM:POL NORM

LFGEN1 FREQ Selection of the frequency of the 1st LF generator.

IEC-bus command SOUR:AM:INT1:FREQ 1kHz

LFGEN2 FREQ Input value of the frequency of the 2nd LF generator.

IEC-bus command SOUR:AM:INT2:FREQ 1kHz

LFGEN2 SHAPE Selection of the waveform of the 2nd LF generator.

IEC-bus command :SOUR2:FUNC SIN

1038.6002.02 2.55 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

[Link] Frequency Modulation

Menu MODULATION-FM offers access to settings for frequency modulation.

Note: The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
FM and PM; FM2 and STEREO; FM2 SOURCE = LFGEN2 and VOR, ILS, MKR BCN

Menu selection: MODULATION-FM

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM FM1 DEVIATION 10.0 kHz

LEVEL FM FM1 SOURCE OFF LFGEN1 EXT1 EXT2
MODULATION PM LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4k 1k 3k 15k Hz
DIGITAL MOD PULSE
LF OUTPUT FM2 DEVIATION 10.0 kHz
SWEEP FM2 SOURCE OFF LFGEN2 EXT1 EXT2
LIST LFGEN2 FREQ 1.000 0 kHz
MEM SEQ LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI
UTILITIES
HELP EXT1 COUPLING AC DC
EXT2 COUPLING AC DC
PREEMPHASIS OFF 50µ 75µ s

Fig. 2-25 Menu MODULATION-FM (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B2, LF-generator
(LFGEN2) and option SM-B5, FM/PM-modulator

FM1 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for FM1.

IEC-bus command SOUR:FM1 10kHz

FM1 SOURCE Switching on and off FM1 and selection of the modulation source.
IEC-bus command SOUR:FM1:SOUR INT; STAT ON

LFGEN1 FREQ Selection of the frequency of the 1st LF generator.

EC-bus short command SOUR:FM1:INT:FREQ 1kHz

FM2 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for FM2.

EC-bus short command SOUR:FM2 10kHz

FM2 SOURCE Switching on and off FM2 and selection of the modulation source.
EC-bus short command SOUR:FM2:STAT OFF

LFGEN2 FREQ Input value of the LFGEN2 frequency.

EC-bus short command SOUR:FM2:INT:FREQ 1kHz

LFGEN2 SHAPE Selection of the waveform of the 2nd LF generator.

EC-bus short command SOUR:SOUR2:FUNC SIN

EXT1 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC for the external input EXT1.
IEC-bus command SOUR:FM1:EXT1:COUP AC

1038.6002.02 2.56 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

EXT2 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC for the external input EXT2.
IEC-bus command SOUR:FM1:EXT2:COUP AC

PREEMPHASIS Selection of the preemphasis

IEC-bus command SOUR:FM1:PRE 50us

[Link].1 FM Deviation Limits

The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set (cf. Fig. 2-26). It is possible to enter a
deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the
deviation can no longer be set. In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error
message is displayed.

In the RF range 93.75 MHz to 130 MHz a different synthesis range is selected depending on the
deviation set. If the deviation is smaller than 62,5 kHz, the synthesizer is in the division range with
optimal spectral purity. If the deviation set is larger than 62,5 kHz, the extended heterodyne band is
automatically selected.

maximal 4000
FM-deviation
[kHz] 2000

extended
1000
heterodyne band

500

250

125
62,5

0,005 93,75 130 187,5 375 750 1500 3000 6000

RF-frequency [MHz]
Fig. 2-26 Dependency of the FM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set

[Link].2 Preemphasis
Preemphasis results in a preemphasis of the modulation signal with time constants 50 µs or 75 µs. The
higher frequencies of the modulation signal are preemphasized.

When preemphasis is switched on, only 1/4 of the maximal deviation is permissible. The highest
permissible modulation frequency is 15 kHz. Exceeding the permissible modulation frequency can lead
to overmodulation.

1038.6002.02 2.57 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

[Link] Phase Modulation

Menu MODULATION-PM offers access to settings for phase modulation.

Note: The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
PM and FM
PM and STEREO
PM2 SOURCE = LFGEN2 and VOR, ILS, MKR BCN

Menu selection: MODULATION - PM

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM PM1 DEVIATION 1.0 rad

LEVEL FM PM1 SOURCE OFF LFGEN1 EXT1 EXT2
MODULATION PM LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4k 1k 3k 15k Hz
DIGITAL MOD PULSE
LF OUTPUT PM2 DEVIATION 10.0 kHz
SWEEP PM2 SOURCE OFF LFGEN2 EXT1 EXT2
LIST LFGEN2 FREQ 1.000 0 kHz
MEM SEQ LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI
UTILITIES
HELP EXT1 COUPLING AC DC
EXT2 COUPLING AC DC

Fig. 2-27 Menu MODULATION - PM (preset setting) fitted with option SM-B2, LF-generator ^
(LFGEN2), and option SM-B5, FM/PM-modulator

PM1 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for PM1.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PM1 1RAD

PM1 SOURCE Switching on and off PM1 and selection of the modulation source.
IEC-bus command SOUR:PM1:SOUR:INT; STAT ON

LFGEN1 FREQ Selection of the frequency of the 1st LF generator.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PM1:INT:FREQ 1kHz

PM2 DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for PM2.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PM2 1RAD

PM2 SOURCE Switching on and off PM2 and selection of the modulation source.
IEC-bus command SOUR:PM2:SOUR INT; STAT ON

LFGEN2 FREQ Input value of the LFGEN2 frequency.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PM2:INT:FREQ 1kHz

LFGEN2 SHAPE Selection of the waveform of the 2nd LF generator.

IEC-bus command SOUR:SOUR2:FUNC SIN

1038.6002.02 2.58 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

EXT1 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC with external supply for PM1 (input
EXT1).
IEC-bus command SOUR:PM:EXT1:COUP AC

EXT2 COUPLING Selection of the type of coupling AC or DC with external supply for PM2 (input
EXT2).
IEC-bus command SOUR:PM:EXT2:COUP AC

[Link].1 PM Deviation Limits

The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set (cf. Fig. 2-28). It is possible to enter a
deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the
deviation can no longer be set. In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error
message displayed.

In the RF range 93.75 MHz to 130 MHz a different synthesis range is selected depending on the
deviation set. If the deviation is smaller than 0,625 rad, the synthesizer is in the division range with
optimal spectral purity. If the deviation set is larger than 0,625 rad, the extended heterodyne band is
automatically selected.

maximal 40
PM-deviation
[rad] 20
extended
10 heterodyne band

2,5

1,25
0,625

0,005 93,75 130 187,5 375 750 1500 3000 6000

RF-frequency[MHz]

Fig. 2-28 Dependency of the PM maximal deviation on the RF frequency set

1038.6002.02 2.59 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

[Link] Pulse Modulation

The pulse modulator can be controlled by an external source as well as by the internal pulse generator.
In the case of external control, the external source directly feeds the pulse modulator. The envelope of
the RF is identical to the control signal. In the case of control by the internal pulse generator, the pulse
form of the pulse generator determines the envelope of the RF. Pulse delay, pulse width and period can
be set.

The polarity of the pulse modulation is selectable. With POLARITY = NORM, the RF level is on with
HIGH level at modulation input PULSE. The input resistance is selectable between 50 Ω and 10 kΩ.

[Link].1 Pulse Generator

As an internal modulation source, the pulse generator (option SM-B4) offers the possibility to set single
and double pulses with variable pulse delay, pulse width and period. The pulse generator can be
triggered internally or by means of an external signal at the PULSE input. The internal triggering is
derived from the reference frequency and hence very stable. In trigger mode EXT, the positive or the
negative edge can be used to trigger the pulse generator.

The pulse generator can also be operated as an independent function without the pulse modulator being
controlled if the pulse modulation source SOURCE is switched to OFF or EXT. The pulse can be tapped
at the VIDEO output.

The inputs and outputs to the pulse generator are at the rear of the instrument.

Signal examples:

SYNC signal
PERIOD
PULSE DELAY WIDTH PULSE DELAY W IDTH

VIDEO signal

RF signal

Fig. 2-29 Signal example 1: single pulse, TRIGGER MODE = AUTO

1038.6002.02 2.60 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

Pulse input
TRIGGER DELAY

SYNC signal
Double Pulse Delay
W IDTH WIDTH

VIDEO signal

RF signal

Fig. 2-30 Signal example 2: double pulse, TRIGGER MODE = EXT, SLOPE = POS

Note: The minimum period length depends on parameters WIDTH and PULSE DELAY. To avoid a
settings conflict the following has to be true:
PERIOD ≥ 1,1 × (WIDTH + PULSE DELAY) + 30 ns
For double pulse the following has to be true:
DOUBLE PULSE DELAY ≥ WIDTH + 40 ns

Menu MODULATION-PULSE offers access to settings for pulse modulation and to the pulse generator.
If only option SM-B3, pulse modulator, is fitted, only the first 3 lines are displayed in the setting menu.

Menu selection: MODULATION - PULSE

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM SOURCE OFF EXT PULSE-GEN

LEVEL FM POLARITY NORM INV
MODULATION PM EXT IMPEDANCE 50 10 k
DIGITAL MOD PULSE ---------------PULSE GENERATOR----------------
LF OUTPUT PERIODE 10.00 µs
SWEEP WIDTH 1.00 µs
LIST PULSE DELAY 1.00 µs
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES DOUBLE PULSE STATE OFF ON
HELP TRIGGER MODE AUTO EXT
EXT TRIG SLOPE POS NEG

Fig. 2-31 Menu MODULATION-PULSE (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B3, pulse modulator,
and option SM-B4, pulse generator.

1038.6002.02 2.61 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

SOURCE Selection of the modulation source.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PULM:SOUR INT; STAT ON

POLARITY Selection of the polarity of the modulation

NORM The RF signal is on during high level.
INV The RF signal is suppressed during high level.
IEC-bus command SOUR:PULM:POL NORM

EXT IMPEDANCE Selection of the input resistance 50 Ω or 10 kΩ.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PULM:EXT:IMP 50

PERIOD Input value of the period.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PULS:PER 10us

WIDTH Input value of the pulse width.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PULS:WIDT 1us

PULSE DELAY Input value of the single-pulse delay. Is only displayed if DOUBLE PULSE
STATE is set to be OFF.
IEC-bus command SOUR:PULS:DEL 1us

DOUBLE PULSE DELAY Input value of the double-pulse delay.

IEC-bus command SOUR:PULS:DOUB:DEL 1us

DOUBLE PULSE STATE Switching on/off the double pulses.

ON Double pulse is switched on
OFF Single pulse
IEC-bus command SOUR:PULS:DOUB ON

TRIGGER MODE Selection of the trigger mode.

AUTO Period as entered under PERIOD.
EXT Period is determined by the external signal at the PULSE input.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:PULS:SOUR AUTO

EXT TRIG SLOPE Selection of the active edge of the external trigger signal.
POS Pulse generator triggers on positive edge of the external signal.
NEG Pulse generator triggers on negative edge of the external signal..
IEC-bus command :TRIG:PULS:SLOP POS

1038.6002.02 2.62 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

[Link] Stereo Modulation

By means of option SM-B6, multifunction generator, and option SM-B5, FM/PM modulator, stereo
multiplex signals conforming to standards can be generated according to the pilot-tone method.

Note: The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
STEREO and FM
STEREO and PM
STEREO and AM if SOURCE AM = LFGEN2

Menu selection: MODULATION - STEREO

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM MODE OFF R L R=L R=L ARI

LEVEL FM DEVIATION 40.0 kHz
MODULATION PM AUDIO FREQ 1.000 0 kHz
DIGITAL MOD PULSE PREEMPHASIS OFF 50µ 75µ S
LF OUTPUT STEREO PILOT STATE OFF ON
SWEEP VOR PILOT DEVIATION 6.72 kHz
LIST ILS-GS PILOT PHASE 0.00 deg
MEM SEQ ILS-LOC
UTILITIES MKR-BCN ARI DEVIATION 4.00 kHz
HELP ARI IDENTIFICATION OFF DK BK
ARI BK A B C D E F

Fig. 2-32 Menu MODULATION-STEREO (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B6, multifunction
generator, and option SM-B5, FM/PM modulator

MODE Selection of the operating mode.

OFF The stereo signal is switched off.
R Audio signal only in the right-hand channel.
L Audio signal only in the left-hand channel.
R=L Audio signals of same frequency and phase in both channels.
R=L Audio signals of same frequency but opposite phase in both
channels.
ARI Generation of 19-kHz pilot tone and ARI traffic channel signals.
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:STAT ON; SIGN AUD; AUD:MODE LEFT

DEVIATION Input value of the frequency deviation of the STEREO-MPX signal without
considering the pilot-tone content.
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER 40kHz

AUDIO FREQ Input value of the frequency of the audio signal.

IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:AUD 1kHz

1038.6002.02 2.63 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

PREEMPHASIS Selection of the preemphasis of the audio signal.

50 uS Preemphasis 50 µs
75 uS Preemphasis 75 µs
OFF Preemphasis switched off
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:AUD:PRE OFF

PILOT STATE Switching on/off the pilot tone.

IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:PIL:STAT OFF

PILOT DEVIATION Input value of the frequency deviation of the pilot tone.
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:PIL 6720

PILOT PHASE Input value of the phase of the pilot tone. The zero point of the suppressed
38-kHz subcarrier of the STEREO multiplex signal serves as phase reference.
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:PIL:PHAS 0

ARI DEVIATION Input value of the deviation content of the unmodulated 57-kHz-ARI subcarrier
in the ARI operating mode.
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:ARI 4kHz

ARI IDENTIFICATION Selection between ARI broadcasting code (DK) and traffic area code (BK).
OFF The area code and the broadcasting code are switched off.
DK The broadcasting code is activated.
The AM modulation depth of the broadcasting code (125 Hz) on the
ARI subcarrier is m=0.3.
BK The area code is activated.
The AM modulation depth of the area code chosen under ARI BK is
m=0.6.
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:SIGN ARI; ARI:TYPE DK

ARI BK Selection of the standard traffic area codes.

A Traffic area code A, 23,7500 Hz
B Traffic area code B, 28,2738 Hz
C Traffic area code C, 34,9265 Hz
D Traffic area code D, 39,5833 Hz
E Traffic area code E, 45,6731 Hz
F Traffic area code F, 53,9773 Hz
IEC-bus command SOUR:STER:SIGN ARI; ARI:TYPE BK; ARI:BK A

[Link] VOR- / ILS-Test Signals

By means of option SM-B6, multifunction generator, test signals for avionics systems
• VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Range) ,
• ILS (Instrument Landing System) and
• MKR-BCN (Marker Beacon) can be generated.

1038.6002.02 2.64 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

[Link].1 VOR Modulation

Notes: - The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
VOR and AM
VOR and PM if SOURCE PM = LFGEN2
VOR and FM if SOURCE FM = LFGEN2
- In the AM, FM, PM and LF-output menu the message "VOR" is displayed under
LFGEN2 if the VOR modulation is activated.

Menu selection: MODULATION-VOR

FREQ 108. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL

- 47.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM MODE OFF NORM VAR SUBCARRIER SUBC+FM

LEVEL FM BEARING ANGLE 0.00 deg
MODULATION PM DIRECTION FROM TO
DIGITAL MOD PULSE VAR/REF FREQUENCY 30.0 Hz
LF OUTPUT STEREO VAR DEPTH 30.0 %
SWEEP VOR SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY 9.960 kHz
LIST ILS-GS SUBCARRIER DEPTH 30.0 %
MEM SEQ ILS-LOC REF DEVIATION 480 Hz
UTILITIES MKR-BCN VOR DEFAULT SETTING
HELP COM/ID STATE OFF ON
COM/ID FREQUENCY 1.020 kHz
COM/ID DEPTH 10.0 %

CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED

EXT AM [SENS. 1V/100%] OFF EXT1

Fig. 2-33 Menu MODULATION-VOR (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B6, multifunction
generator

MODE Selection of the VOR operating mode.

OFF VOR modulation is switched off.
In menus AM, FM, PM and LF-OUTPUT, the original setting is
displayed under LFGEN2, the message "VOR" is eliminated.
NORM VOR modulation is activated.
VAR Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 30-Hz signal
content of the VOR signal. The modulation depth of the 30-Hz
signal corresponds to the value set under VAR DEPTH.
SUBCARRIER Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the
unmodulated 9960-Hz FM carrier of the VOR signal. The
modulation depth corresponds to the value set under
SUBCARRIER DEPTH.
SUBC+FM Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the
frequency-modulated 9960-Hz FM carrier of the VOR signal.
The frequency deviation corresponds to the value set under
REF DEVIATION, the modulation depth to the value set under
SUBCARRIER DEPTH.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:STAT ON; MODE NORM

1038.6002.02 2.65 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

BEARING ANGLE Input value of the phase angle between the 30-Hz VAR signal and the 30-Hz
reference signal.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR 0deg

DIRECTION Selection of the reference position of the phase information.

FROM Selection of the beacon as a reference position. The angle set
under BEARING ANGLE corresponds to the angle between
the true north and the connection line between beacon and
airplane.
TO Selection of the airplane position as a reference position. The
angle set under BEARING ANGLE corresponds to the angle
between the true north and the connection line between
airplane and beacon.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:DIR FROM

VAR/REF Input value of the frequency of the VAR and the REF signal.
FREQUENCY IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:VAR:FREQ 30

VAR DEPTH Input value of the AM modulation depth of the 30-Hz VAR signal.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:VAR 30PCT

SUBCARRIER Input value of the frequency of the FM carrier.

FREQUENCY IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:SUBC 9960

SUBCARRIER DEPTH Input value of the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier.

IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:SUBC:DEPT 30PCT

REF DEVIATION Input value of the frequency deviation of the REF signal on the FM carrier.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:REF 480

VOR DEFAULT Call the VOR default setting.

SETTING The default setting corresponds to the setting represented in Fig. 2-33 except
for the MODE setting (=NORM). The selection of the CARRIER FREQ KNOB
STEP parameters is not changed by calling this function.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:PRES

COM/ID STATE Switching on/off an additional communication/identification signal (COM/ID

signal).
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:COM ON

COM/ID FREQUENCY Input value of the frequency of the COM/ID signals.

IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:COM:FREQ 1020

COM/ID DEPTH Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signals.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:COM:DEPT 10PCT

1038.6002.02 2.66 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

CARRIER FREQ Selection of the variation of the carrier frequency via the rotary knob.
KNOB STEP DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position.
DEFINED Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized VOR
transmitting frequencies (see table, values in MHz):
Note: If DEFINED is selected, the current RF frequency is automatically
switched over to the next VOR transmitting frequency according to the
table when switching on modulation VOR.

108.00 109.40 110.80 112.10 112.80 113.50 114.20 114.90 115.60 116.30 117.05 117.75

108.05 109.45 110.85 112.15 112.85 113.55 114.25 114.95 115.65 116.35 117.10 117.80

108.20 109.60 111.00 112.20 112.90 113.60 114.30 115.00 115.70 116.40 117.15 117.85

108.25 109.65 111.05 112.25 112.95 113.65 114.35 115.05 115.75 116.45 117.20 117.90

108.40 109.80 111.20 112.30 113.00 113.70 114.40 115.10 115.80 116.50 117.25 117.95

108.45 109.85 111.25 112.35 113.05 113.75 114.45 115.15 115.85 116.55 117.30

108.60 110.00 111.40 112.40 113.10 113.80 114.50 115.20 115.90 116.60 117.35

108.65 110.05 111.45 112.45 113.15 113.85 114.55 115.25 115.95 116.65 117.40

108.80 110.20 111.60 112.50 113.20 113.90 114.60 115.30 116.00 116.75 117.45

108.85 110.25 111.65 112.55 113.25 113.95 114.65 115.35 116.05 116.80 117.50

108.00 110.40 111.80 112.60 113.30 114.00 114.70 115.40 116.10 116.85 117.55

109.05 110.45 111.85 112.65 113.35 114.05 114.75 115.45 116.15 116.90 117.60

109.20 110.60 112.00 112.70 113.40 114.10 114.80 115.50 116.20 116.95 117.65

109.25 110.65 112.05 112.75 113.45 114.15 114.85 115.55 116.25 117.00 117.70

EXT AM [SENS. 1V/100%] Switching on/off an external modulation signal via socket EXT1.
OFF External AM input EXT1 switched off.
ON External AM input EXT1 activated.
The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent modulation
depth.
IEC-bus command SOUR:VOR:SOUR INT2,EXT
Note: As automatic level monitoring of the external modulation
signal is switched off in this operating mode, there can be
an overmodulation as a function of the level of the
external signal without a corresponding caution message
being generated.
In order to avoid an overmodulation, the peak value of
the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the
sum of the modulation depths of the remaining VOR
signal components.

1038.6002.02 2.67 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

[Link].2 ILS-Glide Slope Modulation (ILS-GS)

Notes: - The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
ILS-GS and AM, ILS-GS and PM if SOURCE PM = LFGEN2
ILS-GS and FM if SOURCE FM = LFGEN2
- In the AM, FM, PM and LF-output menu the message "ILS-GS" is displayed under
LFGEN2 if the ILS-GS modulation is activated.
- With setting CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP= DEFINED, a change to modulation
ILS-LOC automatically causes the RF frequency to be adapted to the localizer value
which is coupled to the glide-slope setting.

Menu selection: MODULATION-ILS-GS

FREQ 334.700 000 0 MHz LEVEL

- 50.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM MODE OFF NORM 90Hz 150Hz

LEVEL FM DDM 0.000 0
MODULATION PM DDM 0.00 µA
DIGITAL MOD PULSE DDM 0.0 dB
LF OUTPUT STEREO FLY UP DOWN
SWEEP VOR SUM OF DEPTH 80.0 %
LIST ILS-GS UP FREQUENCY 90.0 Hz
MEM SEQ ILS-LOC DOWN FREQUENCY 150.0 Hz
UTILITIES MKR-BCN UP/DOWN PHASE 0.0 deg
HELP ILS DEFAULT SETTING
COM/ID STATE OFF ON
COM/ID FREQUENCY 1.020 kHz
COM/ID DEPTH 10.0 %

DDM KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED

CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED
EXT AM [SENS. 1V/100%] OFF EXT1

Fig. 2-34 Menu MODULATION-ILS-GS (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B6, multifunction
generator

MODE Selection of the ILS-GS operating mode.

OFF ILS-GS modulation is switched off.
In menus AM, FM, PM and LF-OUTPUT, the original setting is
displayed under LFGEN2, the message "ILS-GS" is
eliminated.
NORM ILS-GS modulation is activated.
90 Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 90-Hz
signal content of the ILS-GS signal. The modulation depth of
the 90-Hz signal results from the settings of parameters SUM
OF DEPTH (SOD) and DDM according to:
AM(90 Hz) = 0,5 × (SOD + DDM × 100%)

1038.6002.02 2.68 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

150 Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 150-Hz

signal content of the ILS-GS signal. The modulation depth of
the 150-Hz signal results from the settings of parameters
SUM OF DEPTH (SOD) and DDM acc. to:
AM (150 Hz) = 0,5 × (SOD DDM × 100%)
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:STAT ON; TYPE GS; MODE
NORM

DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation. Input value of the difference in depth

of modulation between the 90-Hz and the 150-Hz tone of the ILS-GS
modulation signal. The DDM value is calculated to formula (parameter
UP/DOWN = DOWN):
DDM = [ AM(90 Hz) - AM(150 Hz) ] /100%
A variation of the DDM value automatically leads to a variation of the
value of the instrument current and the DDM value in dB.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:DDM 0

DDM Input value of the current of the ILS indicating instrument corresponding
to the DDM value. A variation of the value of the instrument current
automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value
in dB. The value of the instrument current is calculated according to:
DDM µ A = DDM × 857,1 µ A
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:DDM:CURR 0

DDM Input of the DDM value in dB. A variation of the value automatically
leads to a variation of the DDM value and the value of the instrument
current. The dB value is calculated according to:
DDM dB = 20 × LOG [(SOD+DDM×100%) / (SOD-DDM×100%)]
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:DDM:LOG 0

FLY Selection between ILS-GS operating modes UP and DOWN. A change

of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM value.
UP In operating mode UP, the 150-Hz modulation signal is
predominant, the DDM value is positive.
DOWN In operating mode DOWN, the 90-Hz modulation signal is
predominant, the DDM value is negative.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:DDM:DIR UP

SUM OF DEPTH Input value of the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of the 90-Hz
and 150-Hz ILS-GS signal contents. The RMS modulation depth of the
sum signal depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:SOD 80PCT

UP FREQ Input value of the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged at
the top.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:ULOB 90

1038.6002.02 2.69 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

DOWN FREQ Input value of the modulation freq. of the antenna lobe arranged at the
bottom.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LLOB 150
Note: A variation of one of the two modulation frequencies
causes an automatic adaptation of the other modulation
frequency in such a way that a frequency-response ratio of
3:5 or 5:3 is maintained.

UP/DOWN PHASE Input value of the phase between the modulation signals of the upper
and lower antenna lobe. The zero point of the 150-Hz signal serves as a
reference. The input is effected in degrees of the 150-Hz signal.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:PHAS 0deg

ILS DEFAULT SETTING Call the ILS-GS default setting. The default setting corresponds to the
setting represented in Fig. 2-34 except for the MODE setting (=NORM).
The selection of the CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP parameter is not
changed by calling this function.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:PRES

COM/ID STATE Switching on/off an additional communication/identification signal

(COM/ID-Signal).
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:COM ON

COM/ID FREQUENCY Switching on/off an additional communication/identification signal

(COM/ID-Signal).
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:COM:FREQ 1020

COM/ID DEPTH Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:COM:DEPT 10PCT

DDM KNOB STEP Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position.
DEFINED Variation between the predefined DDM values:
-0,4000
-0,1750 (Glide Sector)
-0,0910, 0,0450
0,0000 (Glide Path)
+0,0450, +0,0910
+0,1750 (Glide Sector)
+0,4000

CARRIER FREQ KNOB Variation between the predefined DDM values:

STEP DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor position..
DEFINED Variation in predefined steps according to the standardized
GLIDE-SLOPE transmitting frequencies (see table).
Note: If DEFINED is selected, the current RF frequency is
automatically switched over to the next GLIDE-SLOPE
transmitting frequency acc. to the table when switching on the
modulation.

1038.6002.02 2.70 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

LOC/GS (MHz) LOC/GS (MHz) LOC/GS (MHz) LOC/GS (MHz) LOC/GS (MHz) LOC/GS (MHz) LOC/GS (MHz)

108.10 / 108.70 / 109.30 / 109.90 / 110.50 / 111.10 / 111.70 / 333.50

334.70 330.50 332.00 333.80 329.60 331.70

108.15 / 108.75 /330.35 109.35 / 109.95 / 110.55 / 111.15 / 111.75 / 333.35

334.55 331.85 333.65 329.45 331.55

108.30 / 108.90 / 109.50 / 110.10 / 110.70 / 111.30 / 111.90 / 331.10

334.10 329.30 332.60 334.40 330.20 332.30

108.35 / 108.95 / 109.55 / 110.15 / 110.75 / 111.35 / 111.95 / 330.95

333.95 329.15 332.45 334.25 330.05 332.15

108.50 / 109.10 331.40 109.70 / 110.30 / 110.90 / 111.50 /

329.90 333.20 335.00 330.80 332.90

108.55 / 109.15 / 109.75 / 110.35 / 110.95 / 111.55 /

329.75 331.25 333.05 334.85 330.65 332.75

EXT AM [SENS. 1V/100%] Switching on/off an external modulation signal via socket EXT1.
OFF External AM input EXT1 switched off.
ON External AM input EXT1 activated.
The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent of modulation
depth.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:SOUR INT2, EXT

Note: As the automatic level monitoring of the external

modulation signal is switched off in this operating mode,
there can be an overmodulation as a function of the level
of the external signal without a corresponding caution
message being generated.
In order to avoid an overmodulation, the peak value of
the external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the
sum of the modulation depths of the remaining ILS signal
components.

1038.6002.02 2.71 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

[Link].3 ILS-Localizer Modulation (ILS-LOC)

Notes: - The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
ILS-LOC and AM
ILS-LOC and PM if SOURCE PM = LFGEN2
ILS-LOC and FM if SOURCE FM = LFGEN2
- In the AM, FM, PM and LF-output menu the note "ILS-LOC" is displayed under LFGEN2
if the ILS-LOC modulation is activated.
- With setting CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP= DEFINED, a change to modulation
ILS-GS automatically causes the RF frequency to be adapted to the glide-slope value
which is coupled to the localizer setting.

Menu selection: MODULATION ILS - LOC

FREQ 108. 100 000 0 MHz LEVEL

- 47.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM MODE OFF NORM 90Hz 150Hz

LEVEL FM DDM 0.000 0
MODULATION PM DDM 0.000 µA
DIGITAL MOD PULSE DDM 0.0 dB
LF OUTPUT STEREO FLY LEFT RIGHT
SWEEP VOR SUM OF DEPTH 40.0 %
LIST ILS-GS FREQUENCY 90.0 Hz
MEM SEQ ILS-LOC LEFT FREQUENCY 150.0 Hz
UTILITIES MKR-BCN LEFT/RIGHT PHASE 0.0 deg
HELP ILS DEFAULT SETTING
COM/ID STATE OFF ON
COM/ID FREQUENCY 1.020 kHz
COM/ID DEPTH 10.0 %

DDM KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED

CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED
EXT AM [SENS. 1V/100%] OFF EXT1

Fig. 2-35 Menu MODULATION-ILS-LOC (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B6, multifunction
generator

MODE Selection of the ILS-LOC operating mode.

OFF ILS-LOC modulation is switched off.
In menus AM, FM, PM and LF-OUTPUT the original setting
is displayed under LFGEN2, the note "ILS-LOC" is
eliminated.
NORM ILS-LOC modulation is activated.
90 Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 90-Hz
signal content of the ILS-LOC signal. The modulation depth
of the 90-Hz signal is calculated from the settings of
parameters SUM OF DEPTH (SOD) and DDM according
to:
AM (90 Hz) = 0,5 × (SOD + DDM × 100%)

1038.6002.02 2.72 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

150 Hz Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the 150-Hz

signal content of the ILS-LOC signal. The modulation depth
of the 150-Hz signal results from the settings of parameters
SUM OF DEPTH (SOD) and DDM according to:
AM (150 Hz) = 0,5 × (SOD DDM × 100%)

IEC-bus command
SOUR:ILS:STAT ON; TYPE LOC; LOC:MODE NORM

DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation.

Input value of the difference in depth of modulation between the
90-Hz and the 150-Hz tone of the ILS-LOC modulation signal. The
DDM value is calculated according to the following formula
(parameter LEFT/RIGHT = RIGHT):
DDM = [ AM(90 Hz) AM (150 Hz) ] / 100%
If LEFT of parameter LEFT/RIGHT is selected, negative DDM values
result with otherwise same setting. A variation of the DDM value
automatically leads to a variation of the DDM value in dB and the
value of the instrument current.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:DDM 0

DDM Input value of the current of the ILS indicating instrument

corresponding to the DDM value.
A variation of the value of the instrument current automatically leads
to a variation of the DDM value and the DDM value in dB. The value
of the instrument current is calculated according to:
DDM µ A = DDM × 857,1 µ A
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:DDM:CURR 0

DDM Input of the DDM value in dB.

A variation of the DDM value in dB automatically leads to a variation
of the value of the instrument current and of the DDM value. The dB
value is calculated according to:
DDM dB = 20 × LOG [(SOD+DDM×100%) / (SOD-DDM×100%)]
IEC-bus command SOUR:LOC:DDM:LOG 0

FLY Selection between ILS-LOC operating modes LEFT and RIGHT. A

change of the setting automatically changes the sign of the DDM
value.
LEFT In the LEFT operating mode, the content of the 150-Hz
modulation signal is predominant. The DDM value is
negative.
RIGHT In the RIGHT operating mode, the content of the 90-Hz
modulation signal is predominant. The DDM value is
positive..
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:DDM:DIR LEFT

SUM OF DEPTH Input value of the arithmetic sum of the modulation depths of 90-Hz
and 150-Hz ILS-LOC signal contents. The RMS modulation depth
depends on the phase setting of both modulation tones.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:SOD 40PCT

1038.6002.02 2.73 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

LEFT FREQUENCY Input value of the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged
at the left viewed from the plane.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:LLOB 90

RIGHT FREQUENCY Input value of the modulation frequency of the antenna lobe arranged
at the right viewed from the plane.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:RLOB 150
Note: A variation of one of the two modulation frequencies causes
an automatic adaptation of the other modulation frequency in
such a way that a frequency-response ratio of 3:5 or 5:3 is
maintained.

LEFT/RIGHT PHASE Input value of the phase between the modulation signals of the
left-hand and right-hand antenna lobe. The zero point of the 150-Hz
signal serves as a reference.
The input is effected in degrees of the 150-Hz signal.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:PHAS 0deg

ILS DEFAULT SETTING Calling the ILS-LOC default setting.

The default setting corresponds to the setting represented in Fig.
2-35 except for the MODE setting (=NORM). The selection of the
CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP parameter is not changed by calling
this function.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:PRES

COM/ID STATE Switching on/off an additional communication/identification signal

(COM/ID signal).
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:COM ON

COM/ID FREQUENCY Switching on/off an additional communication/identification signal

(COM/ID signal).
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:COM:FREQ 1020

COM/ID DEPTH Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:LOC:COM:DEPT 10PCT

DDM KNOB STEP Selection of the variation of the DDM value via the rotary knob.
DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor
position.
DEFINED Variation between the predefined DDM values:
-0,2000,
-0.1550 (Course Sector)
-0,0930, -0,0460
0,0000 (Course Line)
+0,0460, +0,0930
+0,1550 (Course Sector)
+0,2000

1038.6002.02 2.74 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP Selection of the variation of the carrier frequency via the rotary knob.
The selection is effective on both ILS modulations.
DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor
position.
DEFINED Decimal variation according to the current cursor
position.
Note: If DEFINED is selected, the current RF frequency is
automatically switched over to the next LOCALIZER
transmitter frequency according to the table when switching
on the modulation.

EXT AM [SENS. 1 V/100%] Switching on/off an external modulation signal via socket EXT1.
OFF External AM input EXT1 switched off.
ON External AM input EXT1 activated.
The sensitivity is 10 mV per percent modulation depth.
IEC-bus command SOUR:ILS:SOUR INT2, EXT

Note: As automatic level monitoring of the external modulation

signal is switched off in this operating mode, there can be an
overmodulation as a function of the level of the external
signal without a corresponding caution message being
generated.
In order to avoid an overmodulation, the peak value of the
external signal is to be delimited corresponding to the sum of
the modulation depths of the remaining ILS signal
components.

1038.6002.02 2.75 E-13

Analog Modulations SME

[Link].4 Marker Beacon

Notes: - The following modulations cannot be set simultaneously and deactivate one another:
MKR-BCN and AM, MKR-BCN and PM if SOURCE PM = LFGEN2
MKR-BCN and FM if SOURCE FM = LFGEN2
- In the AM, FM, PM and LF-output menu the note "MKR-BCN" is displayed under
LFGEN2 if the MKR-BNC modulation is activated.

Menu selection: MODULATION-MKR-BCN

FREQ 75. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 47.0 dBm

FREQUENCY AM MARKER BEACON STATE OFF ON

LEVEL FM
MODULATION PM MARKER FREQ 400 1300 3000 Hz
DIGITAL MOD PULSE MARKER DEPTH 95.0 %
LF OUTPUT STEREO
SWEEP VOR COM/ID STATE OFF ON
LIST ILS-GS COM/ID FREQUENCY 1020.0 Hz
MEM SEQ ILS-LOC COM/ID DEPTH 5.0 %
UTILITIES MKR-BCN
HELP CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP DECIMAL DEFINED

Fig. 2-36 Menu MODULATION-MKR-BCN (preset settings), fitted with option SM-B6, multifunction
generator.

MARKER BEACON STATE Switching on and off the marker-beacon signal.

IEC-bus command SOUR:MBE:STAT ON

MARKER FREQ Switching on and off the marker-beacon signal.

IEC-bus command SOUR:MBE:FREQ 400

MARKER DEPTH Input value of the modulation depth of the marker-beacon signals.
IEC-bus command SOUR:MBE:DEPT 95PCT

COM/ID STATE Switching on and off an additional communication/identification

signal (COM/ID signal).
IEC-bus command SOUR:MBE:COM ON

COM/ID FREQUENCY Input value of the frequency of the COM/ID signal.

IEC-bus command SOUR:MBE:COM:FREQ 1020

COM/ID DEPTH Input value of the AM modulation depth of the COM/ID signal.
IEC-bus command SOUR:MBE:COM:DEPT 5PCT

1038.6002.02 2.76 E-13

SME Analog Modulations

CARRIER FREQ KNOB STEP Selection of the variation of the carrier frequency via the rotary
knob.
DECIMAL Decimal variation according to the current cursor
position.
DEFINED Variation in predefined steps according to the
standardized marker beacon transmitter frequencies
(s. table, val. in MHz).

Note: If DEFINED is selected, the current RF frequency is

automatically switched over to the next marker beacon
transmitter frequency when switching on the modulation.

74.600 75.675 74.750 74.825 74.900 74.975 75.050 75.125 75.200 75.275 75.350

74.625 74.700 74.775 74.850 74.925 75.000 75.075 75.150 75.225 75.300 75.375

74.650 74.725 74.800 74.875 74.950 75.025 75.100 75.175 75.250 75.325 75.400

1038.6002.02 2.77 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

2.6.3 Digital Modulation

The SME offers the following digital modulations (option SME-B11, DM coder):

• GMSK for GSM/PCN (Global System for Mobile Communications/

Personal Communication System)
CDPD (Cellular Digital Packet Data)
MC9 (French Communication network)
MOBITEX (Mobile data system)
DSRR (Digital Short Range Radio)
MD24 to MD192 (Standards according to ETS specifications)

• GFSK for DECT (Digital European Cordless Telephony)

CT2 (Cordless Telephony)
CT3 (Cordless Telephony)

• QPSK for NADC (North American Digital Cellular)

PDC (Pacific Digital Cellular)
TFTS (Terrestrial Flight Telephone System)
APCO25 (Association of Public Safety Communications Officers,
Project 25)
TETRA (Trans European Trunked Radio)
MSAT (Mobile Satellite)
INMARSAT-M (International Maritime Satellite)

• FSK for POCSAG (Post Office Code Standardization Advisory Group)

CITYRUF (German pager system)
FLEX (Flexible High Speed Paging System)

• 4FSK for ERMES (European Radio Message System)

APCO25 (Association of Public Safety Communications Officers,
Project 25)
FLEX (Flexible High Speed Paging System)
MODACOM (Mobile Data Communication)

• FFSK for POCSAG (Post Office Code Standardization Advisory Group)

Internal or external data sources can be used. A PRBS generator with selectable sequence lengths and
a data generator (RAM) are available as an internal data source. Option SME-B12, memory extension,
increases the memory depth to 8 MBit.
Option SME-B12, memory extension, can be used to set radiocommunication service ERMES directly,
cf. Section "Radiocommunication Service ERMES".
Option SME-B41, FLEX, together with option SME-B12, memory extension, can be used to generate
call signals complying to the FLEX standard, cf. Section "Radiocommunication Service FLEX".
Option SME-B42, POCSAG, together with option SME-B12, memory extension, can be used to
generate call signals complying to the POCSAG standard, cf. Section "Radiocommunication Service
POCSAG".
Option SME-B43, REFLEX, together with option SME-B12, memory extension, can be used to generate
call signals complying to the ReFLEX standard. , cf. Section "Radiocommunication Service REFLEX".

1038.6002.02 2.78 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] Data Generator

The data generator contains a memory for the data (DATA), for level switchover (LEV ATT) and for the
BURST output (BURST) each. The data generator can be programmed via the IEC bus or manually
using the list editor (cf. Fig. 2-37). The maximal memory capacity is 8192 bits. The data generator can
also be programmed for shorter sequences. The data of all three memories are combined in a list. Up
to 10 different lists can be stored in the instrument.
Option SME-B12, DM memory extension, increases the memory depth to 8 MBit (cf. Section [Link],
DM memory extension, option SME-B12).

The DATA memory contains the modulation data bits.

The LEV-ATT memory contains the bits to control the level reduction. A logic "0" means the level
indicated in the header field. A logic "1" means a level reduction by the value indicated in the menu
under LEVEL ATTENUATION. For a constant carrier, either the bits of the LEV-ATT list or the
parameter LEVEL ATTENUATION must be set to 0.

The BURST memory contains the bits to control the BURST output. A logic "1" means level HIGH. A
logic "0" means level LOW.

What is to be observed is that the modulation generation is subject to a delay that must not be
neglected. In order to keep the level reduction or the BURST signal synchronous with the modulation,
these memories are to be programmed offset by the delay. The delays of the different modulations are
listed in table 2-5, radio network data (cf. Fig. 2-38, signal example with respect to DM delay as well).

Sockets DATA, CLOCK and BURST are switched to be an output if the data generator is switched on,
and the bit sequences can be tapped there. The BURST output can be used to control the pulse
modulator or to trigger the LIST mode, if there is an external cable connection from the PULSE input or
TRIGGER input at the rear of the unit.

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

GMSK

FREQUENCY GMSK SELECT LIST... CURRENT:DLIST1

LEVEL GFSK FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW
MODULATION QPSK -NR- FREE 6942- LEN 1250 DATA LEV ATT BURST
DIGITAL MOD FSK 0001 00100011 11100000 00011111
LF OUTPUT 4FSK 0009 01110110 00000000 11111111
SWEEP FFSK 0017 00110101 00000000 11111111
LIST 0025 11010010 00000000 11111111
MEM SEQ 0033 11010010 00000000 11111111
UTILITIES 0041 11010010 00000000 11111111
HELP 0049 11010010 00000000 11111111
0057 11010010 00000000 11111111

Fig. 2-37 Menu DIGITAL MOD-GMSK, edit page

1038.6002.02 2.79 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

IEC-bus commands for programming the data generator::

:DM:DATA:SEL "DLIST1"
:DM:DATA:DATA 0,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,1,1,1,0,1,1,0
:DM:DATA:ATT 1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
:DM:DATA:BURS 0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1

bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6

DATA

LEV-ATT
bit 1 bit 2 bit 3

bit 4 bit 5 bit 6

delay of level approx. 1 µs
approx. 2µs
control

RF bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit n

DM delay
(cf. table 2-5)

Fig. 2-38 Signal example with respect to DM delay and delays of level control

[Link] PRBS Generator

The PRBS generator (Pseudo Random Binary Sequence) supplies pseudo random bit sequences with
sequence lengths of

29-1 = 511 ( 9 bit),

215-1 = 32767 (15 bit),
220-1 = 1048575 (20 bit),
221-1 = 2097151 (21 bit) or
223-1 = 8388607 (23 bit)

If the PRBS generator is switched on, the PRBS bit sequence replaces the data bit sequence of the
data generator. The programming of the level reduction and the BURST output remains valid even if
the PRBS generator is switched on. For a constant carrier, either the bits of the LEV-ATT list or
parameter LEVEL ATTENUATION must hence be set to 0.

Sockets DATA, CLOCK and BURST are switched to be an output if the PRBS generator is switched on,
and the bit sequences can be tapped there.

1038.6002.02 2.80 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] DM Memory Extension, Option SME-B12

Option SME-B12, memory extension, increases the memory depth of the data generator. The memory
depth depends on the selection of the memory space allocation (MEM MODE, cf. submenu CONFIG
XMEM...). If the entire memory area is allocated to the DATA memory (MEM MODE 8M*1), the memory
depth is increased to 8 MBit. If the memory area is divided up into the three memories DATA, LEV-ATT
and BURST (MEM MODE 1M*3), however, the memory depth is decreased to 1 MBit.

In the DM menus, the memory extension can be activated in submenu SELECT LIST... by selecting list
"XMEM".

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30. 0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE CREATE NEW LIST

LEVEL GFSK PRBS DLIST1 15
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... DLIST2 325
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE DLIST3 500
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION XMEM 8388607
SWEEP FFSK MODE
LIST SELECT STANDARD...
MEM SEQ FILTER / BIT RATE...
UTILITIES DIFF ENCODER
HELP MOD POLARITY
SELECT LIST...
DELETE LIST...
CONFIG XMEM...

Fig. 2-39 Selection of the memory extension in submenu SELECT LIST...

Compared to all other lists, list "XMEM" is special for the following reasons:

• It cannot be processed using the list editor. The data are either loaded externally via the DATA
socket (RECORD DATA→) or entered via the IEC bus or the RS-232 interface.
• List "XMEM" cannot be deleted. The previous data of a certain memory area are overwritten when
new data are read into this memory area.
• List "XMEM" can be divided up into several sublists (memory areas). The memory areas are defined
by the start address and the length of the data sequence. Their contents is permanently stored.
For modulation types QPSK and 4FSK it should be noted that a symbol is coded with two bits, the X bit
and the Y bit. If data lists for these modulations are to be stored in the memory extension, three
operating modes can be selected, each storing the X and Y bits in the "XMEM" list in a different way.
Switchover between the different modes is not possible without a change of the XMEM data:

1038.6002.02 2.81 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

1. CLOCK MODE BIT In this mode, X and Y bits are stored serially in the "XMEM" list and
MEM MODE 8M*1 are transmitted via the DATA line. The X bit can be found at the
start address.

2. CLOCK MODE BIT In this mode, the X and Y bits are also stored serially in the
MEM MODE 1M*3 "XMEM" list and are transmitted via the DATA line. The X bit can
be found at the start address. The LEV-ATT (level reduction) and
the BURST channel can be used.

3. CLOCK MODE SYMB (DM Coder VAR.4/REV.1 or higher)

MEM MODE 1M*3 In this mode, X and Y bits are stored in parallel in the "XMEM" list
and are transmitted in parallel via the DATA or BURST line. The
LEV-ATT channel can be used for level reduction.

During the serial operating modes 1 and 2 (bit clock) the DM coder and the memory extension are
synchronized with regard to the X and Y bit, if one of the settings (e.g. BITRATE or LENGTH) is
changed. As this synchronization is effected via the trigger input of the memory extension (EXT TRIG),
it is not possible to externally trigger the memory extension. The external trigger mode has to be
switched off (EXT TRIGGER = OFF). If EXT TRIGGER is ON an error message is displayed.

In the parallel operating mode 3 (symbol clock) the synchronization is not required and the memory
extension can be externally started via connector TRIGGER (EXT TRIGGER = ON is allowed).

By selecting list "XMEM", list editor line FUNCTION is replaced by submenu CONFIG XMEM...which
contains the parameters of the memory extension.

Menu selection DIGITAL MOD - „DM“ - CONFIG XMEM...

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30. 0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE START ADDRESS 1

LEVEL GFSK PRBS LENGTH 3
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... MEM MODE 8M*1 1M*3
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE EXT TRIGGER ON OFF
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION EXT TRIGGER SLOPE POS NEG
SWEEP FFSK MODE
LIST SELECT STANDARD...
MEM SEQ FILTER / BIT RATE... RECORD DATA
UTILITIES DIFF ENCODER ABORT RECORDING
HELP MOD POLARITY
SELECT LIST...
DELETE LIST...
CONFIG XMEM. ..

Fig. 2-40 Submenu DIGITAL MOD-GMSK-CONFIG XMEM...

1038.6002.02 2.82 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

START ADDRESS Input value of the start address

Input range in mode 8M*1: 1 to 8388478
Input range in mode 1M*3: 1 to 1048558.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:STAR 1

LENGTH LENGTH Input value of the sequence length.

For a start address = 1 the following applies:
Input range in mode 8M*1: 3 to 8388480
Input range in mode 1M*3: 3 to 1048560.
On increasing the start address, the maximum sequence length is reduced
correspondingly. If the maximum value is exceeded, an error message is
displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:LENG 3

MEM MODE MEM MODE Selection of the allocation of the memory area.
8M*1 The 8-MBit memory area can only be used for data.
1M*3 The memory area is divided up into DATA, LEV ATT and BURST.
The memory depth is 1 MBit.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:MODE DATA

EXT TRIGGER Switching on/off the external trigger facility.

ON The run of the list is triggered by the external trigger signal. Each
trigger signal starts a new run beginning with the start address.
OFF The external trigger mode is switched off.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:TRIG ON

EXT TRIGGER Selection of the active edge of the external trigger signal.
SLOPE POS The sequence starts with the positive edge of the trigger signal.
NEG The sequence starts with the negative edge of the trigger signal
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:TRIG:SLOP POS

RECORD DATA Ð Starts the recording of data from an external source via the DATA input (cf.
Section "Recording a Data Sequence from an External Source (External
Loading)"). Recording can be effected by means of both an external or internal
clock. The clock can be selected in the CLOCK submenu (cf. Section "QPSK
modulation").
During the time of recording, the note "RECORDING" is displayed on the right
side of the line. When recording has been finished, the note "DONE" is
displayed for a short time.
Note: Recording is only possible if SOURCE EXT is activated.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:REC

ABORT Aborts a running recording. The note "ABORTED" is displayed at the right
RECORDING Ð margin of the line for a short time. The data recorded up to the point of time of
the abortion remain in the memory.
IEC-bus command :ABORt:XMEM

1038.6002.02 2.83 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

[Link].1 Recording a Data Sequence from an External Source

(External Loading)
Call DM menu À Mark one of the digital modulations using the menu cursor and press
key [SELECT].

Select external À Mark parameter SOURCE using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].
À Mark selection EXT using the menu cursor and press key [SELECT].
Set the bit rate À Mark submenu SELECT STANDARD... using the menu cursor and
press key [SELECT].
À Mark one of the standards using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].
or
À Mark parameter BITRATE using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].
À Enter the bit rate using rotary knob or numeric key and press key [1 x
ENTER].
Memory extension À Mark submenu SELECT LIST... using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].
À Mark list XMEM using the menu cursor and press key [SELECT].
Define memory area Note: In recording, the memory area is overwritten from the start area
and memory and memory address to the stop address (START ADDRESS +
LENGTH –1)
Up to 7 bits below the start address and up to 15 bits above the
stop address (START ADDRESS + LENGTH –1) are additionally
overwritten with a random value. The additional bits must be
considered if a new recording is to be effected between
recordings already stored.
À Mark submenu CONFIG XMEM... using the menu cursor and press
key [SELECT].
À Mark parameter START ADDRESS using the menu cursor and press
key [SELECT].
À Enter the start address using rotary knob or numeric keys and press
key [1 x ENTER].
À Enter the start address using rotary knob or numeric keys and press
key [1 x ENTER].
À Mark parameter LENGTH using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].
À Enter the sequence length using rotary knob or numeric keys and
press key [1 x ENTER].
À Mark parameter MODE using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].
À Mark selection 8M*1 using the menu cursor and press key [SELECT].

1038.6002.02 2.84 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

Select external clock À Mark submenu CLOCK... using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].
À Mark parameter CLOCK SOURCE using the menu cursor and press
key [SELECT].
À Mark selection COUPLED using the menu cursor and press key
[SELECT].

Connect external À Connect the data source to input socket DATA of the SME.
À Connect the clock source to input socket CLOCK of the SME.

Recording À Mark action RECORD DATA Ð to be executed using the menu

cursor and press key [SELECT].
If parameter CLOCK EDGE is set on POS, the data with the positive
clock edge is read in.

The data sequence recorded can be activated as an internal source by switching over parameter
SOURCE from EXT to DATA in the DM menu after the recording.

The above example describes the recording of a DATA sequence in the 8M*1 mode (MEM MODE
8M*1). For recording in the 1M*3 mode the same settings can be used except for selection 1M*3 for
MEM MODE. It should be noted that the setting range for the start address and the sequence length is
reduced. No bits will be overwritten below the start address and one bit overwritten above the stop
address.

In the 1M*3 mode, the LEV-ATT channel can be used for level reduction. During recording, this signal
then has to be fed into the BURST connector and is stored on the LEV-ATT and BURST channel
(same contents on the two channels).

1038.6002.02 2.85 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

[Link] External Data Sources

Inputs DATA, CLOCK and BURST are available for the digital modulation with external data signals.
The polarity of the modulation and the active clock edge can be selected in the menu. In the case of
4FSK and QPSK modulation, the CLOCK input can be switched over between bit clock and symbol
clock. The BURST input controls the level reduction indicated in the menu under LEVEL
ATTENUATION in the case of external modulation. What is to be considered is that the delays of
modulation processing and level control are different. The delays of the different modulations are listed
in table 2-5, radio network data. The delays of the level control are 2 µs in switch-on and approx. 1 µs in
switch-off (cf. Fig. 2-38 as well).

Table 2-5 Radio network data

Network Modulation Filter Bit rate Delay (INT) Delay (EXT)

GSM / PCN GMSK Gauss 0.3 270.833 kb/s 3.8 bit 2.8 bit
CDPD GMSK Gauss 0.5 19.2 kb/s 3.8 bit 2.8 bit
MC9 GMSK Gauss 0.25 8 kb/s 3.8 bit 2.8 bit
DSRR GMSK Gauss 0.5 4 / 16 kb/s 3.8 bit 2.8 bit
MD24...MD192 GMSK Gauss 0.3 / 0.5 2.4. to 19.2 kb/s 3.8 bit 2.8 bit
MOBITEX GMSK Gauss 0.3 8 kb/s 3.8 bit 2.8 bit
DECT GFSK Gauss 0.5 1152 kb/s 4.4 bit 3.4 bit
CT2 GFSK Gauss 0.5 72 kb/s 4.4 bit 3.4 bit
CT3 GFSK Gauss 0.5 640 kb/s 4.4 bit 3.4 bit
NADC π/4 DQPSK √cos 0.35 48.6 kb/s 12 bit 12 bit

PDC π/4 DQPSK √cos 0.5 42 kb/s 12 bit 12 bit

TFTS π/4 DQPSK √cos 0.4 44.2 kb/s 12 bit 12 bit

APCO25 π/4 DQPSK cos 0.2 9.6 kb/s 12 bit 12 bit

TETRA π/4 DQPSK √cos 0.35 36 kb/s 12 bit 12 bit

MSAT QPSK √cos 0.6 6.75 kb/s 12 bit 12 bit

INMARSAT-M OQPSK √cos 0.6 8 kb/s 12 bit 12 bit

ERMES 4FSK Bessel 3.9 kHz 6.25 kb/s 3.3 bit 3.3 bit
APCO25 4FSK cos 0.2 9.6 kb/s 9.5 bit 9.5 bit
FLEX 4FSK Bessel 3.9 kHz 3.2 / 6.4 kb/s 3.3 bit 3.3 bit
MODACOM 4FSK √cos 0.2 9.6 kb/s 9.5 bit 9.5 bit

CITYRUF FSK Gauss 2.73 512/1200/2400 b/s 3.6 bit 2.6 bit
POCSAG FSK Gauss 2.73 512/1200/2400 b/s 3.6 bit 2.6 bit
FLEX FSK Bessel 3.9 kHz 1.6/3.2 kb/s 1.5 bit 0.5 bit
POCSAG FFSK AF 1200/1800 1200 b/s 2.0 bit 1.0 bit

1038.6002.02 2.86 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] GMSK Modulation

Menu DIGITAL MOD-GMSK offers access to settings for GMSK modulation.

Menu selection: DIGITAL MOD - GMSK

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE OFF EXT PRBS DATA

LEVEL GFSK PRBS 9 15 20 21 23 bit
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... POS / COUPLED
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX GSM-SLOPE
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION 0.0 dB
SWEEP FFSK MODE AUTO SINGLE
LIST SELECT STANDARD... CURRENT: GSM/PCN
MEM SEQ FILTER / BIT RATE... B*T 0.3 / 270.833 kbps
UTILITIES DIFF ENCODER OFF ON
HELP MOD POLARITY NORM INV
SELECT LIST... CURRENT: DLIST1
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEV

Fig. 2-41 Menu DIGITAL-MOD-GMSK (preset setting), fitted with option SME-B11, DM coder

SOURCE Selection of the modulation source for GMSK.

OFF GMSK is switched off
EXT GMSK with external data signals
PRBS GMSK with pseudo random binary sequence
DATA GMSK with internally stored data sequence
IEC-bus command:SOUR:DM:TYPE:GMSK; SOUR EXT; STAT ON

PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:PRBS 9

CLOCK... Opens a window to set the clock parameters. The current settings are
displayed (cf. Section "QPSK modulation").

LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction
OFF The level reduction is switched off.
NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered
in LEVEL ATTENUATION. The linear range extends
to an attenuation of approx. 30 dB.
MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of
>80dB.
GSM SLOPE The rise and fall time of the level reduction correspond
to GSM power ramping
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV:MODE NORM
:SOUR:DM:GMSK:GSL ON

1038.6002.02 2.87 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of the level reduction. The level reduction is internally
controlled by the LEV-ATT bits in the data list or externally via
connector BURST. A logic "1" in the data list causes a level reduction.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV 0dB
MODE Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator.
AUTO The data are always repeated.
SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been
started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE➤
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO
SELECT STANDARD... Opens a window to select one of the standard GMSK modulations
(see Table 2-5). By selecting a standard, the parameters indented
below the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard. If
the setting of a parameter is different from the standard, SELECT
STANDARD... CURRENT:USER is displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:GMSK:STAN GSM
BITRATE /FILTER ... Selection of filtering BxT and bitrate. The following is to choose from:
bitrate = 2.4 kb/s / B×T=0.3; 0.5 bitrate = 20.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5
bitrate=2.5 kb/s / B×T=0.5 bitrate = 24.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5
bitrate = 3.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5 bitrate = 28.8 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5
bitrate = 3.6 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ;0.5 bitrate = 32.0 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5
bitrate = 4.0 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5 bitrate = 38.4 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5
bitrate = 4.8 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5 bitrate = 40.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5
bitrate = 5.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5 bitrate = 48.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5
bitrate = 6.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5 bitrate = 64.0 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5
bitrate = 7.2 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ;0.5 bitrate=67.708kb/s/B×T=0.2;0.3;0.5
bitrate = 8 kb/s / B×T=0.25 ; 0.3 ;0.5 bitrate = 76.8 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5
bitrate = 9.6 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5 bitrate = 80.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5
bitrate = 10 kb/s / B×T=0.5 bitrate = 160 kb/s / B×T=0.5
bitrate = 12.0 kb/s / B×T=0.5 bitrate=70.833kb/s/B×T=0.2;0.3;0.5
bitrate = 14.4 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5 bitrate = 512 kb/s / B×T=0.5
bitrate = 16.0 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5 bitrate = 1000 kb/s B×T=0.4
bitrate=19.2 kb/s / B×T=0.3 ; 0.5
The current selection is displayed.
IEC-bus commands :SOUR:DM:GMSK:FILT 0.3; BRAT
8kb/s

DIFF ENCODER Switching on/off the GSM difference coding.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:GMSK:DCOD ON

MOD POLARITY Selection of the polarity of the modulation excursion.

NORM Polarity of the modulation as specified according to GSM.
INV Polarity of the modulation is inverted.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:GMSK:POL NORM

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List
Editor).

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

FUNCTION Selection of the editor function for processing the lists (cf. Section
2.2.4, List Editor).

1038.6002.02 2.88 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] GFSK Modulation

Menu DIGITAL MOD - GFSK offers access to settings for GFSK modulation.

Menu selection: DIGITAL MOD - GFSK

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE OFF EXT PRBS DATA

LEVEL GFSK PRBS 9 15 20 21 23 Bit
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... POS / COUPLED
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX DECT-SLOPE
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION 0.0 dB
SWEEP FFSK MODE AUTO SINGLE
LIST SELECT STANDARD... CURRENT: DECT
MEM SEQ BIT RATE... 1.152 Mbps
UTILITIES FILTER B*T/DEVIATION... B*T=0.5/DEV=288 kHz
HELP MOD POLARITY NORM INV
SELECT LIST... CURRENT: DLIST2
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEV
CONFIG XMEM...

Fig. 2-42 Menu DIGITAL MOD-GFSK (preset setting), fitted with option SME-B11, DM coder

SOURCE Selection of the modulation source for GFSK.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:TYPE GFSK; SOUR EXT; STAT ON

PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:PRBS 9

CLOCK ... Opens a window to set the clock parameters. The current settings are
displayed (cf. Section "QPSK modulation").

LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction
OFF The level reduction is switched off.
NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in
LEVEL ATTENUATION. The linear range extends to an
attenuation of approx. 30 dB.
MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of
>80dB.
DECT-SLOPE
The rise and fall time of the level reduction are filtered.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV:MODE NORM

LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of the level reduction. The level reduction is internally
controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via
connector BURST. A logic "1" in the data list causes a level reduction.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV 0dB

1038.6002.02 2.89 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

MODE Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator.

AUTO The data are always repeated.
SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been
started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE➤
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO

SELECT STANDARD... Opens a window to select one of the standard GFSK modulations
(see Table 2-5). By selecting a standard, the parameters indented
below the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard. If
the setting of a parameter is different from the standard, SELECT
STANDARD... CURRENT:USER is displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:GFSK:STAN DECT

BIT RATE Input value of the bit rate for the selected standard.
The specified ranges are 10...585 kb/s and 640 ...1170 kb/s.
With settings B×T=0.5 / DEV=14.0 kHz and DEV=25.2 kHz the
specified range is 0.05 to 90 kb/s.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:GFSK:BRAT 1152 kb/s

FILTER / DEVIATION Opens a window to select different settings with filtering BxT and with
the deviation. The following is to choose from:
B×T=0.5 / DEV=14.0 kHz B×T=0.7 / DEV= 14.4 kHz
B×T=0.5 / DEV=18.0 kHz B×T=0.5 / DEV= 20.0 kHz
B×T=0.4 / DEV= 25.2 kHz B×T=0.5 / DEV=25.2 kHz
B×T=0.5 / DEV=160 kHz B×T=0.5 / DEV=180 kHz
B×T=0.5 / DEV=202 kHz B×T=0.5 / DEV=259 kHz
B×T=0.4 / DEV=288 kHz B×T=0.5 / DEV=288 kHz
B×T=0.6 / DEV=288 kHz B×T=0.5 / DEV=317 kHz
B×T=0.5 / DEV=403 kHz
The values currently set are displayed.

Note: In the RF range from 130 to 187 MHz, deviations >200 kHz are
not possible.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:GFSK:FILT 0.5; DEV 288kHz

MOD POLARITY Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation.

NORM Logic "1" generates a positive deviation.
INV Logic "1" generates a negative deviation.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:GFSK:POL NORM

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List
Editor).

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

FUNCTION Selection of the editor function to process the selected list (cf. Section
2.2.4, List Editor).

1038.6002.02 2.90 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] QPSK Modulation

Menu DIGITAL MOD - QPSK offers access to settings for QPSK modulation setting range of the bit
rate is 1.00 to 24.3 kbps and 27.0 to 48.6 kbps. In range 1.00 to 24.3 kbps the nonharmonic
suppression is reduced by aliasing products. The spurious products occur at the frequency spacing =
15 × bit rate. The spurious level is shown in the diagram.

Spurios products [dBc]

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80
0 10 20 30 40 50
Bit rate [kps]

Menu selection DIGITAL MOD - QPSK

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE OFF EXT PRBS DATA

LEVEL GFSK PRBS 9 15 20 21 23 Bit
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... POS / COUPLED / SYMBOL
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION 0.0 dB
SWEEP FFSK MODE AUTO SINGLE
LIST SELECT STANDARD... CURRENT: NADC
MEM SEQ MOD TYPE π/4DQPSK
UTILITIES BIT RATE 48.6k bps
HELP FILTER... √COSINE/0.35
CODING... NADC
MOD POLARITY NORM INV
SELECT LIST... CURRENT: DLIST3
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FIIL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEV
CONFIG XMEM...

Fig. 2-43 Menu DIGITAL MOD - QPSK (preset setting), fitted with option SME-B11, DM coder

SOURCE Selection of the modulation source for QPSK.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:TYPE QPSK; SOUR EXT; STAT ON

PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:PRBS 9

1038.6002.02 2.91 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30 .0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE CLOCK EDGE POS NEG

LEVEL GFSK PRBS CLOCK SOURCE INT COUPLED
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... CLOCK MODE SYMBOL BIT
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION
SWEEP FFSK MODE
LIST SELECT STANDARD...
MEM SEQ MOD TYPE...
UTILITIES BIT RATE
HELP FILTER...
CODING...
MOD POLARITY
SELECT LIST...
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FILL
CONFIG XMEM...

Fig. 2-44 Submenu DIGITAL-MOD-QPSK-CLOCK...(preset setting)

CLOCK... Opens a window to set the clock parameters. The current settings are
displayed.

CLOCK EDGE Selection of the active clock edge

POS The positive clock edge is active.
NEG The negative clock edge is active.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:CLOC:POL NORM
CLOCK SOURCE Selection of the clock source
INT The internal clock generator is also used with an
external data source. The CLOCK socket is
switched to form an output
COUPLED The CLOCK input/output is switched in accordance
with the DATA input/output.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:CLOC:SOUR COUP
CLOCK MODE Selection of the clock pulse for the CLOCK
input/output.
SYMBOL The CLOCK input/output is set to symbol clock
pulse.
BIT The CLOCK input/output is set to bit clock.
Note: Using XMEM (option SMIQ-B12), requires CLOCK BIT to
be set
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:CLOC:MODE SYMB

LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction
OFF The level reduction is switched off.
NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in
LEVEL ATTENUATION. The linear range extends to an
attenuation of approx. 30 dB.
MAX The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in
LEVEL ATTENUATION. The linear range extends to an
attenuation of approx. 30 dB.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV:MODE NORM

1038.6002.02 2.92 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of the level reduction. The level reduction is internally
controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via
connector BURST. A logic "1" in the data list causes a level reduction.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV 0dB

MODE Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator.

AUTO The data are always repeated.
SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been
started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE➤
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO

SELECT STANDARD... Opens a window to select one of the standard QPSK modulations (see
Table 2-5). By selecting a standard, the parameters indented below
the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard. If the
setting of a parameter is different from the standard, SELECT
STANDARD... CURRENT:USER is displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:QPSK:STAN NADC

MOD TYPE... Opens a window to select modulation type. The following is to choose
of:
QPSK, OQPSK, π/4QPSK, π/4DQPSK
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:QPSK:TYPE QPSK

BITRATE Input value of the bit rate. The specified ranges are 1 to 24.3 kbps and
27 to 48.6 kbps. In the range 1 to 24.3 kbps, the nonharmonic
suppression is reduced (cf. diagram).
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:QPSK:BRAT 48.6kb/s

FILTER.. Opens a window to select filtering (roll-off factor).

The following is to choose from:
OFF cos / 0,2
cos /0,35, √cos /0,35,
cos /0,4, √cos /0,4,
cos /0,5, √cos /0,5,
cos/0,6 √cos /0,6.
Note: For modulation type OQPSK only √cos/0.6 can be set.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:QPSK:FILT SCOS,0.35

CODING... Selection of difference coding. The following is to choose from:

NADC, PDC, TETRA, APCO, TFTS, MSAT and INMARSAT
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:QPSK:COD NADC

MOD POLARITY Selection of the polarity of the modulation excursion.

NORM Polarity of the modulation is specified according to standards.
INV Polarity of the modulation is inverted.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:QPSK:POL NORM

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

FUNCTION Selection of the editor function to process the selected list (cf. Section
2.2.4, List Editor).

1038.6002.02 2.93 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

[Link] FSK Modulation

Menu DIGITAL MOD - FSK offers access to settings for FSK modulation. FSK modulation is possible
with or without a filter. The filter can be switched off and allows free setting of the deviation. The
maximum setting depends on the carrier frequency.

Carrier frequency Maximum deviation

< 130 MHz 100 kHz

130 to 187.5 MHz 25 kHz

187.5 to 375 MHz 50 kHz

375 to 750 MHz 100 kHz

750 to 1500 MHz 200 kHz

1500 to 3000 MHz 400 kHz

3000 to 6000 MHz 800 kHz

If option SME-B11 is not installed, FSK modulation is only possible with an external source and without
a filter. The menu indicates the lines SOURCE, DEVIATION and MOD POLARITY.

Menu selection DIGITAL MOD - FSK

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE OFF EXT PRBS DATA

LEVEL GFSK PRBS 9 15 20 21 23 bit
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... POS / COUPLED
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION 0.0 dB
SWEEP FFSK MODE AUTO SINGLE
LIST
MEM SEQ SELECT STANDARD... CURRENT: USER
UTILITIES DEVIATION 4.50 kHz
HELP BIT RATE 1.20 kbps
FILTER... OFF
MOD POLARITY NORM INV
SELECT LIST... CURRENT: DLIST4
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FIIL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEV
CONFIG XMEM...

Fig. 2-45 Menu DIGITAL MOD - FSK (preset setting), fitted with option DM coder SME-B11

1038.6002.02 2.94 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

SOURCE Selection of the modulation source for FSK.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:TYPE FSK; SOUR EXT; STAT ON

PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:PRBS 9
CLOCK ...
Opens a window to set the clock parameters. The current settings are
displayed (cf. Section "QPSK modulation").

LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction
OFF The level reduction is switched off.
NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in
LEVEL ATTENUATION. The linear range extends to an
attenuation of approx. 30 dB.
MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of
>80dB.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV:MODE NORM

LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of the level reduction. The level reduction is internally
controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via
connector BURST. A logic "1" in the data list causes a level reduction.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV 0dB

MODE Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator.

AUTO The data are always repeated.
SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been
started using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE➤
IEC-bus command :SOUR:TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO

EXECUTE SINGLE MODE Starts a single servicing of the data. This action to be executed is only
displayed and is only effective if MODE is set to SINGLE.
IEC-bus commands :TRIG:DM:SOUR SING; :TRIG:DM

SELECT STANDARD... Opens a window to select one of the standard FSK modulations (see
Table 2-5). By selecting a standard, the parameters indented below
the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard. If the
setting of a parameter is different from the standard, SELECT
STANDARD... CURRENT:USER is displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK:STAN POCS1200

DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for FSK. If the FILTER is switched off, the
deviation can be set in the range from 0 to 400 kHz. In this case, the
maximum deviation depends on the carrier frequency and is limited to
20% of the analog FM deviation.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK:DEV 4.5kHz

BIT RATE Input value of the bit rate for FSK. Setting range:
FILTER OFF: 0.05 to 1900 kbps
FILTER switched on: 0.05 to. 90 kbps; resolution: 3-digit
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK:BRAT 1200b/s

1038.6002.02 2.95 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

FILTER... Opens a window to select the filters. The following filters can be selected:
OFF
BESSEL B×T=1.22 (corresponds to a bandwidth of 3.9 kHz at 3.2 kbps)
BESSEL B×T=2.44 (corresponds to a bandwidth of 3.9 kHz at 1.6 kbps)
GAUSS B×T=2.73 (corresponds to a rise time 250 µs at 512 bps)
Due to digital filtering, a change of the bit rate influences the cut-off
frequency of the filter. That is why B×T (bandwidth×symbol duration) is
indicated instead of the cut-off frequency which is specified according to the
standard. The cut-off frequency of the filter is calculated as follows:
Cut-off frequency = B×T value × symbol rate
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK:FILT BESS, 1.22

MOD POLARITY Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation.

NORM Logic "1" generates a positive deviation.
INV Logic "1" generates a negative deviation.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK:POL NORM

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

FUNCTION Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

1038.6002.02 2.96 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] 4FSK Modulation

Menu DIGITAL MOD - 4FSK offers access to settings for 4FSK modulation. The maximum setting
depends on the carrier frequency:

Carrier frequency Maximum deviation

< 130 MHz 100 kHz

130 to 187.5 MHz 25 kHz

187.5 to 375 MHz 50 kHz

375 to 750 MHz 100 kHz

750 to 1500 MHz 200 kHz

1500 to 3000 MHz 400 kHz

3000 to 6000 MHz 800 kHz

Menu selection DIGITAL MOD - 4FSK

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE OFF EXT PRBS DATA

LEVEL GFSK PRBS 9 15 20 21 23 Bit
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... POS /COUPLED /SYMBOL
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION 0.0 dB
SWEEP FFSK MODE AUTO SINGLE
LIST
MEM SEQ SELECT STANDARD... CURRENT: ERMES
UTILITIES DEVIATION 4.688 kHz
HELP BIT RATE 6250 bps
FILTER... BESSEL B*T=1.25
CODING... ERMES
MOD POLARITY NORM INV
SELECT LIST... CURRENT: DLIST5
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FIIL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEV

Fig. 2-46 Menu DIGITAL MOD - 4FSK (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B11, DM coder

1038.6002.02 2.97 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

SOURCE Selection of the modulation source for 4FSK.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:TYPE FSK4; SOUR EXT; STAT ON

PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence..

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:PRBS 9

CLOCK ... Opens a window to set the clock parameters. The current settings are
displayed (cf. Section "QPSK modulation")
LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction
OFF The level reduction is switched off.
NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in
LEVEL ATTENUATION. The linear range extends to an
attenuation of approx. 30 dB.
MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of
>80dB.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV:MODE NORM

LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of the level reduction. The level reduction is internally
controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via
connector BURST. A logic "1" in the data list causes a level reduction.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV 0dB

MODE Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator.

AUTO The data are always repeated.
SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started
using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE ➤.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO

EXECUTE SINGLE MODE Ð Starts a single servicing of the data. These action to be executed is
only displayed and is only effective if MODE is set to SINGLE.
IEC-bus commands :TRIG:DM:SOUR SING; :TRIG:DM

SELECT STANDARD... Opens a window to select one of the standard 4FSK modulations (see
Table 2-5). By selecting a standard, the parameters indented below
the line SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard. If the
setting of a parameter is different from the standard, SELECT
STANDARD... CURRENT:USER is displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK4:STAN ERM

DEVIATION Input value of the deviation for 4FSK. The maximum setting depends
on the carrier frequency and is limited to 20% of the analog FM
deviation.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK4:DEV 4.6875 kHz

BIT RATE Input value of the bit rate for 4FSK.

Setting range: 1 to 24.3 kbps and 27 to 48.6 kbps.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK4:BRAT 6250b/s

1038.6002.02 2.98 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

FILTER ... Opens a window to select the filters for 4FSK. The following filters can
be selected::
BESSEL B×T=1.22 cos, 0.2
BESSEL B×T= 1.25 √cos, 0.2
BESSEL B×T= 2.44
Due to digital filtering, a change of the bit rate influences the cut-off
frequency of the filter. That is why B×T (bandwidth×symbol duration)
is indicated instead of the cut-off frequency which is specified
according to the standard. The cut-off frequency of the filter is
calculated as follows:
Cut-off frequency = B×T-value × symbol rate
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK4:FILT BESS, 1.25

CODING... Opens a window to select the coding following is to choose from:

APCO25, ERMES, FLEX and MODACOM
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK4:COD APCO

MOD POLARITY Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation.

NORM Logic "1" generates a positive deviation.
INV Selection of the polarity of the frequency modulation.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FSK4:POL NORM

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List
Editor).

DELETE LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List
Editor).

FUNCTION Selection of the editor function to process the list selected (cf. Section
2.2.4, List Editor).

1038.6002.02 2.99 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

[Link] FFSK Modulation

Menu DIGITAL MOD - FFSK offers access to settings for FFSK modulation.

Menu selection: DIGITAL MOD - FFSK

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK SOURCE OFF EXT PRBS DATA

LEVEL GFSK PRBS 9 15 20 21 23 Bit
MODULATION QPSK CLOCK... POS /COUPLED
DIGITAL MOD FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE OFF NORM MAX
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION 0.0 dB
SWEEP FFSK MODE AUTO SINGLE
LIST
MEM SEQ SELECT STANDARD... CURRENT: POCSAG
UTILITIES BIT RATE 1200 bps
HELP DEVIATION 1.5k 2.0k 3.0k 3.5k 4.0k 4.5k Hz
SELECT LIST... CURRENT: DLIST5
DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FIIL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEV
CONFIG XMEM...

Fig. 2-47 Menu DIGITAL MOD - FFSK (preset setting), fitted with option SME-B11, DM-coder

SOURCE Selection of the modulation source FFSK.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:TYPE FFSK; SOUR EXT; STAT ON

PRBS Selection of the Pseudo Random Binary Sequence.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:PRBS 9

CLOCK ... Opens a window to set the clock parameters. The current settings are
displayed (cf. Section "QPSK modulation").

LEVEL ATTENUATION MODE Selection of the operating mode for level reduction
OFF The level reduction is switched off.
NORM The level reduction corresponds to the value entered in
LEVEL ATTENUATION. The linear range extends to an
attenuation of approx. 30 dB.
MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of
>80dB.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV:MODE NORM

LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value of the level reduction. The level reduction is internally
controlled by the LEV ATT bits in the data list or externally via
connector BURST. A logic "1" in the data list causes a level reduction.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV 0dB

1038.6002.02 2.100 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

MODE Selection of the operating mode for the DATA generator.

AUTO The data are always repeated.
SINGLE The data are sent once as soon as the run has been started
using EXECUTE SINGLE MODE ➤
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO

EXECUTE SINGLE MODE Ð Starts a single servicing of the data. This action to be executed is only
indicated and is only effective if MODE is set to SINGLE.
IEC-bus commands :TRIG:DM:SOUR SING; :TRIG:DM

SELECT STANDARD... Opens a window to select the standard FFSK modulation (see Table
2-5). By selecting a standard, the parameters indented below the line
SELECT STANDARD are set according to standard. If the setting of a
parameter is different from the standard, SELECT STANDARD...
CURRENT:USER is displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FFSK:STAN POCS

BIT RATE Input value of the bit rate for the internal modulation signals.
Setting range: 0.05 to 90 kbps..
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FFSK:BRAT 1200 b/s

DEVIATION Selection of the deviation for FFSK. The following is to choose from:
1.5 kHz, 2 kHz, 3 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 4 kHz and 4.5 kHz
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:FFSK:DEV 4kHz

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List
Editor).

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

FUNCTION Selection of the editor function to process the list selected (cf. Section
2.2.4, List Editor).

1038.6002.02 2.101 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

[Link] Radiocommunication Service ERMES

ERMES is a radiocommunication method permitting Europe-wide paging. If fitted with options SME-
B11, DM coder, and SME-B12, memory extension, the SME generates ERMES call signals conforming
to standard. All parameters and the message to be transmitted can be freely selected.

Note: Switching on ERMES automatically switches off all other DM modulations.

Menu selection: DIGITAL MOD - ERMES

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK STATE OFF ON

LEVEL GFSK CHANNEL... 0 / 169.452 MHz
MODULATION QPSK RECALCULATE
DIGITAL MOD FSK --------------NETWORK INFORMATION---------------
LF OUTPUT 4FSK ZONE /COUNTRY CODE 262
SWEEP FFSK OPERATOR CODE 0
LIST ERMES PAGING AREA 0
MEM SEQ ---------------SYSTEM INFORMATION---------------
UTILITIES EXT TRAFFIC INDICATOR OFF ON
HELP BORDER AREA INDICATOR OFF ON
FREQ SUBSET INDICATOR 30
DAY OF MONTH 1
TIME 0:00
--------------------MESSAGE---------------------
INITIAL ADDRESS 0
CATEGORY TONE NUMERIC ALPHANUM
TONE NUMBER 0
NUMERIC MESSAGE 0123456789
ALPHANUM MESSAGE CURRENT: USER3
EDIT MESSAGE...
-------------------BIT ERRORS-------------------
ERROR BIT MASK 0
POSITION OF ERRONEOUS BATCH A
POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0
-----------------MESSAGE SEQUENCE---------------
BATCH A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
MSG X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
MODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT-SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG-ALWAYS
EXECUTE SINGLE
CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT

Fig. 2-48 Menu DIGITAL MOD - ERMES (preset setting), fitted with option SME-B11, DM coder and
option SM-B12, memory extension

1038.6002.02 2.102 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

STATE ON Switching on ERMES. The RF frequency is set to the value

determined by the selection of CHANNEL. The status line
indicates the word ERMES, the batch, the number of
subsequence, and the type of data sent. "MSG" indicates
message data, "- - -" indicates fill data.
With every change from STATE OFF to STATE ON, the
data for the memory extension are recalculated and written
into list "XMEM". Every change of one of the ERMES
parameters, except for MESSAGE SEQUENCE MODE,
requires the data to be recalculated. During STATE ON,
every change of the parameters thus generates a warning
"ERMES settings and output signal mismatch". The data
can be recalculated either by switching over to STATE
OFF / STATE ON or by triggering action RECALCULATE
➤.
OFF Switching off ERMES
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:STAT ON

CHANNEL... Opens a window to select the RF channel used. 16 channels with

the appropriate frequencies can be selected:
Channel 0: 169,425 MHz Channel 8: 169,625 MHz
Channel 1: 169,450 MHz Channel 9: 169,650 MHz
Channel 2: 169,475 MHz Channel 10: 169,675 MHz
Channel 3: 169,500 MHz Channel 11: 169,700 MHz
Channel 4: 169,525 MHz Channel 12: 169,725 MHz
Channel 5: 169,550 MHz Channel 13: 169,750 MHz
Channel 6: 169,575 MHz Channel 14: 169,775 MHz
Channel 7: 169,600 MHz Channel 15: 169,800 MHz
The selection of the channel also influences the structure of the
ERMES data. Thus the channel cannot be changed by readjusting
the frequency in the FREQUENCY menu or via the [FREQ] key.
Readjusting the RF output frequency by means of the [FREQ] key or
in the FREQUENCY menu is possible, however, message "ERMES
channel / Frequency mismatch" is displayed.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:CHAN 1

RECALCULATE Ð Triggers a recalculation of the data for the "XMEM" list. This action
must be triggered after every change of the parameters, except for
MESSAGE SEQUENCE MODE.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:STAT OFF; STAT ON

--- NETWORK INFORMATION -- The parameters of the network information set the data denoting the
network the SME simulates in greater detail. These data are
included in every message (cf. ERMES standard).

ZONE / COUNTRY CODE Input value of the zone and country code. Germany has the value
262.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:NINF:ZCO 262

1038.6002.02 2.103 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

OPERATOR CODE Input value of the code of the network operator.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:NINF:OPER 7

PAGING AREA Input value of the paging area.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:NINF:PA 4

--- SYSTEM INFORMATION --- The parameters of the system information set the data of the
transmitting system. These data are included in every message (cf.
ERMES standard).

EXT TRAFFIC INDICATOR Input value of the External Traffic Indicator Bit.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:SI:ETI ON

BORDER AREA INDICATOR Input value of the Border Area Indicator Bit.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:SI:BAI ON

FREQ SUBSET INDICATOR Input value of the Frequency Subset Indicator. One-channel
networks have an FSI of 30 according to ERMES standard.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:SI:FSI 30

DAY OF MONTH Input value of the date (day of month).

IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:SI:DOM 24

TIME Input value of the time.

IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:SI:TIME 12,59

--- MESSAGE --- The parameters of this section set the destination address and
determine the message data.

INITIAL ADDRESS Input value of the address of the pager. Every receiver has an own,
nonrecurring address.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:MESS:IA 0

CATEGORY Selection of the message category.

TONE Tone-only message
NUMERIC Numeric message
ALPHANUM Alphanumeric message
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:MESS:CAT TONE

TONE NUMBER Input value of the tone transmitted with message category TONE. 16
tones (8 normal, 8 urgent) are available.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:MESS:TONE 1

NUMERIC MESSAGE Input of the character string for a numeric message. The SME
maximally provides 16 digits. In addition to the 10 digits "0" to "9",
the signs forward slash "/", upper-case letter "U", hyphen "-", period
".", percent "%" and blank can be used.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:MESS:NUM "12% 12-17"

1038.6002.02 2.104 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

ALPHANUM MESSAGE Opens a window to select an alphanumeric message and to create

a new one. The following is available:
FOX "The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog"
ALPHA "ABCD..." (complete ERMES character string)
LONG Message completely filling a batch
USER1 to 3 Three messages which can freely be edited by means
of command EDIT MESSAGE..
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:MESS:ALPH "FOX"

EDIT MESSAGE Opens a window to edit one of the alphanumeric messages USER1
to USER3. The message to be processed must be selected using
ALPHANUM MESSAGE.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:MESS:ALPH:DATA "Test"

--- BIT ERRORS --- The SME offers the possibility of providing a 30-bit word of the
message transmitted with bit errors for test purposes. The
parameters of this section determine the faulty bits and their
position.

ERROR BIT MASK Input of the faulty bits into a 30-bit field. The decimal number
transmitted (0 to 1073741823) is converted into a 30-bit binary
number internally and thus determines the 30 bits. These bits are
XORed with the word of the message to be corrupted and thus
determine which bits of this word are transmitted correctly or
wrongly.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:ERR:MASK 0

POSITION OF ERRONEOUS Input value of the batch in which the faulty word is to be.
BATCH IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:ERR:BATC A

POSITION OF ERRONEOUS Input value of the faulty word. 0 to 153 are valid values
WORD (0 to 189 for a long batch)
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:ERR:WORD 1

--- MESSAGE SEQUENCE --- The SME always sends complete cycles from five subsequences.
Two types of subsequence are generated. In the message
subsequence, fill data and message data are mixed, the fill
subsequence only contains fill data. The message subsequences of
a cycle only differ in the subsequence number contained, they
cannot be configured differently. I.e., the settings under BATCH are
valid for all message subsequences of a cycle.
The fill subsequences cannot be configured, the subsequences of a
cycle also only differ in the subsequence number contained.
The parameters of this section determine how the message
subsequence is structured and when which subsequence is sent.

BATCH For each of batches A to P of the message subsequence, a

determination is possible whether it contains message data (an X
under the letter) or fill data (a blank under the letter). Operation is
analog to the variation of a number with the rotary knob, however,
the characters are restricted to 2 there.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:ERM:SEQ:DBAT A, B, G,H

1038.6002.02 2.105 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

MODE Selection of the message and fill subsequence.

ALWAYS The message subsequence is output continuously.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO
SINGLE The filler subsequence is output. With the trigger
pulse, switchover to message subsequence is effected
for 12 seconds.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR SING
:SOUR:ERM:TACT MESS
EXT The filler subsequence is output. With the trigger pulse
from the external trigger female connector, switchover
to message subsequence is effected for 12 seconds.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT
:SOUR:ERM:TACT MESS
EXTTRIG The SME only starts with the generation of the FLEX
signal after recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger
input connector. After recognition of this signal, a
message subsequence (length: 12 seconds) is output.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT;
:SOUR:ERM:TACT ONCE

EXTTRIG-ALWAYS
The units waits for a signal edge at the trigger
connector. After recognition of this edge, the unit
behaves as described under setting ALWAYS.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT
:SOUR:ERM:TACT STAR

EXECUTE SINGLE Ð Starts the output of a message subsequence (length: 12 seconds).

Afterwards, fill subsequences are sent again. This action to be
executed is only displayed and is only effective if MODE SINGLE is
selected.
IEC-bus command *TRG

CLOCK SOURCE Selection of the clock source. This setting is also valid for FLEX,
REFLEX and POCSAG but not for the other digital modulations.
INT The clock required for signal generation is generated
internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector.
EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used as
the clock signal.
Note: For all bit rates, i.e. for 1600 bps and 3200 bps, a symbol
clock rate of 3200 Hz is always used. This applies to both
the output (CLOCK SOURCE INT) and the input (CLOCK
SOURCE EXT) of the clock.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:SOUR:DM:COMP:CLOC:SOUR INT

1038.6002.02 2.106 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] Radiocommunication Service FLEX

Like ERMES, FLEX is a radiocommunication service that makes for convenient paging. When
equipped with the SME-B41 (FLEX), SME-B11 (DM coder) and SME B12 (DM memory extension)
options, the SME generates call signals complying to the FLEX or FLEX-TD standard. All essential
parameters and the message to be transmitted are freely selectable.
FLEX settings can be accessed via the DIGITAL-MOD- FLEX menu:

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK STATE OFF ON

LEVEL GFSK MODULATION 1600-2FSK
MODULATION QPSK DEVIATION 4.8 kHz
DIGITAL MOD FSK ---------------SYSTEM INFORMATION---------------
LF OUTPUT 4FSK SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE 4
SWEEP FFSK FRAME OFFSET 1
LIST ERMES ROAMING OFF NID SSID ALL
MEM SEQ FLEX SSID
UTILITIES LOCAL ID 0
HELP COVERAGE ZONE 0
COUNTRY CODE 262
SSID TMF 15
NID
NETWORK ADDRESS 2058240
MULTIPLIER 1
SERVICE AREA 0
NID TMF 15
DATE 1994/01/01
TIME 12:00
--------------------MESSAGE---------------------
CAPCODE A0000001
AUTO ADJUST NONE PHASE FRAME BOTH
PHASE A
CATEGORY TONE
REPEATS 0

TONE NUMBER 0
NUMERIC/SNUMERIC MESSAGE... 0123456789
ALPHANUM MESSAGE CURRENT: USER3
EDIT MESSAGE
SECURE MESSAGE CURRENT: USER3
TYPE ASCII BIN USER RESERVED
BINARY MESSAGE CURRENT: USER1
EDIT MESSAGE
DISPLAY DIRECTION LEFT RIGHT
BLOCKING LENGTH 1

MESSAGE NUMBERING OFF ON

MAIL DROP FLAG OFF ON
--------------------BIT ERRORS-------------------
ERROR BIT MASK 0
POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0
---------------MESSAGE GENERATION----------------
START IN CYCLE 0
START IN FRAME 0
FRAME CONTENTS...

RECALCULATE
MODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT-SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG-ALWAYS
EXECUTE SINGLE
CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT
ext
Fig. 2-49 Menu DIGITAL MOD - FLEX, options SME-B41, SME-B11, SM-B12

1038.6002.02 2.107 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

STATE ON Switch on of FLEX.

The RF frequency has to be set to the desired value by
means of key [FREQ]. The status line displays the word
FLEX as well as the cycle and frame number and the type
of output data:
SEC secure message
INST instruction to SSID subscriber
TONE tone-only message
NUM numeric message
SNUM special numeric message
ALPH alphanumeric message
BIN binary/hexadecimal message
RSYN emergency resync
---- FLEX frame without message
OTH frame without FLEX structures
If REPEATS is larger than 0 (i.e. FLEX-TD active), only the
first character is displayed for each phase (for SNUM a P
is displayed).
A switchover from STATE OFF to STATE ON results in a
recalculation of the memory extension data and their entry
into the list "XMEM". Changing FLEX parameters except
for MESSAGE GENERATION MODE requires a
recalculation of data. With radiocommunication service
FLEX activated (STATE ON), every parameter change
generates a warning "FLEX setting and output signal
mismatch". The recalculation of data can either be effected
by switchover from STATE OFF / STATE ON or by
triggering RECALCULATE .
OFF Switch off of FLEX
IEC -bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:STAT OFF
MODULATION Selection of used bit rate and modulation. Four modulations are
available:
1600bps/2FSK 3200bps/2FSK 3200bps/4FSK 6400bps/4FSK
Basic setting after *RST: 1600-2FSK
IEC-bus command :SOUR:FLEX:MOD 1600,FSK2

DEVIATION Input value of frequency deviation of modulation. The deviation

specifies the spacing from the carrier to the two further placed
symbols in 4FSK. The FLEX standard specifies 4800 Hz for this
value which may be varied for testing.
Basic setting after *RST: 4800Hz.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:FLEX:DEV 4.8kHz

--- SYSTEM INFORMATION --- The system information parameters are used for setting the data
of the sending system. These data are sent to the pager (see
FLEX standard).

SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE Input value of number of bits (0 to 7) which the pager uses to
compare its home frame number with the received frame number
The value 7 signifies that the pager only accepts messages in one
of the 128 frames (provided its pager collapse value is not below
7). With the value 0 the pager receives messages in any frame.
Basic setting after *RST: 4.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:FLEX:SI:COLL 4

1038.6002.02 2.108 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

FRAME OFFSET Input value of the frame offsets.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:FOFF 0
ROAMING Activating/Deactivating the generation of roaming information in
the telegram sent.
OFF None; the roaming bits in the frame information word have
the value 0.
SSID BIW000 for all frames, each in one phase.
BIW111 in the first four frames, each in one phase.
NID NID in all frames which comply with the formula specified
in the FLEX standard. The cycle value is however fixed to
the value of START IN CYCLE; consists of a network
address and a short message vector; no BIW and no
message body is generated.
ALL All the information of NID and SSID together.
If ROAMING is not set to OFF, the following additional information
is included in the telegram:
− TIME INFO (a BIW010 in phases 0 and 2 of frame 0 and a
BIW001 in phases 1 and 3 of frame 0. As the SME is not able
to differentiate between cycles, the contents of the phases
does not rotate over both BIWs; moreover, no BIW001 is sent
for 1600 bps because only one phase is present).
− CHANNEL SETUP INSTRUCTION (in one phase in each of
the first four frames; for 1600 bps not in the first frame as there
is no space; consists of a BIW101; has no address, no vector
and no message body).
− SYSTEM EVENT NOTIFICATION (starting from frame 0 for a
sc
collapse cycle, i.e. 2 , where sc denotes the value set under
SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE; consists of an operator
message address and a short instruction vector, has no
message body and no BIW101).
− MESSAGE FOR ALL SUBSCRIBERS (is generated depending
on the contents of FRAME CONTENTS, also if ROAMING is
set to OFF; consists of an operator message address, a vector
and a message body, has no BIW101).
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:ROAM OFF

SSID The following four commands define the "Simulcast System ID"
emitted by the SME.

LOCAL ID Input value of the local ID.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:LID 0

COUNTRY CODE Input value of the country code.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:COUN 0
COVERAGE ZONE Input value of the current zone.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:CZON 0

SSID TMF Input value of the four traffic management flags for SSID.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:STMF 15

1038.6002.02 2.109 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

NID The following four commands define the "Network Identification" emitted
by the SME.

NETWORK Input value of the network address part of the network ID.
ADDRESS IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:NADD 2058240

MULTIPLIER Input value of the multiplier part of the network ID.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:MULT 1

SERVICE AREA Input value of the service area part of the network ID.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:SAR 0

NID TMF Input value of the four traffic management fags for NID
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:NTMF 15

DATE Input value of the date.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SI:DATE 1994,12,01

TIME Input value of the current time.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SI:TIME 12,00

--- MESSAGE --- The parameters of this section are used for setting the destination
address as well as the useful data of the message.

CAPCODE Input value of the CAPCODE of the pager to be called as printed on the
receiver. CAPCODE is defined in FLEX standard. The CAPCODE
contains the addresses of the receiver as well as frame and phase
information.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:CAPC "A0000001"

AUTO ADJUST Selection of which settings are influenced by a change of CAPCODE:

NONE No influence
PHASE The phase is adjusted to the value contained in CAPCODE. This
is performed whenever the setting for CAPCODE is changed.
FRAME FRAME CONTENT is set so that in all the frames evaluated by
the receiver (and only in those) FLEX data are also transmitted.
However, FRAME CONTENTS is changed only for frames
where FRAME CONTENTS contains an ’X’, an ’x’ or a ’ ’ (blank).
For all other frames, FRAME CONTENTS is left unchanged.
BOTH PHASE as well as FRAME CONTENT are adjusted.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:PHAS:AUTO ON
:SOUR:FLEX:FCON:AUTO ON

1038.6002.02 2.110 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

PHASE Selection of which phase (A to D) the message is to be transmitted. Since

each frame lasts 1.875 sec independent of the modulation and more data
can be transmitted at bit rates higher than 1600 bps, several independent
channels ("phases") are bit-multiplexed. With 1600 bps, the message is
transmitted for every setting in phase A. With 3200 bps, the message is
transmitted in phase A if A and B are set, and transmitted in phase C if C
and D are set. With 6400 bps, the message is transmitted in all the four
phases depending on the relevant setting. Each pager is set to one phase.
The phase can be calculated from the CAPCODE of a pager as shown
below:
Phase = (Integer(CAPCODE/4)) modulo 4, with 0=A, 1=B, etc.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:PHAS A

CATEGORY... Selection of message category for all frames where FRAME CONTENT
contains the entry ’X’ or ’x’. For all other values of FRAME-CONTENTS,
this setting is ignored.
TONE tone-only message
NUMERIC numeric message,
with ≤3 figures = short message
SNUMERIC special numeric message
ALPHANUM alphanumeric message
SECURE secure alphanumeric message
BIN binary message
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:CAT TONE

REPEATS Entry of the number of calls following the first call according to FLEX-TD.
For the value 0 (no repeat), normal FLEX frames are transmitted,
whereas subframes according to FLEX-TD are used with other values.
The repeat calls are transmitted at the frame interval defined by the
SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE. A frame may contain a new message and
repetitions of previous messages.

Notes: – Since the SME transmits the messages always completely in

a (sub-)frame, the maximum length of the SME-generated
message decreases with increasing values.
– The SME generates a complete cycle which is repeated
continuously. Repetitions which are contained in the
subsequent cycle are already transmitted in the current cycle,
i.e., they might be transmitted prior to transmitting the
original.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:REP 0...3

TONE NUMBER Input value of the tone which is transmitted during category TONE.
8 tones are available.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:TONE 0

NUMERIC/SNUMERIC Opens a window to enter the character string for a numeric or special
MESSAGE... numeric message. SME provides a maximum of 41 characters. In addition
to the 10 figures "0" to "9" other characters such as square brackets right
and left "[", "]", upper case letter "U", hyphen "-" and blank space " " can
be used.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:NUM "12-17"

1038.6002.02 2.111 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

ALPHANUM MESSAGE... Opens a window to select or create an alphanumeric message. The

following selection can be made:
FOX "The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog"
ALPHA "ABCD..." (complete FLEX character set)
USER1...4 Four messages that can be freely edited by command EDIT
MESSAGE.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:ALPH "FOX"

EDIT MESSAGE... Opens a window to edit one of the alphanumeric messages USER1 to
USER4. The message to be processed has to selected with ALPHANUM
MESSAGE.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:ALPH:DATA "Test"

SECURE MESSAGE... Opens a window to select a secure message. Four messages, USER1 to
USER4, are available and can be arbitrarily edited.
Note: The messages can be edited via remote control only.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:SEC "USER1"

TYPE Selection of the type of a secure message. The value set here is
transmitted via the corresponding bits of the message body and thus
determines the character used to fill the remaining space behind the
message body. It has no further consequences.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR FLEX:MESS:SEC:TYPE "ASC"

BINARY MESSAGE... Opens a window to select a binary message.

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:SEL "USER1"

EDIT MESSAGE... Opens a window to edit one of the binary messages. The message to be
processed has to be selected wit BINARY MESSAGE. Values 0 and 1 are
available. Each value represents 1 bit. The maximum length of the
message is 460 bit.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:DATA "1101"

DISPLAY Selection of direction of binary message.

LEFT Display from left to right.
RIGHT Display from right to left.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:DDIR LEFT

BLOCKING LENGTH Entry of number of bits to be interpreted as a unit (character). Permissible

values are 1 to 16.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:BLEN 1

MESSAGE NUMBERING Selection of whether or not the transmitted message is to be assigned a

message number.
Every message transmitted can be assigned a message number. This
information is evaluated when received by the pager.
ON SME sends the number 0 for every message.
OFF SME sends no number with the message.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:MNUM OFF

1038.6002.02 2.112 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

MAIL DROP FLAG Switch on/off of MAIL DROP flag

ON The transmitted message is marked as "volatile". Thus, it is not
filed in the normal message memory of the pager but in a
special memory location and is not subject to normal numbering.
The message overwrites the previous "volatile" one.
OFF The message is not marked.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:MDR OFF

----BIT ERRORS--- The SME allows for providing a 32-bit-word of the transferred message
with bit errors for test purposes. The parameters of this section specify the
erroneous bits and their positions.

ERROR BIT MASK Entry of the erroneous bits in a 32-bit field. The transmitted decimal
number (0...4294967295) is converted internally into a 32-bit binary
number and thus defines the 32 bits. These bits are XORed with the word
of the message which is to be falsified and thus determine which bits of
this word are to be transmitted correctly or incorrectly.
Note: XORing precedes block interleaving (see FLEX standard)! It is
carried out in all phases of all message frames.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:ERR:MASK 0

POSITION OF Entry value for the position of the word to be falsified. The words are
ERRONEOUS WORD numbered from block 0, word 0 to block 10, word 7 of a frame. The sync
part and the frame information word cannot be falsified. The falsification
precedes block interleaving in all transmitted phases.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:ERR:WORD 0

--- MESSAGE The parameters of this section determine which types of data (FLEX
GENERATION --- useful data, FLEX filler data, simulated data of other paging systems or
emergency resynchronization) are sent at what time.
This can individually be determined for every frame of a cycle with the
setting then being valid for all cycles. The cycle and frame numbers are
generated and sent in compliance with standard for a period of one hour.

START IN CYCLE Input value of number of cycle with which the message is started.
Valid values are 1 to 14.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:CYCL 0

START IN FRAME Input value of the number of the frame in the cycle with which the
message is started. Valid values are 1 to 127.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:FRAM 0

1038.6002.02 2.113 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

FRAME CONTENTS... Opens a window to determine the contents of up to 128 frames.

Each frame is represented by one character. These characters can be set
to the following values:
A: alphanumeric message
B: binary message
F: filler frame, contains FLEX structures but no messages
identical with <blank>
I: instruction for SSID subscriber units
N: numeric message
O: frame without FLEX structures ("other")
P: special numeric message
R: Emergency Resync Frame, as defined in the FLEX standard
S: Secure Message
T: tone-only message
X: the message type is defined by the value of CATEGORY
<blank>:
same as F’
lower case letter:
same as upper case letters but as a "message to all subscribers".
Not all message types can be sent as "message to all subscribers"
so that not all lower case letters exist.
X and blank may be used in order to permit the AUTO ADJUST
mechanism (see above) to change this entry.
Notes: - The SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE may cause the pager to
respond to much more than only its "own" frame.
- After *RST a character is set in the editor window for each of
the 128 frames. It is possible, however, to clear characters by
means of the BACKSPACE key. Correspondingly less than
128 frames are then output per cycle. Thus it is possible, for
instance, to generate a three-frame test sequence if only the
characters for the first three frames are output.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:FCON "O,X,A"

RECALCULATE Triggers a recalculation of the generated FLEX telegram. This action has
to be triggered each time a parameter has been changed.
Exception: MESSAGE GENERATION MODE.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:STAT OFF; STAT ON

MODE Selection of sequence of useful and filler frames.

ALWAYS The frames are continuously output according to the setting
under FRAME CONTENTS.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO
SINGLE Only FLEX filler data are output. If EXECUTE SINGLE is
selected, the subsequent frame is output in the way it has
been set under FRAME CONTENTS.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR SING
:SOUR:FLEX:TACT MESS
EXT Only FLEX filler data are output. In the case of an external
trigger pulse, the subsequent frame is output in the way it has
been set under FRAME CONTENTS.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT
:SOUR:FLEX:TACT MESS

1038.6002.02 2.114 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

EXTTRIG The SME only starts with the generation of the FLEX signal
after recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger input
connector. After recognition of this signal, the next frame is
output in the way it has been specified under FRAME
CONTENTS.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT;
:SOUR:FLEX:TACT ONCE

EXTTRIG-ALWAYS
The units waits for a signal edge at the trigger connector
(same as EXTTRIG). After recognition of this edge, the unit
behaves as described under setting ALWAYS.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT
:SOUR:FLEX:TACT STAR

EXECUTE SINGLE The next frame is output in the way it has been specified under FRAME
CONTENTS. This triggerable action is only displayed and active when
MODE SINGLE has been selected.
IEC-bus command: *TRG

CLOCK SOURCE Selection of the clock source. This setting is also valid for ERMES, FLEX,
REFLEX and POCSAG but not for the other digital modulations.
INT The clock required for signal generation is generated
internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector.
EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used as the
clock signal.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:DM:COMP:CLOC:SOUR INT

Note: For all bit rates, i.e. for 1600 bps and 3200 bps, a symbol clock rate
of 3200 Hz is always used. This applies to both the output (CLOCK
SOURCE INT) and the input (CLOCK SOURCE EXT) of the clock.

1038.6002.02 2.115 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

[Link] Radiocommunication Service ReFLEX25

When equipped with the SME-B43, SME-B11 and SME-B12 options, the SME generates telegrams
complying to the ReFLEX25 standard. The telegram generated by the SME complies with the
ReFLEX25 Protocol Specification Document Version 2.4 dated March 15, 1996, issued by the Motorola
Advanced Messaging Group.

Notes:

- When ReFLEX25 is switched on, all other DM modulations are automatically switched off.

- To permit easier handling, a few settings are automatically updated each time ReFLEX25 is
switched on (and RECALCULATE executed) if other settings have been changed. This applies to
the RF frequency and the FRAME CONTENTS value. Normally, automatic mode is activated, but it
can be deactivated under AUTO ADAPTATION. Parameters that have been set automatically can
be varied again at will; these modifications take effect immediately.

- Fixed values
The following values in the telegram are fixed and cannot be changed:
- Base frame management (see [Link] of the ReFLEX25 documentation): pf = 0, pn = 3,
ps = 0, cn = 2, cs = 3, pc = 5
- ALOHA Time-out and randomization interval ([Link]): ri = 0, t = 0, LT = 0, rt = 0
- Message sequence number (3.9): msn = 32
- Vector format (3.10): last word only present if response required = 1. Values: rs = 0, rt = 0,
rc = 0, MR = 0; additionally for forward channel scheduling: fc = 0, ff = 0
- Priority bit in address field is always 0, i.e. only one tone-only call.

- Using the user-definable custom frames CUS1to CUS9

The SME permits to output user-definable frames. These frames must be generated on a host
processor (e.g. a PC) and transferred to the SME via IEC bus or RS232. The detailed procedure
will be described below in the section “Reading out, Modifying, Returning of Telegram Parts“,
reading out being omitted, of course, if the custom frames are completely generated on the host
processor.
The custom frames must have the following data format: Each transmitted symbol of a 4FSK
consists of an x and a y bit. X and y bits are filed in two separate byte arrays. The two arrays are
transferred to the SME separately. Each byte of the two arrays contains 8 valid x or y bits, which
permits to implement a 6400 bps-4FSK. In order to achieve a 2FSK all y bits must be set to 0. In
order to obtain lower bit rates, the bits must be doubled accordingly. The SME starts the
transmission with the MSB of the byte at the lowest address and stops with the LSB of the byte at
the highest address.

1038.6002.02 2.116 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

- Bit Error Rate Test

The SME is able to switch a receiver to the test mode for bit error rate tests and then send
standard test patterns.
To this end, set a character to “B“ (for BER message) in FRAME CONTENTS. Furthermore, set
any number of continuous frames to “F“ (for filler pattern). In the BER frame, the SME sends the
command for switching over to the BER test mode to the receiver. The FPAT frames contain the
test pattern.
The command in the BER frame contains start and number of test pattern frames. For calculating
the command, the SME searches for the first “F“ in FRAME CONTENTS and sets the length to the
number of continuous FPAT frames.
The calculation of the BER frame is performed when switching on ReFLEX25 and executing
RECALCULATE. This is why FRAME CONTENTS either must be set before switching on
ReFLEX2 or RECALCULATE must be executed.

- Reading Out, Modifying, Returning of Telegram Parts

It is possible to modify parts of the telegram generated by the SME using a host processor and to
have the modified telegram sent by the SME. Likewise, telegram parts generated on the host
processor can be transferred into the custom frames of the SME.
When ReFLEX25 is switched on, the telegram to be sent is calculated and stored in the extension
memory of the SME („XMEM“). The custom frames are not changed. For reasons of space, the
individual fragments of the telegram are calculated and filed. During the execution, a so-called
sequencer makes sure that the individual fragments are read such that a valid and complete
telegram is obtained. The sequencer automatically places a sync1 portion, a frame info word and a
sync2 portion ahead of all frames except for the types OTH, RSYN and CUS1 to CUS9.

The individual fragments are stored in the XMEM as follows:

Fragment „start“ „length“

Sync 1 portion 3 224
1920 Frame info words (Ft1Ft0 = 10) 301 1920 * 64
1920 Frame info words (Ft1Ft0 = 11) 125001 1920 * 64
1920 Frame info words (Ft1Ft0 = 00) 250001 1920 * 64
Sync 2 portion 375001 1920 * 80
OTH frame 376001 6000
RSYN frame 383001 5632
IDLE frame 390001 5632
TONE frame 397001 5632
NUM frame 404001 5632
ALPH frame 411001 5632
SCI frame 418001 5632
BER frame 425001 5632
FPAT frame 432001 5632
CUS1 frame 510001 6000
CUS2 frame 520001 6000
CUS3 frame 530001 6000
CUS4 frame 540001 6000
CUS5 frame 550001 6000
CUS6 frame 560001 6000
CUS7 frame 570001 6000
CUS8 frame 580001 6000
CUS9 frame 590001 6000

Separate frame info words are stored for each combination of frame number (0...127) and cycle
number (0...14), accounting for the number 128*15 = 1920 of the frame info words per category.

1038.6002.02 2.117 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

The following steps are required:

À Generation of a telegram
Set all ReFLEX25 parameters to the desired values. Make sure that REFLEX25:STATE:AUTO
is set to ON. Switch ReFLEX25 on and off again in order to generate a ReFLEX25 telegram in
the SME memory. This step is not required for custom frames.

À Reading out of the telegram data

You can now transfer any parts of the just generated telegram via IEC bus or the serial interface to
a host processor. Enter values from the above table for “start“ and “length“ in order to
determine the fragment you wish to read out. Use the following command sequence:
FORMAT PACKED Data output is performed in binary format
SOUR:DM:DATA:SEL “XMEM“ Determine memory extension as source
SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:MODE ALL Read out x and y bits
SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:START start Specify the start address of the data to be read
SOUR:DM:DATA:XMEM:LENGTH length Specify the length of the data to be read
SOUR:DM:DATA:DATA? Read out the x bits
SOUR:DM:DATA:ATT? Read out the y bits (only required for four-valued modulations
The setting commands in this step (except for the two last ones) are also necessary if you wish
to transfer custom frames to the SME without reading out data before.

À Modifying the telegram data

Each data byte received contains 8 valid x or y bits. The MSB of each byte belongs to the
symbol output first, the LSB to that output last (see also “Using custom frames CUS1...CUS9).
These data can now be manipulated using an appropriate PC program.

À Returning the telegram data

If the settings made during readout have not been changed, the data can simply be returned to
the SME using
SOUR:DM:DATA:DATA <x bits binary data>
SOUR:DM:DATA:ATT <y bits binary data>
When transferring several fragments, “start“ and “length“ are to be set before.

À Starting ReFLEX25
Set SOUR:REFL:STAT:AUTO OFF in order to avoid recalculation of the telegram when
ReFLEX is started. Then start ReFLEX25.

- Digital data at output connectors

In addition to the modulated RF, the digital data and the clock can also be tapped at the output
connectors. For the 2-valued modulations (1600bps/2FSK and 3200bps/2FSK), the data appear at
the DATA connector. For the four-valued modulations (3200bps/4FSK and 6400bps/4FSK), the x
bit of each symbol is output at the DATA connector, the associated y bit at the BURST connector.

When using the internal clock (setting CLOCK SOURCE INT in the menu), the symbol clock is
output at the CLOCK connector. Caution: Depending on bit rate and type of modulation, a 3200-
Hz clock is always output here!

1038.6002.02 2.118 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

Menu selection: DIGITAL MOD - ReFLEX

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK STATE OFF ON

LEVEL GFSK MODULATION 1600-2FSK 3200-2FSK 3200-4FSK 6400-4FSK
MODULATION QPSK DEVIATION 2.40 kHz
DIGITAL MOD FSK --------------------MESSAGE---------------------
LF OUTPUT 4FSK PERSONAL ADDRESS 16777216
SWEEP FFSK NUMERIC MESSAGE...
LIST ERMES ALPHANUM MESSAGE... CURRENT:USER4
MEM SEQ FLEX EDIT MESSAGE...
UTILITIES ReFLEX25 RESPONSE REQUIRED ON OFF
HELP ---------------SYSTEM INFORMATION---------------
ZONE 1
SUBZONE 1
SERVICE PROVIDER 0
FORWARD CHANNEL
BASE FREQUENCY 929 MHz
ASSIGNMENT NUMBER 1
REVERSE CHANNEL
BASE FREQUENCY 896 MHz
ASSIGNMENT NUMBER 2
SPEED 800 1600 6400 9600
FREQUENCY SPACING 6250 Hz
SCI BASE FRAME 0
SCI COLLAPSE MASK 7
--------------------BIT ERRORS-------------------
ERROR BIT MASK 0
POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0
---------------MESSAGE GENERATION----------------
FRAME CONTENTS...
AUTO ADAPTATION OFF ON
RECALCULATE
MODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT-SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG-ALWAYS
EXECUTE SINGLE
CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT

Fig. 2-50 Menu DIGITAL MOD - ReFLEX, fitted with option SME-B43, ReFlex, option SME-B11,
DM coder, and option SM-B12, memory extension

1038.6002.02 2.119 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

STATE ON Switches on ReFLEX25. The status line displays the

cycle and frame number and the type of output data as
well as the word “RFLX“ (see table under FRAME
CONTENTS).
A switchover from STATE OFF to STATE ON results in a
recalculation of the telegram and its entry into the list
“XMEM“. Changing the ReFLEX parameters, except for
FRAME CONTENTS, AUTO ADAPTATION, MODE and
CLOCK SOURCE, requires a recalculation of data. With
radiocommunication service ReFLEX activated (STATE
ON), the warning „Signal output / ReFLEX settings
mismatch - use RECALCULATE“ is displayed in this
case. The recalculation of data can either be effected by
switchover to STATE OFF / STATE ON or by triggering
RECALCULATE ->
OFF Switches off ReFLEX
IEC-bus command SOUR:REFL25:STAT ON

MODULATION Selection of used bit rate and modulation. Four modulations are
available: 1600bps/2FSK, 3200bps/2FSK, 3200bps/4FSK and
6400bps/4FSK.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:MOD 1600,FSK2

DEVIATION Input value of frequency deviation of modulation. The deviation

specifies the spacing from the carrier to the two further placed
symbols in 4FSK. The ReFLEX25 standard specifies 2400Hz for
this value which may be varied for testing.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:DEV 2.4kHz

-- MESSAGE -- The parameters of this section permit to set the address of the
receiver to be called, define the useful data of the message and
determine whether the receiver is to return a confirmation.
Note: The category of a sent message does not have to be
specified in this section. It is rather determined by the
selection of appropriate frames under FRAME
CONTENTS.

PERSONAL ADDRESS Input value of the address of the receiver to be called. The values
range from 16 777 216 to 1 073 741 823.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:PADD 16777216

NUMERIC MESSAGE Opens a window to enter the character string for a numeric
message. The SME provides a maximum of 41 characters. In
addition to the 10 figures “0“ to “9“, other characters such as
square brackets left and right “[“ and „]“, upper-case letter „U“,
hyphen “-“ and blank space “ “ can be used.
IEC-bus command:

SOUR:REFL25:MESS:NUM “[49-89-] 4129-1131“

1038.6002.02 2.120 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

ALPHANUM MESSAGE Opens a window to select an alphanumeric message. The

following selections can be made:
FOX „The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog“
ALPHA „ABCD...“ (complete ReFLEX25 character set)
USER1...4 Four messages that can be freely edited by
command EDIT MESSAGE.
There is one common set of messages for
ReFLEX25 and Flex - each modification for
ReFLEX25 also changes the message for FLEX.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:ALPH “FOX

EDIT MESSAGE... Opens a window to edit the message selected under ALPHANUM
MESSAGE. The maximum length of the message is 128
characters.
IEC-bus command:
SOUR :REFL25:MESS:ALPH:DATA “Hello, world!“

RESPONSE REQUIRED: Determines whether the receiver is to confirm the message or not.
The respective bit is set in the message. In the case of OFF the
vector field is reduced by one code word if this is permitted by the
ReFLEX standard.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:RREQ OFF

-- SYSTEM INFORMATION -- The system information parameters are used for setting the data
of the sending system (simulated by the SME). These data are
sent to the receiver in the respective block information words.

ZONE Input value of the geographical transmit zone. The significance is

determined by the network operator. The value 0 is referred to as
“restricted“ in the ReFLEX25 documentation, but can be set for
testing. The upper limit is 4091.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:ZONE 1

SUBZONE Input value of the subzone within a transmit zone. The

significance is determined by the network operator. The value 0 is
referred to as “restricted“ in the ReFLEX25 documentation, but
can be set for testing. The upper limit is 127.
IEC-bus command: :REFL25:SI:SZONe 1

SERVICE PROVIDER Input value for the ID of the service provider. Valid values are 0 to
16383.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:PROV 0

1038.6002.02 2.121 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

FORWARD CHANNEL Together with FREQUENCY SPACING the next two settings
determine the frequency of the channel from the transmitter
(SME) to the receiver. The following formula is valid in this case:

FREQ = FORW CHAN BASE FREQUENCY +

FORW CHAN ASSIGNMENT NUMBER * FREQUENCY SPACING

If AUTO ADAPTATION is switched to ON, the frequency

calculated when switching on ReFLEX25 and executing
RECALCULATE is also transferred to the RF setting of the SME,
provided the formula provides a value that lies within the setting
range of the SME.
The preset values for the following parameters are selected such
that the default value of 929.00625 MHz specified in the
ReFLEX25 documentation is obtained as frequency.

BASE FREQUENCY Base frequency of forward channel. Valid values are 0 to 8191
MHz. This exceeds the setting range of the SME. Nevertheless,
the set value is transferred to the receiver without being changed.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:FCH:BASE 929MHz

ASSIGNMENT NUMBER Frequency assignment number. This is not the logic channel
number. Valid values are 0 to 2047.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:FCH:ANUM 1

REVERSE CHANNEL Together with FREQUENCY SPACING, the next two settings
determine the frequency of the reverse channel from the receiver
to the transmitter (SME). The following formula is valid in this
case:

FREQ = REV CHAN BASE FREQUENCY +

REV CHAN ASSIGNMENT NUMBER * FREQUENCY SPACING

In addition, the bit rate of the reverse channel is specified.

The preset values for the following parameters are selected such
that the default value of 896.0125 MHz specified in the ReFLEX25
documentation is obtained as frequency.

BASE FREQUENCY Base frequency of the reverse channel. Valid values are 0 to 8191
MHz.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:RCH:BASE 896MHz

ASSIGNMENT NUMBER Frequency assignment number. This is not the logic channel
number. Valid values are 0 to 2047.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:RCH:ANUM 2

SPEED Selection of bit rate of reverse channel. Possible selections are

800bps, 1600bps, 6400bps and 9600bps.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:RCH:SPE 800bps

FREQUENCY SPACING Determines the frequency spacing according to the above

formulas for FREQ. This setting applies both to forward and
reverse channel. Valid values are 0 to 102350Hz, in steps of
50Hz.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:FSP 6250Hz

1038.6002.02 2.122 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

SCI BASE FRAME System configuration information (SCI) frames are transmitted
within each cycle of 128 frames. Their positions within the cycle is
calculated according to

INDEX = SCI BASE FRAME + 2SCI COLLAPSE MASK * i for all i, until INDEX exceeds
127

SCI BASE FRAME and SCI COLLAPSE MASK are transmitted to

the receiver in the respective block information words.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:SCIBase 0

SCI COLLAPSE MASK See explanation under SCI BASE FRAME.

IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:SI:SCICollapse 7

-- BIT ERRORS -- The SME allows for providing a 32-bit word of the transferred
message with bit errors for test purposes. The following
parameters specify the bits to be falsified and the position of the
erroneous word within a frame. The bit errors are incorporated
before the individual blocks are subjected to interleaving (see
ReFLEX25 documentation).

ERROR BIT MASK Input of the bits to be falsified. The set decimal number is
converted internally into a 32-bit binary number. This binary
number is XORed with the original message word. Each bit of the
ERROR BIT MASK set to 1 causes an inversion of the respective
bit in the transmitted word.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:ERR:MASK 0

POSITION OF ERRONEOUS Indicates the position of the erroneous word. The erroneous word
WORD appears in each frame. Counting starts with the first word of block
0 of each frame, i.e. immediately after the sync partition; the sync
partition cannot be falsified. Values from 0 to 351 can be set.
Depending on the modulation, a frame (without sync partition)
consists of 88, 176 or 352 words. If an excessive value is entered
for POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD for the set modulation,
no bit errors are produced.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:ERR:WORD 0

-- MESSAGE GENERATION -- The SME always sends complete cycles consisting of up to 128
frames. The parameters of this section specify the frame
contents.

1038.6002.02 2.123 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

FRAME CONTENTS This function specifies the contents of the max. 128 frames sent
by the SME during one cycle. A window is opened in which each
frame is represented by one character. One of the following frame
types can be selected for each of the 128 frames:

Character Status Frame contents

display
I IDLE ReFLEX25 frame without addresses and message
contents
A ALPH ReFLEX25 frame with alphanumeric message and
address
N NUM ReFLEX25 frame with numeric message and
address
T TONE ReFLEX25 frame with tone-only message and
address
S SCI SCI frame
R RSYN Emergency resynchronization frame
B BER ReFLEX25 frame with a message that switches the
receiver to the bit-error-test mode
F FPAT ReFLEX25 test filler pattern according to section
10.1 of the ReFLEX25 standard
O OTH Simulated data of another radiocommunication
service; contains no ReFLEX structures at all
1...9 CUS1 to 9 Custom frames, freely definable by the user (see
operating instructions at the end of this section)

Notes:
- A cycle can also be reduced to less than 128 frames. Each
time the -/<- key is pressed, a frame character is deleted and
the cycle thus reduced by one frame. Hatched areas are
displayed. In this case, the SME starts the next cycle earlier.
- FRAME CONTENTS can also be varied while ReFLEX25 is
active.
- For using the frame types BER and FPAT see also section „Bit
Error Rate Test“
- In the modes MODE SINGLE and MODE EXT-SINGLE all
ALPH, NUM und TONE frames are replaced by IDLE frames
as long as no trigger event has arrived or EXECUTE SINGLE
has not been triggered.

IEC-bus command: IEC-bus command:

SOUR:REFL25:FCON “SAAAAAAAAAAAAAA...“ (abbreviated)

AUTO ADAPTATION If AUTO ADAPTATION is set to ON, the following settings are
performed automatically as soon as ReFLEX25 is switched on or
RECALCULATEis triggered. In detail, the following settings are
performed:
FORWARD CHANNEL BASE FREQUENCY, ASSIGNMENT
NUMBER and FREQUENCY SPACING are used to calculate and
set the RF.
The automatically set values can be varied subsequently without
recalculation of the telegram. These modifications take effect
immediately. However, they do not react on the output
parameters.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:AAD ON

1038.6002.02 2.124 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

RECALCULATE Ð Triggers recalculation of the generated ReFLEX25 telegram and -

with AUTO ADAPTATION set to ON - an update of the RF
frequency. The execution of RECALCULATE is required when a
setting is changed that influences the telegram. This includes all
parameters except for FRAME CONTENTS, AUTO
ADAPTATION, MODE and CLOCK SOURCE. The same result
can be obtained by briefly switching ReFLEX25 off and on again.
IEC-bus command: SOUR:REFL25:STAT OFF; STAT ON

MODE Selection of the output mode. The contents of the individual

frames is mainly determined by FRAME CONTENTS. However,
MODE also performs an interpretation in this case.

ALWAYS The SME starts with the generation of the

ReFLEX25 signal immediately after switching on
of ReFLEX25. The frames are sent in the way
they have been specified under FRAME
CONTENTS.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO

SINGLE The SME starts with the generation of the

ReFLEX25 signal immediately after switching on
of ReFLEX25. All ALPH, NUM and TONE frames
are replaced by IDLE frames. By selecting
EXECUTE SINGLE, one ALPH, NUM or TONE
frame (as specified in FRAME CONTENTS) is
transmitted; all further ALPH, NUM and TONE
frames are again replaced by IDLE frames until
EXECUTE SINGLE is triggered again.
IEC-bus command:
:TRIG:DM:SOUR SING;
:SOUR:REFL25:TACT MESS

EXT-SINGLE The SME starts with the generation of the

ReFLEX25 signal immediately after switching on
of ReFLEX25. EXT-SINGLE behaves like
SINGLE, however, instead of EXECUTE
SINGLE, a trigger signal is required at the trigger
input connector.
IEC-bus command:
:TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT;
:SOUR:REFL25:TACT MESS

EXTTRIG The SME only starts with the generation of the

ReFLEX25 signal after recognition of a trigger
pulse at the trigger input connector. After
recognition of this signal, exactly one cycle (up to
128 frames) is output. The frames are output in
the way they have been specified in FRAME
CONTENTS. After execution of the cycle, the
SME waits for a new trigger pulse.
IEC-bus command:
:TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT;
:SOUR:REFL25:TACT ONCE

1038.6002.02 2.125 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

EXTTRIG-ALWAYS The SME only starts with the

generation of the ReFLEX25 signal after
recognition of a trigger pulse at the trigger input
connector. Then, this mode behaves as
described under the setting ALWAYS. This
setting can be used to synchronize two SMEs.
IEC-bus command
:TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT;
:SOUR:REFL25:TACT STAR

EXECUTE SINGLE Ð See description of MODE SINGLE

IEC-bus command: *TRG

CLOCK SOURCE Selection of the clock source. This setting applies to ERMES,
POCSAG, FLEX and REFLEX at the same time, however not to
the other digital modulations. The EXT setting can be used to
synchronize two or more SMEs.
INT The clock required for signal generation is generated
internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector.
EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used as the
clock signal.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:DM:COMP:CLOC INT

Note: For all bit rates, i.e. for 1600bps and 3200bps also, a
symbol clock rate of 3200Hz is always used. This applies
both to the output (CLOCK SOURCE INT) and to the input
(CLOCK SOURCE EXT) of the clock

1038.6002.02 2.126 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

[Link] Radiocommunication Service POCSAG

POCSAG is a standard which in its various implementations (e.g. CITYRUF, SCALL) allows convenient
paging. When equipped with the SME-B42 (POCSAG), SME-B11 (DM coder) and SME B12 (DM
memory extension) options, the SME generates call signals complying to the POCSAG standard. All
essential parameters and the message to be transmitted are freely selectable.

Notes: - When POCSAG is switched on, all other DM modulations are automatically switched off.
- The RF frequency is not determined by the POCSAG standard, it has to be set to the
desired value by means of key [FREQ].

POCSAG settings can be accessed via DIGITAL-MOD-POCSAG menu:

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY GMSK STATE OFF ON

LEVEL GFSK MODULATION FSK FFSK
MODULATION QPSK DEVIATION 1.5 2.0 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 kHz
DIGITAL MOD FSK MOD POLARITY NORM INV
LF OUTPUT 4FSK LEVEL ATTENUATION 0.0 dB
SWEEP FFSK BITRATE 512 1200 2400 bps
LIST ERMES --------------------MESSAGE---------------------
MEM SEQ FLEX ADDRESS 1
UTILITIES POCSAG CATEGORY TONE NUMERIC ALPHANUM
HELP
SYNC WORD POCSAG INFORUF
TONE NUMBER A B C D
NUMERIC MESSAGE...
ALPHANUM MESSAGE... CURRENT: USER3
EDIT MESSAGE...
--------------------BIT ERRORS--------------------
ERROR BIT MASK 0
POSITION OF ERRONEOUS WORD 0
---------------MESSAGE GENERATION----------------
FILL-BATCHES BEFORE MESSAGE 0
TIME SLICE 10 sec

RECALCULATE
MODE ALWAYS SINGLE EXT-SINGLE EXTTRIG EXTTRIG-ALWAYS
EXECUTE SINGLE
CLOCK SOURCE INT EXT

Fig. 2-51 Menu DIGITAL MOD-POCSAG

STATE ON Switch on of POCSAG.

The RF frequency has to be set to the desired value by
means of key [FREQ]. An indication appears in the status
line: "PRE" stands for preamble. "MSGx" stands for
message, the number "x" denotes the current batch, "- - -"
stands for filler data (see POCSAG standard).
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:STAT ON
OFF Switch off of POCSAG.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:STAT OFF

1038.6002.02 2.127 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

MODULATION Selection of used modulation. Two types are available:

FSK The RF is directly modulated with the data signal.
FFSK An LF is first modulated, which is then used as the
modulation signal for the RF.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:MOD FSK

DEVIATION Input value of frequency deviation of modulation.

For FSK 4.0 kHz and 4.5 kHz are possible, for FFSK 1.5 kHz, 2.0
kHz, 3.0 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 4.0 kHz and 4.5 kHz. The instrument stores
two independent deviation values (one for each type of modulation).
The value which is displayed and used depends on the modulation
setting.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:DEV 4.5kHz

MOD POLARITY Selection of the polarity of the modulation.

NORM Polarity of modulation according to standard POCSAG.
INV Polarity of modulation inverted.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:POL NORM

LEVEL ATTENUATION Input value for the level attenuation. According to FTZ 171TR1
section [Link], the levels of the batches no. 2 up to no. 5 are
reduced by the value set here.

Notes: – This setting has an impact only, when a message or filler

batches are transmitted in any of the batches 2 to 5. The
unmodulated carrier emitted between the end of the
message and the beginning of the next call is not
attenuated. Usually, the message is transmitted in the first
batch. By setting FILL-BATCHES BEFORE MESSAGE,
however, the filler batches can be inserted prior to the
actual message.
– Entry of a value in this menu changes the LEVEL
ATTENUATION-value of the other DM-modulations, too.
IEC-bus command SOUR:DM:DATA:ALEV 0dB

BITRATE Selection of bitrate, at which the data should be outputted. Possible

values are:
512, 1200 and 2400 baud.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:BRAT 512bps

--- MESSAGE --- The parameters of this section are used for setting the destination
address as well as the useful data of the message.

ADDRESS Input value of the address of the pager to be called. The specified
range is 0 to 2097151.
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:MESS:ADDR 1

CATEGORY Selection of the category of the transmitted message.

NUMERIC numeric message,
TONE tone-only message
ALPHANUMERIC alphanumeric message
IEC-bus command SOUR:POCS:MESS:CAT TONE

1038.6002.02 2.128 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

SYNC WORD Selection of the contents of the sync word.

This word distinguishes between the various types of paging services.
POCSAG 0x7CD215D8; also used for CITYRUF
INFORUF 0x7CD21436.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:MESS:SWOR POCS

TONE NUMBER Input value of the tone which is transmitted during category TONE.
Four tones are available (A, B, C, D).
Notes: – Only true tone-only receivers can process all four possible
values.
– Numerical and alphanumerical receivers react to tone-only
pages only when tone number is B or C.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:MESS:TONE B

NUMERIC MESSAGE... Opens a window to enter the character string for a numeric or special
numeric message. SME provides a maximum of 41 characters.
Characters 0 to 9, U, -, [,] and blank space may be used.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:MESS:NUM "12-17"

ALPHANUM MESSAGE... Opens a window to select or create an alphanumeric message. There

is one common character set for FLEX (option SME-B41) and
POCSAG.
FOX "The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog"
ALPHA "ABCD..." (complete POCSAG character set)
USER1...4 Four messages that can be freely edited by command
EDIT MESSAGE.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:MESS:ALPH:SEL "USER3"

EDIT MESSAGE... Opens a window to edit one of the alphanumeric messages USER1
to USER4.
The following conversions are used for the German CITYRUF
network:

Hex-value USA Germany

0x5B [ Ä
0x5C \ Ö
0x5D ] Ü
0x7B { ä

0x7C  ö

0x7D } ü

0x7E ~ ß

IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:MESS:ALPH:DATA "Hello"

1038.6002.02 2.129 E-13

Digital Modulation SME

----BIT ERRORS--- The SME allows for providing a 32-bit-word of the transferred
message with bit errors for test purposes. The parameters of this
section specify the erroneous bits and their positions.

ERROR BIT MASK Entry of the erroneous bits in a 32-bit field. The transmitted
decimal number (0...4294967295) is converted internally into a
32-bit binary number and thus defines the 32 bits. These bits are
XORed with the word of the message which is to be falsified and
thus determine which bits of this word are to be transmitted
correctly or incorrectly.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:ERR:MASK 0

POSITION OF ERRONEOUS Entry value of the position of the word to be falsified in the batch.
WORD Values from 0 to 16 are valid. The value 0 denotes the
synchronization word.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:ERR:WORD 0

--- MESSAGE GENERATION --- The parameters of this section determine which types of data
(POCSAG message, POCSAG filler data) are sent at what time.

FILL-BATCHES BEFORE MESSAGE Input value for the number of filler batches emitted prior to the
actual message.
This allows, e. g., to create a test message according to FTZ
171TR1, appendix 1, section 3.2.2, where the message must
th
appear in the 7 batch
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:LBAT 0

TIME SLICE Input value of the length of the time slice.

Possible values are: 2 to 120 sec.
A preamble of 576 bits is sent at the beginning of every time slice,
followed by the number of filler batches set under FILL-BATCHES
BEFORE MESSAGE. Each batch has the length of 544 bits.
Depending on the settings under MODE, zero, one or two
message batches follow. Then an unmodulated signal is sent up
to the end of the time slice.
Due to the fact that only complete code word groups are sent, it is
possible that, depending on the set bit rate, the actual length of
the time slice slightly differs from the set length of the time slice.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:TSL 10

RECALCULATE Ð Triggers a recalculation of the generated POCSAG telegram.

The telegram which is to be sent is recalculated using the set
values. As a result of this function, a change in the settings also
becomes effective in the generated signal.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:POCS:STAT OFF;STAT ON

1038.6002.02 2.130 E-13

SME Digital Modulation

MODE Selection of sequence of messages and filler data.

ALWAYS The message is continuously output according to the
time interval which is set under TIME SLICE.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO
SINGLE The time slices without message are continuously
output. If EXECUTE SINGLE is selected, a time slice
with the message is output once.
IEC-bus command :TRIG:DM:SOUR SING
:SOUR:POCS:TACT MESS
EXT The time slices without message are continuously
output. If EXECUTE SINGLE is selected, a time slice
with the message is output once.
IEC-bus command:TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT
:SOUR:POCS:TACT MESS

EXTTRIG The SME only starts with the generation of the

POCSAG signal after recognition of a trigger pulse
at the trigger input connector. After recognition of
this signal, exactly one message is output.
IEC-bus command::TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT;
:SOUR:POCS:TACT ONCE

EXTTRIG-ALWAYS
The units waits for a signal edge at the trigger
connector. After recognition of this edge, the unit
behaves as described under setting ALWAYS.
IEC-bus command: :TRIG:DM:SOUR EXT;
:SOUR:POCS:TACT STAR

EXECUTE SINGLE Ð The set message is output exactly once at the next possible point
of time. This triggerable action is only displayed and active when
MODE SINGLE has been selected.
IEC-bus command *TRG

CLOCK SOURCE Selection of the clock source. This setting is also valid for
ERMES, FLEX and REFLEX but not for the other digital
modulations.
INT The clock required for signal generation is generated
internally and can be tapped at the CLOCK connector.
EXT The signal applied to the CLOCK connector is used
as the clock signal.
Note: For all bit rates, i.e. for 1600 bps and 3200 bps, a symbol
clock rate of 3200 Hz is always used. This applies to both
the output (CLOCK SOURCE INT) and the input (CLOCK
SOURCE EXT) of the clock.
IEC-bus command :SOUR:DM:COMP:CLOC:SOUR INT

1038.6002.02 2.131 E-13

LF-Output SME

2.7 LF-Output

Depending on which options are fitted (cf. table 2-4), internal LF generator 1 and/or 2 are available as a
signal source for the LF output.

Menu LF OUTPUT offers access to the settings of the LF output.

Notes: - An alteration of the waveform or frequency of the internal modulation generators in the LF-
output menu has a parallel effect on the modulation for which the respective generator is
selected as modulation source.
- The SWEEP function of LF generator 2 can be activated in menu SWEEP-LF-GEN2.
- Key [G/n] dBµ switches the unit of the display / LF level output voltage setting to dBu.

Menu selection: LF OUTPUT

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY STATE OFF ON

LEVEL VOLTAGE 1.000 V
MODULATION SOURCE LFGEN1 LFGEN2
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT LFGEN1 FREQ 0.4 k 1k 3k 15k Hz
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ LFGEN2 FREQ 1.000 0 kHz
UTILITIES LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN SQR TRI NOI
HELP

Fig. 2-52 Menu LF OUTPUT (preset setting), fitted with option SM-B6, multifunction generator

STATE Switching on/off the LF output. Parameter LF STATE has no influence on the
modulation settings.
IEC bus short command :OUTP2 ON

VOLTAGE Input value of the output voltage of the LF output. The input is effected in the
form of a peak voltage. If no LF generator option is fitted, the constant output
voltage of the standard generator (VS = 1 V ) is indicated.
IEC Bus short command :OUTP2:VOLT 1V

1038.6002.02 2.132 E-13

SME LF-Output

Notes: If LF generator 2 (LFGEN2) is selected as source and

- STEREO operating mode is activated,
the voltage of the LF output depends on the setting of the
wanted and the pilot deviation and cannot be changed in this
menu. The output voltage is 6 dBu (1.55 VRMS at 600 ?) per
40 kHz of set sum deviation. The following is displayed:
VOLTAGE (STEREO) 6dBu / 40 kHz
- one of operating modes VOR, ILS-GS or ILS-LOC is activated,
the input of the output voltage of the LF output is effected
relative to the set sum modulation depth. The following is
displayed, e.g. in the case of VOR modulation:
VOLTAGE (VOR/ILS) per 100% DEPTH 1.000 V

LF SOURCE Selection of the signal source for the LF output.

IEC bus short command :OUTP2:SOUR 0 (Selection of LF generator 1)
:OUTP2:SOUR 2 (Selection of LF generator 2)

LFGEN1 FREQ Input value of the frequency of internal modulation generator 1.

IEC bus short command :SOUR0:FREQ 1kHz

LFGEN1 SHAPE Input value of the signal shape for modulation generator 1. The signal shape of
modulation generator 1 can only be set if two modulation generator options are
fitted.
IEC bus short command :SOUR0:FUNC SIN

LFGEN2 FREQ Input value of the frequency of internal modulation generator 2. This parameter
is only displayed if a modulation generator option is fitted.
IEC bus short command :SOUR2:FREQ 1kHz
Note: In operating modes Stereo, VOR, ILS... or LF-Sweep the value
indication is replaced by "STEREO", "VOR", "ILS.." or "SWEEP".

LFGEN2 SHAPE Input value of the signal shape of modulation generator 2. This parameter is
only displayed if a modulation generator option is fitted.
IEC bus short command :SOUR2:FUNC SIN
Notes: - A selection of signal shape NOI in the LF-SWEEP operating
mode automatically leads to this operating mode being aborted.
- In operating modes STEREO, VOR, ILS.. an indication of this
parameter is eliminated. Instead, a selection between STEREO
OUTPUT MPX and PILOT is possible (see below).

STEREO OUTPUT Selection of the stereo signal at the LF output. This parameter is only displayed
if STEREO modulation is activated.
MPX Output of the complete Stereo multiplex signal.
PILOT Output of the pilot tone.
IEC bus short commands :SOUR:STER:STAT ON;
:OUTP2:SOUR 2;
:OUTP2:SOUR:STER MPX

1038.6002.02 2.133 E-13

Sweep SME

2.8 Sweep

The SME offers a digital step-by-step sweep for parameters:

• RF frequency
• LF frequency
• RF level
In addition to the digital step-by-step sweep, an analog sweep for RF frequency and RF level is possible
by switching on frequency or amplitude modulation with an internal saw tooth.

Setting a sweep is effected in five basic steps which are shown in the following example, the setting of a
frequency sweep:

1. Set sweep range (START and STOP or CENTER and SPAN).

2. Select linear or logarithmic sequence (SPACING).
3. Set step width (STEP) and dwell time (DWELL).
4. Activate marker if desired (MARKER).
5. Switch on sweep (MODE set to AUTO, SINGLE or STEP).

2.8.1 Setting the Sweep Range (START, STOP, CENTER and SPAN)
The sweep range of the RF sweep can be entered in two different ways. Either by entering the START
and STOP value or by entering CENTER and SPAN. Please observe that the two parameter sets
influence one another. The influence is exerted in the following way:

• START frequency altered: STOP = unaltered

CENTER = (START + STOP)/2
SPAN = (STOP - START)

• STOP frequency altered: START = unaltered

CENTER = (START + STOP)/2
SPAN = (STOP - START)

• CENTER frequency altered SPAN = unaltered

START = (CENTER - SPAN/2)
STOP = (CENTER + SPAN/2)

• SPAN frequency altered: CENTER = unaltered

START = (CENTER - SPAN/2)
STOP = (CENTER + SPAN/2)

1038.6002.02 2.134 E-13

SME Sweep

2.8.2 Selecting the Sweep Run (SPACING LIN, LOG)

The sweep run, linear or logarithmic, can be selected using SPACING. For the RF and LF sweep, a
linear or logarithmic run is possible. For level sweep, only the logarithmic run is possible.

With the logarithmic sweep, step width STEP is equal to a constant fraction of the present setting. The
logarithmic step width is entered in unit % with RF or LF sweep, in unit dB with level sweep.

2.8.3 Operating Modes (MODE)

The following sweep operating modes are available:

AUTO Sweep from the starting point to the stop point, with automatic restart at the starting
point. If another sweep operating mode was activated prior to the AUTO operating
mode, continuation is made from the current sweep setting (cf. Fig. 2-52).
IEC bus short commands:
RF sweep: LF sweep: Level sweep:
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR2:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:SOUR AUTO TRIG2:SOUR AUTO TRIG:SOUR AUTO

SINGLE Single run from the starting point to the stop point. If SINGLE is selected, the run is
not started yet. Function EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP Ð to be executed, which can
be used to start the run, is displayed below the MODE line (cf. Fig. 2-53).
IEC bus short commands:
RF sweep: LF sweep: Level sweep:
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR2:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:SOUR SING TRIG2:SOUR SING TRIG:SOUR SING

STEP Step-by-step, manual run within the sweep limits. Activating STEP stops a running
sweep and the cursor wraps to the indication value of CURRENT. The sweep run
can now be controlled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob
or the numeric keys.
IEC bus short commands:
RF sweep: LF sweep: Level sweep:
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR2:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:MODE STEP SOUR2:SWE:MODE STEP SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE STEP
TRIG:SOUR SING TRIG2:SOUR SING TRIG:SOUR SING

EXT-SINGLE Single run from the starting point to the stop point as in the case of SINGLE, but
triggered by an external trigger signal.
IEC-bus commands:
RF sweep: LF sweep: Level sweep:
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR2:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:SOUR EXT TRIG2:SOUR EXT TRIG:SOUR EXT

1038.6002.02 2.135 E-13

Sweep SME

EXT-STEP Step-by-step run by means of the external trigger signal. Each trigger event triggers
a single step.
IEC-bus commands:
RF sweep: LF sweep: Level sweep:
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR2:FREQ:MODE SWE SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:MODE STEP SOUR2:SWE:MODE STEP SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE STEP
TRIG:SOUR EXT TRIG2:SOUR EXT TRIG:SOUR EXT

OFF The sweep operating mode is switched off.

IEC-bus commands:
RF sweep: LF sweep: Level sweep:
SOUR:FREQ:MODE CW SOUR2:FREQ:MODE CW SOUR:POW:MODE CW

2.8.4 Trigger Input

An external signal at the rear input triggers the sweep in the EXT-SINGLE and EXT-STEP operating
modes. The polarity of the active trigger edge can be set in menu UTILITIES - AUX I/O EXT TRIG
SLOPE .

2.8.5 Sweep Outputs

Outputs X-AXIS, BLANK and MARKER are available at the rear of the instrument to control and trigger
oscilloscopes or XY recorders.

X-AXIS With sweep switched on, this output supplies a voltage ramp of 0 to 10 V for the X-
deflection of an oscilloscope or an XY recorder.

BLANK This output supplies a signal (0V/5V) to trigger and blank an oscilloscope or for the
PEN LIFT control of an XY recorder. The polarity and the period of the signal can be
set under UTILITIES - AUX I/O - BLANK POLARITY and - BLANK TIME.

1038.6002.02 2.136 E-13

SME Sweep

MARKER This output becomes active when the sweep run has reached the mark. The
MARKER signal can be used for the brightness control of an oscilloscope. Up to
three marks can be set in order to mark certain positions in the sweep run. The
polarity of the signal can be set in menu UTILITIES - AUX I/O - MARKER
POLARITY. The period of the active signal is equal to the dwell time (DWELL) of a
step.

Signal examples:

10 V

X-AXIS

0V

5V
BLANK
0V

5V
MARKER
0V

Fig.

Fig. 2-53 Signal example sweep: MODE = AUTO, BLANK TIME = NORMAL

SINGLE restarted
10 V

X-AXIS

0V 200 ms
300 ms
5V
BLANK

0V

Fig. 2-54 Signal example sweep: MODE = SINGLE, BLANK TIME = LONG

1038.6002.02 2.137 E-13

Sweep SME

2.8.6 RF-Sweep
Menu SWEEP - FREQ offers access to settings for RF sweep.

Menu selection: SWEEP - FREQ

START FREQ 100.000 000 0 MHz

STOP FREQ 500.000 000 0 MHz
LEVEL - 30.0 dBm
RF-SWP

FREQUENCY FREQ START FREQ 100.000 000 0 MHz

LEVEL LEVEL STOP FREQ 500.000 000 0 MHz
MODULATION LFGEN CENTER FREQ 300.000 000 0 MHz
DIGITAL MOD SPAN 400.000 000 0 MHZ
LF OUTPUT CURRENT FREQ 100.000 000 0 MHz
SWEEP
LIST SPACING LIN LOG
MEM SEQ STEP LIN 1.000 000 0 MHz
UTILITIES DWELL 15.0 ms
HELP MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT-SINGLE EXT-STEP
EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP
RESET SWEEP

MARKER 1 FREQ 100.000 0 MHz

MARKER 1 STATE OFF ON
AMPLITUDE MARKER 1 OFF ON
MARKER 2 FREQ 200.000 0 MHz
MARKER 2 STATE OFF ON
AMPLITUDE MARKER 2 OFF ON
MARKER 3 FREQ 300.000 0 MHz
MARKER 3 STATE OFF ON
AMPLITUDE MARKER 3 OFF ON

Fig. 2-55 Menu SWEEP - FREQ

[Link].[Link].1
START FREQ Input value of the starting frequency.
IEC bus short command :SOUR:FREQ:STAR 100MHz

STOP FREQ Input value of the stop frequency.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:FREQ:STOP 500MHz

CENTER FREQ Input value of the center frequency.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:FREQ:CENT 300MHz

SPAN Input value of the span.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:FREQ:SPAN 100MHz

CURRENT FREQ Indication of the current frequency value.

Operating mode STEP: Input value of the frequency.

STEP LIN (LOG) Input value of the step width. Depending on whether SPACING LIN or LOG
is selected, STEP LIN or STEP LOG is displayed.
IEC bus short command :SOUR:SWE:STEP:LIN 1MHz

1038.6002.02 2.138 E-13

SME Sweep

DWELL Input value of the dwell time per step.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:SWE:DWEL 10ms

SPACING Input value of the dwell time per step.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:SWE:SPAC LIN

MODE Selection of the sweep operating mode (cf. Section 2.8.3)..

IEC bus short commands :SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE; :SWE:MODE AUTO;
:TRIG:SOUR SING

EXECUTE SINGLE Starts a single sweep run. This action to be executed is only indicated and is
SWEEP ➤ only effective if MODE SINGLE has been selected.
IEC bus short command :TRIG

RESET SWEEP ➤ Sets the starting frequency.

IEC bus short command :ABOR

MARKER 1 FREQ Input value of the frequency for the marker selected
MARKER 2 FREQ IEC bus short command :MARK1:FREQ 100MHz
MARKER 3 FREQ

MARKER 1 STATE Switching on/off the marker selected

MARKER 2 STATE IEC bus short command :SOUR:MARK1 OFF
MARKER 3 STATE

AMPLITUDE MARKER1 Switching on/off the amplitude marker selected

AMPLITUDE MARKER 2 OFF Input value of the frequency for the marker selected
AMPLITUDE MARKER 3 ON Amplitude marker is switched on. On reaching the mark the output
level is reduced by 1 dB.
IEC bus short command :SOUR:MARK1:AMPL OFF

1038.6002.02 2.139 E-13

Sweep SME

2.8.7 LEVEL Sweep

Menu SWEEP - LEVEL offers access to settings for LEVEL sweep.

Menu selection: SWEEP - LEVEL

START LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz STOP LEVEL - 10.0 dBm
LEV-SWP

FREQUENCY FREQ START LEVEL -30.0 dBm

LEVEL LEVEL STOP LEVEL -10.0 dBm
MODULATION LFGEN CURRENT LEVEL -30.0 dBm
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT STEP 1.0 dB
SWEEP DWELL 15.0 ms
LIST MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT-SINGLE EXT-STEP
MEM SEQ EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP
UTILITIES RESET SWEEP
HELP
MARKER 1 LEVEL +1.0 dB
MARKER 1 STATE OFF ON

MARKER 2 LEVEL +2.0 dB

MARKER 2 STATE OFF ON

MARKER 3 LEVEL +3.0 dB

MARKER 3 STATE OFF ON

Fig. 2-56 Menu SWEEP - LEVEL

START LEVEL Input value of the starting level.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:POW:STAR -30dBm

STOP LEVEL Input value of the stop levell. IEC bus short command
:SOUR:POW:STOP -10dBm

CURRENT LEVEL Indication of the current level.

Operating mode STEP: Input value of the level.

STEP Input value of the step width.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:SWE:POW:STEP 1dB

DWELL Input value of the dwell time per step

IEC bus short command :SOUR:SWE:POW:DWEL 15ms

MODE Selection of the sweep operating mode (cf. Section 2.8.3).

IEC bus short command :SOUR:POW:MODE SWE;
:SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO;
:TRIG:SOUR SING

1038.6002.02 2.140 E-13

SME Sweep

EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP Ð Starts a single sweep run. This action to be executed is only
indicated and is only effective if MODE SINGLE is selected.
IEC bus short command :TRIG

RESET SWEEP Ð Sets the starting level.

IEC bus short command :ABOR

MARKER 1 LEVEL Input value of the level for the marker selected.
MARKER 2 LEVEL IEC bus short command :SOUR:MARK1:PSW:POW 0dBm
MARKER 3 LEVEL

MARKER 1 STATE Switching on/off the marker selected.

MARKER 2 STATE IEC bus short command :SOUR:MARK1:PSW OFF
MARKER 3 STATE

2.8.8 LF-Sweep
Menu SWEEP - LF GEN offers access to settings for LF sweep.

Note: Settings LF SWEEP and SOURCE LFGEN2 SHAPE NOI deactivate one another.

Menu selection: SWEEP - LF GEN2

START FREQ 100.000 0 kHz

STOP FREQ 50.000 0 kHz
LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

LF2-SWP

FREQUENCY FREQ START FREQ 100.000 0 kHz

LEVEL LEVEL STOP FREQ 50.000 0 kHz
MODULATION LFGEN CURRENT FREQ 82.000 0 kHz
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT SPACING LIN LOG
SWEEP STEP LIN 1.000 0 kHz
LIST DWELL 15.0 ms
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT-INGLE EXT-STEP
HELP EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP
RESET SWEEP

MARKER 1 FREQ 1.000 0 kHz

MARKER 1 STATE OFF ON

MARKER 2 FREQ 2.000 0 kHz

MARKER 2 STATE OFF ON

MARKER 3 FREQ 3.000 0 kHz

MARKER 3 STATE OFF ON

Fig. 2-57 Menu SWEEP - LF GEN

1038.6002.02 2.141 E-13

Sweep SME

START FREQ Input value of the starting frequency.

IEC bus short command :SOUR:SOUR2:FREQ:STAR 100kHz

STOP FREQ Input value of the stop frequency.

IEC bus short command :SOUR2:FREQ:STOP 50kHz

CURRENT FREQ Indication of the current frequency value.

Operating mode STEP: Input value of the frequency.

STEP Input value of the step width.

IEC bus short command :SOUR2:SWE:STEP:LIN 1kHz

DWELL Input value of the dwell time per step.

IEC bus short command :SOUR2:SWE:DWEL 15ms

SPACING Selection of the sweep run, linear or logarithmic.

IEC bus short command :SOUR2:SWE:SPAC LIN

MODE Selection of the sweep operating mode (cf. Section 2.8.3).

IEC bus short command :SOUR2:FREQ:MODE SWE
:SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO
:TRIG2:S:SOUR OUR SING

EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP Ð Starts a single sweep run. This action to be executed is only indicated
and is only effective if MODE SINGLE is selected.
IEC bus short command :TRIG

RESET SWEEP Ð Sets the starting frequency.

IEC bus short command :ABOR

MARKER 1 FREQ Input value of the frequency for the marker selected.
MARKER 2 FREQ IEC bus short command :SOUR2:MARK1:FREQ 1kHz
MARKER 3 FREQ

MARKER 1 STATE Switching on/off the marker selected.

MARKER 2 STATE IEC bus short command :SOUR2:MARK1 OFF
MARKER 3 STATE

1038.6002.02 2.142 E-13

SME LIST Mode

2.9 LIST Mode

A sequence of predefined frequency and level points is executed in the LIST mode, similar as in a
sweep. Differently from the sweep, however, a list with freely selectable pairs of values (frequency and
level) can be generated. The specified range of the frequency comprises the entire adjustable frequency
range of the instrument. The specified range of the level covers a 20-dB range. If the permissible
variation range is exceeded, the level error increases.

Caution: After the generation or change of a list in the LIST mode, function LEARN has to be started
to ensure that the new settings are transferred to the hardware.

Table 2-6 LIST mode; Example of a list

Index Frequency Level

0001 100 MHz 0 dBm

0002 575 MHz 13 dBm

0003 235 MHz 7 dBm

0100 333 MHz 5 dBm

: : :

Up to 10 lists can be created. The total amount of possible pairs of values including all lists may
maximally be 2000. I.e., a list may have 2000 entries at the most, or less if several lists have been
created.

Each list is identified by a separate name and selected via this name. A detailed description how to
process the lists can be found in Section 2.2.4, List Editor.

2.9.1 Operating Modes (MODE)

The following LIST-operating modes are available:

AUTO Run from the beginning to the end of the list with automatic restart at the beginning.
If another mode was activated prior to the AUTO operating mode, continuation is
made from the current index.
IEC bus short commands: :SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST
:SOUR:LIST:MODE AUTO
:TRIG:LIST:SOUR AUTO

SINGLE Single run from the beginning to the end of the list. If SINGLE is selected, the run is
not yet started. Function EXECUTE SINGLE LIST ➤ to be executed, which can be
used to start the run, is displayed below the MODE line.
IEC bus short commands: :SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST
:SOUR:LIST:MODE AUTO
:TRIG:LIST:SOUR SING

1038.6002.02 2.143 E-13

LIST Mode SME

STEP Step-by-step manual processing of the list. Activating STEP stops a list running and
the cursor wraps to the indication value of CURRENT INDEX. The list can now be
controlled upwards or downwards in discrete steps using the rotary knob or the
numeric keys.
IEC bus short commands: :SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST
:SOUR:LIST:MODE STEP
:TRIG:LIST:SOUR SING

EXT-SINGLE Single run from the beginning to the end of the list as with SINGLE, but triggered by
an external trigger signal.
IEC bus short commands: :SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST;
:SOUR:LIST:MODE AUTO
:TRIG:LIST:SOUR EXT

EXT-STEP Step-by-step run by means of the external trigger signal. Each trigger event triggers
a single step.
IEC bus short commands: :SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST
:SOUR:LIST:MODE STEP
:TRIG:LIST:SOUR EXT

OFF Operating mode LIST is switched off.

IEC bus short command: :FREQ:MODE CW

2.9.2 Inputs/Outputs
TRIGGER input and BLANK output are available at the rear of the instrument for synchronization with
other instruments.

TRIGGER An external signal at this input triggers the LIST mode in operating modes
EXT-SINGLE and EXT-STEP. The polarity of the active trigger edge can be
set in the UTILITIES - AUX I/O - EXT TRIG SLOPE menu.

BLANK This output supplies a signal (0 V/5 V) to blank the settling process by means
of pulse modulation or AM. The signal can also be used to synchronize other
instruments. The polarity of the signal can be set in the UTILITIES - AUX I/O -
BLANK POLARITY menu.

MARKER At the first step of the LIST mode, this output provides an approx. 200 µs
trigger signal immediately after blanking. At small DWELL times, this signal
can be used for an accurate synchronization to trigger other devices and
shows the first stable output frequency. The delay to the fed-in signal at the
TRIGGER input for EXT-SINGLE or EXT-STEP is 1.5 to 2 ms and has a jitter
of 0.5 ms.

1038.6002.02 2.144 E-13

SME LIST Mode

TRIGGER input

BLANK-output

MARKER-output

Frequency

Fig. 2-58 Signal example LIST mode: MODE = EXT-STEP

The LIST menu offers access to settings for the LIST mode.

Menu selection: LIST

FREQ
- - -.- - - LEVEL - - -.-
LIST

FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT-SINGLE EXT-STEP

LEVEL EXECUTE SINGLE LIST
MODULATION RESET LIST
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT DWELL 10.0 ms
SWEEP CURRENT INDEX 1
LIST LEARN
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES SELECT LIST... CURRENT: LIST2
HELP DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW

Fig. 2-59 Menu LIST - OPERATION page

MODE Selection of the operating mode (cf. Section 2.9.1, operating modes).
IEC bus short commands : :SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST;
:SOUR:LIST:MODE AUTO;
:TRIG:LIST:SOUR SING

EXECUTE SINGLE LIST Ð Starts a single run of a list. This menu option is only visible if MODE
SINGLE is selected.
IEC bus short command : :TRIG:LIST

1038.6002.02 2.145 E-13

LIST Mode SME

RESET LIST Ð Sets the starting point.

IEC-bus short command :ABOR:LIST

DWELL Input value of the dwell time per step.

IEC-bus short command :SOUR:LIST:DWEL 10ms

CURRENT INDEX Indication of the current list index. Setting value of the current list index in the
STEP operating mode.

LEARN Ð Starts the LEARN function. All value pairs of the active list are subsequently
set by the instrument with the current additional parameters, and the hardware
setting data are stored.
Caution: This function must be called after every creating and altering the
list (or the remaining setting data).
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:LIST:LEAR

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or creation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:LIST:SEL "LIST2"

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

IEC-bus short command :SOUR:LIST:DEL "LIST1"

FUNCTION Selection of the editor functions to process a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).
IEC-bus short command
:SOUR:LIST:FREQ 100MHz, 1.2GHz; POW 0dBm, 6dBm

1038.6002.02 2.146 E-13

SME LIST Mode

The second page of the LIST menu, the EDIT page is automatically activated if one of the editor
functions of line FUNCTION is selected. The list which is displayed as CURRENT LIST in the SELECT
LIST line is shown.

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SELECT LIST... CURRENT: LIST2

LEVEL FUNCTION FILL-LIST INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW
MODULATION -INDEX- FREE 2041 - LEN 2055 FREQ LEVEL
DIGITAL MOD 0001 575.000 000 0 MHz 13.0 dBm
LF OUTPUT 0002 235.000 000 0 MHz 7.0 dBm
SWEEP 0003 123.000 000 0 MHz 1.0 dBm
LIST 0004 456.000 000 0 MHz 1.0 dBm
MEM SEQ 0005 735.000 000 0 MHz 3.0 dBm
UTILITIES 0006 333.000 000 0 MHz 4.0 dBm
HELP 0007 400.000 000 0 MHz 7.0 dBm
0008 235.000 000 0 MHz 7.0 dBm

Fig. 2-60 Menu List - EDIT page

INDEX Index of the list.

FREE Indication of the list entries still vacant.

LENGTH Length of the current list.

FREQ Parameter: Frequency.

LEVEL Parameter: Level; specified range 20 dB.

1038.6002.02 2.147 E-13

Memory Sequence SME

2.10 Memory Sequence

In the memory-sequence operating mode the instrument automatically services a list with stored
instrument settings. Memory locations 1 to 50, which are loaded using SAVE and whose stored settings
are called either separately using RECALL or automatically and subsequently in the SEQUENCE mode,
are available.

The list is continuously serviced from the beginning to the end with a continual index. The order of the
memories to be passed through is arbitrary. Each setting can be assigned a freely selectable dwell time.
The dwell time determines the duration of the setting, its minimal value is 50 ms, its maximal value 60
sec.

The list is divided up into 3 columns for list index, memory location number (Memory) and dwell time
(Dwell) .. The beginning of the list has index 1.

Table 2-7 MEMORY SEQUENCE; Example of a list

Index Memory Dwell

001 09 50.0 ms

002 02 50.0 ms

003 01 75.0 ms

004 10 75.0 ms

... ... ...

Up to 10 sequence lists can be created. The total number of possible list elements is maximally 256.
I.e., a list can have 256 entries at the most, or less if several lists have been created.

Each list is identified by a separate name and selected via this name. A detailed description how to
process the lists can be found in Section 2.2.4, List Editor.

Note: Frequently changing the level in the operating mode MEMORY SEQUENCE can stress the
mechanically switched attenuator. The attenuator is also actuated when AM is switched on or
off. For this reason we recommend that you make use of the non-interrupting level setting as
much as possible and that you use the setting AM 0% instead of switching AM off.

Operating Modes (MODE)

The following operating modes are available:

AUTO Run from the beginning to the end of the list with automatic restart at the
beginning. If another mode was activated prior to the AUTO operating mode,
continuation is made from the current index.
IEC-bus short command: :SYST:MODE MSEQ;
:SYST:MSEQ:MODE AUTO
:TRIG:MSEQ:SOUR AUTO

1038.6002.02 2.148 E-13

SME Memory Sequence

SINGLE Single run from the beginning to the end of the list. If SINGLE is selected, the
run is not yet started. Below the MODE line, function EXECUTE SINGLE
SEQUENCE ➤ to be executed is displayed which can be used to start the run.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:MODE MSEQ;
:SYST:MSEQ:MODE AUTO
:TRIG:MSEQ:SOUR SING

STEP Step-by-step manual processing of the list. Activating STEP stops an automatic
run and the cursor wraps to the indication value of CURRENT INDEX. The list
can now be passed through upwards or downwards step by step using the
rotary knob.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:MODE MSEQ;
:SYST:MSEQ:MODE STEP
:TRIG:MSEQ:SOUR SING

EXT-SINGLE Single run from the beginning to the end of the list as with SINGLE, but
triggered by an external trigger signal.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:MODE MSEQ;
:SYST:MSEQ:MODE AUTO
:TRIG:MSEQ:SOUR EXT

EXT-STEP Step-by-step run using the external trigger signal. Each trigger event triggers a
single step.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:MODE MSEQ;
:SYST:MSEQ:MODE STEP
:TRIG:MSEQ:SOUR EXT

OFF Step-by-step run using the external trigger signal. Each trigger event triggers a
single step.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:MODE FIX

1038.6002.02 2.149 E-13

Memory Sequence SME

External Trigger
An external signal at the rear input TRIGGER triggers the MEMORY SEQUENCE in the EXT-SINGLE
and EXT-STEP operating modes. The polarity of the active trigger edge can be set in the UTILITIES -
AUX I/O - EXT TRIG SLOPE menu.

Menu MEM SEQ with the two menu pages OPERATION and EDIT offers access to the
memory-sequence operating mode.

Menu selection: MEM SEQ

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY MODE OFF AUTO SINGLE STEP EXT-SINGLE EXT-STEP

LEVEL
MODULATION RESET SEQUENCE
DIGITAL MOD
LF OUTPUT CURRENT INDEX 1
SWEEP
LIST
MEM SEQ
UTILITIES SELECT LIST... CURRENT: MSEQ1
HELP DELETE LIST...
FUNCTION
FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW

Fig. 2-61 Menu MEM SEQ -OPERATION-page (preset setting)

MODE Selection of the operating mode; setting the operating mode

regards various command systems at the IEC bus (cf. above).

EXECUTE SINGLE SEQUENCE Ð Starts the single run of a memory sequence. This menu option is
only visible if MODE SINGLE is selected.
IEC-bus short command :TRIG:MSEQ

RESET SEQUENCE Ð Wrap to the beginning of the list.

IEC-bus short command :ABOR:MSEQ

CURRENT INDEX Indication of the current list index. Setting value of the current list
index in the MODE STEP operating mode.

SELECT LIST... Selection of a list or generation of a new list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List
Editor).
IEC-bus short command :SYST:MSEQ:SEL "MSEQ1"

DELETE LIST... Deletion of a list (cf. Section 2.2.4, List Editor).

IEC-bus short command :SYST:MSEQ:DEL "MSEQ2"

FUNCTION Selection of the editor functions to process a list (cf. Section 2.2.4,
List Editor).
IEC-bus short command :SYST:MSEQ 9,2,...;
:SYST:MSEQ:DWEL 50ms, 50ms,.

1038.6002.02 2.150 E-13

SME Memory Sequence

The second page of menu MEM SEQ, the EDIT page, is automatically activated if one of the editor
functions of the FUNCTION line is selected. The list which is entered as CURRENT LIST in the
SELECT LIST line is shown.

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SELECT LIST... CURRENT: MSEQ1

LEVEL FUNCTION FILL INSERT DELETE EDIT/VIEW
MODULATION -INDEX - FREE 2041 - LEN 2055 MEMORY DWELL
DIGITAL MOD 001 09 50 ms
LF OUTPUT 002 02 50 ms
SWEEP 003 01 60 ms
LIST 004 23 60 ms
MEM SEQ 005 09 85 ms
UTILITIES 006 10 85 ms
HELP 007 08 85 ms
008 11 85 ms

Fig. 2-62 Menu MEM SEQ - EDIT page

INDEX Index of the list.

FREE Indication of the list entries still vacant.

LEN Length of the current list.

MEMORY Parameter: number of memory location; range 1 to 50.

DWELL Parameter: dwell time; specified range 50 ms to 60 sec, step width 1 ms.

1038.6002.02 2.151 E-13

Utilities SME

2.11 Utilities

The UTILITIES menu contains submenus for general functions which do not directly relate to the signal
generation.

2.11.1 IEC-Bus Address (SYSTEM-GPIB)

Submenu SYSTEM-GPIB offers access to the remote-control address. The setting range is 0 to 30. At
the point of delivery address 28 is set.

Menu selection: UTILITIES -SYSTEM -GPIB

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM GPIB ADDRESS 28

LEVEL REF OSC RS232
MODULATION PHASE SECURITY
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LANGUAGE
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-63 Menu UTILITIES -SYSTEM -GPIB

ADDRESS Input value of the IEC-bus address

IEC-bus short command :SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 28

1038.6002.02 2.152 E-13

SME Utilities

2.11.2 Parameter of the RS232 Interface (SYSTEM-RS232)

Submenu SYSTEM-RS232 offers access to the configuration of the RS-232 interface. The pin
assignment of the interface corresponds to the pin assignment of a PC.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - SYSTEM - RS232

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM GPIB DATA FORMAT 8 Bits

LEVEL REF OSC RS232 PARITY NO
MODULATION PHASE SECURITY STOP BIT 1
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LANGUAGE BAUD RATE 9600 bps
LF OUTPUT CALIB HANDSHAKE OFF RTS/CTS XON/XOFF
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-64 Menu UTILITIES - SYSTEM - RS232

DATA FORMAT Indication of the number of data bits. This value cannot be changed.

PARITY Indication of parity. This value cannot be changed.

STOP BIT Indication of the number of stop bits. This value cannot be changed.

BAUD RATE Selection of the baud rate.

IEC-bus short command :SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 9600

HANDSHAKE Selection of the handshake.

OFF No handshake
IEC-bus short command :SYST:COMM:SER:PACE NONE
:SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS ON
RTS/CTS Hardware handshake using the interface lines RTS and CTS. This
mode always is to be preferred to XON/XOFF mode, if permitted by
the configuration of the host computer.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS RFR
XON/XOFF Software handshake using the ASCII codes 11h <XON> and 13h
<XOFF>. This mode is not recommended for binary data and for
baud rates above 9600 baud.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:COMM:SER:PACE XON

1038.6002.02 2.153 E-13

Utilities SME

2.11.3 Suppressing Indications and Deleting Memories (SYSTEM-SECURITY)

For security interests, indications can be suppressed and memories deleted in the SYSTEM-SECURITY
submenu.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - SYSTEM-SECURITY

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM GPIB STATE OFF ON

LEVEL REF OSC RS232 ANNOTTATION FREQ OFF ON
MODULATION PHASE SECURITY ANNOTTATION AMPLITUDE OFF ON
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LANGUAGE CLEAR MEMORY
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-65 Menu UTILITIES - SYSTEM-SECURITY

STATE Selection of the SECURITY state

ON Locks the suppression of the indications. Can only be
set via IEC bus.
OFF Deactivates the interlock of the indication
suppression. The preset state is set in the transition
ON→OFF, and all data stored such as settings, with
the exception of the DM lists are deleted. Can only
be set via IEC bus.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:SEC OFF

ANNOTATION FREQ OFF All frequency indications are suppressed.

ON The frequency setting is displayed..
IEC-bus short command :DISP:ANN:FREQ ON

ANNOTATION AMPLITUDE OFF All level indications are suppressed.

ON The level setting is displayed.
IEC-bus short command :DISP:ANN:AMPL ON

CLEAR MEMORY Ð Deletion of all data stored such as settings, user correction and
list settings stored, with the exception of the DM lists.
For this action, two commands are necessary at the IEC bus:
IEC-bus short command :SYST:SEC ON; SEC OFF

1038.6002.02 2.154 E-13

SME Utilities

2.11.4 Indication of the IEC-Bus Language (LANGUAGE)

Submenu UTILITIES-SYSTEM LANGUAGE indicates the IEC-bus language and the current SCPI
version.

2.11.5 Reference Frequency Internal/External (REF OSC)

In the internal-reference operating mode, the internal reference signal at a frequency of 10 MHz is
available at the REF socket (rear of the instrument).

Signal level: Veff (EMF, sine) = 1 V.

The frequency of the internal reference oscillator can be detuned via the TUNE input (rear of the
instrument). Input voltage range ±10 V, pulling range ±1×10-6.
The external detuning is possible in both states of the ADJUSTMENT STATE (ON or OFF) unless
option SM-B1, reference oscillator OCXO, is fitted. If option SM-B1, reference oscillator OCXO, is fitted,
the detuning via the TUNE input is only possible if the ADJUSTMENT STATE selection has been
switched to ON in the UTILITIES-REF OSC menu.

In the external-reference operating mode, an external signal at a frequency of 1 MHz to 16 MHz

(spacing 1 MHz) is to be fed into socket REF. The setting to external frequency is effected in the
UTILITIES-REF OSC menu.

Signal level: Veff = 0.1 to 2 V

The message "EXT REF" is displayed in the status line in the header field of the display in the
external-reference operating mode.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - REF OSC

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM SOURCE INT EXT

LEVEL REF OSC EXT FREQUENCY 10 MHz
MODULATION PHASE
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT
LF OUTPUT CALIB ADJUSTMENT STATE OFF ON
SWEEP DIAG FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT 2048
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-66 Menu UTILITIES - REF OSC (preset setting)

SOURCE Selection of the operating mode.

INT Internal-reference operating mode
EXT External-reference operating mode
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:ROSC:SOUR INT

1038.6002.02 2.155 E-13

Utilities SME

EXT FREQUENCY Input value of the external reference frequency (1 MHz to 16 MHz,
spacing 1 MHz).
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:ROSC:EXT:FREQ 10E6

ADJUSTMENT STATE OFF Tuning value of the internal reference frequency as

calibrated (cf. menu UTILITIES-CALIB)
ON Tuning value according to setting value FREQUENCY
ADJUSTMENT. Option SM-B1, reference oscillator
OCXO, is switched off. Only the standard reference
oscillator is in operation.
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:ROSC:ADJ:STAT ON

FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT Input value in the range 0 to 4095 to set the internal reference
frequency. Pulling range ±4×10-6
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:ROSC:ADJ:VAL 2048

2.11.6 Phase of the Output Signal (PHASE)

Menu UTILITIES-PHASE offers access to the phase setting of the RF output signal with respect to a
reference signal of the same frequency.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - PHASE

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM DELTA PHASE 0 deg

LEVEL REF OSC RESET DELTA PHASE DISPLAY
MODULATION PHASE
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-67 Menu UTILITIES - PHASE (preset setting)

DELTA PHASE Setting value of the phase.

IEC-bus short command :SOUR:PHAS 0

RESET DELTA PHASE DISPLAY Ð Sets the display of the DELTA PHASE to 0 without the phase of
the output signal being influenced.
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:PHAS:REF

1038.6002.02 2.156 E-13

SME Utilities

2.11.7 Password Input With Functions Protected (PROTECT)

The execution of calibrating and service functions is protected by a password. To unlock the lock-out,
the correct password, a 6-digit number, has to be entered and then the [ENTER] key has to be pushed.
After the instrument has been switched on, the lock-out is automatically activated.

Password 1 unlocks the lock-out for calibrations LEV PRESET, VCO SUM and PULSE GEN.

Password 2 unlocks the lock-out for calibration REF OSC.

Password 3 permits the input of the serial number and the value of the counter for POWER ON,
operating hours and attenuator circuits.

Menu UTILITIES-PROTECT offers access to the unlocking of protected functions.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - PROTECT

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM LOCK LEVEL 1 OFF ON

LEVEL REF OSC PASSWORD LEVEL 1 XXXXXX
MODULATION PHASE
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT LOCK LEVEL 2 OFF ON
LF OUTPUT CALIB PASSWORD LEVEL 2 XXXXXX
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST LOCK LEVEL 3 OFF ON
PASSWORD LEVEL 3 XXXXXX
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-68 Menu UTILITIES - PROTECT (preset setting)

LOCK LEVEL X Activating/deactivating the lock-out.

ON The lock-out is activated.
OFF The cursor automatically wraps to the input of the
password. After the password has been entered, the
lock-out is deactivated.
IEC-bus short command :SYST:PROT1 ON

PASSWORD LEVEL X Input of the password; termination with [ENTER] key.

IEC-bus short command :SYST:PROT1 OFF, 123456

1038.6002.02 2.157 E-13

 Utilities SME

2.11.8 Calibration (CALIB)

For servicing, the following menus offer access to calibrating routines and correction values:
UTILITIES - CALIB - VCO SUM
LEV PRESET
PULSE GEN
REF OSC (cf. service manual)
QPSK
LEVEL (cf. service manual)

Internal calibration routines LEV PRESET, VCO SUM, QPSK and PULSE GEN are protected by a
password. They can only be executed if the lock-out in the UTILITIES - PROTECT menu has been
unlocked. The password is PASSWORD LEVEL 1 = "123456".

Caution: Execute calibration routines only when the instrument has warmed up

Calibration routines LEVEL and REF OSC are described in the service manual (stock no.
1039.1856.24).

Calibration VCO SUM

To synchronize the summing loop, the frequency the oscillator generates must be so close to the rated
frequency that the phase control can lock in. This is effected by means of presetting values. The
presetting values are stored in a table and can be renewed using internal calibration routine VCO SUM.
The calibration routine needs only be executed after a data loss in the RAM or after an exchange of
modules.

Function: In a 10-MHz division scale, the VCOs are synchronized with the rated frequency and the
presetting voltage readjusted until the difference to the tuning voltage becomes minimal.
The value hence achieved is entered into the table. The routine takes approx. 10 seconds.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - CALIB - VCO SUM

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATE

LEVEL REF OSC LEV PRESET VIEW
MODULATION PHASE PULSE GEN
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT OSC REF 0001 750.0 MHz -22mV 88 2
LF OUTPUT CALIB QPSK 0002 760.0 MHz -24mV 108 2
SWEEP DIAG LEVEL 0003 770.0 MHz -25mV 127 2
LIST TEST 0004 780.0 MHz -26mV 147 2
MEM SEQ MOD KEY 0005 790.0 MHz -27mV 167 2
UTILITIES AUX I/O 0006 800.0 MHz -28mV 187 2
HELP BEEPER 0007 810.0 MHz -29mV 207 2
INSTALL 0008 820.0 MHz -30mV 217 2

Fig. 2-69 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - VCO SUM

1038.6002.02 2.158 E-13

SME Utilities

CALIBRATE Ð Triggers the calibration for the VCO summing loop

IEC-bus short command :CAL:VSUM?

VIEW Ð Indication of the list of correction values.

The cursor wraps to index 1 of the list. The list can be executed using the rotary
knob. This index can be obtained by entering the index value on the digit block.
IEC-bus short command :CAL:VSUM:OFFS?
:CAL:VSUM:DAC?
:CAL:VSUM:KOS?

Calibration LEV PRESET

In order to hold the amplitude modulator in the optimal working point with all frequency and level
settings, a second control element is mounted by means of which the level before the modulator is set in
such a way that the modulator always works in the best part of its characteristic. The setting values for
the second control element are stored in a table and can be renewed using internal calibration routine
LEV PRESET. The calibration routine needs only be executed in the case of a data loss in the RAM or
after an exchange of modules.

Function: By alternately adjusting the two level control elements, the calibration routine determines
the value for the presetting in which the amplitude modulator is operated at the attenuation
demanded. The calibration is executed according to a given frequency table at levels of
13dBm to -2dBm in steps of 3 dB. The routine takes approx. 2 min.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - CALIB - LEV PRESET

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATE

LEVEL REF OSC LEV PRESET FREQUENCY RANGE NORM MIXER
MODULATION PHASE PULSE GEN LEVEL 16 13 10 7 4 1 -2 dBm
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT REF OSC VIEW
LF OUTPUT CALIB QPSK
0001 10.00 MHz 558
SWEEP DIAG LEVEL 0002 50.00 MHz 562
LIST TEST 0003 514
93.75 MHz
MEM SEQ MOD KEY 0004 534
110.00 MHz
UTILITIES AUX I/O 0005 130.70 MHz 638
HELP BEEPER 0006 374
93.75 MHz
INSTALL 0007 358
104.50 MHz

Fig. 2-70 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - LEV PRESET

CALIBRATE Ð Triggers the calibration for level preset.

IEC-bus short command :CAL:LPR?

FREQUENCY RANGE Selection of the correction values displayed by VIEW

NORM Correction values, with the exception of the mixer range.
MIXER Correction values of the mixer range.

1038.6002.02 2.159 E-13

Utilities SME

LEVEL Selection of the level for which the correction values are indicated.

VIEW Ð The cursor wraps to index 1 of the list. The list can be executed using the
rotary knob. This index can be directly obtained by entering the index value on
the digit block.
IEC-bus short command :CAL:LPR:DATA?

Calibration PULSE GEN

A programmable oscillator determines the accuracy of the pulse width and the pulse delay of the pulse
generator. To compensate for the temperature dependence of the oscillator (approx. 0.2%/degree) an
internal calibration is offered. The adjustment accuracy is approx. ±0.5%. The calibration routine is to be
executed even after a data loss in the RAM or after an exchange of modules.

Function: The frequency of the oscillator is measured using a counter which is synchronized with the
crystal reference. The oscillator is readjusted until the deviation is minimized. The
calibration value thus achieved is stored.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - CALIB - PULSE GEN

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATE

LEVEL REF OSC LEV PRESET
MODULATION PHASE PULSE GEN CALIBRATION DATA FINE 26
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT OSC REF CALIBRATION DATA COURSE 2
LF OUTPUT CALIB QPSK
SWEEP DIAG LEVEL
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-71 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - PULSE GEN

CALIBRATE Ð Triggers the calibration for the pulse generator.

IEC-bus short command :CAL:PULS?

CALIBRATION DATA FINE Indication of the fine adjustment in decimal form.

IEC-bus short command :CAL:PULS:DATA?

CALIBRATION DATA COURSE Indication of the coarse adjustment in decimal form.

IEC-bus short command :CAL:PULS:DATA?

1038.6002.02 2.160 E-13

SME Utilities

CALIBRATION QPSK
QPSK modulation is generated by means of frequency modulation and amplitude modulation. The delay
of FM and AM signal must be tuned to each other. As the delay of the AM signal is subjected to
manufacturing tolerances, the delay of the FM signal can be adjusted electronically.

Menu UTILITIES-CALIB-QPSK offers access to the delay calibration. The delay can be set in the range
0 to 10 µs in steps of 20 ns. The delay is set correctly if the spectrum of the PRBS-modulated QPSK
signal at the RF output is symmetric. The typical value of the delay is 2.60 µs.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - CALIB - QPSK

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM VCO SUM CALIBRATION DATA 2.60 µs

LEVEL REF OSC LEV PRESET
MODULATION PHASE PULSE GEN RECALL DEFAULT
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT REF OSC OVERWRITE DEFAULT
LF OUTPUT CALIB QPSK
SWEEP DIAG AMPLITUDE TRIM OFF ON
LEVEL
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-72 Menu UTILITIES - CALIB - QPSK

CALIBRATION DATA Input value of the delay compensation.

IEC-bus short command :CAL:QPSK 2.60us

RECALL DEFAULT Ð Sets the DEFAULT value (factory setting).

IEC-bus short command :CAL:QPSK DEF

OVERWRITE DEFAULT Ð Overwrites the DEFAULT value in the Flash-EPROM with the
current DELAY value. The function is protected by PASSWORD
LEVEL 2.
IEC-bus short command :CAL:QPSK:STOR

AMPLITUDE TRIM Switches on/off the service function for the adjustment of the
amplitude content with QPSK.
Note: If the service function "AMPLITUDE TRIM" is switched
on, this is indicated by displaying "QPSK AMPLITUDE
TRIM" in the status line. An activated AM is deactivated
by switching on AMPLITUDE TRIM.

1038.6002.02 2.161 E-13

Utilities SME

2.11.9 Indications of Module Variants (DIAG-CONFIG)

For service purposes, the modules installed can be indicated with their variants and states of
modification. Submenu DIAG-CONFIG offers access to the module indication.

IEC-bus short command :DIAG:INFO:MOD?

Menu selection: UTILITIES - DIAG - CONFIG

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONFIG FRQ VAR REV

LEVEL REF OSC TPOINT REFSS VAR REV
MODULATION PHASE PARAM DSYN VAR REV
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT SUM REV
VAR
LF OUTPUT CALIB OPU1 VAR REV
SWEEP DIAG
OPU3 VAR REV
LIST TEST
ROSC SM-B1 VAR REV
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
LFGEN SM-B2 VAR REV
AUX I/O
UTILITIES FMOD SM-B5 VAR REV
BEEPER
HELP PUM3 SM-B8 VAR REV
INSTALL
DCOD SM-B11 VAR REV

Fig. 2-73 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - CONFIG

1038.6002.02 2.162 E-13

SME Utilities

2.11.10 Voltage Indication of Test Points (DIAG-TPOINT)

Submenu DIAG-TPOINT offers access to internal test points. If a test point is switched on, the voltage
indication is displayed in a window in the header field. For greater detail, see service manual (stock no.
1039.1856.24).

Menu selection: UTILITIES - DIAG - TPOINT

TP 007
FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz +3.570V LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONFIG STATE OFF ON

LEVEL REF OSC TPOINT POINT 7
MODULATION PHASE PARAM
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-74 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - TPOINT

STATE Switching on/off the voltage indication in the headerfield.

POINT........... Input value of the test point.

IEC-bus short command :DIAG:POINxx?

1038.6002.02 2.163 E-13

Utilities SME

2.11.11 Indications of Service Data (DIAG-PARAM)

Submenu DIAG-PARAMETER offers access to different parameters such as serial number, software
version, operating-hours counter and attenuator circuits.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - DIAG - PARAM

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM CONFIG SERIAL NO. XXXX XXXX.X

LEVEL REF OSC TPOINT SOFTWARE VERSION 1.03
MODULATION PHASE PARAM SOFTWARE DATE FEB 04 1993
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT POWER ON COUNT 173
LF OUTPUT CALIB OPERATION TIME 300 h
SWEEP DIAG ATTEN COUNT 40dB Z1 320
LIST TEST ATTEN COUNT 5dB Z2 456
MEM SEQ MOD KEY ATTEN COUNT 20dB Z3 523
UTILITIES AUX I/O ATTEN COUNT 20dB Z4 250
HELP BEEPER ATTEN COUNT 10dB Z5 466
INSTALL ATTEN COUNT 40dB Z6 400

Fig. 2-75 Menu UTILITIES - DIAG - PARAM

For IEC-bus commands, cf. Chapter 3, Section "DIAGnostic System".

2.11.12 Test (TEST)

(cf. Chapter 4, Section "Functional Test")

1038.6002.02 2.164 E-13

SME Utilities

2.11.13 Assigning Modulations to the [MOD ON/OFF] Key (MOD-KEY)

The modulations can be switched on/off in the individual modulation menus and parallely by means of
the [MOD ON/OFF] key.

For which modulations the [MOD ON/OFF] key is effective can be defined in the UTILITIES-MOD KEY
menu. The key can either be effective for all modulations or for a selected one.

Function of the [MOD ON/OFF] key if effective for a type of modulation:

À Every pressing a key alters the state (ON or OFF) of the selected modulation.

Function of the [MOD ON/OFF] key if effective for all types of modulation (ALL):
À If at least one modulation is switched on, pressing the [MOD ON/OFF] key switches the modulation/s
off. Which modulations were switched on is stored.
If no modulation is switched on, pressing the [MOD ON/OFF] key switches on the modulations which
were last switched off using the [MOD ON/OFF] key.

On switching on using the [MOD ON/OFF] key, the modulation sources are used as defined in the
modulation menus.

Access to the selection of the modulation to be switched using the [MOD ON/OFF] key is possible in the
UTILITIES-MOD KEY menu.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - MOD KEY

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL -30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM MODULATION ALL AM FM PM PULSE DM

LEVEL REF OSC
MODULATION PHASE
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-76 Menu UTILITIES - MOD KEY (preset setting)

MODULATION Selection for which modulation the [MOD ON/OFF] key is to be effective.
Note: Preset switches off all modulations, sets the selection to ALL and
stores AM 30%, AM SOURCE INT: LF GEN1 as default setting.

1038.6002.02 2.165 E-13

Utilities SME

2.11.14 Setting Auxiliary Inputs/Outputs (AUX-I / O)

Menu UTILITIES - AUX I/O offers access to settings for the TRIGGER input, BLANK output and
MARKER output. Sections Sweep, List Mode and Memory Sequence provide further information.
Menu selection: UTILITIES - AUX I/O

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM EXT TRIGGER SLOPE POS NEG EITHER

LEVEL REF OSC
MODULATION PHASE SWEEP BLANK TIME NORM LONG
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT BLANK POLARITY NORM INV
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG MARKER POLARITY NORM INV
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-77 Menu UTILITIES - AUX I/O

EXT TRIGGER SLOPE Selection of the active edge of the external trigger signal.
POS The instrument triggers on the positive edge of the
external signal.
NEG The instrument triggers on the negative edge of the
external signal.
EITHER The instrument triggers on both edges of the external
signal.
IEC-bus short command :TRIG:SLOP POS

SWEEP BLANK TIME Selection of the blank duration.

NORM BLANK duration is set to the shortest duration
possible.
LONG The BLANK duration is set for the PEN LIFT control of
an XY recorder (approx. 500ms).
IEC-bus short command :SOUR2:SWE:BTIM NORM

BLANK POLARITY Selection of the polarity for the blank signal.

NORM With active BLANK, the output signal is HIGH.
INV Polarity is inverted.
IEC-bus short command :OUTP:BLAN NORM

MARKER POLARITY Selection of the polarity for the marker signal.

NORM The output signal is HIGH when the sweep cycle
reaches the mark.
INV Polarity is inverted.
IEC-bus short command :SOUR:MARK:POL NORM

1038.6002.02 2.166 E-13

SME Utilities

2.11.15 Switching On/Off Beeper (BEEPER)

Menu UTILITIES-BEEPER offers access to the switching on/off of the beeper.
Note: Preset does not alter the current state (ON or OFF).

Menu selection: UTILITIES - BEEPER

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM KEY BEEP STATE OFF ON

LEVEL REF OSC
MODULATION PHASE
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-78 Menu UTILITIES - BEEPER

KEY BEEP STATE Switching on/off the beeper

IEC-bus command :SYST:BEEP:STAT ON

1038.6002.02 2.167 E-13

Utilities SME

2.11.16 Installation of Software Option

s are installed in the menu UTILITIES-INSTALL by means of a keyword. The keyword is part to the
equipment supplied in case of a follow-up order.

Menu UTILITIES-INSTALL gives access to the keyword entry.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - INSTALL

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM OPTION TO INSTALL FLEX

LEVEL REF OSC INSTALLATION KEY ******
MODULATION PHASE
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT
LF OUTPUT CALIB
SWEEP DIAG
LIST TEST
MEM SEQ MOD KEY
UTILITIES AUX I/O
HELP BEEPER
INSTALL

Fig. 2-79 Menu UTILITIES - INSTALL, fitted with options

OPTION TO INSTALL Selection of the option to be installed.

INSTALLATION KEY Entry of the keyword; after entry, press key [ENTER].

1038.6002.02 2.168 E-13

SME Status

2.12 The Help System

The SME has two help systems. On the one hand the context-sensitive help which is called by means of
the HELP key and which gives information on the current menu. On the other hand, auxiliary texts can
be selected according to headwords in alphabetical order by accessing menu HELP.

HELP Key

The yellow HELP key can be pressed at any point in time. The current setting menu is faded out and
context-sensitive text faded in. The help panel can be exited by means of the RETURN key.

Menu HELP

After calling the help menu, access to all auxiliary texts is possible via an index. Operation is analog to
menu operation.
À Set the menu cursor to the index desired using the shaft encoder.
À Press the [SELECT] key.
À The information for the index marked is displayed.
À Press the [RETURN] key to exit the menu.

2.13 Status

By means of a STATUS page, the SME permits an overview over all settings of the instrument. The
settings are displayed in an abbreviated form. The STATUS page is called by pressing the [STATUS]
key. Return to the preceding menu is effected using the [RETURN] key.

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FM1 PULSE

AM:OFF LF1: 1kHz

LF2:1 000 0kHz; SIN
FM1:DEV 123.00kHz; LFGEN1 AC OUTPUT:OFF
FM2:OFF / PM:OFF
SWEEP:OFF
PULSE:EXT DEL 1.00µs
REF OSC:10MHz INT
WID 1.00µs
ALC BW: AUTO
DM:OFF FM1 PULSE TRIGGER SLOPE:NORM
LOCAL
UNLOCKED

Fig. 2-80 Menu STATUS page

1038.6002.02 2.169 E-13

Error Messages SME

2.14 Error Messages

The SME displays error and caution messages in a different manner, depending on how long, for a
short period of time or permanently, the cause exists.

Short-term message The short-term message is displayed in the status line. Part of it
overwrites the status indications and disappears after approx. 2
seconds or in the case of a new entry.
The instrument shows, e.g., short-term messages if the attempt is
made to enter an overrange or if incompatible operating modes
deactivate one another.

Long-term message The long-term message is displayed in the status line by means of
the message "WARNING" or "ERROR". Pressing the [ERROR] key
calls the ERROR page in which the messages are entered. Several
messages can be entered at the same time. The long-term message
remains existing until there is no cause any more. The ERROR page
is exited using the [RETURN] key.
The instrument displays, e.g., the long-term message "ERROR" if
there is a hardware error or "WARNING" if overrange settings have
been made.

Notes: – An error message "ERROR" does not necessarily point to a defect instrument. There are
various operating states which can cause an ERROR message. E. g. if the instrument is set
to external reference but no external reference is connected.
– Error 313 indicates the loss of calibration data and is also applicable in case of a cold start
(key [PRESET] is pressed during switch-on). The calibration values can be restored with
internal calibration routines. These routines are accessible via menu UTILITIES-CALIB (see
section on calibration).

The ERROR page offers access to long-term messages if the [ERROR] key is pressed.

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 MHz LEVEL - 12.0 dBm

AM EXT1-LOW ERROR

WARNING -221 Settings conflict; modulation forces peak level into overrange
ERROR 211 Summing loop unlocked
Warning 153 Input voltage out of range; EXT1 too low

Fig. 2-81 ERROR page

A list of the possible error messages is to be found in annex B.

1038.6002.02 2.170 E-11

SME Introduction/Brief Instructions

3 Remote Control

3.1 Introduction

The instrument is equipped with an IEC-bus interface according to standard IEC 625.1/IEEE 488.1 and
a RS-232 interface. The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit to connect a
controller for remote control. The instrument supports the SCPI version 1994.0 (Standard Commands
for Programmable Instruments). The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the
standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers (see Section
3.5.1).

This section assumes basic knowledge of IEC-bus programming and operation of the controller. A
description of the interface commands is to be obtained from the relevant manuals.
The requirements of the SCPI standard placed on command syntax, error handling and configuration of
the status registers are explained in detail in the respective sections. Tables provide a fast overview of
the commands implemented in the instrument and the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables
are supplemented by a comprehensive description of every command and the status registers. Detailed
program examples of the main functions are to be found in annex D. The program examples for
IEC-bus programming are all written in QuickBASIC.

Note: In contrast to manual control, which is intended for maximum possible operating convenience,
the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status. This means that when
incompatible settings (e.g. activation of PM and FM at the same time) are attempted, the
command is ignored and the device status remains unchanged, i.e. is not adapted to other
settings. Therefore, IEC/IEEE-bus control programs should always define an initial device status
(e.g. with command *RST) and then implement the required settings.

3.2 Brief Instructions

The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the
instrument and setting of its basic functions.

3.2.1 IEC-Bus
It is assumed that the IEC-bus address, which is factory-set to 28 has not yet been changed.

1. Connect instrument and controller using IEC-bus cable.

2. Write and start the following program on the controller:
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%) Open port to the instrument
CALL IBPAD(generator%, 28) Inform controller about instrument address
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*RST;*CLS") Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "FREQ 50MHz") Set frequency to 50 MHz
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "POW -7.3dBm") Set output level -7.3m dBm
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:SOUR INT1") Set AM modulation source LFGEN1
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:INT1:FREQ 15kHz") Set AM modulation source LFGEN1
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM 30PCT") Set AM modulation depth 30%
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:STAT ON") Switch on AM
An amplitude-modulated signal is now applied at the output of the instrument.
3. To return to manual control, press the LOCAL key at the front panel.

1038.6002.02 3.1 E-13

Introduction/Brief Instructions SME

3.2.2 RS-232 Interface

It is assumed that the configuration of the RS-232 interface at the unit has not yet been changed.

1. Connect unit and controller using the 0-modem cable.

2. Enter the following command at the controller to configure the controller interface:
mode com1: 9600, n, 8, 1
3. Create the following ASCII file:
Switch instrument to remote control (Return key)
*RST;*CLS Reset instrument
FREQ 50MHz Set frequency 50 MHz
POW -7.3dBm Set output level -7.3 dBm
OUTP:STAT ON Switch on RF output
AM:SOUR INT1 Set AM modulation source LFGEN1
AM:INT1:FREQ 15kHz
AM 30PCT Set modulation frequency 15 kHz
AM:STAT ON Set AM modulation depth 30%
Switch on AM
(Return key)
4. Transfer ASCII file to unit via RS-232 interface. Enter the following command at the controller:
copy <filename> com1:
An amplitude-modulated signal is now applied at the output of the instrument.
5. To return to manual control, press the [LOCAL] key at the front panel.

3.3 Switchover to Remote Control

On power-on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state ("LOCAL"state) and can be
operated via the front panel.

The instrument is switched to remote control ("REMOTE)" state)

IEC-bus as soon as it receives an addressed command from a controller.

RS-232 as soon as it receives either a carriage return <CR> (=0Dh) or a line feed <LF> (0Ah) from
a controller.

During remote control, operation via the front panel is disabled. The instrument remains in the remote
state until it is reset to the manual state via the front panel or via IEC bus (see Sections [Link] and
[Link]). Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the
remaining instrument settings.

1038.6002.02 3.2 E-13

SME Switchover to Remote Control

3.3.1 Remote Control via IEC Bus

[Link] Setting the Device Address

The IEC-bus address of the instrument is factory-set to 28. It can be changed manually in the
UTILITIES-SYSTEM-GPIB-ADDRESS menu or via IEC bus. Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible.
Manually:
À Call UTILITIES-SYSTEM-GPIB-ADDRESS menu
À Enter desired address
À Terminate input using the [1x/ENTER] key
Via IEC bus:
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%) Open port to the instrument
CALL IBPAD(generator%, 28) Inform controller about old
address
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 20") Set instrument to new address
CALL IBPAD(generator%, 20) Inform controller about new
address

[Link] Indications during Remote Control

The state of the remote control is evident by the words "IEC REMOTE" or "LOCAL" on the STATUS
page. The STATUS page is always displayed in the REMOTE state.
LOCKED indicates that the key [LOCAL] is disabled, i.e. switchover to manual operation is only possible
via IEC/IEEE bus. With UNLOCKED indicated, switchover to manual control is possible via the key
[LOCAL] (see also section [Link]).

[Link] Querying the Error Status

CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SYST:SERR?")
CALL IBRD(generator%, error$)
The string error$ contains the list of errors existing at the time of the query. This list corresponds to
the list displayed when the [ERROR] key is pressed in manual operation (see Section 2.14). It differs
from the SCPI error list in that error entries are not deleted by the query. They are deleted only when the
corresponding errors don’t exist any more (e.g. after a setting has been changed).

[Link] Return to Manual Operation

Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC bus.
Manually: À Press the [LOCAL] key.
Notes:
– Before switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise
switchover to remote control is effected immediately.
– The [LOCAL] key can be disabled by the universal command LLO (see
annex A) in order to prevent unintentional switchover. In this case,
switchover to manual mode is only possible via the IEC bus.
– The [LOCAL] key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN control line
of the IEC bus (see annex A).
Via IEC bus: ...
CALL IBLOC(generator%) Set instrument to manual operation.
...

1038.6002.02 3.3 E-13

Messages SME

3.3.2 Remote Control via RS-232-Interface

[Link] Setting the Transmission Parameters

To enable an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the unit and the controller
should have the same setting. To prevent any problems during binary data transmission, the RS-232
interface is set for 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit. This data format corresponds to the current IEEE
P1174 standard. Parameters baud rate and handshake can be manually changed in menu
UTILITIES-SYSTEM-RS-232.

À Call UTILITIES-SYSTEM-GPIB-RS232 menu

À Select desired baudrate and handshake
À Terminate input using the [1x/ENTER] key

[Link] Indications during Remote Control

The state of the remote control is evident by the words "RS-232 REMOTE" or "LOCAL" on the STATUS
page. The STATUS page is always displayed in the REMOTE state.

[Link] Return to Manual Operating

Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel.
ÀPress the [LOCAL] key.
Note: Before switchover, command processing must be completed as otherwise
switchover to remote control is effected immediately.

3.4 Messages

The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC bus (see annex A) can be divided into two
groups:
- interface messages and
- device messages.

3.4.1 Interface Message

Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the ATN control line being active.
They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a
controller which has the IEC-bus control. Interface commands can be subdivided into
- universal commands and
- addressed commands.
Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC bus without previous addressing,
addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners. The interface messages
relevant to the instrument are listed in annex A.
Some control characters are defined for the control of the RS-232-interface (see annex A)

1038.6002.02 3.4 E-13

SME Structure and Syntax of the Messages

3.4.2 Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses)

Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC bus, the "ATN" control line not being
active. ASCII code is used. The device messages are largely identical for the two interfaces (IEC bus
and RS232) .
A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent on the IEC bus:
– Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument. They operate the device
functions and request information.
The commands are subdivided according to two criteria:
1. According to the effect they have on the instrument:
Setting commands cause instrument settings such as reset of the
instrument or setting the output level to 1 volt.
Queries cause data to be provided for output on the IEC-bus,
e.g. for identification of the device or polling the active
input.

2. According to their definition in standard IEEE 488.2:

Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in
standard IEEE 488.2. They refer to functions such as
management of the standardized status registers,
reset and selftest.
Device-specific commands refer to functions depending on the features of the
instrument such as frequency setting. A majority of
these commands has also been standardized by the
SCPI committee (cf. Section 3.5.1).
– Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can
contain measurement results, instrument settings and information on the
instrument status (cf. Section 3.5.4).
Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in Section 3.5. The commands are listed
and explained in detail in Section 3.6.

3.5 Structure and Syntax of the Device Messages

3.5.1 SCPI Introduction

SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) describes a standard command set for
programming instruments, irrespective of the type of instrument or manufacturer. The goal of the SCPI
consortium is to standardize the device-specific commands to a large extent. For this purpose, a model
was developed which defines the same functions inside a device or for different devices. Command
systems were generated which are assigned to these functions. Thus it is possible to address the same
functions with identical commands. The command systems are of a hierarchical structure. Fig. 3-1
illustrates this tree structure using a section of command system SOURce, which operates the signal
sources of the devices. The other examples concerning syntax and structure of the commands are
derived from this command system.
SCPI is based on standard IEEE 488.2, i.e. it uses the same syntactic basic elements as well as the
common commands defined in this standard. Part of the syntax of the device responses is defined with
greater restrictions than in standard IEEE 488.2 (see Section 3.5.4, Responses to Queries).

1038.6002.02 3.5 E-13

Structure and Syntax of the Messages SME

3.5.2 Structure of a Command

The commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. Header and
parameter are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The
headers may consist of several key words. Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to
the header.

Note: The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the
instrument.

Common Commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk "*"

and one or several parameters, if any.
Examples: *RST RESET, resets the device
*ESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE, sets the bits of the
event status enable registers
*ESR? EVENT STATUS QUERY, queries the
contents of the event status register.

Device-specific commands

Hierarchy: Device-specific commands are of hierarchical structure (see Fig. 3-1).

The different levels are represented by combined headers. Headers of
the highest level (root level) have only one key word. This key word
denotes a complete command system.
Example: SOURce This key word denotes the command
system SOURce.
For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified,
starting on the left with the highest level, the individual key words being
separated by a colon ":".
Example: SOURce:FM:EXTernal:COUPling AC
This command lies in the fourth level of the SOURce system. It sets the
coupling of the external signal source to AC.

SOURce

POWer AM FM

POLarity MODE INTernal EXTernal STATe

POLarity COUPling

Fig. 3-1 Tree structure of the SCPI command systems using the SOURce system by way of example

1038.6002.02 3.6 E-13

SME Structure and Syntax of the Messages

Some key words occur in several levels within one command system. Their
effect depends on the structure of the command, that is to say, at which
position in the header of a command they are inserted.
Example: SOURce:FM:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the third
command level. It defines the polarity between modulator and
modulation signal.
SOURce:FM:EXTernal:POLarity NORMal
This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth
command level. It defines the polarity between modulation
voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the
external signal source indicated.

Optional key words: Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted
into the header or omitted. These key words are marked by square
brackets in the description. The full command length must be recognized
by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard.
Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional key words.
Example: [SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet 1
This command immediately sets the offset of the signal to 1
volt. The following command has the same effect:
POWer:OFFSet 1
Note: An optional key word must not be omitted if its effect is specified
in detail by a numeric suffix.

Long and short form: The key words feature a long form and a short form. Either the short form
or the long form can be entered, other abbreviations are not permissible.
Example: STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 1= STAT:QUES:ENAB 1
Note: The short form is marked by upper-case letters, the long form
corresponds to the complete word. Upper-case and lower-case
notation only serve the above purpose, the instrument itself
does not make any difference between upper-case and
lower-case letters.

Parameter: The parameter must be separated from the header by a "white space". If
several parameters are specified in a command, they are separated by a
comma ",". A few queries permit the parameters MINimum, MAXimum and
DEFault to be entered. For a description of the types of parameter, refer to
Section 3.5.5.
Example: SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation? MAXimum Response: 60
This query requests the maximal value for the attenuation.

Numeric suffix: If a device features several functions or features of the same kind, e.g.
inputs, the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the com-
mand. Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1.
Example: SOURce:FM:EXTernal2:COUPling AC
This command sets the coupling of the second external signal
source.

1038.6002.02 3.7 E-13

Structure and Syntax of the Messages SME

3.5.3 Structure of a Command Line

A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by a <New Line>, a <New
Line> with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte. Quick BASIC automatically produces an EOI
together with the last data byte.

Several commands in a command line are separated by a semicolon ";". If the next command belongs
to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:POWer:CENTer MINimum;:OUTPut:ATTenuation 10")
This command line contains two commands. The first command is part of the SOURce
system and is used to specify the center frequency of the output signal. The second
command is part of the OUTPut system and sets the attenuation of the output signal.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the
command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command after the semicolon starts with the
level that lies below the common levels (see also Fig. 3-1). The colon following the semicolon must be
omitted in this case.
Example:
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:FM:MODE LOCKed;:SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz")
This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated
from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the SOURce command
system, subsystem FM, i.e. they have two common levels.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below
SOURce:FM. The colon after the semicolon is omitted.
The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows:
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:FM:MODE LOCKed;INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz")
However, a new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example: CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:FM:MODE LOCKed")
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency 1kHz")

3.5.4 Responses to Queries

A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding
a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are
partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
1. The requested parameter is transmitted without header.
Example: SOURce:EXTernal:COUPling? Response: AC

2. Maximum values, minimum values and all further quantities, which are requested via a special text
parameter are returned as numerical values.
Example: FREQuency? MAX Response: 10E3
3. Numerical values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the
units set using the Unit command.
Example: FREQuency? Response: 1E6 for 1 MHz
4. Truth values <Boolean values> are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example: OUTPut:STATe? Response: 1
5. Text (character data) is returned in a short form (see also Section 3.5.5).
Example: SOURce:FM:SOURce? Response: INT1

1038.6002.02 3.8 E-13

SME Structure and Syntax of the Messages

3.5.5 Parameter
Most commands require a parameter to be specified. The parameters must be separated from the
header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text,
character strings and block data. The type of parameter required for the respective command and the
permissible range of values are specified in the command description (see Section 3.6).

Numerical values Numerical values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and
exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or
down. The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie
inside the value range -32000 to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E"
or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not permissible. In the case of physical
quantities, the unit can be entered. Permissible unit prefixes are G (giga), MA
(mega), MOHM and MHZ are also permissible), K (kilo), M (milli), U (micro)
and N (nano). It the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example: SOURce:FREQuency 1.5 kHz = SOURce:FREQuency 1.5E3

Special numerical The texts MINimum, MAXimum, DEFault, UP and DOWN are interpreted as
values special numerical values.
In the case of a query, the numerical value is provided.
Example: Setting command: SOURce:VOLTage MAXimum
Query: SOURce:VOLTage? Response: 15

MIN/MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.

DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This
value conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.

UP/DOWN UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step. The step
width can be specified via an allocated step command (see annex C, List of
Commands) for each parameter which can be set via UP, DOWN.

INF/NINF INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numerical values -9.9E37 or
9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as device responses.

NAN Not a Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as device
response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero by
zero, the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing
values.

Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is
represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0. The OFF state (logically
untrue) is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0. 0 or 1 is provided in a
query.
Example: Setting command: SOURce:FM:STATe ON
Query: SOURce:FM:STATe? Response: 1

Text Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for key words, i.e. they can be
entered using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be
separated from the header by a white space. In the case of a query, the short
form of the text is provided.
Example: Setting command: OUTPut:FILTer:TYPE EXTernal
Query: OUTPut:FILTer:TYPE? Response: EXT

Strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (’ or ").

Example: SYSTem:LANGuage "SCPI" or
SYSTem:LANGuage ’SCPI’

1038.6002.02 3.9 E-13

Structure and Syntax of the Messages SME

Block data Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of
large amounts of data. A command using a block data parameter has the
following structure:
Example: HEADer:HEADer #45168xxxxxxxx
ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how
many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example
the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow.
During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are
ignored until all bytes are transmitted. Data elements comprising more than one
byte are transmitted with the byte being the first which was specified by SCPI
command "FORMat:BORDer".

The format of the binary files within the block depends on the IEC-bus
command
The commands
:SOURce:LIST:DWELl
:SOURce:LIST:FREQuency
:SOURce:LIST:POWer
:SOURce:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency
:SOURce:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer
:SYSTem:MSEQuence:DWELl
:SYSTem:MSEQuence:RCL
use the IEEE-754 format for double precision floating point numbers. Each
number is represented by 8 bytes.

Example:
a# = 125.345678E6
b# = 127.876543E6
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURCE:CORRECTION:CSET:DATA:FREQ
#216" + MKD$(a#) + MKD$(b#))
– '#' in the command string introduces the binary block,
– '2' indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next,
– '16' is the length of the binary block (in bytes), here: 2 double precision
floating pooint number with 8 bytes each.
– The actual binary data follow now. As the function IBWRT requires a text
string, MKD$ is used for the type conversion.
The following ASCII format has the same effect:
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURCE:CORRECTION:CSET:DATA:FREQ
125.345678E6, 127.876543E6")

The commands
:SOURce:DM:DATA:DATA
:SOURce:DM:DATA:ATTenuate
:SOURce:DM:DATA:BURSt
use a bit-by-bit format. The data transmitted are evaluated byte by byte from the
left to the right and from the MSBit to the LSBit.

Example:
The following sequence of modulation data is to be transmitted as a binary
block:
01010101 00110011 00001111 11111111 00000000 (binary representation)

1038.6002.02 3.10 E-13

SME Structure and Syntax of the Messages

55 33 0F FF 00 (hexadecimal rep.)
The QuickBASIC-command reads:
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURCE:DM:DATA:DATA #15"+CHR$
(&h55)+CHR$(&h33)+CHR$(&h0F) +CHR$(&hFF)+CHR$(&h00))
– ''#' introduces the binary block.
– ''1' indicates that 1 digit specifying the length will follow next,
– ''5' is the length of the binary block (in bytes).
– 'The actual binary data follow now. As the function IBWRT requires a text
string, CHR$ is used for the type conversion.
The following ASCII format has the same effect:
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SOURCE:DM:DATA:DATA 0,1,0,1,0,
1,0,1,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,
1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0")
However, the binary representation is more compact and transmitted faster.
The number of data bits must be an integer multiple of 8 because, according to
IEEE 488.2, binary blocks allow transmission of integer bytes only. Eventually,
the binary block must be filled up to the next byte; the spare bits can then be
deleted manually.

3.5.6 Overview of Syntax Elements

The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements.

The colon separates the key words of a command.

:
In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost
command level.

The semicolon separates two commands of a command line.

;
It does not alter the path.

, The comma separates several parameters of a command.

? The question mark forms a query.

* The asterix marks a common command.

" Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it.

# ASCI character # introduces block data.

A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates

header and parameter.

1038.6002.02 3.11 E-13

Description of Commands – Notation SME

3.6 Description of Commands

3.6.1 Notation
In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then
described in detail, separated according to the command system. The notation corresponds to the one
of the SCPI standards to a large extent. The SCPI conformity information can be taken from the list of
commands in annex C.

Table of Commands
Command: In the command column, the table provides an overview of the commands
and their hierarchical arrangement (see indentations).

Parameter: In the parameter column the requested parameters are indicated together
with their specified range.

Unit: The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters.

Remark: In the remark column an indication is made on

- whether the command does not have a query form,
- whether the command has only one query form ,
- whether this command is implemented only with a certain option of the
instrument.

Indentations The different levels of the SCPI command hierarchy are represented in the
table by means of indentations to the right. The lower the level is, the
farther the indentation to the right is. Please observe that the complete
notation of the command always includes the higher levels as well.

Example: SOURce:FM:MODE is represented in the table as follows:

SOURce first level

:FM second level
:MODE third level

In the individual description, the complete notation of the command is

given. An example for each command is written out at the end of the
individual description.

Upper/lower case Upper/lower case letters serve to mark the long or short form of the key
notation words of a command in the description (see Section 3.5.2). The instrument
itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters.

1038.6002.02 3.12 E-13

SME Description of Commands – Notation

Special characters | A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several
commands. These key words are indicated in the same line, they are
separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these key words has to be
indicated in the header of the command. The effect of the command is
independent of which of the key words is indicated.

Example:SOURce
:FREQuency
:CW|:FIXed
The two following commands of identical meaning can be
formed. They set the frequency of the constantly frequent signal
to 1 kHz:

SOURce:FREQuency:CW 1E3 = SOURce:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3

A vertical stroke in indicating the parameters marks alternative possibilities

in the sense of "or". The effect of the command is different, depending on
which parameter is entered.

Example:Selection of the parameters for the command

SOURce:COUPling AC | DC
If parameter AC is selected, only the AC content is fed through, in
the case of DC, the DC as well as the AC content.

[ ] Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header
(cf. Section 3.5.2, Optional Keywords). The full command length must be
accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI
standards.
Parameters in square brackets can optionally be incorporated in the
command or omitted as well.

{ } Parameters in braces can optionally be incorporated in the command either

not at all, once or several times.

1038.6002.02 3.13 E-13

Common Commands SME

3.6.2 Common Commands

The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. Same commands have
the same effect on different devices. The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk "*" followed
by three letters. Many common commands refer to the status reporting system which is described in
detail in Section 3.8.

Table 3-1 Common Commands

Command Parameter Unit Remark

*CLS No query

*ESE 0 to 255

*ESR? Only query

*IDN? Only query

*IST? Only query

*OPC

*OPT? Only query

*PRE 0 to 255

*PSC 0|1

*RCL 0 to 50 No query

*RST No query

*SAV 1 to 50 No query

*SRE 0 to 255

*STB? Only query

*TRG No query

*TST? Only query

*WAI

*CLS
CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the
EVENt-part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation register to zero. The command does not
alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer

*ESE 0 to 255
EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated. Query
*ESE? returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.

1038.6002.02 3.14 E-13

SME Common Commands

*ESR?
STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in decimal
form (0 to 255) and subsequently sets the register to zero.

*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification.
The device response is for example: "Rohde&Schwarz, SME03,00000001, 1.03"
03 = variant identification
00000001= serial number
1.03 = firmware version number

*IST?
INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form (0 | 1). The
IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll (cf. Section [Link]).

*OPC
OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands
have been executed. This bit can be used to initiate a service request (cf. Section 3.7).

*OPT?
OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options included in the instrument and returns a
list of the options installed. The options are separated from each other by means of commas. For
every option, a fixed position is provided in the response.

Table 3-2 Device Response to *OPT?

Position Option

1 SM-B1 Reference oscillator OCXO

2 SM-B2 LF generator

3 SM-B2 2nd LF generator

4 SM-B3 Pulse modulator 1.5 GHz

5 SM-B4 Pulse generator

6 SM-B5 FM/PM modulator

7 SM-B6 Multifunction generator

8 SM-B8 Pulse modulator 3 GHz

9 SM-B9 Pulse modulator 6 GHz

10 SME-B11 DM coder

11 SME-B12 DM memory extension

Example for a device response: 0,SM-B2,0, 0,0,SM-B5,0,0,0,0,0

1038.6002.02 3.15 E-13

Common Commands SME

*PRE 0 to 255
PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the value
indicated. Query *PRE? returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.

*PSC 0 | 1
POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers is
maintained or reset in switching on.
*PSC = 0 causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained. Thus a service request
can be triggered in switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of
status registers ESE and SRE.
*PSC ≠ 0 resets the registers.
Query *PSC? reads out the contents of the power-on-status-clear flag. The response can be 0 or 1.

*RCL 0 to 50
RECALL calls the instrument state which was stored under the number supplied using command
*SAV. 50 instrument states can be stored.

*RST
RESET sets the instrument to a defined default status. The command essentially corresponds to
pressing the [PRESET] key. The state of the RF-output is an exception: The RF-output is
deactivated after *RST, however, it is activated after the [RESET] key has been pressed. The
default setting is indicated in the description of the commands.

*SAV 1 to 50
SAVE stores the current instrument state under the number indicated (cf. *RCL as well).

*SRE 0 to 255
SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the value indicated. Bit
6 (MSS mask bit) remains 0. This command determines under which conditions a service request
is triggered. Query *SRE? reads the contents of the service request enable register in decimal
form. Bit 6 is always 0.

*STB?
READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the contents of the status byte in decimal form.

*TRG
TRIGGER triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. Special trigger events can be started by
command system "TRIGger" (see section "TRIGger System").

*TST?
SELF TEST QUERY triggers all selftests of the instrument indicated in Chapter 4, Section
"Functional Test" and outputs an error code in decimal form.

*WAI
WAIT-to-CONTINUE only permits the servicing of the subsequent commands after all preceding
commands have been executed and all signals have settled (cf. Section 3.7 and "*OPC" as well).

1038.6002.02 3.16 E-13

SME ABORt

3.6.3 ABORt System

The ABORt system contains the commands to abort actions triggered. After an action has been
aborted, it can be triggered again at once. All commands trigger an event, thus they have no *RST
value.

Further commands for the trigger system of the SME can be found in the TRIGger system.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:ABORt
[:SWEep] No query
:LIST No query
:MSEQuence No query
:DM No query /
option SME-B11
No query /
:XMEM option SME-B12

:ABORt[:SWEep]
The command aborts a sweep.
Example: :ABOR:SWE

:ABORt:LIST
The command aborts a list execution.
Example: :ABOR:LIST

:ABORt:MSEQuence
The command aborts a Memory Sequence.
Example: :ABOR:MSEQ

:ABORt:DM
The command aborts the single execution of a DM list. The command always relates to the digital
type of modulation currently set using SOURce:DM:TYPE .
Example: :ABOR:DM

:ABORt:XMEM
The command aborts the recording of data into the DM memory extension, list "XMEM".
Example: :ABOR:XMEM

1038.6002.02 3.17 E-13

CALibration SME

3.6.4 CALibration-System
The CALibration system contains the commands to calibrate the SME. On triggering the calibration by
means of :MEASure , response "0" displays a faultless calibration, response "1" means that an error
has occurred during calibration. As to the meaning of the data in the case of query :DATA?, cf. Chapter
2, Section "Calibration".

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:CALibration
:QPSK Option SME-B11
[:DATA] 0 to 10 000 ns | DEFault s
:STORe
:LEVel
:DATA? Query only
:FRANge NORMal | MIXer
:PMODulator ON | OFF
:STATe ON | OFF
:LPReset
[:MEASure]? Query only
Query only
:DATA?
Option SM-B4
:PULSe
Query only
[:MEASure]?
Query only
:DATA?
:ROSCillator
0 to 4095
[:DATA]
:VSUMmation
Query only
[:MEASure]?
Query only
:OFFS?
Query only
:DAC?
Query only
:KOS?

:CALibration:QPSK
The commands to set the calibration value for the QPSK modulator are under this node.

:CALibration:QPSK[:DATA] 0 to 10 000 ns | DEFault

The command enters the calibration data. The number specifies a delay for the digital FM signal.
DEFault can also be indicated instead of a time. Then the value saved in the FLASH memory is
used.
Example: :CAL:QPSK:DATA 10 000ns

:CALibration:QPSK:STORe
The command saves the delay presently set under [:DATA] as a default value in the FLASH
memory.
Example: :CAL:QPSK:STOR

1038.6002.02 3.18 E-13

SME CALibration

:CALibration:LEVel
This node provides the commands for the management of the level correction table. The
corresponding data are permanently stored in the instrument and cannot be changed. The
instrument includes different level correction tables. The tables to be used are selected
depending on the set frequency and the pulse modulator switched on (internal or external). The
:FRANge and :PMODulator commands select the level correction tables to be read out using
the DATA? command. These commands simulate the current instrument status but do not have
any influence on the instrument setup. The :STATe ON command activates the level correction
table corresponding to the real instrument setup.

:CALibration:LEVel:DATA?
The command queries the level correction data. It returns all level correction data in the format
fixed in the :FORMat system. The other commands under this node determine the list that is
returned.
Example: :CAL:LEV:DATA?

:CALibration:LEVel:FRANge NORMal | MIXer

The command selects the level correction table valid for a frequency in the NORMal or in the
MIXer range.
Example: :CAL:LEV:FRAN NORM *RST value is NORMal

:CALibration:LEVel:PMODulator ON | OFF
The command selects the level correction table valid for an instrument setup with the pulse
modulator ON or OFF.
Example: :CAL:LEV:PMOD OFF *RST value is OFF

:CALibration:LEVel:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches on or off internal level correction. *RST value is ON.
Example: :CAL:LEV:STAT OFF

:CALibration:LPReset
The commands to measure the values for the level presetting table are under this node (Level
PReset).

:CALibration:LPReset[:MEASure]?
The command triggers a calibration measurement. The command triggers an event and thus has
no *RST value.
Example: :CAL:LPR:MEAS? Response: 0

:CALibration:LPReset:DATA?
The command queries the correction data. It returns all correction data in the format fixed in the
:FORMat system.
Example: :CAL:LPR:DATA?

1038.6002.02 3.19 E-13

CALibration SME

:CALibration:PULSe
The commands to calibrate the pulse generator are under this node (option SM-B4).

:CALibration:PULSe[:MEASure]?
The command triggers a calibration measurement. The command triggers an event and thus has
no *RST value.
Example: :CAL:PULS:MEAS? Response: 0

:CALibration:PULSe:DATA?
The command queries the correction data. It returns the correction data as two integers
separated by a comma. The first number indicates the fine adjustment, the second the coarse
adjustment.
Example: :CAL:PULS:DATA? Response: 26,2

:CALibration:ROSCillator
The commands to calibrate the reference oscillator are under this node.

:CALibration:ROSCillator[:DATA] 0 to 4095
The command enters the correction data. For an exact definition of the calibration value, cf.
Section 2.
Example: :CAL:ROSC:DATA 2048

:CALibration:VSUMmation
The commands to determine the support values for the frequency setting are under this node.

:CALibration:VSUMmation[:MEASure]?
The command triggers a calibration measurement. The command triggers an event and thus has
no default setting value.
Example: :CAL:VSUM:MEAS? Response: 0

:CALibration:VSUMmation:OFFS?
:CALibration:VSUMmation:DAC?
:CALibration:VSUMmation:KOS?
The commands query the calibration data (refer to service manual 1039.1856.24). They output all
calibration data in the format set in FORMat system.
Example: :CAL:VSUM:OFFS?

1038.6002.02 3.20 E-13

SME DIAGnostic

3.6.5 DIAGnostic-System
The DIAGnostic system contains the commands for diagnostic test and service of the instrument. SCPI
does not define DIAGnostic commands, the commands listed here are SME-specific. All DIAGnostic
commands are queries which are not influenced by *RST. Hence no default setting values are stated.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:DIAGnostic
:INFO
:CCOunt
:ATTenuator1|2|3|4|5|6? Query only
:POWer? Query only
:MODules? Query only
:OTIMe? Query only
:SDATe? Query only

[:MEASure]
:POINt? Query only

:XMEM
:CHECksum
:CALCulate
Query only
[:TOTal]?
Query only
:DATA?
Query only
:ATTenuate?
Query only
:BURSt?

:DIAGnostic:INFO
The commands which can be used to query all information which does not require hardware
measurement are under this node.

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt
The commands which can be used to query all counters in the instrument are under this node
(Cycle COunt).

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuator 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6?
The command queries the number of switching processes of the different attenuator stages. The
stages are designated with Z1 to Z6 within the instrument. In this command they are differentiated
by a numeric suffix whose name corresponds to the number:

Suffix Name Function

1 Z1 40-dB stage
2 Z2 20-dB stage
3 Z3 5-dB stage
4 Z4 20-dB stage
5 Z5 10-dB stage
6 Z6 40-dB stage

Example: :DIAG:INFO:CCO:ATT1? Response: 1487

1038.6002.02 3.21 E-13

DIAGnostic SME

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:POWer?
The command queries the number of switch-on processes.
Example: :DIAG:INFO:CCO:POW? Response: 258

:DIAGnostic:INFO:MODules?
The command queries the modules existing in the instrument with their model and
state-of-modification numbers. The response supplied is a list in which the different entries are
separated by commas. The length of the list is variable and depends on the equipment of the
instrument. Each entry consists of three parts which are separated by means of blanks:
1. Name of module; 2. Variant of module in the form VarXX (XX = 2 digits)
3. Revision of module in the form RevXX (XX = 2 digits)
Example :DIAG:INFO:MOD? Response: FRO Var01 Rev00, DSYN Var03 Rev12, to

:DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe?
The command reads out the internal operating-hours counter. The response supplies the number
of hours the instrument has been in operation up to now.
Example: :DIAG:INFO:OTIM? Response: 19

:DIAGnostic:INFO:SDATe?
The command queries the date of software creation. The response is returned in the form year,
month, day.
Example: :DIAG:INFO:SDAT? Response: 1992, 12, 19

:DIAGnostic:[:MEASure]
The commands which trigger a measurement in the instrument and return the measured value
are under this node.

:DIAGnostic[:MEASure]:POINt?
The command triggers a measurement at a measuring point and returns the voltage measured.
The measuring point is specified by a numeric suffix (cf. service manual, stock no.
1039.1856.24).
Example: :DIAG:MEAS:POIN2? Response: 3.52

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum
The command for calculating and querying the checksum are provided in this node. Contrary to
the display in local mode, the values are returned as decimal numbers.

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:CALCulate
This command triggers the calculation of all four checksums. The results depend on the start and
stop addresses selected and on the operating mode of the memory extension. This command is
recommended whenever a checksum is to be read out and when setups or memory extension
data have been modified since the last calculation.
Example: :DIAG:XMEM:CHEC:CALC Action without query

1038.6002.02 3.22 E-13

SME DIAGnostic

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum[:TOTal]?
This command queries the overall checksum for the memory extension. Beforehand, the
checksum has to be calculated using :CALCulate.
Example: :DIAG:XMEM:CHEC? Response: 178034

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:DATA?
This command queries the overall checksum for the DATA section of the memory extension data.
In the 8M*1 mode, this checksum is identical with the overall checksum. Beforehand, the
checksum has to be calculated using :CALCulate.
Example: :DIAG:XMEM:CHEC:DATA? Response: 10043

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:ATTenuate?
This command queries the overall checksum for the ATTenuate section of the memory extension
data. In the 8M*1 mode, this checksum is 0. Beforehand, the checksum has to be calculated
using :CALCulate.
Example: :DIAG:XMEM:CHEC:ATT? Response: 97134

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:BURSt?
This command queries the overall checksum for the BURSt section of the memory extension
data. In the 8M*1 mode, this checksum is 0. Beforehand, the checksum has to be calculated
using :CALCulate.
Example: :DIAG:XMEM:CHEC:BURS? Response: 28601

1038.6002.02 3.23 E-13

DISPlay SME

3.6.6 DISPLAY-System
This system contains the commands to configure the screen. If system security is activated using
command SYSTem:SECurity ON, the display cannot be switched on and off arbitrarily (cf. below)

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:DISPlay
:ANNotation
[:ALL] ON | OFF
:AMPLitude ON | OFF
:FREQuency ON | OFF

:DISPlay:ANNotation
The commands determining whether frequency and amplitude are indicated are under this node.
Caution: With SYSTem:SECurity ON, the indications cannot be switched from OFF to ON. In
this case *RST does not influence the ANNotation settings either. With
SYSTem:SECurity OFF, the *RST value is ON for all ANNotation parameters.

:DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL] ON | OFF
The command switches the frequency and amplitude indication on or off.
Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:ALL ON can only be executed if SYSTem:SECurity is
set to OFF.
With SECurity OFF - *RST value is ON.
Example: :DISP:ANN:ALL ON

:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the amplitude indication.
Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON can only be executed if
SYSTem:SECurity is set to OFF.

With SYSTem:SECurity OFF - *RST value is ON.

Example: :DISP:ANN:AMPL ON

:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the amplitude indication.
Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON can only be executed if
SYSTem:SECurity is set to OFF.
With SYSTem:SECurity OFF - *RST value is ON.
Example: :DISP:ANN:FREQ ON

1038.6002.02 3.24 E-13

SME FORMat

3.6.7 FORMat-System
This system contains the commands determining the format of the data the SME returns to the
controller. All queries returning a list of numeric data or block data are concerned. With each of these
commands, this connection is pointed to in the description.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:FORMat
[:DATA] ASCii | PACKed
:BORDer NORMal | SWAPped

:FORMat[:DATA] ASCii | PACKed

The command specifies the data format, that the SME uses for returning the data. When data are
transmitted from the controller to the SME, the SME recognizes the data format automatically. In
this case, the value specified here has no significance.
Note: Settings using the FORMat:DATA command are only effective for commands with
which this is stated in the command description.

ASCii Numeric data are transmitted in plain text, separated by commas.

PACKed Numerical data are transmitted as binary block data. The format of the binary data
itself is command-specific. Its description can be found in Section 3.5.5.
Example: :FORM:DATA ASC *RST value is ASCii

:FORMat:BORDer NORMal | SWAPped

This command defines the order of bytes inside a binary block. This concerns only blocks which
use the IEEE754 format internally (see section 3.5.5, paragraph "Block Data").
NORMal: The SME expects (for setting commands) and sends (for queries) first the most
significant byte of each IEEE-754 floating point number, last the least significant
byte. For hosts based on a 80x86 processor this corresponds to the configuration of
bytes in the main memory. Thus, no further conversion is required.
SWAPped: The SME expects (for setting commands) and sends (for queries) first the least
significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number, last the most significant byte.
Example: :FORMat:BORDer:NORMal *RST-value is NORMal

1038.6002.02 3.25 E-13

OUTPut SME

3.6.8 MEMory System

This system contains the commands for the memory management of the SME.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:MEMory Query only

:NSTates?

:MEMory:NSTates?
The command returns the number of *SAV/*RCL memories available. The SME has 50
*SAV/*RCL memories in total.
Example: :MEM:NST? Response: 50

3.6.9 OUTPut-System
This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the RF output socket and the
BLANk socket. The characteristics of the LF socket are specified in the OUTPut2 system.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:OUTPut
:AMODe AUTO | FIXed
:BLANk
:POLarity NORMal | INVerted
:IMPedance? Query only
:PROTection
:CLEar
:TRIPped? Query only

[:STATe] ON | OFF

:PON OFF |UNCHanged

:OUTPut:AMODe AUTO | FIXed

The command switches over the operating mode of the attenuator at the RF output (Attenuator
MODe).
AUTO The attenuator is switched whenever possible.
FIXed The attenuator is switched when certain fixed levels are exceeded/fallen below.
Example: :OUTP:AMOD AUTO *RST value is AUTO

1038.6002.02 3.26 E-13

SME MEMory / OUTPut

:OUTPut:BLANk:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command sets the polarity of the BLANk signal.
NORMal The active BLANk state is indicated by the more positive or higher output voltage.
INVers The active BLANk state is indicated by the more negative or lower output voltage.
Example: :OUTP:BLAN:POL NORM RST value is NORM

:OUTPut:IMPedance?
The command queries the impedance of the RF output
. This permits converting the output level between units V and W. The impedances cannot be
changed. With the SME, this is the fixed value of 50 Ohm for the RF output.
Example: :OUTP:IMP? Response: 50

:OUTPut:PROTection
The commands to configure the protective circuit are under this node. The RF output is protected
by a protective circuit which deactivates the output if an overvoltage is supplied from outside. This
does not change the value of OUTPut:STATe.

:OUTPut:PROTection:CLEar
The command resets the protective circuit after it has been triggered. The state of the output is
determined by OUTPut:STATe again. The command triggers an event and hence has no default
setting value.
Example: :OUTP:PROT:CLE

:OUTPut:PROTection:TRIPped?
The command queries the state of the protective circuit. The responses mean:
"0" The protective circuit has not responded
"1" The protective circuit has responded
Example: :OUTP:PROT:TRIP? Response: "1"

:OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the RF output. The RF output can also be switched off by the
response of the protective circuit. But this has no influence on this parameter.
Note: In contrast to the PRESET key, command *RST sets this value to OFF, the output is
deactivated.
Example: :OUTP:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

:OUTPut[:STATe]:PON OFF | UNCHanged

This command selects the state the RF output is to assume after power-on of the unit. It only
exists for the RF output. *RST does not influence the set value.
OFF Output is switched off.
UNCHanged Same state as before switch- off
Example: :OUTP:PON OFF

1038.6002.02 3.27 E-13

OUTPut2 SME

3.6.10 OUTPut2 System

This system contains the commands specifying the characteristics of the LF output socket

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:OUTPut2
:SOURce 0|2 Option SM-B2
:STEReo MPX | PILot Option SM-B6
[:STATe] ON | OFF Option SM-B6
:VOLTage 0 V to 4 V V

:OUTPut2:SOURce 0 | 2
This command selects which LF generator is connected with the LF output socket (only with
option SM-B2 and SM-B6).
0 LF generator 1
2 LF generator 2 *RST value is 0, LF-generator 1 is connected at the output.
Example: :OUTP2:SOUR 2

:OUTPut2:SOURce:STEReo MPX | PILot

The command determines whether the complete stereo multiplex signal (MPX) or only the pilot
tone is output. The command is only effective if LF generator2 is in the STEREO operating mode
and if LF generator2 is selected for OUTPut2:SOURce as well.
Example: :OUTP2:SOUR:STER MPX *RST value is MPX

:OUTPut2[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches the LF output on or off. *RST value is OFF
Example: :OUTP2:STAT ON

:OUTPut2:VOLTage 0V to 4V
The command sets the voltage of the LF output. The voltage is a characteristic of the output, not
the source. I.e., it is maintained even if another LF generator is connected to the output.
Example: :OUTP2:VOLT 3.0V *RST value is 1 V

1038.6002.02 3.28 E-13

SME SOURce

3.6.11 SOURce-System
This system contains the commands to configure the RF signal source. Keyword SOURce is optional,
i.e., it can be omitted. The LF signal sources (options SM-B2 and SM-B6) are configured in the
SOURce0|2 system (cf. Section 3.6.12).

The following subsystems are realized in the instrument:

Subsystem Settings

[:SOURce]
:AM Amplitude modulation
:CORRection Correction of the output level
:DM Digital modulation
:ERMes ERMES signal
:FLEX FLEX signal
:FM Frequency modulation

:FREQuency Frequencies including sweep

:ILS Test signals for ILS (Instrument Landing System)

:LIST LIST operating mode

:MARKer Marker generation with sweeps

Marker signals (Marker Beacon)
:MBE
Phase between output signal and reference oscillator signal
:PHASe
Phase modulation
:PM
Post Office Code Standardisation Advisory Group)
:POCSag
Output level, level control and level correction
:POWer
Pulse modulation
:PULM
Pulse generator
:PULSe
Reference oscillator
:ROSCillator
Stereo modulation
:STEReo
Sweeps
:SWEep
Test signals for VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Range)
:VOR

1038.6002.02 3.29 E-13

3
SOURce:AM SME

[Link] SOURce:AM Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to control the amplitude modulation. Up to two LF generators
which serve as internal modulation sources can be fitted in the instrument (options SM-B2 and SM-B6).
Part of their settings is effected under SOURce0|2.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:AM
[:DEPTh] 0 to100PCT PCT
:EXTernal
:COUPling AC | DC
:INTernal1|2
:FREQuency 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 15 kHz or Hz
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz Option SM-B2 or B6

:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

:SOURce EXT | INT1|2 | EXT, INT1|2

:STATe ON | OFF

[:SOURce]:AM[:DEPTh] 0 to 100PCT
The command sets the modulation depth in percent. *RST value is 30PCT
Example: :SOUR:AM:DEPT 15PCT

[:SOURce]:AM:EXTernal
The commands to set the external AM input are under this node.

[:SOURce]:AM:EXTernal:COUPling AC | DC
The command selects the type of coupling for the external AM input.
AC The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal.
DC The modulation signal is not altered. *RST value is AC
Example: :SOUR:AM:EXT:COUP AC

[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal1|2
The settings for the internal AM inputs are effected under this node.
INT1 is LF generator 1,
INT2 is LF generator 2.
Here the same hardware is set for AM, PM, FM and SOURce0|2. This means that, for example,
the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect:
SOUR:AM:INT2:FREQ
SOUR:FM2:INT:FREQ
SOUR:PM2:INT:FREQ
SOUR2:FREQ:CW

1038.6002.02 3.30 E-13

SME SOURce:AM

[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal1|2:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or

0.1 Hz to 500 kHz (option SM-B2)or
0.1 Hz to 1MHz (option SM-B6)
The command sets the modulation frequency. Only certain specified ranges are permissible
depending on the equipment of the instrument.
If neither SM-B2 nor SM-B6 are fitted, only INT1 is permissible and values 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz
and 15 kHz are true. With option SM-B2, the specified range from 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz is true, with
SM-B6, from 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz. *RST value is 1 kHz
Example: :SOUR:AM:INT:FREQ 15kHz

[:SOURce]:AM:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command selects the polarity of the AM.
NORMal A positive modulation voltage generates a higher output level.
INVerted The AM polarity is inverted.
Example: :SOUR:AM:POL NORM *RST value is NORMal

[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce EXT | INT1|2 | EXT, INT1|2

The command selects the modulation source. INT1 is LF generator 1, INT2 LF generator 2
(option SM-B2 or SM-B6). An external and an internal modulation source can be indicated at the
same time (see example). *RST value is INT1
Example: :SOUR:AM:SOUR INT1, EXT

[:SOURce]:AM:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches amplitude modulation on or off. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:AM:STAT ON

1038.6002.02 3.31 E-13

3
SOURce:CORRection SME

[Link] SOURce:CORRection Subsystem

The CORRection subsystem permits a correction of the output level. The correction is effected by
adding user-defined table values to the output level as a function of the RF frequency. In the SME, this
subsystem serves to select, transmit and switch on USER-CORRECTION tables (see Chapter 2,
Section "User Correction (UCOR)" as well).

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:CORRection
[:STATe] ON | OFF
:CSET
:CATalog? Query only
[:SELect] "Name of table"
:DATA
:FREQuency 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz {,5 kHz to 1.5 GHz} Hz SME03E: to 2.2 GHz

:POWer -40 dBto 6dB {,-40 dBto 6dB} dB SME03: to 3 GHz

:DELete "Name of table" SME06: to 6 GHz

[:SOURce]:CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches the table selected using SOURce:CORRection:CSET on or off.
Example: :SOUR:CORR:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET
The commands to select and edit the UCOR tables are under this node.

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog?ß
The command requests a list of UCOR tables. The individual lists are separated by means of
commas. This command is a query and has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:CORR:CAT? Answer: "UCOR1", "UCOR2", "UCOR3"

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] "Name of table"

The command selects a UCOR table. This command alone does not yet effect a correction. First
the table selected must be activated (cf. :SOURce:CORRection:STATe). If there is no table of
this name, a new table is created. The name may contain up to 7 letters. This command triggers
an event and hence has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:CORR:CSET:SEL "UCOR1"

1038.6002.02 3.32 E-13

SME SOURce:CORRection

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA
The commands to edit the UCOR tables are under this node.

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz {,5 kHz to 1.5 GHz}

SME03E/03/06: to 2.2/3/6 GHz
The command transmits the frequency data for the table selected using
:SOURce:CORRection:CSET. *RST does not influence data lists.
Example: :SOUR:CORR:CSET:DATA:FREQ 100MHz,102MHz,103MHz,to

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer -40dB to 6dB {,-40dB to 6dB}

The command transmits the level data for the table selected using
:SOURce:CORRection:CSET. *RST does not influence data lists.
Example: :SOUR:CORR:CSET:DATA:POWer 1dB, 0.8dB, 0.75dB,to

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete "Name of table"

The command deletes the table indicated from the instrument memory. This command triggers an
event and hence has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:CORR:CSET:DEL "UCOR2"

1038.6002.02 3.33 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

[Link] SOURce:DM Subsystem

In this subsystem, the types of digital modulation are checked. A difference is made between basic
modulations (GMSK, GFSK, QPSK, FSK, 4FSK and FFSK) and complex modulations (ERMES, FLEX,
POCSAG). The common characteristics of all basic modulations are set under node [:BASic], the
common characteristics of all complex modulations under :COMPlex. An external input, an internal
pseudo-random sequence generator and an internal data generator are available as data source for the
basic modulations.

Note: The signal generator SME42 (Id No. 1038.6002.42) is a special model for ERMES, FLEX,
FLEX-TD and POCSAG. The options SME-B11 (DM coder), SME-B12 (DM expanded memory),
SME-B41 (FLEX protocol) and SME-B42 (POCSAG protocol) have been integrated in the
SME42 as standard.
Only the command MGRoup? and the commands of node SOURce:DM:COMPlex are available
when using the SME42.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:DM Option SME-B11
:MGRoup? Query only
[:BASic]
:TYPE GMSK | GFSK | QPSK | FSK | FSK4 | FFSK
:STATe ON | OFF
:SOURce EXTernal | PRBS | DATA
:CLOCk
:MODE BIT | SYMBol
:POLarity NORMal | INVerted
:SOURce INTernal | COUPled
:DATA
:CATalog? Query only
:DELete "Name"
:ALL
:FREE? Query only
:SELect "Name"
:DATA 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1}
:POINts? Query only
:ATTenuate 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1}
:POINts? Query only
:BURSt 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1}
:POINts? Query only
:ALEVel 0 to 60 dB dB
:MODE NORM | MAX | OFF
:XMEM Option SME-B12
:STARt 1 to 8388478 | 1 to 1048558
:LENGth 3 to 8388480 | 3 to 1048560
:AUTO ON | OFF
:MODE DATA | ALL
:RECord No query
:TRIGger ON | OFF
:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative
:PRBS
[:LENGth] 9 | 15 | 20 | 21 | 23

1038.6002.02 3.34 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

Command Parameter Default Unit Remark

[:SOURce]
:DM Option SME-B11
:COMPlex
:CLOCk
[:SOURce] INT | EXT
:GMSK
:STANdard GSM | PCN | CDPD | MC9 | MOBitex | DSRR | MD24 to No query
MD192
:BRATe 2.4 to 1000kb/s b/s
:FILTer 0.2 | 0.25 | 0.3 | 0.4 | 0.5
:DCODer ON | OFF
:GSLope ON | OFF
:POLarity NORMal | INVerted
:GFSK
:STANdard DECT | CT2 | CT3 No query
:BRATe 10 to 585 kb/s | 640 to 1170 kb/s b/s
:FILTer 0.4 | 0.5 | 0.6
:DEViation 14 | 14.4 | 18 | 20 | 25.2 | 160 | 180 | 202 | 259 | 288 | Hz
317 | 403 kHz
:DSLope
ON | OFF
:POLarity
NORMal | INVerted
:QPSK
:STANdard No query
NADC | PDC | TFTS | APCO | TETRa | INMarsat |
:TYPE MSAT
:BRATe QPSK | OQPSk | PI4Qpsk | PI4Dqpsk b/s
:CODing 1 to 24.3 kbps | 27.0 to 48.6 kbps
:FILTer NADC | TFTS | PDC | APCO | TETRa | INMarsat |
:POLarity MSAT
:FSK COS|SCOS, 0.35|0.4|0.5|0.6 | COS,0.2
:STANdard NORMal | INVerted No query

POCSag512 | POCSag1200 | POCSag2400 |

:BRATe CITYruf512 | CITYruf1200 | CITYruf2400 | FLEX1600 | b/s
:DEViation FLEX3200 Hz
:FILTer 0.05 to 1900 kb/s | 0.05 to 90 kb/s
:POLarity 0.01 to 400 kHz
:FSK4 GAUSs, 2.73 | BESSel, 1.22|2.44 | OFF
:STANdard NORMal | INVerted No query
:CODing
:BRATe ERMes | APCO | MODacom | FLEX3200 | FLEX6400 b/s
:DEViation ERMes | APCO | MODacom | FLEX Hz
:FILTER 1 to 24.3 kb/s | 27.0 to 48.6 kb/s
:POLarity 0.01 to 400 kHz
:FFSK BESSel, 1.22|1.25|2.44 | COS|SCOS, 0.2
:STANdard NORMal | INVerted No query
:DEViation Hz
:BRATe POCSag b/s
1.5 | 2.0 | 3.0 | 3.5 | 4.0 | 4.5 kHz
0.05 to 90 kb/s

1038.6002.02 3.35 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

[:SOURce]:DM:MGRoup?
The command queries the selected type of modulation. „BAS“ is returned for the basic modula-
tions GFSK, GMSK, QPSK, FSK, FSK4, and FFSK. „COMP“ is returned for the complex protocols
ERMES, FLEX, and POCSAG. The command is a query and hence has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:DM:MGR? Response: „BAS“

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]
The commands that are also valid for modulations GMSK, GFSK, DQPSK, FSK, FSK4 and FFSK
are under this node.

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:TYPE GMSK | GFSK | QPSK | FSK | FSK4 | FFSK

The command selects the type of basic modulation.
GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying
GFSK Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying
QPSKQuad Phase Shift Keying, a special form of PSK. The key word :DQPSk is also accepted.
FSK Frequency modulation with exactly two states
FSK4 Frequency modulation with exactly four states, designated as 4 FSK in the manual
control.
FFSK Fast Frequency Shift Keying, a special form of FSK
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:TYPE FSK *RST value is GMSK

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the modulation selected under :SOURce:DM[:BASic]:TYPe.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:STAT OFF *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:SOURce EXTernal | PRBS | DATA

The command selects the data source.
Note: Even if PRBS is selected, the burst output and the level reduction continue to be
controlled by the list selected under :SOURce:DM[:BASic]:DATA.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:SOUR PRBS *RST value is PRBS

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:CLOCk
The commands to set the data source for the time base used are under this node

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:CLOCk:MODE BIT | SYMBol

The command sets the clock operating mode. Bit and symbol clock pulse are only different in the
case of modulations possessing more than two states, i.e. requiring more than one bit to code
each state. Hence the command only has an effect on QPSK and FSK4.
BIT For each bit, a complete clock cycle is executed.
SYMBol A complete clock cycle is executed for n bits each (one symbol) (symbol clock pulse).
*RST value is BIT
Note: This command is also used for reading data from the extended memory XMEM which
is done either serially from the data list or in parallel from the data list together with the
burst list. Therefore, if all symbols are stored in the data list in a 2-bit code each (X and
Y), only BIT, not SYMBol must be selected. This implies also that the command
DATA:XMEM:MODE DATA (no ATTenuate and BURSt list available) is inconsistent
with DM:CLOC:MODE SYMBol when XMEM is used.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:CLOC:MODE BIT

1038.6002.02 3.36 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:CLOCk:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command sets the polarity of the time base used.
NORMal The data are accepted with a rising edge (external clock) or can be tapped at the
DATA socket with a rising edge (internal clock).
INVerted The data are accepted with a falling edge (external clock) or can be tapped at the
DATA socket with a falling edge (internal clock).
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:CLOC:POL NORM *RST value is NORMal

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | COUPled

The command selects the source for the DATA clock.
INTernal The internal clock generator is used. The CLOCK socket is switched to act as an
output.
COUPled The function of the CLOCK socket depends on the function of the DATA socket. This
means that with an external supply of the data, the clock has to be supplied
externally, with internal data generation the instrument itself generates the clock
pulse. *RST value is COUPled
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:CLOC:SOUR INT

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA
The commands to set the data generator are under this node. The bit rate at which the data are
output is to be set under the individual modulations.
The DM lists consists of a DATA, BURSt and ATTenuate content. The list contents must all be of
the same length except for contents of length 1. With QPSK, the number of entries has to be an
integer in addition. This is interpreted as if the content had the same length as the other contents
and all values were equal to the first value.
However, this is not valid for list "XMEM" offering access to the memory extension (cf. node
SOURce:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM).

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:CATalog?
The command queries the data lists available. The response supplied is an enumeration of the
data lists separated by commas. *RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:CAT? Answer: "DLIST1", "DLIST2", "DLIST3"

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DELete "Name"
This command deletes the data list indicated. *RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:DEL "DLIST2"

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DELete:ALL
This command deletes all data lists, with the exception of list "XMEM" (cf Chapter 2, Section "DM
Memory Extension"). *RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:DEL:ALL

1038.6002.02 3.37 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:FREE?
This command deletes all data lists, with the exception of list "XMEM" (cf Chapter 2, Section "DM
Memory Extension"). *RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:FREE? Answer: 2400, 200

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:SELect "Name"
This command selects the data list indicated. Working with the data list is only possible after
selection. If the list indicated does not exist yet, it is generated. The name may contain up to
seven letters.
List "XMEM" calls the DM memory extension (option SME-B12) (cf. Chapter 2, Section "DM
memory extension"). *RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:SEL "DLIST1"

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DATA 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1}
This command transmits the bit data the data generator outputs bit by bit to the data list selected
or to the memory area of the DM memory extension indicated (selection list "XMEM", definition of
the memory area under :DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM). Only numbers 0 or 1 are permissible. The data
can also be transmitted as block data. 8 bit data each are combined to form a byte, with the first
bit date having to be saved in the most significant bit of the first data byte. The following examples
of commands are equal. If the data are to be returned as block data, this has to be set in the
FORMat system. In the case of binary-block transmission, only lists with a length of integral
multiples of 8 can be loaded; when the data are returned, the last byte is filled if necessary. RST
has no influence on data lists.
Example:
:SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:DATA 0,1,1,0,0,0,0,1,0,1,0,1,1,0,0,0,0,0,1,0,1,1,0,1
:SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:DATA #13aX- (s.a. ’block data’ in chap. ’Parameter’)

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DATA:POINts?
This command queries the length (in bits) of the DATA list presently selected. The command is a
query and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:DATA:POIN? Answer: 200

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ATTenuate 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1}
This command transmits the bit edgedata the data generator uses for the decision of whether the
level is to be reduced or not (see SOURce:DM:BAS:DATA:ALEVel as well). List "XMEM",
DM memory extension, can only be written into with ATTenuate data if
DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:MODE is set to [Link] numbers 0 or 1 are permissible. The data can also
be transmitted as block data (cf. DATA). *RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:ATT 1,1,1,0,0,0,0,...

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ATTenuate:POINts?
This command queries the length (in bits) of the ATTenuate list presently selected. The
command is a query and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:ATT:POIN? Answer: 200

1038.6002.02 3.38 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:BURSt 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1}
The command transmits the burst data output at the BURSt output socket. List "XMEM", DM
memory extension, can only be written into with BURSt data if DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:MODE is set
to ALL. Only numbers 0 or 1 are permissible. "1" corresponds to high level at the burst socket.
The data can also be transmitted as block data (cf. DATA). *RST has no influence on data lists.

Example::SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:BURS 0,0,0,1,1,1,1

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:BURSt:POINts?
This command queries the length (in bits) of the BURSt list presently selected. The command is
a query and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:BURS:POIN? Answer: 200

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ALEVel 0 to 60 dB
This command (Attenuate LEVel) specifies the value in dB by which the level is reduced if a "1"
occurs in the ATTenuate list presently active. The command is only active in the setting
DM:BAS:DATA:ALEVel:MODE NORM.
Note: The command also specifies the level reduction of the complex modulation POCSAG.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:ALEV 3dB *RST value is 0 dB

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ALEVel:MODE NORM | MAX | OFF

This command specifies the operating mode for the level reduction. In GMSK modulation, the
command is only active in the setting DM:GMSK:GSLope = OFF.
NORM The level reduction is specified by the command DM:BAS:DATA:ALEVel.
MAX The level reduction is set to a maximum attenuation of >80 dB.
OFF No level reduction (DM:DATA:ALEV is without effect).
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:ALEV:MODE MAX *RST value is NORM

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM
The commands to configure option SME-B12, DM memory extension are under this node.

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:STARt 1 to 8388478 (XMEM:MODE = DATA) |

1 to 1048558 (XMEM:MODE = ALL)
This command indicates the start address for reading and outputting the data.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:STAR 256 Not changed by *RST

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:LENGth 3 to 8388480 (XMEM:MODE = DATA) |

3 to 1048560 (XMEM:MODE = ALL)
This command indicates the length of the data sequence to be input or output. The command is
only effective if :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:LENG:AUTO is set to OFF. The length maximally
possible depends on the selected mode of the memory space allocation and on the selected start
address (cf. Chapter 2, Section "DM Memory Extension"). The minimal length is 3.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:LENG 524280 Not changed by *RST

1038.6002.02 3.39 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:LENGth:AUTO ON | OFF
This command switches the automatic length identification in recording the data on or off. The
command is only effective with a data transmission via IEC bus, however, if the data are recorded
from an external source, it is not.
ON The transmitted data specify the length of the data sequence. The instrument adjusts
the value of LENGth accordingly.
OFF LENGth specifies the length of the sequence. The instrument ignores surplus data; if
the data quantity is too small, it copies as many data from the beginning of the
sequence as is necessary to achieve the specified sequence length.
Example::SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:LENG:AUTO OFF *RST value is ON

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:MODE DATA | ALL

This command specifies the memory space allocation.
DATA The memory is 1 bit broad and only contains DATA data. The memory depth is 8
MBit.
ALL The memory is 3 bits broad and contains lists of all three types of data (DATA,
ATTenuate and BURSt) The memory depth is 1 MBit.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:MODE DATA Not changed by *RST

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:RECord
This command starts the recording of external data. The data are directly transferred to the
memory extension, list XMEM. The recording automatically stops when the end address is
reached. The recording can be aborted using command :ABORt:XMEM. The setting under
:DM:BAS:DATA :XMEM:LENG:AUTO has no influence. The external data generator can be
synchronized via the CLOCK output of the SME. The command triggers an event and thus has no
*RST value.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:REC

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:TRIGger ON | OFF
This command switches the external trigger facility on or off.
ON The run of the list is triggered by an external trigger signal. Each trigger signal starts
a new run, which starts with the start address.
OFF The external trigger mode is switched off.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:TRIG OFF *RST value is OFF

:[SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:TRIGger:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative

This command selects the active edge of the external trigger signal.
POSitive The run of the list starts with the positive edge of the trigger signal.
NEGative The run of the list starts with the negative edge of the trigger signal.
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:DATA:XMEM:TRIG:SLOP POS *RST value is POSitive

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:PRBS

The commands to set the pseudo random sequence generator are under this node.

1038.6002.02 3.40 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:PRBS:LENGth 9 | 15 | 20 | 21 | 23
The command specifies the length of the pseudo random sequence according to the following
equation:
Length = (2LENGth) -1
Example: :SOUR:DM:BAS:PRBS:LENG 9 *RST value is 9 Bit

:SOURce]:DM:COMPlex:CLOCk:SOURce INT | EXT

The command selects the clock source for radiocommunication services ERMes, FLEX, REFLEX
and POCSag.
INT The clock required for signal generation is generated internally. The CLOCK
connector is switched to be an output.
EXT The clock required for signal generation is applied to the CLOCK connector.
Example: :SOUR:DM:COMP:CLOC:SOUR INT *RST value is INT

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK
The commands to set the data source for the digital type of modulation GMSK are under this
node. GMSK (Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying) always has exactly two states. The bit rate of the
data source is fixedly set, the phase displacement as well.

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:STANdard GSM|PCN | CDPD | MC9 | MOBitex | MD24N | MD24W | MD36N |

MD36W | MD48N | MD48W | MD80W | MD96N | MD96W |
MD100W | MD120W | DSRR | DSRR4K
This short-form command sets the parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the
standards (cf. table). The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table. Hence
it has no query form or *RST value.

Short command Command sequence

:DM:GMSK:STANdard GSM | PCN :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0,3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 270,833kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer ON
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard CDPD | MD192 :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0,5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 19,2 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MC9 :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0,3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 8 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer ON
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MOBitex | MD80N :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0,3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 8 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD24N :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0,3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 2,4 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

1038.6002.02 3.41 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:STANdard

Short command Command sequence

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD24W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0,5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 2,4 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD36N :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0,3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 3,6 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD36W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 23.6 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD48N :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 4.8 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD48W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 4.8 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD48W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 4.8 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD80W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 8 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD96N :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 9.6 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD96W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 9.6 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD100W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 10.0 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard MD120W :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 12.0 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard DSRR | MD160 :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.3

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 16.0 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GMSK:STANdard DSSR4K :DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GMSK:BRATe 4.0 kb/s
:DM:GMSK:DCODer OFF
:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORM

Example::SOUR:DM:GMSK:STAN PCN

1038.6002.02 3.42 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:BRATe 2.4 kb/s to 1000 kb/s

The command sets the bit rate of the modulation. The value of SOURce:DM:GMSK: FILTer is
adapted if necessary to obtain a valid setting. Valid setting are listeted in the table to Section
"GMSK Modulation" in Chapter 2.
Example: :SOUR:DM:GMSK:BRAT 8000b/s *RST value is 270.833kb/s

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:DCODer ON | OFF
Command (Differential Encoder) specifies the state coding.
ON Difference coding of the states according to regulation GSM is switched on.
OFF No difference coding. *RST value is ON
Example: :SOUR:DM:GMSK:DCOD OFF

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.2 | 0.25 | 0.3 | 0.4 | 0.5

The command specifies B x T of the Gaussian filter used. The value of SOURce:DM:
GMSK:FILTer is adapted if necessary to obtain a valid setting.
Valid settings are listed in the table to Section "GMSK Modulation" in Chapter 2.
Example: :SOUR:DM:GMSK:FILT 0.2 *RST value is 0.3

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:GSLope ON | OFF
The command specifies the level reduction for the modulation.
ON The rise and fall time of the level reduction correspond to GSM power ramping.
OFF Command DM:DATA:ALEVel:MODE specifies the level reduction.
Example: :SOUR:DM:GMSK:GSL ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity of the modulation.
NORMal A "1" from the data source generates a positive deviation, a "0" a negative deviation.
INVerted A "1" from the data source generates a negative deviation, a "0" a positive deviation.*RST value is NO
Example: :SOUR:DM:GMSK:POL INV

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK
The commands to set the data source for the digital type of modulation GFSK are under this node.
GFSK (Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying) always has exactly two states.

1038.6002.02 3.43 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:STANdard DECT | CT2 | CT3

This short-form command sets the parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the
standards (cf. table). The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table. Hence
it neither has a query form nor an *RST value.

Short command Command sequence

:DM:GFSK:STANdard DECT :DM:GFSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GFSK:BRATe 1125 kb/s
:DM:GFSK:DEViation 288kHz
:DM:GFSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GFSK:STANdard CT2 :DM:GFSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GFSK:BRATe 72 kb/s
:DM:GFSK:DEViation 18 kHz
:DM:GFSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:GFSK:STANdard CT3 :DM:GFSK:FILTer 0.5

:DM:GFSK:BRATe 640 kb/s
:DM:GFSK:DEViation 160 kHz
:DM:GFSK:POLarity NORM

Example: :SOUR:DM:GFSK:STAN DECT

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:BRATe 10 to 585 kb/s and 640 to 1170 kb/s

The command sets the bit rate for the modulation in bits per second. With setting FILTer 0.5 and
DEViation 14.0 kHz or 25.2 kHz the range is 0.05...90 kb/s
Example: :SOUR:DM:GFSK:BRAT 1122 kb/s *RST value is 1170 kb/s

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:DEViation 14 |14.4 |18 |20.0 |25.2 |160 |180 |202 |259 |288 |317 |403 kHz
The command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation. The value of
:SOURce:DM:GMSK:DEViation is adapted if necessary in order to achieve a valid setting.
Valid settings are: DEViation FILTer DEViation FILTer
14 kHz 0.5 180 kHz 0.5
14.4 kHz 0.7 202 kHz 0.5
18 kHz 0.5 259 kHz 0.5
20.0 kHz 0.5 288 kHz 0.4, 0.5, 0.6
25.2 kHz 0.4, 0.5 317 kHz 0.5
160 kHz 0.5 403 kHz 0.5
Example: :SOUR:DM:GMSK:DEV 288E3 *RST value is 288 kHz

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:FILTer 0.4 | 0.5 | 0.6 | 0.7

The command specifies B x T of the filter used. The value of :SOURce:DM:GFSK:DEViation is
adapted if necessary in order to achieve a valid setting
Valid settings are: FILTer DEViation
0.4 25.2 kHz, 288 kHz
0.5 14 kHz, 18 kHz, 20.0 kHz, 25.2 kHz, 160 kHz, 180 kHz,
202 kHz, 259 kHz, 288 kHz, 317 kHz, 403 kHz
0.6 288 kHz
0.7 14.4 kHz *RST value is 0.5
Example: :SOUR:DM:GFSK:FILT 0.4

1038.6002.02 3.44 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:DSLope ON | OFF
The command specifies the level reduction for the modulation.
ON The rise and fall time of the level reduction correspond to DECT power ramping.
OFF Command DM:DATA:ALEVel:MODE specifies the level reduction.
Example: :SOUR:DM:GFSK:DSL ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity of the modulation.
NORMal A "1" from the data source results in a positive deviation
INVerted A "1" from the data source results in a negative deviation
Example: :SOUR:DM:GMSK:POL INV *RST value is NORMal

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK
The commands to set the data source for the digital type of modulation QPSK ( Quad Phase Shift
Keying) are under this node. The key word :DQPSk is also accepted..

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:STANdard NADC | PDC | TFTS | TETRa | APCO | MSAT | INMarsat

This short-form command sets parameters shown in the table to the values specified by standards
(cf. table). The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table. Hence it neither
has a query form nor an *RST value.
NADCNorth American Digital Cellular
PDC Personal Digital Cellular
TFTS Terrestrial Flight Telephone System
TETRa Trans European Trunk Radio
APCO25 Association of Public Safety Communications Officers, Project 25
MSATMobile Satellite
INMarsat International Maritime Satellite

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:STANdard

Short command Command sequence

:DM:QPSK:STANdard NADC :DM:QPSK:TYPE PI4Dqpsk

:DM:QPSK:BRATe 48.6 kb/s
:DM:QPSK:CODing NADC
:DM:QPSK:FILTer SCOS, 0.35
:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:QPSK:STANdard APCO :DM:QPSK:TYPE PI4Dqpsk

:DM:QPSK:BRATe 9.6 kb/s
:DM:QPSK:CODing NADC
:DM:QPSK:FILTer COS, 0.2
:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:QPSK:STANdard PDC :DM:QPSK:TYPE PI4Dqpsk

:DM:QPSK:BRATe 42 kb/s
:DM:QPSK:CODing NADC
:DM:QPSK:FILTer SCOS, 0.5
:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORM

1038.6002.02 3.45 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:STANdard

:DM:QPSK:STANdard TETRa :DM:QPSK:TYPE PI4Dqpsk

:DM:QPSK:BRATe 36 kb/s
:DM:QPSK:CODing NADC
:DM:QPSK:FILTer SCOS, 0.35
:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:QPSK:STANdard TFTS :DM:QPSK:TYPE PI4Dqpsk

:DM:QPSK:BRATe 44.2 kb/s
:DM:QPSK:CODing TFTS
:DM:QPSK:FILTer SCOS, 0.4
:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:QPSK:STANdard MSAT :DM:QPSK:TYPE QPSK

:DM:QPSK:BRATe 6.75 kb/s
:DM:QPSK:CODing MSAT
:DM:QPSK:FILTer SCOS, 0.6
:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORM

:DM:QPSK:STANdard INMarsat :DM:QPSK:TYPE 0QPSk

:DM:QPSK:BRATe 8 kb/s
:DM:QPSK:CODing INMarsat
:DM:QPSK:FILTer SCOS, 0.6
:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORM

Example: :SOUR:DM:QPSK:STAN PDC

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:TYPE QPSK | 0QPSk | PI4Qpsk | PI4Dqpsk

The command specifies the used QPSK modulation type in detail.
Example: :SOUR:DM:QPSK:TYPE QPSK *RST value is PI4Dqpsk

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:BRATe 1 to 24.3 kb/s and 27.0 to 48.6 kb/s

The command indicates the bit rate for the modulation in bits per second. The resolution is 100
b/s. *RST value is 48.6 kb/s
Example: :SOUR:DM:QPSK:BRAT 42kb/s

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:CODing NADC | PDC | TFTS | TETRa | APCO | MSAT | INMarsat

The command specifies the coding between the binary data and the generated signal (difference
coding).
Example: :SOUR:DM:QPSK:COD NADC *RST value is NADC

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:FILTer COSine|SCOSine , 0.35|0.4|0.5|0.6 | COSine, 0.2

The command specifies the filter characteristics (characteristic and "roll-off factor"). Values
COSine (cosine) and SCOSine (square root cosine) are permissible for characteristic. For roll-off,
0.2, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5 and 0.6 are permissible.
Example: :SOUR:DM:QPSK:FILT COS,0.35. *RST value is SCOSine, 0.35

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity of the modulation.
NORMal A "1" from the data source generates a positive deviation
INVerted A "1" from the data source generates a negative deviation
Example: :SOUR:DM:QPSK:POL NORM *RST value is NORMal

1038.6002.02 3.46 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK
The commands to set the data source for the digital frequency modulation are under this node.
FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) always has exactly two states. In contrast to the other types of
modulation, there are trigger commands for FSK and FSK4 which also permit a single processing
of the data list (cf. TRIGger system, Section 3.6.16).

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:STANdard POCSag512| POCSag1200| POCSag2400| CITYruf512|

CITYruf1200| CITYruf2400 | FLEX1600 | FLEX3200
This short-form command sets parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the
standards (cf. table). The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table. Hence
it neither has a query form nor an *RST value.

Short command Command sequence

:DM:FSK:STANdard POCSag512 :DM:FSK:BRATe 512

:DM:FSK:DEViation 4.5 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER GAUSs, 2.73
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted
:DM:FSK:STANdard POCSag1200 :DM:FSK:BRATe 1200
:DM:FSK:DEViation 4.5 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER GAUSs, 2.73
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted
:DM:FSK:STANdard POCSag2400 :DM:FSK:BRATe 2400
:DM:FSK:DEViation 4.5 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER GAUSs, 2.73
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted
:DM:FSK:STANdard CITYruf512 :DM:FSK:BRATe 512
:DM:FSK:DEViation 4 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER GAUSs, 2.73
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted
:DM:FSK:STANdard CITYruf1200 :DM:FSK:BRATe 1200
:DM:FSK:DEViation 4 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER GAUSs, 2.73
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted
:DM:FSK:STANdard CITYruf2400 :DM:FSK:BRATe 2400
:DM:FSK:DEViation 4 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER GAUSs, 2.73
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted
:DM:FSK:STANdard FLEX1600 :DM:FSK:BRATe 1600
:DM:FSK:DEViation 4.8 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER BESSel, 2.44
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted
:DM:FSK:STANdard FLEX3200 :DM:FSK:BRATe 3200
:DM:FSK:DEViation 4.8 kHz
:DM:FSK:FILTER BESSel, 1.22
:DM:FSK:POLarity INVerted

Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK:STAN POCS512

[:SOURce]:DM :FSK:BRATe 0.05 to 1900 kb/s (with FILTer OFF),

0.05 to 90 kb/s (with FILTer switched on)
The command sets the bit rate for the modulation in bits per second. If this value does not
correspond to the standard selected, the FILTer is deactivated automatically (OFF).
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK:BRAT 2400 *RST value is 1200b/s

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:DEViation 0 to 400 kHz

This command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation. If this value does not correspond to
the standard selected, the FILTer is deactivated automatically (OFF).
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK:DEV 3kHz *RST value is 4.5 kHz

1038.6002.02 3.47 E-13

3
SOURce:DM SME

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:FILTer GAUSs, 2.73 | BESSel, 1.22 | BESSel, 2.44 | OFF

The command activates or deactivates the selected filter. Deactivating the filter is possible at any
time. Activating the filter is only possible when values DEViation and BITRate correspond to the
standard values.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK:FILT GAUS,2.73 *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity of the modulation.
NORMal Logic "0" reduces the frequency, logic "1" increases it.
INVerted Logic "1" reduces the frequency, logic "0" increases it.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK:POL INV *RST value is NORMal

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4
The commands to set the data source for the digital frequency modulation with exactly four states
are under this node. In contrast to the other modulations, there are trigger commands for FSK and
FSK4 which also permit a single processing of the data list.

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:STANdard ERMes | APCO| MODacom | FLEX3200 | FLEX6400

This short -form command sets parameters shown in the table to the values specified by the
standards (cf. table). The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table. Hence
it neither has a query form nor an *RST value.

Short command Command sequence

:DM:FSK4:STANdard ERMes :DM:FSK4:BRAT 6.25 kb/s

:DM:FSK4:FILTer BESSel, 1.25
:DM:FSK4:DEViation 4.68756kHz
:DM:FSK4:STANdard APCO :DM:FSK4:BRAT 9.6 kb/s
:DM:FSK4:FILTer COS, 0.2
:DM:FSK4:DEViation 1.800kHz
:DM:FSK4:STANdard MODacom :DM:FSK4:BRAT 9.6 kb/s
:DM:FSK4:FILTer SCOS, 0.2
:DM:FSK4:DEViation 2.0kHz
:DM:FSK4:STANdard FLEX3200 :DM:FSK4:BRAT 3.2 kb/s
:DM:FSK4:FILTer BESSel, 1.22
:DM:FSK4:DEViation 4.8kHz
:DM:FSK4:STANdard FLEX6400 :DM:FSK4:BRAT 6.4 kb/s
:DM:FSK4:FILTer BESSel, 2.44
:DM:FSK4:DEViation 4.8kHz

Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK4:STAN ERM

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:BRATe 1 to 24.3 kb/s | 27.0 to 48.6 kb/s

The command sets the bit rate for the modulation.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK4:BRAT 6.25 kb/s *RST value is 6.25 kb/s

1038.6002.02 3.48 E-13

SME SOURce:DM

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:CODing ERMes | APCO| MODacom | FLEX

The command specifies according to which standard the coding between binary data and
generated signal is performed.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK4:COD ERM *RST value is ERMes

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:DEViation 0.01 to 400 kHz

This command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK4:DEV 4.6875kHz *RST value is 4687.5

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:FILTer BESSel, 1.22|1.25|2.44 | COS|SCOS, 0.2

This command selects the filter of the modulation.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK4:FILT COS, 0.2 *RST value is BESSel, 1.25

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity of the modulation.
NORMal A "0" from the data source reduces the frequency, "1" increases it.
INVerted A "1" from the data source reduces the frequency, "0" increases it.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FSK4:POL INV *RST value is NORMal

[:SOURce]:DM:FFSK
The commands to check the two-stage modulation FFSK are under this node. An LF signal is
FSK-modulated and then serves as an input signal for an FM modulation of the actual carrier.

[:SOURce]:DM:FFSK:STANdard POCSag
This short-form command sets parameter shown in the table to the value specified by the
standard (cf. table). The command is an abbreviation of the commands listed in the table. Hence it
neither has a query form nor an *RST value.

Short command Command sequence

:DM:FSK4:STANdard POCSag :DM:FFSK:DEViation 4.5 kHz

Example: :SOUR:DM:FFSK:STAN POCS

[:SOURce]:DM:FFSK:BRATe 0.05 to 90 kb/s

This command sets the bit rate of the modulation.
Example: :SOUR:DM:FFSK:BRAT 2400 *RST value is: 1200 b/s

[:SOURce]:DM:FFSK[:DEViation] 1.5 kHz | 2.0 kHz | 3.0 kHz | 3.5 kHz | 4.0 kHz | 4.5 kHz
The command sets the frequency deviation of the modulation. *RST value is: 4.5 kHz
Example: :SOUR:DM:FFSK:DEV 100kHz

1038.6002.02 3.49 E-13

3
SOURce:ERMes SME

[Link] SOURce:ERMes Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to set the ERMES signal. ERMES uses a 4FSK modulation.
The parameters of the DM:FSK4 subsystem, however, are not influenced by settings in the ERMes
subsystem. Switchover between the output of useful or filler subsequences is by means of the
TRIGger:DM subsystem.

Command Parameter Defaul Remark

t
Unit

[:SOURce]
:ERMes Option SME-B11/
:STATe ON | OFF SME-B12
:AUTO ON | OFF
:CHANnel 0 to 15
:ERRor
:MASK 0 to 1073741823
:BATCh A to P

:WORD 0 to 153 ( 0 to 189 for long batch)

:MESSage
:CATegory TONE | NUMeric | ALPHanumeric

:ALPHanumeric
"String"
:DATA
"FOX"|"ALPHA"|"LONG"| "USER1 to 3"
[:SELect]
0 to 262143
:IA | IADDress
"String"
:NUMeric
0 to 15
:TONE
:NINFormation
0 to 7
:OPERator
0 to 63
:PA | PARea
0 to 799
:ZCOuntry
:SEQuence
A to P {,A to P}
:DBATch
:SI | SINFormation
ON | OFF
:ETI
ON | OFF
:BAI
0 to 30
:FSI 1 to 31
:DOMonth 00,00 to 23,59
:TIME MESSage | STARt | ONCE
:TACTion

[:SOURce]:ERMes:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches on the ERMES signal and hence switches off all other active DM
modulations. The RF frequency is set to the value determined by command
SOURce:ERMes:CHANnel.
If STATe:AUTO is ON with every change from OFF to ON, the data for the memory extension are
recalculated and written into list "XMEM". Every change of one of the ERMES parameters
requires the data to be recalculated, i.e. a brief switchover to STATe OFF after every change.
Example: :SOUR:ERM:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

1038.6002.02 3.50 E-13

SME SOURce:ERMes

[:SOURce]:ERMes:STATe:AUTO ON | OFF
The command specifies wether the ERMES data are to be newly calculated on switching from
ERMes:STATe OFF to :STATe ON.
ON The data are newly recalculated and written into list "XMEM"
OFF The existing contents are kept in the memory extension. This can be used to transfer
data generated or changed by an external program to the memory extension and
thus generate a ERMes telegram. *RST value is ON
Example: :SOUR:ERM:STAT:AUTO ON

[:SOURce]:ERMes:CHANnel 0 to 15
The command determines the channel and thus the transmitter frequency for ERMes (cf. Chapter
2, Section "Radiocommunication Service ERMES"). This command also influences the structure
of the ERMES data. This is why the channel cannot be changed by adjusting the frequency using
command SOURce:FREQuency but only using command SOURce:ERMes:CHANnel and then
changing to STATe OFF and then to STATe ON again.
Example: :SOUR:ERM:CHAN 1 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:ERMes:ERRor
The SME offers the possibility of entering bit errors into a 30-bit word of the message transmitted
for test purposes. The commands to specify the bit errors and their position are under this node.

[:SOURce]:ERMes:ERRor:MASK 0 to 1073741823
The command specifies the faulty bits of the word of the message selected using ERRor:WORD.
30 bits can be defined as faulty (1) or perfect (0). The decimal number transmitted is converted
internally into a 30-bit binary number and thus determines the 30 bits. These bits are XORed with
the word to be corrupted and hence determine which bits of this word are transmitted correctly or
wrongly. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:ERM:ERR:MASK 5

[:SOURce]:ERMes:ERRor:BATCh A to P
The command specifies in which of batches A to P the faulty word is. The faulty word is
determined by command SOURce:ERMes:ERRor:WORD. *RST does not influence this setting.
Example: :SOUR:ERM:ERR:BATC P

[:SOURce]:ERMes:ERRor:WORD 0 to 153 (0 to 189 for long batch)

The command determines the faulty word in the batch selected by means of command
SOURce:ERMes:ERRor:BATC. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:ERM:ERR:WORD 111

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage
The commands to set the destination address and to determine the message data are under this
node.

1038.6002.02 3.51 E-13

3
SOURce:ERMes SME

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:IA | IADDress 0 to 262143

The command determines the address ("Inital ADDress") of the pager addressed. Each pager has
an own, nonrecurring address. 0 are 262143 are valid values, i.e. all numbers which can be
indicated using 18 bits. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:ERM:MESS:IA 0

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric | NUMeric | TONE

The command specifies the category of the message to be sent.
ALPHanumeric Alphanumeric message
NUMeric Numeric message
TONETone-only message
Example: :SOUR:ERM:MESS:CAT NUM *RST value is TONE

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:ALPHanumeric
The commands to specify the contents of the alphanumeric message are under this node. These
commands are only effective if ERMes:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric is selected.

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] "FOX" | "ALPHA" | "LONG" | "USER1" |

"USER2" | "USER3"
The command selects the alphanumeric message. The following is available:
"FOX" The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog
"ALPHA" ABCD to (complete ERMES character set)
"LONG" Message completely filling a batcht
"USER1to3" Three messages which can be edited freely using command
ALPHanumeric:DATA
Example: :SOUR:ERM:MESS:ALPH:SEL FOX *RST value is USER3

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA "String"
The command permits the input of an arbitrary character string into one of the alphanumeric
messages USER1 to 3. This message must be selected before using ALPHanumeric:SELect.
*RST value is "" (i.e., empty message)
Example: :SOUR:ERM:MESS:ALPH:DATA "Hello"

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:NUMeric "string"
The command specifies which character string the numeric message consists of. The SME
permits maximally 16 digits. In addition to the 10 digits "0" to "9", the signs forward slash "/",
upper-case letter "U", hyphen "-", period ".", percent "%" and blank can be used. This command
is only effective if CATegory NUMeric has been selected.
Example: :SOUR:ERM:MESS:NUM "12% 15-17" *RST value is "" (i.e., empty message)

1038.6002.02 3.52 E-13

SME SOURce:ERMes

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:TONE 0 to 15
The command specifies which of the 16 tones possible (8 normal, 8 urgent) are transmitted in an
tone-only message. This command is only effective if CATegory TONE has been selected.
Example: :SOUR:ERM:MESS:TONE 7 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:ERMes:NINFormation
The commands to set the data denoting the network (the SME simulates) in greater detail are
under this node. These data are part of every message sent (cf. ERMES standard).

[:SOURce]:ERMes:NINFormation:OPERator 0 to 7
The command sets the code of the network operator. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:ERM:NINF:OPER 1

[:SOURce]:ERMes:NINFormation:PA | PARea 0 to 63
The command sets the paging area. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:ERM:NINF:PA 4

[:SOURce]:ERMes:NINFormation:ZCOuntry 0 to 799
The command sets the zone and the country code in the message to be sent. Germany has code
262 *RST value is 262
Example: :SOUR:ERM:NINF:ZCO 799

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SEQuence
The commands specifying the structure of the message subsequences are under this node. The
control of the subsequence (message or fill subsequences, cf. Chapter 2, Section
"Radiocommunication Service ERMES") is effected via the TRIGger system.

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SEQuence:DBATch A to P {,A toP}

The command indicates the batches which are to contain message data.
After *RST value, no batch contains user data
Example: :SOUR:ERM:SEQ:DBAT A, B, C, G, H, M, P

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation
The commands to set the sending system are under this node (cf. ERMES standard). The data
are part of every message sent.

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:BAI ON | OFF
The command sets the Border Area Indicator Bit. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:ERM:SI:BAI ON

1038.6002.02 3.53 E-13

3
SOURce:ERMes SME

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:ETI ON | OFF
The command sets the External Traffic Indicator Bit. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:ERM:SI:ETI ON

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:FSI 0 to 30
The command sets the Frequency Subset Indicator. According to the standard, one-channel
networks have an FSI of 30. *RST value is 30
Example: :SOUR:ERM:SI:FSI 20

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:DOMonth 1 to 31
The command sets the date (day of month). *RST value is 1
Example: :SOUR:ERM:SI:DOM 24

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:TIME 00,00 to 23,59

The command sets the time. *RST value is 00,00
Example: :SOUR:ERM:SI:TIME 12,00

[:SOURce]:ERMes:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE

This command (Trigger ACTion) determines the action which is activated by a trigger event. The
valid trigger events are specified by command TRIGger:DM:SOURce. This command also
defines the allocation between manual and remote-control operations.
MESSage A trigger event switches from filler data output to useful data output for the duration
of a subsequence (12 s). The filler data are then output again.
STARt Digital modulation is started by a trigger event. Useful data are then continuously
output according to the settings.
This setting is suitable, for example, for a synchronous start of several units.
ONCE The output of the message subsequence is only started by a valid trigger event.
After recognition of this signal, exactly one message subsequence (length: 12
seconds) is output. After that, the SME waits for its trigger pulse again (defined
under TRIG:DM:SOUR).
Example: :SOUR:ERM:TACT MESS *RST value is MESSage

1038.6002.02 3.54 E-13

SME SOURce:FLEX

[Link] SOURce:FLEX Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands for setting the FLEX signal. Like ERMES, FLEX is a
radiocommunication service that makes for convenient paging. When equipped with the SME-B41
(FLEX), SME-B11 (DM coder) and SME B12 (DM memory extension) options, the SME generates call
signals complying to the FLEX standard. All essential parameters and the message to be transmitted
are freely selectable. Switchover between the output of useful or filler signals is by means of the
TRIGger:DM subsystem.

Command Parameter Defaul Remark

t
Unit

[:SOURce]
:FLEX Options SME-B11/
:STATe ON | OFF SME-B12/SME-B41
:AUTO ON | OFF
:CYCLe 0 to 14
:DEViation 2.0 to 10.0 kHz Hz
:ERRor
:MASK 0 to 4294967295
:WORD 0 to 87
:FCONtent "X | O | A | space [,X | O | A | space]"
:AUTO ON | OFF
:MODulation 1600, FSK2 | 3200, FSK2 | 3200,FSK4 | 6400,FSK4
:PHASe A | B | C | D | AB | AC | AD | BC | BD | CD | ABC |
ABD | ACD | BCD | ABCD |
:AUTO ON | OFF
:MESSage
:CAPCode "A0 000 001 to 999 999 999"
:CATegory ALPHanumeric | SECure | BINary | NUMeric |
SNUMeric | TONE
:ALPHanumeric
[:SELect] ’FOX’ | ’ALPHA’ | ’USER1 to 4’
:CATalog?
:DATA "Alphanumeric data" Query only
:BINary
[:SELect] " Name"
:BLENgth 1 to 16
:CATalog?
:DATA "0 | 1 [,0 |1]" Query only
:DDIRection LEFT | RIGHt
:MNUMbering ON | OFF
:MDRop ON | OFF
:NUMeric " string"
:REPeats 0 to 3
:TONE 0 to 7
:SI | SINFormation
:COLLapse 0 to 7
:DATE Year, month, day
:LCHannel 0 to 511
:TIME 00,00 to 23,59
:CZONe 0 to 31
:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE

1038.6002.02 3.55 E-13

3
SOURce:FLEX SME

[:SOURce]:FLEX:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches the FLEX signal on; all other activated DM modulations are switched off.
In contrast to ERMES, the RF frequency is not changed.
Every switchover from OFF to ON results in a recalculation of the memory extension data and
their entry into the list "XMEM" if :FLEX:STATe:AUTO is set to ON. Every change of a FLEX
parameter except for :FLEX:FCONtent requires a recalculation of data, ie after every parameter
change, STATe OFF has to be briefly activated.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:FLEX:STATe:AUTO ON | OFF
The command determines whether the FLEX data have to be recalculated after switchover from
FLEX:STATe OFF to STATe ON.
ON The data are recalculated and entered into the memory extension.
OFF The previous memory extension contents are not cleared. This feature can be used
for data generated or altered by an external program and then transmitted into the
memory extension to generate a FLEX telegram. *RST value is ON
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:STAT:AUTO ON

[:SOURce]:FLEX:CYCLe 0 to 14
The command determines which number is assigned to the first cycle after switch on of FLEX.
Frame numbering always starts with 0.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:CYCL 0 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:FLEX:DEViation 2.0 to 10.0 kHz

The command determines the frequency deviation of the modulation. The deviation specifies the
spacing from the carrier for the two far-placed symbols in 4FSK. The FLEX standard specifies
4800 Hz for this value which may be varied for testing.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:DEV 4.8kHz *RST value is 4800 Hz

[:SOURce]:FLEX:ERRor:MASK 0 to 4294967295
The command determines the erroneous bits in a 32-bit field. The transmitted decimal number
(0...4294967295) is converted internally into a 32-bit binary number and thus defines the 32 bits.
These bits are XORed with the word of the message which is to be falsified and thus determine
which bits of this word are to be transmitted correctly or incorrectly.
Note: XORing precedes block interleaving (see flex standard)! It is carried out in all phases of
all message frames (i.e., the’ X’marked frames under FRAME CONTENTS).

Example: :SOUR:FLEX:ERRor:MASK 0 *RST value is 0.

1038.6002.02 3.56 E-13

SME SOURce:FLEX

[:SOURce]:FLEX:ERRor:WORD 0 to 87
The command determines the position of the word to be falsified. The words are numbered from
block 0, word 0 to block 10, word 7 of a frame. The sync part and the frame information word
cannot be falsified. The falsification precedes block interleaving in all transmitted phases.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:ERRor:WORD 0 *RST value is 0.

[:SOURce]:FLEX:FCONtent "X | blank spaces | O | A [,X| blank spaces | O| A]"

This command determines the contents of the 128 frames. Each frame is represented by a
character. If less than 128 values are indicated, the output cycle is shortened correspondingly.
X Flex useful data
SpaceFlex filler data
O Simulated data of another radiocommunication service (O for OTHER)
A "Emergency Resynchronization" specified in the FLEX standard (A stands for ASYNC)
The frame assigned to the pager is calculated from the value of FLEX:MESSage:CAPCode
according to the following formula:
Frame = (Integer(CAPCODE/16)) modulo 128
Notes: - The SINFormation:COLLapse value may cause the pager to respond to much
more than merely its "own" frame.
- As the FLEX signal generation is subject to the trigger system, the settings under
TRIGger:DM, determine whether the specified frame contents or only the filler
frames are output.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:FCON "X, , ,O,O,O,O,O,X,X,X,A,A,A, ,X"

[:SOURce]:FLEX:FCONtent:AUTO ON | OFF
This command determines the influence of changes of CAPCODE on FRAME CONTENT.
ON FRAME CONTENT is set so that in all frames evaluated by the reciever (and only in
those) FLEX data are also transmitted. All the other frames only contain filler data.
OFF A change of CAPCODE has no influence on FRAME CONTENT.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:FCON:AUTO ON *RST value is ON

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MODulation 1600, FSK2 | 3200, FSK2 | 3200,FSK4 | 6400,FSK4

The command determines the used bit rate and modulation. FLEX recognizes four modulations:
1600bps/2FSK 3200bps/2FSK 3200bps/4FSK 6400bps/4FSK
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MOD 1600,FSK2 * RST value is 1600,2FSK

1038.6002.02 3.57 E-13

3
SOURce:FLEX SME

[:SOURce]:FLEX:PHASe A | B | C | D | AB | AC | AD | BC | BD | CD | ABC | ABD | ACD | BCD | ABCD |

The command determines in which phase (A to D) the message is to be transmitted. Since each
frame lasts 1.875 sec independent of the modulation and more data can be transmitted at bit
rates higher than 1600 bps, several independent channels ("phases") are bit-multiplexed. With
1600 bps, the message is transmitted for every setting in phase A. With 3200 bps, the message is
transmitted in phase A if A and B are set, and transmitted in phase C if C and D are set. With
6400 bps, the message is transmitted in all the four phases depending on the relevant setting.
Each pager is set to one phase. The phase can be calculated from the CAPCODE of a pager as
shown below:
Phase = (Integer(CAPCODE/4)) modulo 4, with 0=A, 1=B, etc.

Example: :SOUR:FLEX:PHAS A *RST value is A

[:SOURce]:FLEX:PHASe:AUTO ON | OFF
This command determines whether the phase setting is coupled to the CAPCODE.
ON The phase is adjusted to the value contained in the CAPCODE whenever the
CAPCODE is used (see FLEX standard).
OFF Using the CAPCODE has no effect on the phase.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:PHAS:AUTO ON *RST value is ON

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage
Under this node there are commands to set the destination address and to determine the useful
data of the message.

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:CAPCode "Capcode string"

Input value of the CAPCODE of the pager to be called as printed on the receiver. CAPCODE is
defined in the FLEX standard. It contains the addresses of the receiver as well as frame and
phase information.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:CAPC "A0000001" *RST value is "A0000001"

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric | SECure | BINary | NUMeric | SNUMeric |

TONE
The command determines the category of the message to be transmitted.
ALPHanumeric Alphanumeric message
SECure Secured alphanumeric message
BINary Binary message
NUMeric Numeric message (with ≤ 3 figures = "short message" according to FLEX standard)
SNUMeric Special numeric message
TONEOnly-tone message
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:CAT NUM *RST value is TONE

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:ALPHanumeric|SECure
This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the alphanumeric and the
secured messages. There is one common character set for the two types of messages. These
commands can only be activated if FLEX:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric or SECure is
selected.

1038.6002.02 3.58 E-13

SME SOURce:FLEX

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] "FOX" | "ALPHA" | "USER1" | "USER2" |

"USER3" | "USER4"
This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the alphanumeric and the
secured messages. There is one common character set for the two types of messages. These
commands can only be activated if FLEX:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric or SECure is
selected.:
"FOX" The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog
"ALPHA" ABCD to (complete FLEX character set)
"USER1 to 4" Four messages that can be freely edited by command ALPHanumeric:DATA.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:ALPH:SEL "FOX" *RST value is USER3

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:CATalog?
The command queries the alphanumeric and secured alphanumeric messages available. It
causes a list to be returned on which the entries are separated by commas. The command is a
query command and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:ALPH:CAT? Answer: FOX, ALPHA, USER1

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA "String"
The command allows any character string to be entered into one of the alphanumeric messages
USER 1 to 4. This message has to be selected first with the command ALPHanumeric:SELect.
*RST value is "" (eg, empty message)
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:ALPH:DATA "Hallo"

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary
This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the binary messages. The
commands can only be activated if FLEX:MESSage:CATegory BINary is selected.

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary[:SELect] "USER1" | "USER2"

The command selects the binary messages. *RST value is USER1
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:SEL "USER1"

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:BLENgth 1 to 16
The command sets the number of bits to be interpreted as a unit (character). This value has no
significance for SME. It is transmitted to the pager and evaluated there. *RST value is 1
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:BLEN 16

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:CATalog?
The command queries the binary messages available. It causes a list to be returned on which the
entries are separated by commas. The command is a query command and thus has no *RST
value.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:CAT? Answer: USER1

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:DATA "0 | 1 [,0 | 1]"

The command allows the entry of any binary data into one of the binary messages. Values 0 and 1
are available. Each value represents 1 bit. The maximum length of the message is 460 [Link]
message has to be selected first with the command BINary:SELect.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:DATA "111101" *RST value is "" (i.e., empty message)

1038.6002.02 3.59 E-13

3
SOURce:FLEX SME

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:DDIRection LEFT | RIGHt

The command determines the direction of binary messages.
LEFT Display from left to right.
RIGHtDisplay from right to left. *RST value is LEFT
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:BIN:TYPE LEFT

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:MNUMbering ON | OFF
The command determines whether every message is to be assigned with a number and whether
this information is to be evaluated when received by the pager.
ON SME sends the number 0 for every message.
OFF No number is sent.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:MNUM OFF *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:MDRop ON | OFF
The command determines whether or not the messages are to be marked with a MAIL-DROP flag
(see chapter 2, section "Radiocommunication Service FLEX").
ON The messages are marked as "volatile".
OFF The messages are not marked.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:MDR OFF *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:NUMeric "String"
The command determines the type of character string the numeric message may consist of. SME
allows a maximum of 41 characters. In addition to the 10 figures "0" to "9" other characters such
as square brackets right and left "[", "]", upper case letter "U", hyphen "-" and blank space " " can
be used. This command can only be activated if FLEX:MESSage:CATegory NUMeric is
selected. *RST value is "0123456789 U-[]"
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:NUM "15-17"

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:REPeats 0 to 3
The command determines the number of calls following the first call according to FLEX-TD. For
the value 0 (no repeat), normal flex frames are transmitted, whereas subframes according to
FLEX-TD are used with other values (cf. Section [Link], Radiocommunication Service FLEX).
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:REP 0 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:TONE 0 to 7
The command determines which of the 8 possible tones is to be transmitted in case of an
only-tone message. This command can only be activated if FLEX:MESSage:CATegory TONE is
selected.
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:MESS:TONE 7 *RST value is 0

1038.6002.02 3.60 E-13

SME SOURce:FLEX

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation
This node contains commands used to set the data of the transmitting system (see FLEX
standard). These data are sent to the pager. CZONe, DATE, and TIME are transmitted every hour
in cycle 0, frame 0.

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation:COLLapse 0 to 7
The command indicates the number of bits (0 to 7) the pager uses to compare its "built-in" frame
number with the received frame number. The value 7 signifies that the pager only accepts
messages in one of the 128 frames (provided that its pager collapse value is not below 7). With
the value 0 the pager receives messages in any frame. *RST value is 4
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:SI:COLL 4

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI | SINFormation:ROAMing OFF | SSID | NID | ALL

The command indicates Activating/Deactivating generation of roaming information in the
telegram sent.
OFF None; the roaming bits in the frame information word have the value 0.
SSID BIW000 for all frames, each in one phase.
BIW111 in the first four frames, each in one phase.
NID NID in all frames which comply with the formula specified in the FLEX standard. The cycle
value is however fixed to the value of START IN CYCLE; consists of a network address
and a short message vector; no BIW and no message body is generated.
ALL All the information of NID and SSID together.
If ROAMING is not set to OFF, the following additional information is included in the telegram:
− TIME INFO (a BIW010 in phases 0 and 2 of frame 0 and a BIW001 in phases 1 and 3 of
frame 0. As the SME is not able to differentiate between cycles, the contents of the phases
does not rotate over both BIWs; moreover, no BIW001 is sent for 1600 bps because only
one phase is present).
− CHANNEL SETUP INSTRUCTION (in one phase in each of the first four frames; for 1600
bps not in the first frame as there is no space; consists of a BIW101; has no address, no
vector and no message body).
−
sc
SYSTEM EVENT NOTIFICATION (starting from frame 0 for a collapse cycle, i.e. 2 ,
where sc denotes the value set under SYSTEM COLLAPSE VALUE; consists of an
operator message address and a short instruction vector, has no message body and no
BIW101).
− MESSAGE FOR ALL SUBSCRIBERS (is generated depending on the contents of FRAME
CONTENTS, also if ROAMING is set to OFF; consists of an operator message address, a
vector and a message body, has no BIW101).

IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:ROAM OFF

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation:MULTiplier 1 to 7
The command sets the input value of the multiplier part of the network ID.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:MULT 1 *RST value is 1

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: COUNTry 0 to 999

Input value of the country code.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:COUN 0 *RST value is 0

1038.6002.02 3.61 E-13

3
SOURce:FLEX SME

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: CZONe 0 to 31
This command determines the coverage zone. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:SI:CZON 0

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: STMF 0 to 31
The command allows the entry of any input value of the four traffic management flags for SSID.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:STMF 15 *RST value is 15

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: DATE Year, month, day

The command sets the date. *RST value is 1994,01,01
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:SI:DATE 1994,01,01

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: FOFFset 0 to 63
The command sets the input value of the frame offsets.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:FOFFset 0 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: LID 0 to 511

The command sets the input value of the local ID.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:LID 0 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: NADDress 2058240 to 20622335

Input value of the network address part of the network ID.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:NADD 2058240 *RST value is 2058241

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: NTMFlags 0 to 15
The command sets the input value of the four traffic management fags for NID
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:NTMF 15 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: SARea 0 to 31
The command sets the input value of the service area part of the network ID.
IEC-bus command: :SOUR:FLEX:SINF:SAR 0 *RST value is 15

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation: TIME 00,00 to 23,59

This command sets the time. *RST value is 12,00
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:SI:TIME 12,00

[:SOURce]:FLEX:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE

This command (Trigger ACTion) determines the action which is activated by a trigger event. The
valid trigger events are specified by command TRIGger:DM:SOURce. This command also
defines the allocation between manual and remote-control operations.
MESSage A trigger event switches from filler data output to useful data output for the duration
of a batch (1.875 s). The filler data are then output again.
STARt Digital modulation is started by a trigger event. Useful data are then continuously
output according to the settings. This setting is suitable, for example, for a
synchronous start of several units.
ONCE The output of the FLEX telegram is only started by a valid trigger event. After
recognition of this signal, exactly one frame is output in the way it has been set
under :FLEX:FCONT. After that, the SME waits for its trigger pulse again (defined
under TRIG:DM:SOUR).
Example: :SOUR:FLEX:TACT MESS *RST value is MESSage

1038.6002.02 3.62 E-13

SME SOURce:FM

[Link] SOURce:FM Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to check the frequency modulation and to set the parameters
of the modulation signal. The SME can be equipped with two independent frequency modulators (option
SM-B5). They are differentiated by a suffix after FM.

SOURce:FM1
SOURce:FM2

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:FM1|2
[:DEViation] 0 to 1MHz;, Hz Option SM-B5
:EXTernal1|2 SME03/03E: 0 to 2MHz
:COUPling AC | DC SME06: 0 to 4MHz
:INTernal
:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz Hz
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz Option SM-B2 or -B6

:PREemphasis 0 | 50us | 75us

:SOURce INT | EXT1 | EXT2

:STATe ON | OFF

[:SOURce]:FM1|2[:DEViation] 0 to 1 MHz; SME03/03E: 0 to 2 MHz; SME06: 0 to 4 MHz

The command specifies the frequency variation caused by the FM. Although the LF generators
are used as modulation sources, the frequency variation is independent of the voltage at the LF
output. The maximally possible DEViation depends on SOURce:FREQuency (cf. data sheet).
Example: :SOUR:FM1:DEV 5kHz *RST value is 10 kHz

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:EXTernal 2
The commands to set the external FM input are under this node. The settings under EXTernal for
modulations AM, FM and PM are independent of each other. The settings are always related to
the socket which is determined by the numeric suffix after EXTernal. The suffix after FM is
ignored then. With the following commands, e.g., the settings are both related to EXT2 input:
:SOUR:FM1:EXT2:COUP AC
:SOUR:FM2:EXT2:COUP AC

A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1.

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:EXTernal1|2:COUPling AC | DC
The command selects the type of coupling for the external FM input.
AC The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal.
DC The modulation signal is not altered. *RST value is AC
Example: :SOUR:FM:EXT:COUP AC

1038.6002.02 3.63 E-13

3
SOURce:FM SME

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:INTernal
The settings for the internal FM generators are effected under this node. For FM1, this is always
LF generator 1, for FM2, always LF generator 2. Here the same hardware is set for FM1, PM1,
AM:INT1 as well as SOURce0, just like for FM2, PM2 and AM:INT2 as well as SOURce2. This
means that, e.g., the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect:
SOUR:AM:INT2:FREQ
SOUR:FM2:INT:FREQ
SOUR:PM2:INT:FREQ
SOUR2:FREQ:CW

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:INTernal:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1

Hz to 1 MHz
The command sets the modulation frequency. There are different specified ranges depending on
the equipment of the instrument:
If neither SM-B2 nor SM-B6 are fitted, only FM 1 is permissible and values 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz
and 15 kHz are valid. With option SM-B2, the specified range from 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz is valid, with
SM-B6, from 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz. *RST value is 1 kHz
Example: :SOUR:FM:INT:FREQ 10kHz

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:PREemphasis 0 | 50us | 75us

The command selects the preemphasis.
0 No preemphasis
50 us 50 µs, European standard
75 us 75 µs, American standard *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:FM:PRE 50us

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal1 | EXTernal2

The command selects the modulation source. A command without suffix is interpreted like a
command with suffix 1. LF generator 1 is INT for FM1, LF generator2 for FM2 (option SM-B5).
Several modulation sources can be active at the same time (cf. example)
*RST value for FM1: INT
Example: :SOUR:FM:SOUR INT1, EXT2 for FM2:EXT2

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches the frequency modulation on or off. *RST value is OFF.
Example: :SOUR:FM:STAT OFF

1038.6002.02 3.64 E-13

SME SOURce:FREQuency

[Link] SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings of the RF source including the
sweeps.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:FREQuency SME03E/03/06:
:CENTer 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz
[:CW|:FIXed] 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz
:RCL INCLude | EXCLude
:MANual 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz
:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST

:OFFSet -50 to +50 GHz Hz

:SPAN 0 to 1.5 GHz Hz 0 to 2.2/3/6 GHz

:STARt 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz Hz 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz

:STOP 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz

:STEP Hz
0 to 1 GHz
[:INCRement]

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:CENTer 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

The command sets the sweep range by means of the center frequency. This command is coupled
to commands :SOURce:FREQuency:STARt and :SOURce:FREQuency:STOP.
In this command, value OFFSet is considered as with input value FREQUENCY in the
FREQUENCY menu. Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for OFFSet = 0. The
specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following formula (cf.
Chapter 2, Section "Frequency Offset" as well):
5 kHz + OFFSet to 1.5 GHz +OFFSet *RST value is (STARt +STOP)/2
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:CENT 100kHz

[:SOURce]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

The command sets the frequency for CW operation. This value is coupled to the current sweep
frequency. In addition to a numeric value, UP and DOWN can be indicated. The frequency is
increased or reduced by the value set under :SOURce:FREQuency:STEP. (As to specified
range, cf. FREQuency:CENTer).
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:CW 100kHz *RST value is 100 MHz

[:SOURce]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:RCL INCLude | EXCLude

The command determines the effect of the recall function on the frequency. *RST value has no
effect to this setting.
INCLude The saved frequency is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the
[RECALL] key or with a memory sequence.
EXCLude The RF frequency is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded, the current
settings are maintained.
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:RCL INCL

1038.6002.02 3.65 E-13

3
SOURce:FREQuency SME

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:MANual 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

The command sets the frequency if SOURce:SWEep:MODE MANual and
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep are set. Only frequency values between the settings with
:SOURce:FREQuency:STARt and :SOURce:FREQuency:STOP are permitted. (As to specified
range, cf. FREQuency:CENTer) *RST value is 100 MHz
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:MAN 500MHz

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST

The command specifies the operating mode and hence also specifies which commands check the
FREQuency subsystem. The following allocations are valid
CW |FIXed CW and FIXed are synonyms. The output frequency is specified by means of
:SOURce:FREQuency:CW | FIXed.
SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep operating mode. The frequency is specified
by means of commands SOURce:FREQuency:STARt; STOP; CENTer; SPAN;
MANual.
LIST The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings. The settings are
effected in the SOURce:LIST subsystem. Setting SOURce :FREQuency:MODE LIST
automatically sets command SOURce:POWer :MODE to LIST as well.
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:MODE LIST *RST value is CW.

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:OFFSet -50 to + 50 GHz

The command sets the frequency offset of an instrument which might be series-connected, e.g. a
mixer. (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Frequency Offset"). If a frequency offset is entered, the frequency
entered using SOURce:FREQuency: to does no longer correspond to the RF output frequency.
The following connection is true:
SOURce:FREQuency:to = RF output frequency + SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet.
Entering an offset does not alter the RF output frequency but the query value of
SOURce:FREQuency:..
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:OFFS 100MHz *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:SPAN 0 to 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

This command indicates the frequency range for the sweep. This parameter is coupled to the start
and stop frequency. Negative values for SPAN are permitted, then STARt > STOP is true. There
is the following connection:
STARt = CENTer – SPAN/2
STOP = CENTer + SPAN/2 *RST value is (STOP - STARt)
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:SPAN 1GHz

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:STARt 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

This command indicates the starting value of the frequency for the sweep operation. Parameters
STARt, STOP, SPAN and CENTer are coupled to each other. STARt may be larger than STOP.
(As to specified range, cf. FREQuency:CENTer). *RST value is 100MHz
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:STAR 1MHz

1038.6002.02 3.66 E-13

SME SOURce:FREQuency

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:STOP 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

This command indicates the final value of the frequency for the sweep operation (see STARt as
well). (As to specified range, cf. FREQuency:CENTer). *RST value is 500MHz
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:STOP 100MHz

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:STEP
The command to enter the step width for the frequency setting if frequency values UP or DOWN
are used is under this node. This command is coupled to the KNOB STEP command in manual
control. Only linear step widths can be set.

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] 0 to 1 GHz
The command sets the step width for the frequency setting.
Example: :SOUR:FREQ:STEP:INCR 1MHz *RST value is 1MHz

1038.6002.02 3.67 E-13

3
SOURce:ILS SME

[Link] SOURce:ILS Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to control the characteristics of the test signals for ILS
(Instrument Landing System) (option SM-B6, multifunction generator).

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:ILS Option SM-B6
:STATe ON | OFF
:SOURce INT2 | INT2, EXT
:TYPE GS | GSLope | LOCalizer
[:GS | GSLope]
:MODE NORM | ULOBe | LLOBe
:COMid
[:STATe] ON | OFF

:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz Hz

:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT

:DDM
-685 uA to+685uA A
:CURRent
-0.8 to +0.8
[:DEPTh]
UP | DOWN
:DIRection
-999.9 to +999.9
:LOGarithmic
:LLOBe
100 to 200 Hz Hz
[:FREQuency]
:ULOBe
60 to 120 Hz Hz
[:FREQuency]
0 to 120 deg rad
:PHASe
No query
:PRESet
0 to 100 PCT PCT
:SODepth
:LOCalizer
NORM | LLOBe | RLOBe
:MODE
:COMid
ON | OFF
[:STATe] 0.1 to 20 000 Hz Hz
:FREQuency 0 to 100 PCT PCT
:DEPTh
:DDM -387 to +387 uA A
:CURRent -0.4 to +0.4
[:DEPTh] LEFT | RIGHt
:DIRection -999.9 to +999.9
:LOGarithmic
:LLOBe 60 to 120 Hz Hz
[:FREQuency]
:RLOBe 100 to 200 Hz Hz
[:FREQuency] 0 to 120 deg rad
:PHASe No query
:PRESet 0 to 100 PCT PCT
:SODepth

1038.6002.02 3.68 E-13

SME SOURce:ILS

[:SOURce]:ILS:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches the generation of ILS signals on or off. STATe ON is only possible if no
amplitude modulation is switched on. Modulation generator 2 must not be switched simultaneously
as a source for PM or FM either.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:ILS:SOURce INT2 | INT2, EXT

This command determines the signal sources of the test signal.
INT2 The test signal used for ILS is generated internally by LF generator 2.
INT2 , EXT A signal from input EXT1 is added to the internal signal in addition. Switching off the
internal source is not possible.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:SOUR INT2 *RST value is INT2

[:SOURce]:ILS:TYPE GS|GSLope | LOCalizer

The command switches over between the two components of the ILS method. The configuration
of the signals is effected under the respective node GSLope or LOCalizer.
GD|GSLope Vertical component (Glide Slope)
LOCalizer Horizontal component (LOCalizer)
Example: :SOUR:ILS:TYPE GS *RST value is GS

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]
The commands to specify the characteristics of the glide slope signal are under this node.
Whether this signal is output, however, is determined by command SOURce:ILS:TYPE.

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:MODE NORM | ULOBe | LLOBe

The command specifies the type of the ILS-GS signal generated.
NORM ILS-GS signal
ULOBe (Upper LOBe) Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the
SOURce:ILS:GS:ULOBe:FREQuency signal component (generally 90 Hz) of the
ILS-GS signal.
The modulation depth for SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM :DIR DOWN results from
AM(90Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:GS:SODepth + ILS:GS:DDM * 100%)
and for SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:DIR UP from
AM(90Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:GS:SODepth ILS:GS:DDM * 100%)
LLOBe (Lower LOBe) Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the
SOURce:ILS:GS:LLOBe:FREQuency signal component (generally 150 Hz) of the
ILS-GS signal. The modulation depth for SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM :DIR DOWN
results from
AM(150Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:GS:SODepth + ILS:GS:DDM * 100%)
and for SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:DIR UP from
AM(150Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:GS:SODepth ILS:GS:DDM * 100%)
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:MODE ULOB *RST value is NORM

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:COMid
The commands to set the ComId content (communication/identification signal) of the ILS-GS
signal are under this node.

1038.6002.02 3.69 E-13

3
SOURce:ILS SME

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command activates or deactivates the ComId signal. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:COM:STAT ON

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz

The command sets the frequency of the ComId signal. *RST value is 1020 Hz
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:COM:FREQ 1020

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT

The command sets the AM modulation depth of the ComId signal.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:COM:DEPT 10 PCT *RST value is 10 PCT

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM
(Difference in Depth of Modulation) The commands to set the modulation depth difference
between the signal of the upper lobe (90 Hz) and the lower lobe (150 Hz) are under this node. )

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:CURRent - 685 uA to + 685 uA

The command enters the DDM value alternatively as a current by means of the ILS indicating
instrument. This parameter is coupled with SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:DEPTh and :LOGarithmic.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:DDM:CURR 0 *RST value is 0 A

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh] - 0.8 to + 0.8

The command sets the difference of the modulation depth. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:CURRent.
The following is true for SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:DIRection DOWN
ILS:GS:DDM:DEPTh = (AM(90Hz) - AM(150Hz))/100%
and for SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:DIRection UP
ILS:GS:DDM:DEPTh = (AM(150Hz) - AM(90Hz))/100%
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:DDM:DEPT 0 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:DIRection UP | DOWN
The command indicates the direction in which the pilot has to correct the course. By calculation,
this setting has the same effect as a reverse of the sign of the
SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:DEPTh-value.
UP The airplane is too low, it must climb.
DOWN The airplane is too high, it must descend.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:DDM:DIR DOWN *RST value is UP

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:LOGarithmic - 999.9 dB to + 999.9 dB

The command enters the DDM value in dB. This parameter is coupled with SOURce:ILS:GS
:DDM:DEPTh and :CURRent. *RST value is 0.0 dB
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:DDM:LOG 0

1038.6002.02 3.70 E-13

SME SOURce:ILS

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:LLOBe
The commands to configure the signal of the lower ILS-GS antenna lobe are under this node
(Lower LOBe).

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:LLOBe[:FREQuency] 100 to 200 Hz

The command sets the frequency. Normally, it is 150 Hz. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:GS:ULOBe:FREQuency. As the ratio of ULOBe:FREQuency and
LLOBe:FREQuency must always be 3/5, ULOBe:FREQuency is readjusted accordingly.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:LLOB:FREQ 150 *RST value is 150 Hz

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ULOBe
The commands to configure the signal of the upper ILS-GS antenna lobe (Upper LOBe) are under
this node.

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ULOBe[:FREQuency] 60 to 120 Hz
The command sets the frequency. Normally, it is 90 Hz. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:GS:LLOBe:FREQuency. As the ratio of ULOBe:FREQuency and
LLOBe:FREQuency must always be 3/5, LLOBe: FREQuency is readjusted accordingly.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:ULOB:FREQ 90 *RST value is 90 Hz

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLOpe]:PHASe 0 to 120 deg

The command sets the phase between the modulation signals of the upper and the lower antenna
lobe. The zero crossing of the signal of the lower lobe serves as a reference. The angle is related
to the period of the signal of the lower antenna lobe. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:PHAS 0deg

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SODepth 0 to 100 PCT

The command indicates the sum of the modulation depths of the signals of the lower lobe (90 Hz)
and the upper lobe (150 Hz). *RST value is 80PCT
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:SOB 80PCT

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLOpe:PRESet
This command is equivalent to the following GS defaultcommand sequence:
:ILS:STAT ON
:ILS:TYPE GS
:ILS:SOUR INT2
:ILS:GS:MODE NORM
:ILS:GS:COM OFF
:ILS:GS:COM:FREQ 1020Hz
:ILS:GS:COM:DEPT 10PCT
:ILS:GS:DDM 0.0
:ILS:GS:DDM:DIR UP
:ILS:GS:SOD 80PCT
:ILS:GS:ULOB 90Hz
:ILS:GS:LLOB 150Hz
:ILS:GS:PHAS 0
The values set correspond to the state after SYSTem:PRESet or *RST. The command neither
has a query form nor an *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:GS:PRES

1038.6002.02 3.71 E-13

3
SOURce:ILS SME

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer
The commands to specify the characteristics of the LOCalizerlocalizer modulation signal are
under this node. Whether this signal is output, however, is determined by command
SOURce:ILS:TYPE.

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:MODE NORM | LLOBe | RLOBe

The command specifies the type of the ILS-LOC signal generated.
NORM ILS-LOC-Signal
LLOBe (Left LOBe) Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the
SOURce:ILS:LOC:LLOBe:FREQuency signal component (generally 90 Hz) of the
ILS-LOC signal. The modulation depth
AM(90Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:LOC:SODepth + ILS:LOC:DDM * 100%)
and for SOURce:ILS:GS:DDM:DIR LEFT from
AM(90Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:LOC:SODepth ILS:LOC:DDM * 100%)
RLOBe RLOBe (Right LOBe) Amplitude modulation of the output signal using the
SOURce:ILS:LOC:RLOBe:FREQ signal component
(generally 150 Hz) of the ILS-LOC signal. The modulation depth
for ILS:LOC:DDM:DIR RIGHt results from
AM(150Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:LOC:SODepth + ILS:LOC:DDM * 100%)
and for ILS:LOC:DDM:DIR LEFT from
AM(150Hz) = 0.5 * (ILS:LOC:SODepth ILS:LOC:DDM * 100%)
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:MODE LLOB *RST value is NORM

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid
The commands to set the ComId content (communication/identification signal) of the ILS-LOC
signal are under this node.

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command activates or deactivates the ComId signal. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:COM:STAT ON

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz

The command sets the frequency of the ComId signal. *RST value is 1020 Hz
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:COM:FREQ 1020

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT

The command sets the AM modulation depth of the ComId signal.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:COM:DEPT 10PCT *RST value is 10 PCT

1038.6002.02 3.72 E-13

SME SOURce:ILS

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM
(Difference in Depth of Modulation) The commands to set the modulation depth difference
between the signal of the left lobe (90 Hz) and the right lobe (150 Hz) are under this node.

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:CURRENT -387 to +387 uA

The command alternatively enters the DDM value as a current by means of the ILS indicating
instrument. This parameter is coupled with SOURce:ILS:LOC:DDM: DEPTh.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:DDM:CURR 0 *RST value is 0 A

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh] -0.4 to +0.4

The command sets the difference of the modulation depth. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:LOC:DDM:CURRent. The following is true:
for SOURce:ILS:LOC:DDM:DIRection RIGHt
ILS:LOC:DDM:DEPTh = (AM(90Hz) - AM(150Hz))/100%
and for SOURce:ILS:LOC:DDM:DIRection LEFT
ILS:LOC:DDM:DEPTh = (AM(150Hz) AM(90Hz))/100%
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:DDM:DEPT 0 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DIRection LEFT | RIGHt

The command enters the DDM value in dB. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:LOC:DDM :DEPTh.
LEFT The airplane is too much to the right, it must turn to the left.
RIGHtThe airplane is too much to the left, it must turn to the right.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:DDM:DIR LEFT *RST value is LEFT

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:LOGarithmic -999.9 dB to +999.9 dB

The command enters the DDM value in dB. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:LOC:DDM :DEPTh and :CURRent.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:DDM:LOG 0 *RST value is 0.0 dB

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe
The commands to configure the signals of the left ILS-LOC antenna lobe (Left LOBe) are under
this node.

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe[:FREQuency] 60 to 120 Hz
The command sets the frequency. Normally, it is 90 Hz. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:LOC:RLOBe:FREQuency. As the ratio of LLOBe:FREQuency and
RLOBe:FREQuency must always be 3/5, RLOBe: FREQuency is readjusted accordingly.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:LLOB:FREQ 90 *RST value is 90 Hz

1038.6002.02 3.73 E-13

3
SOURce:ILS SME

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe
The commands to configure the signal of the right ILS-LOC antenna lobe (Right LOBe) are under
this node.

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe[:FREQuency] 100 to 200 Hz

The command sets the frequency. Normally, it is 150 Hz. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:ILS:LOC:LLOBe:FREQuency. As the ratio of LLOBe:FREQuency and
RLOBe:FREQuency must always be 3/5, LLOBe: FREQuency is readjusted accordingly.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:RLOB:FREQ 150 *RST value is 150 Hz

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:PHASe 0 to 120 deg

The command sets the phase between the modulation signals of the left and the right antenna
lobe. The zero crossing of the signal of the right lobe serves as a reference. The angle refers to
the period of the signal of the right antenna lobe. *RST value is 0
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:PHAS 0deg

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:PRESet
This command is equivalent to the following command sequence:
:ILS:SOUR INT2
:ILS:STAT ON
:ILS:TYPE LOC
:ILS:LOC:MODE NORM
:ILS:LOC:COM OFF
:ILS:LOC:COM:FREQ 1020Hz
:ILS:LOC:COM:DEPT 10PCT
:ILS:LOC:DDM 0.0
:ILS:LOC:DDM:DIR LEFT
:ILS:LOC:SOD 40PCT
:ILS:LOC:LLOB 90Hz
:ILS:LOC:RLOB 150Hz
:ILS:LOC:PHAS 0
The values set correspond to the state after SYSTEM:PRESET or *RST. The command neither
has a query form nor an *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:PRES

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:SODepth 0 to 100 PCT

The command indicates the sum of modulation depths of the signals of the left lobe (90 Hz) and
the right lobe (150 Hz).
Example: :SOUR:ILS:LOC:SOB 40PCT *RST value is 40 PCT

1038.6002.02 3.74 E-13

SME SOURce:LIST

[Link] SOURce:LIST Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands for the LIST operating mode of the RF generator. Processing
the lists is controlled by the TRIGger:LIST subsystem. Each list consists of a FREQuency, POWer
and DWELl content. The list contents must all be of the same length except for contents of length 1.
This is interpreted as if the content had the same length as the other contents and all values were equal
to the first value. After a list has been created and changed, command :LIST:LEARn has to be entered
to have the settings transferred to the hardware.
The LIST mode is activated by command SOURce:FREQuency:MODE LIST.
The LIST subsystem is not valid for SME03E economy model.
Note: SCPI designates the individual lists as segments.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:LIST
:CATalog? Query only
:DELete "Name of list"
:ALL
:DWELl 1ms to1 s {,1 ms to 1 s} s
:POINts? Query only
:FREE?
:FREQuency 5kHz to 1.5GHz {, 5kHz to 1.5GHz}|block data Hz 5kHz to 3/6
GHz(SME03/06)
:POINts?
Query only
:LEARn
No query
AUTO | STEP
:MODE
-144 to 16 dBm {, -144 to 16 dBm}|block data
:POWer
:POINts?
Query only
"Name of list"
:SELect

[:SOURce]:LIST:CATalog?
The command requests a list of the lists available separated by commas. The command is a
query and hence has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:CAT? Answer: "MYLIST", "LIST1", "LIST2"

[:SOURce]:LIST:DELete "Name of list"

The command deletes the list indicated. This list must not be selected.
*RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:DEL "LIST2"

[:SOURce]:LIST:DELete:ALL
The command deletes all lists. As a possibly selected list is deleted as well, the LIST mode must
be switched off (SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW or SWEep). *RST has no influence on data lists.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:DEL:ALL

1038.6002.02 3.75 E-13

3
SOURce:LIST SME

[:SOURce]:LIST:DWELl 1 ms to 1 s {, 1 ms to 1 s}
For every item of the FREQuency or POWer/VOLTage list contents, the command contains the
time the instrument "dwells" at this item.
Note: The RF generator is not in a position to allocate different times to the individual items
of the FREQuency and POWer list contents. Thus the DWELl part of the list should
have length 1; the value is then valid for all items. If a list containing more than one
element is indicated, all values must be equal.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:DWEL 0.15

[:SOURce]:LIST:DWELl:POINts?
The command queries the length (in items) of the DWELl-part of the list. The command is a query
and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:DWEL:POIN? Answer: 1

[:SOURce]:LIST:FREE?
The command queries two values. The first one indicates the space still vacant for lists (in items),
the second one the space already occupied, also in items. The command is a query and thus has
no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:FREE? Answer: 2400, 200

[:SOURce]:LIST:FREQuency 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz {, 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz}| block data

(SME03/06: 5 kHz to 3/6 GHz)
The command fills the FREQuency part of the list selected with data. The data can either be
indicated as a list of numbers (separated by commas) of arbitrary length or as binary block data.
In the case of block data transmission, always 8 (4) bytes are interpreted as a floating-point
number of double accuracy (cf. command FORMat :DATA). *RST does not influence data lists.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:FREQ 1.4GHz, 1.3GHz, 1.2GHz,...

[:SOURce]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?
The command queries the length (in items) of the FREQuency part of the list presently selected.
The command is a query and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:FREQ:POIN? Answer: 327

[:SOURce]:LIST:LEARn
The command learns the list selected. I.e., it determines the hardware setting for the entire list.
The data thus determined are stored together with the list. The command triggers an event and
thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:LEAR
Caution: This command has to be given after every creating and changing of a list.

1038.6002.02 3.76 E-13

SME SOURce:LIST

[:SOURce]:LIST:MODE AUTO | STEP

The command indicates the mode in which the list is to be processed (by analogy with
SOURce:SWEep:MODE).
AUTOEach trigger event triggers a complete list run.
STEP Each trigger event triggers only one step in processing the list.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:MODE STEP *RST value is AUTO

[:SOURce]:LIST:POWer -144 to 16 dBm {, -144 to 16 dBm} | block data

The command fills the LEVel part of the RF list selected with data. The data can either be
indicated as a list of numbers (separated by commas) of arbitrary length or as binary block data.
As to the format of the data, cf. command :SOURce:LIST:FREQ. *RST does not influence data
lists.
Example: :SOUR:LIST:POW 0dBm, -2dBm, -2dBm, -3dBm,...

[:SOURce]:LIST:POWer:POINts?
The command queries the length (in items) of the LEVel part of the list presently selected. The
command is a query and thus has no *RST value
Example: :SOUR:LIST:POW:POIN? Answer: 32

[:SOURce]:LIST:SELect "Name of list"

The command selects the list indicated. If there is no list of this name, a new list is created. The
name may contain up to 7 letters. The command triggers an event and thus has no *RST value
Example: :SOUR:LIST:SEL "LIST1"

1038.6002.02 3.77 E-13

3
SOURce:MARKer SME

[Link] SOURce:MARKer Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to check the marker generation with sweeps. The SME has
three markers each for frequency and level sweeps which are differentiated by a numeric suffix after
MARKer. The settings for frequency sweep and level sweep marker are independent of each other.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:MARKer1|2|3
[:FSWeep]
:AMPLitude ON | OFF
:AOFF No query
:FREQuency 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz Hz SME03E/03/06:
[:STATe] ON | OFF 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz
:PSWeep
:AOFF No query

:POWer -144 to+16 dBm dBm

[:STATe] ON | OFF
NORMal | INVerted
:POLarity

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]
The commands for the markers with frequency sweep are under this node. Keyword :FSWeep
can be omitted, then the command conforms to SCPI regulations.

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:AMPLitude ON | OFF
The command specifies whether the marker influences the signal level.
ON The output level is reduced by a constant value when the marker frequency is
executed.
OFF The output level remains unchanged. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:MARK1:FSW:AMP ON

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:AOFF
Command (All markers off) switches off all frequency markers. This command triggers an event,
thus it has no *RST value and no query form.
Example: :SOUR:MARK:FSW:AOFF

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:FREQuency 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to F/3/6

GHz)
The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the frequency
indicated.
In this command, the OFFSet value of the subsystem (menu) FREQuency is considered as with
input value MARKER in the SWEEP-FREQ menu. Thus the specified range indicated is only valid
for SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet = 0. The specified range with other OFFSet values can be
calculated according to the following formula (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Frequency Offset", as well):
5 kHz - OFFSet to 1.5 GHz - OFFSet *RST value for MARK1: 100 MHz
MARK2: 200 MHz
Example: :SOUR:MARK1:FSW:FREQ 30MHz MARK3: 300 MHz

1038.6002.02 3.78 E-13

SME SOURce:MARKer

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep][:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer on or off.
Example: :SOUR:MARK1:FSW:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep
The commands for the markers with level sweep are under this node (Power sweep). The three
markers are differentiated by a numeric suffix after MARKer.

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep:AOFF
The command switches all level markers off. This command is an event and thus has no *RST
value and no query form.
Example: :SOUR:MARK:PSW:AOFF

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep:POWer -144 dBm to +16 dBm

The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer to the level indicated.
In this command, the OFFSet value of subsystem (menu) POWER (LEVEL) is considered in
correspondence with input value MARKER in the SWEEP LEVEL menu. Thus the specified range
indicated is only valid for SOURce:POWer:OFFSet = 0. The specified range with other OFFSet
values can be calculated according to the following formula (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Level Offset"
as well):
-144 dBm OFFSet to 16 dBm OFFSet *RST value for MARK1: 1 dBm
MARK2: 2 dBm
Example: :SOUR:MARK1:PSW:POW -2dBm MARK3: 3 dBm

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches the marker selected by the numeric suffix with MARKer on or off.
Example: :SOUR:MARK1:PSW:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity of the marker signal.
NORMal When running through the marker condition, TTL level is applied at the marker
output, otherwise 0 V.
INVerted When running through the marker condition, 0 V is applied at the marker output,
otherwise TTL level. *RST value is NORM
Example: :SOUR:MARK:POL INV

1038.6002.02 3.79 E-13

3
 SOURce:MBEacon SME

[Link] SOURce:MBEacon Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to control the characteristics of the marker signals (Marker
BEacon) as they are used to mark the distance in the approach range of airports (option SM-B6,
multifunction generator).

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:MBEacon Option SM-B6
:STATe ON | OFF
[:MARKer]
:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1300 Hz | 3000 Hz Hz
:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT
:COMid
[:STATe] ON | OFF

:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz Hz

:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the generation of marker beacon signals. STATe ON is only
possible if no amplitude modulation is switched on. Modulation generator 2 must not be inserted
simultaneously as a source for PM or FM either.
Example: :SOUR:MBE:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1300 Hz | 3000 Hz

The command selects the frequency of the marker signal. *RST value is 400 Hz
Example: :SOUR:MBE:MARK:FREQ 400

[:SOURce]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT

The command selects the frequency of the marker signal. *RST value is 95 PCT
Example: :SOUR:MBE:MARK:DEPT 95PCT

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command activates or deactivates the ComId signal. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:MBE:COM:STAT ON

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz

The command sets the frequency of the ComId signal. *RST value is 1020 Hz
Example: :SOUR:MBE:COM:FREQ 1020

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT

The command sets the AM modulation depth of the ComId signal *RST value is 5 PCT
Example: :SOUR:MBE:COM:DEPT 5PCT

1038.6002.02 3.80 E-13

SME SOURce:PHASe

[Link] SOURce:PHASe Subsystem

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:PHASe
[:ADJust] -360 deg to +360 deg rad
:REFerence No query

[:SOURce]:PHASe[:ADJust] -360 deg to +360 deg

The command indicates the phase between output signal and reference oscillator signal. This
setting is only accepted using SOURce:PHASe:REFerence (cf. below). An indication in RADian
is possible.
Example: :SOUR:PHAS:ADJ 2DEG
:SOUR:PHAS:ADJ 0.1RAD *RST value is 0.0 DEG

[:SOURce]:PHASe:REFerence
The command accepts the phase set using SOURce:PHASe:ADJust as a new reference phase.
The command has no *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:PHAS:REF

1038.6002.02 3.81 E-13

SOURce:PM SME

[Link] SOURce:PM Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to check the phase modulation and to set the parameters of
the modulation signal. The SME can be equipped with two independent phase modulators, PM1 and
PM2 (option SM-B5). They are differentiated by a suffix after PM.

SOURce:PM1
SOURce:PM2

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:PM1|2 Option SM-B5
[:DEViation] -360 deg to +360 deg rad
:EXTernal1|2
:COUPling AC | DC
:INTernal
:FREQuency 400 kHz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or Hz
0.1Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1Hz to 1 MHz Option SM-B2 or -B6

:SOURce INT | EXT1 | EXT2

:STATe ON | OFF

[:SOURce]:PM1|2[:DEViation] -360 to +360 deg

The command sets the modulation depth in Radian. DEGree are accepted.
*RST value is 1 rad
Example: SOUR:PM:DEV 20DEGR

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:EXTernal1|2
The commands to check the external input of the PM modulators are under this node. The
settings under EXTernal for modulations AM, FM and PM are independent of each other. The
settings are always related to the socket determined by the suffix after EXTernal. The suffix after
PM is ignored then. With the following commands, e.g., the settings are both related to socket
EXT2:
:SOUR:PM1:EXT2:COUP AC
:SOUR:PM2:EXT2:COUP AC
A command without suffix is interpreted like a command with suffix 1.

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:EXTernal1|2:COUPling AC | DC
The command selects the type of coupling for the external PM input.
AC The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal.
DC The modulation signal is not changed. *RST value is AC
Example: :SOUR:PM:COUP DC

1038.6002.02 3.82 E-13

SME SOURce:PM

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:INTernal
The settings for the internal PM generators are effected under this node. For PM1, this is always
LF generator 1, for PM2, always LF generator 2. Here the same hardware is set for FM1, PM1,
AM::INT1 as well as SOURce0, for FM2, PM2 and AM:INT2 and SOURce2 as well. This means
that, e.g., the following commands are coupled with each other and have the same effect:
SOUR:AM:INT2:FREQ
SOUR:FM2:INT:FREQ
SOUR:PM2:INT:FREQ
SOUR2:FREQ:CW

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:INTernal:FREQuency 400 kHz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1
Hz to 1 MHz
The command sets the modulation frequency. There are different specified ranges depending on
the equipment of the instrument:
If neither SM-B2 nor SM-B6 are fitted, only INT1 is permissible and values 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz
and 15 kHz are valid. With option SM-B2, the specified range from 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz is valid, with
SM-B6 from 0.1 to 1 MHz: *RST value is 1 kHz
Example: :SOUR:PM:INT:FREQ 10kHz

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal1 | EXTernal2

The command selects the modulation source. A command without suffix is interpreted like a
command with suffix 1. LF generator 1 is INTernal for PM1, LF generator2 for PM2 (option
SM-B5). Several modulation sources can be active at the same time (see example)
*RST value for PM1: INT
Example: :SOUR:PM:SOUR INT, EXT2 for PM2:EXT2

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches the phase modulation selected by the numeric suffix with PM on or off.
Example: :SOUR:PM1:STAT OFF *RST value is OFF

1038.6002.02 3.83 E-13

SOURce:POCSag SME

[Link] SOURce:POCSag Subsystem

POCSAG is a standard which in its various implementations (e.g. CITYRUF, SCALL) allows convenient
paging. When equipped with the SME-B42 (POCSAG), SME-B11 (DM coder) and SME B12 (DM
memory extension) options, the SME generates call signals complying to the POCSAG standard. All
essential parameters and the message to be transmitted are freely selectable.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:POCSag
:STATe ON | OFF
:MODulation FSK | FFSK
:BRATe 512bps | 1200bps | 2400bps
:DEViation 1.5 | 2.0 | 3.0 | 3.5 | 4.0 | 4.5 kHz Hz
:ERRor
:MASK 0 to 4294967295
:WORD 0 to 16
:LBATches 0 to 100
:MESSage
:ADDRess 0 to 2097151
:CATegory NUMeric | TONE | ALPHanumeric
:SWORd POCSag | INForuf
:TONE A|B|C|D
:NUMeric "string"
:ALPHanumeric
[:SELect] "FOX" | "ALPHA" | "USER1 to 4"
:CATalog? Query only
:DATA "alphanumeric data"
:POLarity NORMal | INVerted
:TSLice 2 to 120 s s
:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE

[:SOURce]:POCSag:STATe ON| OFF

The command switches all of the other active DM modulation settings off. In contrast to ERMES,
the RF frequency is not changed. Each time OFF is switched to ON, the data for the memory
expansion are recalculated and written into the "XMEM" list. The data must be recalculated
whenever any POCSAG parameter other than POCSag:DEViation is changed. This means that
STATe OFF should be briefly activated after every change.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MODulation FSK | FFSK

The command selects the desired modulation.
Two types are available for POCSAG, FSK und FFSK.
FSK The RF is directly modulated with the data signal.
FFSK An LF is first modulated, which is then used as the modulation signal for the RF.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MOD FSK *RST value is FSK

1038.6002.02 3.84 E-13

SME SOURce:POCSag

[:SOURce]:POCSag:DEViation 1.5 | 2.0 | 3.0 | 3.5 | 4.0 | 4.5 kHz

The command enters the input value of the frequency deviation for the set modulation.
For FSK 4.0 kHz and 4.5 kHz are possible, for FFSK 1.5 kHz, 2.0 kHz, 3.0 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 4.0 kHz
and 4.5 kHz. The instrument stores two independent deviation values (one for each type of
modulation). The value which is displayed and used depends on the modulation setting.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:DEV 4.5kHz *RST value is 4kHz

[:SOURce]:POCSag:BRATe 512bps | 1200bps | 2400bps

The command selects the bitrate, at which the data should be outputted. Possible values are: 512,
1200, and 2400 baud.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:BRAT 512bps *RST value is 512bps

[:SOURce]:POCSag:ERRor:MASK 0 to 4294967295
The command determines the erroneous bits in a 32-bit field. The transmitted decimal number
(0...4294967295) is converted internally into a 32-bit binary number and thus defines the 32 bits.
These bits are XORed with the word of the message which is to be falsified and thus determine
which bits of this word are to be transmitted correctly or incorrectly.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:ERRor:MASK 0 *RST value is 0.

[:SOURce]:POCSag:ERRor:WORD 0 to 16
The command determines the position of the word to be falsified in the batch. Value 0 denotes the
synchronization word.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:ERRor:WORD 0 *RST value is 0.

[:SOURce]:POCSag:LBATches 0 to 100
The command sets the number of filler batches which are transmitted before the message
(Leading BATches). *RST value : 0
Example: :SOUR:POCS:LBAT 0

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage
The parameters of this section are used for setting the destination address as well as the useful
data of the message.

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ADDRess 0 to 2097151
The command sets the address of the pager to be called. The specified range is 0 to 2097151.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:ADDR 1 *RST value is 1

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:CATegory NUMeric | TONE | ALPHanumeric

The command selects the category of the transmitted message.
TONETone-only message
NUMeric Numeric message,
ALPHanumeric Alphanumeric message. *RST value is TONE
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:CAT TONE

1038.6002.02 3.85 E-13

SOURce:POCSag SME

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:SWORd POCSag | INForuf

The command selects the contents of the sync word. This word distinguishes between the various
types of paging services.
POCSAG 0x7CD215D8; also used for CITYRUF
INFORUF 0x7CD21436. *RST value is POCSag
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:SWOR POCS

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:TONE A | B | C | D
The command selects the tone which is transmitted during category TONE. Four tones are
available (A, B, C, D).
Note: Only true tone-only receivers can process all four possible values.
Numerical and alphanumerical receivers react to tone-only pages only when tone
number is B or C.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:TONE B *RST value is TONE

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:NUMeric "String"
The command determines the type of character string the numeric message may consist of. SME
allows a maximum of 41 characters. In addition to the 10 figures "0" to "9" other characters such
as square brackets right and left "[", "]", upper case letter "U", hyphen "-" and blank space " " can
be used.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:NUM "12-17" *RST value is 0123456789 U-[]

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ALPHanumeric
This node contains commands for the determination of the contents of the alphanumeric
messages. There is one common character set for FLEX and POGSAG. These commands can
only be activated if POCS:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric is selected.

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] "FOX" | "ALPHA" | "USER 1" | "USER2" |

"USER3" | "USER4"
The command selects the alphanumeric message. The following selection can be made:
"FOX" The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog
"ALPHA" ABCD to (complete POGSAG character set)
"USER1 to 4" 4 messages that can be freely edited by command ALPHanumeric:DATA.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:ALPH:SEL "FOX" *RST value is USER3

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:CATalog?
The command queries the alphanumeric messages available. It causes a list to be returned on
which the entries are separated by commas. The command is a query command and thus has no
*RST value.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:ALPH:CAT? Answer: FOX, ALPHA, USER1

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA "String"
The command allows any character string to be entered into one of the alphanumeric messages
USER 1 to 4. This message has to be selected first with the command
ALPHanumeric:SELect. *RST value is "" (eg, empty message)
Example: :SOUR:POCS:MESS:ALPH:DATA "Hello"

1038.6002.02 3.86 E-13

SME SOURce:POCSag

[:SOURce]:POCSag:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command sets the polarity of the modulation.
NORMal The polarity of the modulation is set according to standard POCSAG.
INVerted The polarity of the modulation is inverted.
Example : :SOUR:POCS:POL NORM *RST value is NORM

[:SOURce]:POCSag:TSLice 2 to 120 s
The command determines the length of the time slice. Possible values are: 2 to 120 sec. A
preamble of 576 bits is sent at the beginning of every time slice, followed by the number of filler
batches set with command POCS:LBAT. Each batch has the length of 544 bits.
Depending on the settings under commands POCS:TACT and TRIG:DM, zero, one or two
message batches follow. Then an unmodulated signal is sent up to the end of the time slice.
Due to the fact that only complete code word groups are sent, it is possible that, depending on the
set bit rate, the length of the actual time slice slightly differs from the set value of time slice length.
Example: :SOUR:POCS:TSL 10 *RST value is 10

[:SOURce]:POCSag:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE

This command (Trigger ACTion) determines the action which is activated by a trigger event. The
valid trigger events are specified by command TRIGger:DM:SOURce. This command also
defines the allocation between manual and remote-control operations.
MESSage A trigger event switches from filler data output to useful data output for the duration
of a time slice. The filler data are then output again.
STARt Digital modulation is started by a trigger event. Useful data are then continuously
output according to the settings.
This setting is suitable, for example, for a synchronous start of several units.
ONCE The output of a time slice is only started by a valid trigger event. After recognition of
this signal, exactly one time slice is output. After that, the SME waits for its trigger
pulse again (defined under TRIG:DM:SOUR).
Example: SOUR:POCS:TACT MESS *RST value is MESSage

1038.6002.02 3.87 E-13

SOURce:POWer SME

[Link] SOURce:POWer Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to set the output level, the level control and the level correction
of the RF signal. Other units can be used instead of dBm:
• by indication directly after the numeric value (Example :POW 0.5V),
• by altering the DEFault unit in the UNIT system (see Command :UNIT:POWER)

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:POWer
:ALC
:BANDwidth | BWIDth 100 kHz | 500 kHz Hz
:AUTO ON | OFF | ONCE
[:STATe] ON | OFF
[:LEVel]
[:IMMediate]
[AMPLitude] -144 to +16 dBm dBm
:OFFSet -100 to +100 dB dB
:RCL INCLude | EXCLude
:LIMit
[:AMPLitude] -144 to +16 dBm dBm
:MANual -144 to +16 dBm dBm
:MODE FIXed | SWEep | LIST
:STARt -144 to +16 dBm dBm
:STOP -144 to +16 dBm dBm
:STEP
[:INCRement] 0.1 to 10 dB dB

[:SOURce]:POWer:ALC
The commands checking the automatic level control are under this node.

[:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth|BWIDth 100 kHz | 500 kHz

The command sets the bandwidth of the level control. *RST value is 100 kHz
Example: :SOUR:POW:ALC:BAND 100kHz

[:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth | BWIDth:AUTO ON | OFF | ONCE

The command determines the mode in adapting the bandwidth.
ON The bandwidth is automatically adapted.
OFF No bandwidth adaptation.
ONCE The bandwidth is adapted once, then AUTO is automatically set to OFF.
Example: :SOUR:POW:ALC:BAND:AUTO ON *RST value is ON

1038.6002.02 3.88 E-13

SME SOURce:POWer

[:SOURce]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] ON | OFFFehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

The command switches level control on or off.
ON Level control is permanently switched on.
OFF Level control is switched on for a short period of time if the level changes.
Example: :SOUR:POW :ALC:STAT ON *RST value is ON

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] -144 to +16 dBm

The command sets the RF output level in operating mode CW. UP and DOWN can be indicated
in addition to numeric values. Then the level is increased or reduced by the value indicated under
:SOURce:POWer:STEP.
In this command, the OFFSet value is considered as with input value AMPLITUDE in the
LEVEL-LEVEL menu. Thus the specified range indicated is only valid for :POWer:OFFSet = 0.
The specified range with other OFFSet values can be calculated according to the following
formula (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Level Offset" as well):
-144dBm+ OFFSet to +16dBm +OFFSet
The keywords of this command are optional to a large extent, thus the long as well as the short
form of the command is shown in the example. *RST value is -30 dBm
Example: :SOUR:POW:LEV:IMM:AMPL 15 or
:POW 15

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:OFFSet -100 to +100 dB

The command enters the constant level offset of a series-connected attenuator/ amplifier (cf.
Chapter 2, Section "Level Offset"). If a level offset is entered, the level entered using
:POWer:AMPLitude does no longer conform to the RF output level. The following connection is
true:
:POWer = RF output level + POWer:OFFSet.
Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but only the query value of
:POWer:AMPLitude.
Only dB is permissible as a unit here, linear units (V, W etc.) are not permitted.
Caution: The level offset is also valid in the case of level sweeps!
Example: :SOUR:POW:LEV:IMM:AMPL:OFFS 0 oder *RST value is 0
:POW:OFFS 0

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:RCL INCLude | EXCLude

The command determines the effect of the recall function on the RF level.*RST value has no
effect to this setting.
INCLude The saved RF level is loaded when instrument settings are loaded with the [RECALL]
key or with a memory sequence.
EXCLude The RF level is not loaded when instrument settings are loaded, the current settings
are maintained.
Example: :SOUR:POW:RCL INCL

1038.6002.02 3.89 E-13

SOURce:POWer SME

[:SOURce]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] -144 to + 16 dBm

The command limits the maximum Rf output level in operating mode CW and SWEEP. It does not
influence the display LEVEL and the answer to query POW?.
Example: :SOUR:POW:LIM:AMPL 15 *RST value is +16 dBm

[:SOURce]:POWer:MANual -144 to +16 dBm

The command sets the level if SOURce:POWer:MODE is set to SWEep and
SOURce:SWEep:MODE to MANual. Only level values between START and STOP are permissible.
(As to specified range, cf. :POWer). *RST value is -30 dBm
Example: :SOUR:POW:MAN 1dBm

[:SOURce]:POWer:MODE FIXed | SWEep | LIST

The command specifies the operating mode and thus also by means of which commands the
level setting is checked.
FIXed The output level is specified by means of commands under :SOURce:
POWer:LEVel.
SWEep The instrument operates in the SWEep mode. The level is specified by means of
:SOURce:POWer;STARt; STOP; CENTer; SPAN and MANual.
LIST The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings. The settings are
effected in the SOURce:LIST subsystem.
Setting :SOURce:POWer:MODE LIST automatically sets command :SOURce
:FREQuency :MODE to LIST as well. *RST value is FIXed
Example: :SOUR:POW:MODE FIX

[:SOURce]:POWer:STARt -144 to +16 dBm

The command sets the starting value for a level sweep. STARt may be larger than STOP, then
the sweep runs from the high to the low level (As to specified range, cf. :POWer:AMPLitude).
Example: :SOUR:POW:STAR -20 *RST value is -30dBm

[:SOURce]:POWer:STOP -144 to +16 dBm

The command sets the final value for a level sweep. STOP may be smaller than STARt. (As to
specified range, cf. :POWer:AMPLitude). *RST value is -10dBm
Example: :SOUR:POW:STOP 3

[:SOURce]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] 0.1 to 10 dB
The command sets the step width with the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as level values.
The command is coupled with KNOB STEP in the manual control, i.e., it also specifies the step
width of the shaft encoder.
Only dB is permissible as a unit here, the linear units (V, W etc.) are not permitted.
Example: :SOUR:POW:STEP:INCR 2 *RST value is 1dB

1038.6002.02 3.90 E-13

SME SOURce:PULM

[Link] SOURce:PULM Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to check the pulse modulation and to set the parameters of the
modulation signal. The internal pulse generator (option SM-B4) is set in the SOURce:PULSe
subsystem.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:PULM Option SM-B3, SM-B4,
SM-B8, and SM-B9
EXTernal
:IMPedance 50 Ohm| 10 kOhm Ohm
:INTernal
:FREQuency 0.01176 Hz to 10 MHz Hz
:POLarity NORMal | INVerted
:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal

:STATe ON | OFF

[:SOURce]:PULM:EXTernal:IMPedance 50 Ohm | 10 kOhm

The command sets the impedance of the input socket for the external pulse generator. The pulse
generator has an own input socket, hence this setting is independent of the corresponding
settings under PM and FM. *RST value is 10 kOhm
Example: :SOUR:PULM:EXT:IMP 10E3

[:SOURce]:PULM:INTernal:FREQuency 0.01176 Hz to 10 MHz

The command sets the frequency of the pulse generator. This parameter is coupled with
SOURce:PULSe:PERiod. *RST value is 100 kHz
Example: :SOUR:PULM:INT:FREQ 1MHz

[:SOURce]:PULM:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity between modulating and modulated signal.
NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the interpulse period.
INVerted The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse.
Example: :SOUR:PULM:POL INV *RST value is NORMal

[:SOURce]:PULM:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal

The command selects the source of the modulating signal.
INTernal Internal pulse generator (option SM-B4).
EXTernal Signal fed externally *RST value is INTernal
Example: :SOUR:PULM:SOUR INT

[:SOURce]:PULM:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the pulse modulation. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:PULM:STAT ON

1038.6002.02 3.91 E-13

SOURce:PULSe SME

[Link] SOURce:PULSe Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to set the pulse generator (option SM-B4). The pulse
generation is triggered on principle, with the trigger certainly being able to be set to "free run" using
TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce AUTO as well. The pulse modulation (option SM-B3) is set in the
SOURce:PULM subsystem.

Command Parameter Default Unit Remark

[:SOURce]
:PULSe Option SM-B4
:DELay 40 ns to 1 s s
:DOUBle
:DELay 60 ns to 1 s s
[:STATe] ON | OFF
:PERiod 100 ns to 85 s s

:WIDTh 20 ns to 1 s s

[:SOURce]:PULSe:DELay 40 ns to 1 s
The command specifies the time from the start of the period to the first edge of the pulse. Due to
the construction of the instrument, this parameter is set to 0 if :SOURce:PULSe:DOUBle:STATe
is set to ON. The old value is activated again as soon as the double pulse has been switched off.
Example: :SOUR:PULS:DEL 10us *RST value is 1 us

[:SOURce]:PULSe:DOUBle
The commands to check the second pulse are under this node. If :SOURce:PULSe:
DOUBle:STATe is set to ON, a second pulse whose width is identical to the first pulse is
generated in every period.

[:SOURce]:PULSe:DOUBle:DELay 60 ns to 1 s
The command sets the time from the start of the pulse period to the first edge of the second
pulse. *RST value is 1 us
Example: :SOUR:PULS:DOUB:DEL 10us

[:SOURce]:PULSe:DOUBle[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches the second pulse on or off.
ON The second pulse is switched on. Parameter :SOURce:PULSe:DELay is set to 0
and cannot be changed. WIDTh > (PULSe:PERiod - PULSe:DOUBle:DELay)/2
results in error message -221, "Settings conflict".
OFF The second pulse is switched off. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:PULS:DOUB:STAT OFF

[:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod 100 ns to 85 s
The command sets the pulse period.
The pulse period is the reciprocal value of the pulse frequency, thus this command is coupled to
command :SOURce:PULM:INTernal:FREQuency *RST value is 10 us
Example: :SOUR:PULS:PER 2s

[:SOURce]:PULSe:WIDTh 20 ns to 1s
The command sets the pulse width. *RST value is 1 us
Example: :SOUR:PULS:WIDT 0.1s

1038.6002.02 3.92 E-13

SME SOURce:REFLex25

[Link] SOURce:REFLex25 Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands for setting the ReFLEX25 signal. The telegram generated by
the SME complies with the ReFLEX25 Protocol Specification Document Version 2.4 dated March 15,
1996, issued by the Motorola Advanced Messaging Group. ReFLEX25 can only be activated if the SME
is equipped with the SME-B43, SME-B11 and SME-B12 options.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce] Options SME-B11,

SME-B12 and SME-
:REFLex25
B43
:STATe ON | OFF
:AUTO ON | OFF
:MODulation 1600, FSK2 | 3200,FSK2 | 3200,FSK4 | 6400,
FSK4
:DEViation Hz
2.0 to 10.0 kHz
:MESSage
:PADDress
16777216 to 1073741823
:ALPHanumeric
[:SELect]
“name“
:CATalog?
:DATA query only
“alphanumeric data“
:NUMeric
“numeric data“
:RREQuired
ON | OFF
:SI | SINFormation
:ZONE
0 to 4091
:SZONe
0 to 127
:PROVider
0 to 16383
:FCHannel
:BASE Hz
0 to 8191MHz
:ANUMber
0 to 2047
:RCHannel
:BASE Hz
0 to 8191MHz
:ANUMber
0 to 2047
:SPEed bps
800 | 1600 | 6400 | 9600 bps
:FSPacing Hz
0 to 102350 Hz
:SCIBase
0 to 127
:SCICollapse
0 to 7
:ERRor
:MASK
0 to 4294967295
:WORD
0 to 351
:FCONtent
“I|A|N|T|S|R|B|F|O|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
[,I|A|N|T|S|R|B|F|O|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9]“
:AADaptation
ON | OFF
:TACTion
MESSage | STARt | ONCE

1038.6002.02 3.93 E-13

SOURce:REFLex25 SME

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:STATe ON | OFF
This command switches on ReFLEX25. The status line displays the cycle and frame number and
the type of output data as well as the word “RFLX“ (see table in the Manual Operation part under
FRAME CONTENTS).
When ReFLEX25 is switched on, all other DM modulations are automatically switched off.
A switchover from STAT OFF to STAT ON results in a recalculation of the telegram and its entry
into the list “XMEM“. Changing one of the ReFLEX parameters, except for REFL25:AAD,
:TRIG:DM:SOUR and REFL25:FCON, requires a recalculation of data. The recalculation of data is
effected by switchover to REFL25:STAT OFF; STAT ON
To permit easier handling, a few settings are automatically updated each time ReFLEX25 is
switched on if other settings have been changed. This applies to SOUR:FREQ. Normally,
automatic mode is activated, but it can be deactivated using REFL25:AAD OFF. Parameters that
have been set automatically can be varied again at will, these modifications take effect
immediately.
Example: :SOUR:REFL25:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:STATe:AUTO ON | OFF
The command determines whether the ReFLEX telegram is to be recalculated after switchover
from REFL25:STATE OFF to ON.
ON The data are recalculated.
OFF The previous memory extension contents are maintained.
This setting makes sense if the data in the memory extension have been altered by an external
program; see also Manual Operation part under ReFLEX25, section „Further Notes: Reading Out,
Modifying, Returning of Program Parts“.
Example :SOUR:REFL25:STAT:AUTO ON *RST value is ON

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MODulation 1600,FSK2 | 3200,FSK2 | 3200,FSK4 | 6400,FSK4

This command selects the used bit rate and modulation. Four modulations are available:
1600bps/2FSK, 3200bps/2FSK, 3200bps/4FSK and 6400bps/4FSK.
Example: :SOUR:REFL25:MOD 1600,FSK2 *RST value is 1600,FSK2

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:DEViation 2.0 to 10.0 kHz

This command determines the frequency deviation of the modulation. The deviation specifies the
spacing from the carrier to the two further placed symbol in 4FSK. The ReFLEX25 standard
specifies 2400Hz for this value which may be varied for testing. *RST value is 2.4 kHz
Example: SOUR:REFL25:DEV 5 kHz

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:PADDress 16777216 to 1073741823

This command determines the address of the receiver to be called. The values range from 16 777
216 to 1 073 741 823. *RST value is 16777216
Example: : SOUR:REFL25:MESS:PADD 167772168

1038.6002.02 3.94 E-13

SME SOURce:REFLex25

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] “name“
This command selects the alphanumeric message. Valid values:
FOX Selection of an alphanumeric message.
ALPHA „ABCD...“ (complete ReFLEX25 character set)
USER1 to 4 4 messages that can be freely varied using command REFL25:MESS:ALPH:DATA
The parameter is not influenced by *RST.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:ALPH:SEL “FOX“

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:CATalog?
The command queries the alphanumeric messages. It causes a list to be returned on which the
entries are separated by commas. The list contains the values FOX, ALPHA, USER1, USER2,
USER3, USER4. This is a query, it features no *RST value.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:ALPH:CAT?

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA “alphanumeric data string“

This command is used to fill the list selected using REFL25:MESS:ALPH:SEL with the transferred
data. The string may contain a maximum of 128 characters which must be part of the alphabet
defined in the ReFLEX25 documentation. ReFLEX25 and Flex share a common set of messages
- changing ReFLEX25 causes the message under Flex to be changed as well. The messages are
not influenced by *RST.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:ALPH:DATA “hello“

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:NUMeric “numeric data string“

This command enters the character string for a numeric message. The „numeric data string“ may
contain a maximum of 41 characters. In addition to the 10 figures“0“ to “9“ other characters such
as square brackets left and right “[“ and “]“, upper-case letter “U“, hyphen “-“ and blank space “ “
can be used. The parameter is not influenced by *RST.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:NUM “[49-89-]1111-2222“

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:RREQuired ON | OFF
This command determines whether the receiver is to confirm the message or not. The respective
bit is set in the message. In the case of OFF, the vector field is reduced by one code word if this is
permitted by the ReFLEX standard. *RST value is OFF
Example: SOUR:REFL25:MESS:RREQ ON

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:ZONE 0 to 4091

This command sets the geographical transmit zone. The significance is specified by the network
operator. The value 0 is referred to as “restricted“ in the ReFLEX25 documentation, but can be set
for test purposes. The upper limit is 4091. *RST value is 1
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:ZONE 91

1038.6002.02 3.95 E-13

SOURce:REFLex25 SME

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:SZONe 0 to 127

This command sets the subzone within a transmit zone. The significance is specified by the
network operator. The value 0 is referred to as “restricted“ in the ReFLEX25 documentation, but
can be set for test purposes. The upper limit is 127. *RST value is 1
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:SZON 99

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:PROVider 0 to 16383

This command sets the ID of the service provider. *RST value is 0
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:PROV 6383

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:FCHannel
Together with :REFL25:SI:FSP, the commands under this node specify the frequency of the
channel from the transmitter (SME) to the receiver. The following formula is valid:
:FREQ = :REFL25:SI:FCH:BASE + :REFL25:SI:FCH:ANUM * :REFL25:SI:FSPacing
If :REFL25:AADaptation is set to ON, the frequency calculated is also transferred to the RF
setting of the SME when switching on ReFLEX25, provided that the formula provides a value that
lies within the setting range of the SME.
The preset values for the following parameters are selected such that the default value of
929.00625MHz specified in the ReFLEX25 documentation is obtained as frequency.

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:FCHannel:BASE 0 to 8191 MHz

This command sets the base frequency of forward channel. *RST value is 929 MHz
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:FCH:BASE 81 MHz

[:SOURce] :REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:FCHannel:ANUMber 0 to 2047

This command sets the assignment number of forward channel. This is not the logic channel
number.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:FCH:ANUM 204 *RST value is 1

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:RCHannel
Together with :REFL25:SI:FSPacing, the commands under this node specify the frequency of
the reverse channel from the receiver to the transmitter (SME). The following formula is valid in
this case:
:FREQ = :REFL25:SI:RCH:BASE + :REFL25:SI:RCH:ANUM * :REFL25:SI:FSPacing
The preset values for the following parameters are selected such that the default value of
896.0125 MHz defined in the ReFLEX25 documentation is obtained as frequency

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:RCHannel:BASE 0 to 8191 MHz

This command sets the base frequency of reverse channel. *RST value is 896 MHz
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:RCH:BASE 550 MHz

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:RCHannel:ANUMber 0 to 204

This command sets the assignment number of reverse channel. *RST value is 2
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:RCH:ANUM 204

1038.6002.02 3.96 E-13

SME SOURce:REFLex25

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:RCHannel:SPEed 800 | 1600 | 6400 | 9600 bps

This command selects the bit rate of the reverse channel. 800bps, 1600bps, 6400bps and
9600bps are available. The set value is transferred to the receiver and has no further effects.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:RCH:SPE 800 bps *RST value is 800 bps

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:FSPacing 0 to 102350 Hz

This command specifies the frequency spacing according to the formulas for FREQ given above.
This parameter applies both to the forward and the reverse channel. Valid values are 0 to
102350Hz, in steps of 50Hz. *RST value is 6250 Hz
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:FSP 589 Hz

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:SCIBase 0 to 127

System configuration information (SCI) frames are sent within each cycle of 128 frames. Their
positions within the cycle are calculated according to
INDEX = SCI BASE FRAME + 2SCI COLLAPSE MASK * i for all i until INDEX exceeds 127.
:REFL25:SI:SCIBase and :REFL25:SI:SCICollapse are transferred to the receiver in the
respective block information words. *RST value is 0
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:SCIB 99

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI | SINFormation:SCICollapse 0 to 7
See explanation under :REFL25:SI:SCIB. *RST value is 7
Example: SOUR:REFL25:SI:SCIC 5

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:ERRor
The SME allows for providing a 32-bit word of the transferred message with bit errors for test
purposes. The following parameters specify the bits to the falsified and the position of the
erroneous word within a frame. The bit errors are incorporated before the individual blocks are
subjected to interleaving (see ReFLEX documentation).

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:ERRor:MASK 0 to 4294967295
This command sets the bits to be falsified. The set decimal number is converted internally into a
32-bit binary number. This binary number is XORed with the original message word. Each bit of
the ERROR BIT MASK set to 1 causes the respective bit to be inverted in the transmitted word.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:ERR:MASK 4967295 *RST value is 0

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:ERRor:WORD 0 to 351
This command indicates the position of the erroneous word. The erroneous word appears in each
frame. Counting starts with the first word of block 0 of each frame, i.e. immediately after the sync
partition; the sync partition cannot be falsified. Values from 0 to 351 can be set. Depending on the
modulation, a frame (without sync partition) consists of 88, 176 or 352 words. If an excessive
value is entered for REFL25:ERR:WORD for the modulation set, no bit errors are produced.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:ERR:WORD 176 *RST value is 0

1038.6002.02 3.97 E-13

SOURce:REFLex25 SME

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:FCONtent “I|A|N|T|S|R|B|F|O|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9
[,I|A|N|T|S|R|B|F|O|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9]“
This command specifies the contents of the max. 128 frames the SME sends during a cycle. A
string with a length of max. 128 characters can be transferred. Each of the 128 frames is
represented by a character which may assume one of the following values:

Character Status display Frame contents

I IDLE ReFLEX25 frame without addresses and message contents
A ALPH ReFLEX25 frame with alphanumeric message and address
N NUM ReFLEX25 frame with numeric message and address
T TONE ReFLEX25 frame with tone-only message and address
S SCI SCI frame
R RSYN Emergency Resynchronization Frame
B BER ReFLEX25 frame with a message that switches the receiver to the bit-error-test mode
F FPAT ReFLEX25 test filler pattern according to section 10.1 of the ReFLEX25 standard
O OTH Simulated data of another radiocommunication service; contains no ReFLEX
structures at all.
1 to 9 CUS1 to CUS9 Custom frames, freely definable by the user (see instructions in the manual operation
part)

Notes: – A cycle can be reduced to less than 128 frames by transferring a string with less than
128 characters. In this case, the SME starts the next cycle earlier.
– :REFL25:FCONtent can also be changed with ReFLEX25 being active.
– For using the frame types BER and FPAT, see also section „Bit Error Rate Test“ in the
manual operation part.
Example: SOUR:REFL25:FCON “SAAAA....“ RST value is “SAAAA... “(abbreviated)

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:AADaptation ON | OFF
If :REFL25:AADaptation is set to ON, the following settings are performed automatically as
soon as ReFLEX25 is switched on:
:REFL25:SI:FCH:BASE, :REFL25:SI:FCH:ANUMber and :REFL25:SI:FSPacing are used
to calculate and set the RF.
The values set automatically can be changed subsequently without recalculation of the telegram.
These modifications take effect immediately. However,. they do not react on the output
parameters (:REFL25:SI:FCH:SCIBase etc., see above).
Example: SOUR:REFL25:AAD ON *RST value is ON

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE

This command (Trigger ACTion) determines the action triggered by a trigger event. The valid
trigger events (free-running, external signal, *TRG etc.) are specified by the command
TRIGger:DM:SOURce. The assignment manual operation/remote control is also described with
this command.
MESSage A valid trigger event causes the next ALPH, NUM or TONE frame (see
:REFL25:FCONtent) to be actually output as such and not as IDLE frame.
STARt The output of the ReFLEX telegram is only started by a valid trigger event. Then the
frames are sent exactly as specified in :REFL25:FCONtent until :REFL25:STATe
is switched to OFF. This setting is suitable for starting several SMEs synchronously.
ONCE The output of the ReFLEX telegram is only started by a valid trigger event. After
recognition of this signal, exactly one cycle (up to 128 frames) is output. The frames
are output exactly as specified in REFL25:FCONT. After execution of the cycle, the
SME waits for its trigger pulse again (defined under TRIG:DM:SOUR).
Example: SOUR:REFL25:TACT MESS *RST value is MESS

1038.6002.02 3.98 E-13

SME SOURce:ROSCillator

[Link] SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to set the external and internal reference oscillator.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:ROSCillator
:EXTernal
:FREQuency 1 to 16 MHz Hz
[:INTernal]
:ADJust
[:STATe] ON | OFF
:VALue 0 to 4095

:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal
The commands to set the external reference oscillator are under this node.

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1 to 16 MHz
The command informs the instrument about at which frequency the external reference oscillator
oscillates.
Example: :SOUR:ROSC:FREQ 5MHz *RST value is 10 MHz

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust
The commands for frequency correction (fine adjustment of the frequency) are under this node.

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches the fine adjustment of the frequency on or off.
Example: :SOUR:ROSC:INT:ADJ:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue 0 to 4095
The command indicates the frequency correction value (tuning value). For a detailed definition, cf.
Chapter 2,Section Reference Frequency Internal/External.
Example: :SOUR:ROSC:INT:ADJ:VAL 2048 *RST value is 2048

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal

The command selects the reference source.
INTernal The internal oscillator is used.
EXTernal The reference signal is fed externally. *RST value is INTernal
Example: :SOUR:ROSC:SOUR EXT

1038.6002.02 3.99 E-13

SOURce:STEReo SME

[Link] SOURce:STEReo Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to generate FM stereo multiplex signals conforming to
standards according to the pilot-tone method (options SM-B5 and SM-B6). The modulation signal is
output in addition at the LF output socket (cf. Section "OUTPut2 system" as well).

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:STEReo Option SM-B6 and
SM-B5
:STATe ON | OFF
[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 100 kHz Hz
:SIGNal AUDio | ARI
:AUDio
[:FREQuency] 0.1 Hz to 15 kHz Hz
:PREemphasis OFF | 50 us | 75 us
:MODE RIGHt | LEFT | RELeft | REMLeft
:PILot
:STATe ON | OFF
[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 10 kHz Hz
:PHASe 0 to 360 deg rad
:ARI
[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 10 kHz
:TYPE BK | DK | OFF Hz
:BK
[:CODE] A|B|C|D|E|F

[:SOURce]:STEReo:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the stereo signal. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:STER:STAT ON

[:SOURce]:STEReo[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 100 kHz

The command sets the frequency deviation of the FM stereo multiplex signal without considering
the pilot-tone content.
Example: :SOUR:STER:DEV 40kHz *RST value is 40 kHz

[:SOURce]:STEReo:SIGNal AUDio | ARI

The command selects which signals are generated, simulated audio signals or ARI traffic channel
signals with a 19-kHz pilot tone.
AUDio Audio signals are generated, ARI is switched off.
ARI ARI signals are generated.
Example: :SOUR:STER:SIGN AUD *RST value is AUDio

1038.6002.02 3.100 E-13

SME SOURce:STEReo

[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio
The commands to set the characteristics of the audio signals generated by the SME are under
this node.

[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio[:FREQuency] 0.1 Hz to 15 kHz

The command sets the frequency of the audio signal. The frequency applies to both channels at
the same time.
Example: :SOUR:STER:AUD 1kHz *RST value is 1 kHz

[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio:PREemphasis OFF | 50 us | 75 us
The command selects the preemphasis of the audio signal.
OFF Preemphasis is switched off.
50 us 0 µs preemphasis
75 us 75 µs preemphasis *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:STER:AUD:PRE 50us

[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio:MODE RIGHt | LEFT | RELeft | REMLeft

The command selects the operating mode in which the two channels operate.
RIGHtAudio signal only in the right channel
LEFT Audio signal only in the left channel
RELeft (Right Equals Left) Audio signals of same frequency and phase in both channels
REMLeft (Right Equals Minus Left) Audio signals of same frequency but opposite phase in
both channels.
Example: :SOUR:STER:AUD:MODE RIGH *RST value is RELeft

[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot
The commands to set the characteristics of the 19-kHz pilot-tone signal are under this node.

[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot:STATe ON | OFF
The command activates or deactivates the pilot tone. The pilot tone can be activated or
deactivated independently of the setting of SOURce:STEReo:SIGNal.
Example: :SOUR:STER:PIL:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 10 kHz
The command sets the frequency deviation of the pilot tone. *RST value is 6,72 kHz
Example: :SOUR:STER:PIL:DEV 6720

[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot:PHASe 0 to 360 deg

The command sets the phase of the pilot tone. The zero crossing of the suppressed 38-kHz
auxiliary carrier of the stereo multiplex signal serves as a phase reference.
Example: :SOUR:STER:PIL:PHAS 10deg *RST value is 0 deg

1038.6002.02 3.101 E-13

SOURce:STEReo SME

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI
The commands to specify the characteristics of the ARI traffic channel signal are under this node.

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 10 kHz
The command sets the deviation content of the unmodulated 57-kHz ARI auxiliary carrier.
Example: :SOUR:STER:ARI:DEV 4kHz *RST value is 4 kHz

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:TYPE BK | DK | OFF
The command specifies which identification is generated.
BK Area code. The AM modulation depth of the area code on the ARI auxiliary carrier,
which has been selected under SOURce: STEReo:ARI:BK:CODE is m = 0.6.
DK Broadcasting code. The AM modulation depth of the broadcasting code (125 Hz) on
the ARI auxiliary carrier is m = 0.3.
OFF Area and broadcasting code are deactivated. *RST value is DK
Example: :SOUR:STER:ARI:TYPE BK

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:BK
The commands to specify the characteristics of the BK signal are under this node.

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:BK[:CODE] A | B | C | D | E | F
The command specifies the area code.
A Traffic area code A 23,7500 Hz
B Traffic area code B 28,2738 Hz
C Traffic area code C 34,9265 Hz
D Traffic area code D 39,5833 Hz
E Traffic area code E 45,6731 Hz
F Traffic area code F 53,9773 Hz *RST value is A
Example: :SOUR:STER:ARI:BK A

1038.6002.02 3.102 E-13

SME SOURce:SWEep

[Link] SOURce:SWEep Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to check the RF sweep, i.e., sweeps of the RF generators.
Sweeps are triggered on principle. The frequency sweep is activated by command
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep, the level sweep by command SOURce:POWer:MODE SWEep.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:SWEep
:BTIMe NORMal | LONG
[:FREQuency]
:DWELl 10 ms to 5 s s
:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP
:POINts Number
:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
:STEP
[:LINear] 0 to 1 GHz Hz
:LOGarithmic 0.01 to 50 PCT PCT
:POWer
:DWELl 10 ms to 5 s s
:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP
:POINts Number
:STEP
:LOGarithmic 0 to 10 dB dB

[:SOURce]:SWEep:BTIMe NORMal | LONG

The command sets the blank time
(Blank TIMe) of the sweep. The setting is valid for all sweeps, i.e., also for LF sweeps.
NORMal Blank time as short as possible.
LONG Blank time long enough to permit an XY recorder to return to 0.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:BTIM LONG *RST value is NORM

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]
The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node. Keyword [:FREQuency] can
be omitted (cf. examples). The commands are SCPI compatible then unless stated otherwise.

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl 10 ms to 5 s
The command sets the dwell time per frequency step.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:DWEL 12ms *RST value is 15 ms

1038.6002.02 3.103 E-13

SOURce:SWEep SME

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP

The command specifies the run of the sweep.
AUTOEach trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle.
MANual Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a
SOURce:FREQuency:MANual command, the trigger system is not active. The
frequency increases or decreases (depending on the direction of the shaft encoder)
by the value indicated under [:SOURce]:FREQuency:STEP:INCRement.
STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step (single-step mode). The frequency
increases by the value indicated under [:SOURce]:SWEep:STEP:LOGarithmic.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:MODE AUTO *RST value is AUTO

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts Number
The command determines the number of steps in a sweep.
Instead of this command, commands SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LINear and
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:STEP:LOGarithmic should be used, as SOURce:SWEep
:FREQuency:POINts has been adapted to the instrument characteristics in comparison to the
SCPI command.
The value of POINts depends on SPAN and STEP according to the following formulas..
The following is true for linear sweeps : POINts = SPAN / STEP:LIN + 1
The following is true for logarithmic sweeps and STARt < STOP:
POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log (1+ STEP:LOG))
Two independent POINts values are used for SPACing LOG and SPACing LIN. I.e., before
POINts is changed, SPACing must be set correctly. A change of POINts results in an adaptation
of STEP, but not of STARt, STOP and SPAN.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:POIN 100

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings.
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:SPAC LIN *RST value is LINear

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] 0 to 1 GHz
The command sets the step width with the linear sweep. If STEP[:LINear] is changed, the value
of POINts valid for SPACing:LINear also changes according to the formula stated under POINts.
A change of SPAN does not result in a change of STEP[:LINear]. Keyword [:LINear] can be
omitted, then the command conforms to SCPI regulations (see example).
Example: :SOUR:SWE:STEP 1MHz *RST value is 1 MHz

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic 0.01 to 50 PCT

The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next frequency value of
a sweep is calculated according to
new frequency = prior frequency + STEP:LOG x prior frequency (if STARt < STOP)
STEP:LOG indicates the fraction of the prior frequency by which this is increased for the next
sweep step. Usually STEP:LOG is indicated in percent, with the suffix PCT having to be used
explicitly. If STEP:LOG is changed, the value of POINts valid for SPAC:LOG also changes
according to the formula stated under POINts. A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a
change of STEP:LOG.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:STEP:LOG 10PCT *RST value is 1 PCT

1038.6002.02 3.104 E-13

SME SOURce:SWEep

[:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl 10 ms to 5 s
The command sets the dwell time per level step.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:POW:DWEL 12ms *RST value is 15 ms

[:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP

The command specifies the run of the sweep.
AUTOEach trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle.
MANual Each level step of the sweep is triggered by means of manual control or a
SOURce:POWer:MANual command, the trigger system is not active. The level
increases or decreases (depending on the direction of the shaft encoder) by the
value stated under :SOURce:POWer:STEP: INCRement.
STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step (single-step mode). The level increases by
the value indicated under :SOURce:POWer:STEP: INCRement.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO *RST value is AUTO

[:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:POINts Number
The command determines the number of steps in a sweep. Instead of this command, command
SOURce:SWEep:POWer:STEP:LOGarithmic should be used, as POINts has been adapted to the
instrument characteristics in comparison to the SCPI command.
The value of :POINts depends on .SPAN and :STEP according to the following formulas:
POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log STEP:LOG) + 1
A change of POINts results in an adaptation of STEP but not of STARt, STOP and SPAN.
Example: :SOUR:SWE:POW:POIN 100

[:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:STEP:LOGarithmic 0 to 10 dB
The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next level value of a
sweep is calculated according to
new level = prior level + STEP:LOG × prior level
STEP:LOG indicates the fraction of the prior level by which this is increased for the next sweep
step. Usually STEP:LOG is indicated in dB, with suffix dB having to be used explicitly. If
STEP:LOG is changed, the value of POINts also changes according to the formula indicated
under POINts. A change of STARt or STOP does not result in a change of STEP:LOG. Keyword
:LOG can be omitted, then the command conforms to SCPI regulation (see example).
Example: :SOUR:SWE:STEP 10dB *RST value is 1dB

1038.6002.02 3.105 E-13

SOURce:VOR SME

[Link] SOURce:VOR Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands to control the characteristics of the test signals for VOR
(VHF Omnidirectional Range) (option SM-B6, multifunction generator).

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

[:SOURce]
:VOR Option SM-B6
:STATe ON | OFF
:SOURce INT2 | INT2, EXT
:MODE NORM | VAR | SUBCarrier | FMSubcarrier
[:BANGle] 0 to 360 deg rad
:DIRection FROM | TO
:VAR
[:DEPTh] 0 to 100 PCT PCT
:FREQuency 20 to 40 Hz Hz
:SUBCarrier
:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT
[:FREQuency] 5 to 15 kHz Hz
:REFerence
[:DEViation] 0 to 960 Hz Hz
:PRESet No query
:COMid
[:STATe] ON | OFF
:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz Hz
:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT PCT

[:SOURce]:VOR:STATe ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the generation of VOR signals. STATe ON is only possible if no
amplitude modulation is switched on. Modulation generator 2 must not be switched simultaneously
as a source for PM or FM either. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:VOR:STAT ON

[:SOURce]:VOR:SOURce INT2 | INT2, EXT

This command determines the signal sources of the test signal.
INT2 The test signal used for VOR is generated internally by LF generator 2 (SOURce
INT2).
INT2 , EXT A signal from input EXT1 is added to the internal signal in addition. Switching off the
internal source is not possible. *RST value is INT2
Example: :SOUR:VOR:SOUR INT2

1038.6002.02 3.106 E-13

SME SOURce:VOR

[:SOURce]:VOR:MODE NORM | VAR | SUBCarrier

The command specifies the type of VOR signal generated.
NORM VOR signal
VAR Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the SOURce:VOR:VAR
:FREQuency signal component (usually 30 Hz) of the VOR signal. The modulation
depth is set under SOURce:VOR:VAR:DEPTh.
SUBCarrier Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the unmodulated SOURce:VOR
:SUBCarrier:FREQuency-FM carrier (usually 9960 Hz) of the VOR signal.
The modulation depth is set under SOURce:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh.
FMSubcarrier (FM-modulated subcarrier) Amplitude modulation of the output signal with the
frequency-modulated SOURce:VOR:SUBCarrier:FREQuency FM carrier (usually
9960 Hz) of the VOR signal. The frequency deviation is set under
SOURce:VOR:REFerence:DEViation, the modulation depth under
SOURce:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh. *RST value is NORM
Example: :SOUR:VOR:MODE VAR

[:SOURce]:VOR[:BANGle] 0 to 360 deg

The command sets the Bearing ANGle between the VAR signal and the reference signal. The
orientation of the angle depends on the setting under SOURce:VOR :BANGle:DIRection.
Example: :SOUR:VOR:BANG 0deg *RST value is 0 Grad

[:SOURce]:VOR[:BANGle]:DIRection FROM | TO
The command determines the orientation of the bearing angle.
FROM The bearing angle is measured between the geographic north and the connection
line from beacon to airplane.
TO The bearing angle is measured between the geographic north and the connection
line from airplane to beacon.
Example: :SOUR:VOR:BANG:DIR TO *RST value is FROM

[:SOURce]:VOR:VAR[:DEPTh] 0 to 100 PCT

The command sets the AM modulation depth of the VAR signal.
Example: :SOUR:VOR:VAR:DEPT 30PCT *RST value is 30PCT

[:SOURce]:VOR:VAR:FREQuency 20 to 40 Hz
The command sets the frequency of the VAR signal. As VAR and reference signal must always
have the same frequency, this setting is also valid for the reference signal.
Example: :SOUR:VOR:VAR:FREQ 30 *RST value is 30 Hz

[:SOURce]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT

The command sets the AM modulation depth of the FM carrier. *RST value is 30PCT
Example: :SOUR:VOR:SUBC:DEPT 30PCT

[:SOURce]:VOR:SUBCarrier[:FREQuency] 5 to 15 kHz
The command sets the frequency of the FM carrier. *RST value is 9960 Hz
Example: :SOUR:VOR:SUBC:FREQ 9960

1038.6002.02 3.107 E-13

SOURce:VOR SME

[:SOURce]:VOR:REFerence[:DEViation] 0 to 960 Hz
The command sets the frequency deviation of the reference signal on the FM carrier.
Example: :SOUR:VOR:REF:DEV 480 *RST value is 480 Hz

[:SOURce]:VOR:PRESet
The command sets the frequency deviation of the reference signal on the FM carrier.
:VOR:MODE NORM
:VOR:SOUR INT2
:VOR 0deg
:VOR:DIRection FROM
:VOR:VAR:FREQ 30Hz
:VOR:VAR 30PCT
:VOR:SUBC 9960Hz
:VOR:SUBC:DEPTh 30PCT
:VOR:REF:DEV 480Hz
:VOR:COM OFF
:VOR:COM:FREQ 1020Hz
:VOR:COM:DEPTh 10PCT
The values set correspond to the state after SYSTEM:PRESET or *RST. The command neither
has a query form nor an *RST value.
Example: :SOUR:VOR:PRES

[:SOURce]:VOR:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command activates or deactivates the ComId signal. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SOUR:VOR:COM:STAT ON

[:SOURce]:VOR:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz

The command sets the frequency of the ComId signal. *RST value is 1020 Hz
Example: :SOUR:VOR:COM:FREQ 1020

[:SOURce]:VOR:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT

The command sets the AM modulation depth of the ComId signal.
Example: :SOUR:VOR:COM:DEPT 10PCT *RST value is 10 PCT

1038.6002.02 3.108 E-13

SME SOURce0|2:FREQuency

3.6.12 SOURce0|2 System

The SOURce0|2 system contains the commands to configure the LF signal sources. The following
allocation is valid:

SOURce0: Standard generator.

Designated as INT1 if used as a modulation source (cf. command
SOURce:AM:SOURce INT1, e.g.). The numbering as SOURce0 is different from the
manual control.
Second optional LF generator (option SM-B2).
Replaces the standard generator which is cut out by this option. Is designated as INT1 if
it is used as a modulation source; if it is used as an LF generator, it is designated as
SOURce0 differently from the numbering of the manual control.

SOURce2: First optional LF or modulation generator (option SM-B2 or SM-B6).

Is designated as INT2 if it is used as a modulation source; if it is used as an LF
generator, it is designated as SOURce2.

The commands to set the output voltage of the LF generators are in the OUTPut2 system (see Section
3.6.10)

Subsystems Settings

:SOURce0 | 2
:FREQuency Frequency with CW and sweep operation.
:FUNCtion Waveform of the output signal
:MARKer Marker for LF sweeps (only possible using SOURce2)
:SWEep LF sweep (only possible using SOURce2)

[Link] SOURce0|2:FREQuency Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands for the frequency settings in operating modes CW and SWEep.
Only command SOURce0:FREQuency:CW|FIXed is effective for the standard LF generator
(SOURce0). For LF generator2 (SOURce2), sweep commands are effective as well.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:SOURce0 | 2
:FREQuency
[:CW|:FIXed] 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or Hz
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz Option SM-B2 or B6
:MANual 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz Option SM-B2 or B6
:MODE CW|FIXed | SWEep Option SM-B2 or B6
:STARt 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz Option SM-B2 or B6
:STOP 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz Hz Option SM-B2 or B6

1038.6002.02 3.109 E-13

SOURce0|2:FREQuency SME

:SOURce0|2:FREQuency[:CW | :FIXed] 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or

0.1 Hz to 1 MHz
The command sets the frequency for the CW mode.
If neither SM-B2 nor SM-B6 are fitted, the values 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz and 15 kHz are
permissible for SOURce0. With option SM-B2, values from 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz are permissible,
with SM-B6 from 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz. RST-Wert is 1 kHz
Example: :SOUR2:FREQ:CW 1kHz

SOURce0|2:FREQuency:MANual 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz

The command sets the frequency if SOURce2:SWEep:MODe MANual and SOURce2:
FREQuency: MODe SWEep are set. In this case, only frequency values between the settings
SOURce2: FREQuency:STARt and to :STOP are allowed.
Example: :SOUR2:FREQ:MAN 1kHz *RST value is 1kHz

SOURce0|2:FREQuency:MODE CW|FIXed | SWEep

The command specifies the operating mode and hence by means of which commands the
FREQuency subsystem is checked. The following allocations are valid:
CW |FIXed CW and FIXed are synonyms. The output frequency is specified by means of
SOURce0|2:FREQuency:CW |FIXed.
SWEep The generator operates in the SWEep mode. The frequency is specified by means
of commands SOURce2:FREQuency:STARt; STOP; MANual. The SWEep
setting is only possible for SOURce2-
Example: :SOUR2:FREQ:MODE CW *RST value is CW

SOURce0|2:FREQuency:STARt 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz

This command indicates the starting value of the frequency for the sweep.
Example: :SOUR2:FREQ:STAR 100kHz *RST value is 1kHz

SOURce0|2:FREQuency:STOP 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz

This command indicates the end value of the frequency for the sweep.
Example: :SOUR2:FREQ:STOP 200kHz *RST value is 100 kHz

1038.6002.02 3.110 E-13

SME SOURce0|2:FUNCtion

[Link] SOURce 0|2:FUNCtion-Subsystem

This subsystem contains the commands specifying the waveform of the output signal.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:SOURce0|2
:FUNCtion
[:SHAPe] SINusoid | SQUare | TRIangle | PRNoise | Option SM-B2 / B6
SAWTooth Option SM-B6

:SOURce0|2:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] SINusoid | SQUare | TRIangle | PRNoise | SAWTooth

The command specifies the waveform of the output signal. In the case of the standard generator,
the waveform is specified to be sine. Option SM-B2, LF generator can be converted to the signal
forms sine, square, triangle and periodic noise, option SM-B6, multifunction generator to all signal
forms. If two options SM-B2 are installed, SOURce0 can be set to the signal forms of option
SM-B2 as well.
SINusoid Sine
SQUare Square
TRIangle Triangle
PRNoise Periodic noise
SAWtooth Sawtooth *RST value is SIN
Example: :SOUR2:FUNC:SHAP SQU

1038.6002.02 3.111 E-13

SOURce2:MARKer SME

[Link] SOURce2:MARKer-Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands to check the marker generation in the case of LF sweeps.
Operating mode SWEep is only possible for SOURce2. The three markers existing are differentiated by
a numeric suffix after marker.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:SOURce2 Option SM-B2/B6

:MARKer 1 | 2 | 3
[:FSWeep]
:AOFF No query
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz Hz
:FREQuency
ON | OFF
[:STATe]
NORMal | INVerted
:POLarity

:SOURce2:MARKer 1 | 2 | 3[:FSWeep]
The commands for the markers with the LF frequency sweep (Frequency SWeep) are under this
node. Keyword [:FSWeep] can also be omitted, then the command conforms to SCPI regulation
(see examples).

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:AOFF
The command switches off all LF frequency markers. This command triggers an event, thus is
has no *RST value and no query form.
Example: :SOUR2:MARK:AOFF

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:FREQuency 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz

The command sets the marker selected by the numeric suffix at MARKer to the frequency
indicated. *RST value for MARK1: 100kHz
MARK2: 10kHz
Example: :SOUR2:MARK1:FREQ 9000 MARK3: 1kHz

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep][:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches on or off the marker selected by the numeric suffix at MARKer.
Example: :SOUR2:MARK1:STAT ON *RST value is OFF

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3:POLarity NORMal | INVerted

The command specifies the polarity of the marker signal as follows:
NORMal When running through the marker condition, TTL level is applied at the marker
output, otherwise 0 V.
INVers When running through the marker condition, 0 V is applied at the marker output,
otherwise TTL level. *RST value is NORM
Example: :SOUR2:MARK1:POL INV

1038.6002.02 3.112 E-13

SME SOURce2:SWEep

[Link] SOURce2:SWEep-Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands to check the LF sweep of SOURce2. Sweeps are triggered on
principle.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:SOURce2 Option SM-B2

:SWEep
:BTIMe NORMal | LONG
[:FREQuency]
:DWELl 1 ms to 1 s s
:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP
:POINts Number
:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

:STEP
[:LINear] 0 to 500 kHz Hz

:LOGarithmic 0.01 PCT to 50 PCT PCT

:SOURce2:SWEep:BTIMe NORMal | LONG

The command sets the blank time (Blank TIMe) of the sweep. The setting is valid for all sweeps,
i.e., also for RF sweeps
NORMal Blank time as short as possible.
LONG Blank time long enough to permit an X/Y recorder to return to 0.
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:BTIM LONG *RST value is NORM

:SOURce2:SWEep
The commands to set the frequency sweeps are under this node. Keyword [:FREQuency] can be
omitted. Then the commands are SCPI-compatible unless stated otherwise (see examples).

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl 1 ms to 1 s
The command sets the time per frequency step (dwell).
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:DWEL 20ms *RST value is 15 ms

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP

The command specifies the run of the sweep.
AUTOEach trigger triggers exactly one entire sweep cycle.
STEP Each trigger triggers only one sweep step (single-step mode). The frequency
increases by the value indicated under :SOURce2:SWEep
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:MODE AUTO *RST value is AUTO

1038.6002.02 3.113 E-13

SOURce2:SWEep SME

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts Number
The command determines the number of steps in a sweep. Instead of this command, commands
:SOURce2:FREQuency:STEP:LINear and :SOURce2 :FREQuency:STEP:LOGarithmic
should be used, as :SOURce2:SWEep:FREQuency: POINts has been adapted to the
instrument characteristics in comparison to the SCPI command. The value of POINts depends on
SPAN and STEP according to the following formulas.
The following is true of linear sweeps : POINts = SPAN / STEP:LIN + 1
The following is true of logarithmic sweeps and STARt < STOP:
POINts = ((log STOP log STARt) / log STEP:LOG) + 1
Two independent POINts values are used for SPACing LOG and SPACing LIN. That is to say,
before POINts is changed, SPACing must be set correctly. A change of POINts causes an
adaption of STEP, but not of STARt, STOP and SPAN.
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:POIN 50

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic

The command selects whether the steps have linear or logarithmic spacings.
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:SPAC LOG *RST value is LINear

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP
The commands to set the step width with linear and logarithmic sweeps are under this node. The
settings of STEP:LIN and STEP:LOG are independent of each other.

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] 0 to 500 kHz

The command sets the step width with the linear sweep. If STEP:LINear is changed, the value of
POINts valid for SPACing:LINear also changes according to the formula indicated under POINts.
A change of SPAN does not cause a change of STEP:LINear. Keyword [:LINear] can be omitted,
then the command conforms to SCPI regulation (see example)
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:STEP 10kHz *RST value is 1 kHz

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic 0.01 to 50PCT

The command indicates the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next frequency value of
a sweep is calculated according to (if STARt < STOP) :
new frequency = prior frequency + STEP:LOG x prior frequency
Thus STEP:LOG indicates the fraction of the prior frequency by which this is increased for the
next sweep step. Usually STEP:LOG is indicated in percent, with the suffix PCT having to be
used explicitly. If STEP:LOG is changed, the value of POINts valid for SPACing:LOGarithmic also
changes according to the formula stated unde
Example: :SOUR2:SWE:STEP:LOG 5PCT *RST value is 1 PCT

1038.6002.02 3.114 E-13

 SME STATus

3.6.13 STATus-System
This system contains the commands for the status reporting system (c.f. Section "Status Reporting
System"). *RST has no influence on the status registers.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:STATus
:OPERation
[:EVENt]? Query only
:CONDition? Query only
:PTRansition 0 to 32767
:NTRansition 0 to 32767
:ENABle 0 to 32767
:PRESet No query

:QUEStionable
[:EVENt]? Query only

:CONDition? Query only

0 to 32767
:PTRansition
0 to 32767
:NTRansition
0 to 32767
:ENABle
:QUEue
Query only
[:NEXT]?

:STATus:OPERation
The commands for the STATus:OPERation register are under this node.

:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:OPERation register. In
reading out, the content of the EVENt part is deleted.
Example: :STAT:OPER:EVEN? Response: 17

:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:OPERation register. In
reading out, the content of the CONDition part is not deleted. The value returned directly reflects
the current hardware state.
Example: :STAT:OPER:COND? Response: 1

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 0 to 32767
The command (Positive TRansition) sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation
register from 0 to1 for the transitions of the CONDition bits.
Example: :STAT:OPER:PTR 32767

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 0 to 32767
The command (Negative TRansition) sets the edge detectors of all bits of the STATus:OPERation
register from 1 to 0 for the transitions of the CONDition bit.

1038.6002.02 3.115 E-13

STATus SME

Example: :STAT:OPER:NTR 0
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0 to 32767
The command sets the bits of the ENABle register. This register selectively enables the individual
events of the appropriate status event register for the sum bit in the status byte.
Example: :STAT:OPER:ENAB 1

:STATus:PRESet
The command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value. All
PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e., all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition
parts are set to 0, i.e., a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle
parts of STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable are set to 0, i.e., all events in these
registers are not passed on.
Example: :STAT:PRES

:STATus:QUEStionable
The commands for the STATus:QUEStionable register are under this node.

:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. In
reading out, the content of the EVENt part is deleted.
Example: :STAT:QUES:EVEN? Response: 1

:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
In reading out, the content of the CONDition part is not deleted.
Example: :STAT:QUES:COND? Response: 2

:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 0 to 32767STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansitionß to
The command (Positive TRansition) sets the edge detectors of all bits of the
STATus:QUEStionable register from 0 to 1 for transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: :STAT:QUES:PTR 32767

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 0 to 32767
The command (Negative TRansition) sets the edge detectors of all bits of the
STATus:QUEStionable register from 1 to 0 for transitions of the CONDition bit.
Example: :STAT:QUES:NTR 0

:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 0 to 32767
The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. This part
selectively enables the individual events of the appropriate EVENt part for the sum bit in the
status byte
Example: :STAT:QUES:ENAB 1

:STATus:QUEue [:NEXT]?
The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time and thus
deletes it. Positive error numbers denote errors specific of the instrument, negative error numbers
error messages specified by SCPI (see annex B). If the error queue is empty, 0, "No error", is
returned. The command is identical to SYSTem :ERRor?
Example: STATus:QUEue:NEXT? Response: -221, "Settings conflict"

1038.6002.02 3.116 E-13

SME SYSTem

3.6.14 SYSTem-System
In this system, a number of commands for general functions which are not immediately related to signal
generation, are combined.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:SYSTem
:BEEPer
:STATe ON | OFF
:COMMunicate
:GPIB
[:SELF]
:ADDRess 0 to 30
:SERial
:CONTrol
:RTS ON | IBFull | RFR

:BAUD 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 |

115200
XON | NONE
:PACE
:ERRor? Query only
ON | OFF
:KLOCk
FIXed | MSEQuence
:MODE
:MSEQuence
Query only
:CATalog?
"Name of sequence"
:DELete
:ALL
50 ms to 60 s {,50 ms to 60 s}
s
:DWELl
:FREE? AUTO | STEP
:MODE 1 to 50 {,1 to 50}
[:RCL]
Query only
:POINts? "Name of sequence"
:SELect
No query
:PRESet
:PROTect ON | OFF , password
[:STATe]
:SECurity ON | OFF
[:STATe]
Query only
:SERRor? Query only
:VERSion?

:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe ON | OFF
This node contains the commands to set the beeper fitted. *RST value is OFF
Example: :SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF

:SYSTem:COMMunicate
The commands to set the remote control interfaces are under this node.

1038.6002.02 3.117 E-13

SYSTem SME

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB
The commands to check the IEC bus are under this node (GPIB = General Purpose Interface
Bus)

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 1 to 30
The command sets the IEC bus instrument address. *RST value is 28
Example: :SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 1

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial
The command to set the serial interface are under this node. The data format is fixedly set to 8
data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit. These values cannot be changed. The device represents a DTE
(Data Terminal Equipment) in relation to the serial interface. Therefore the the controller must be
connected via a 0-modem.

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD 1200| 2400| 4800| 9600| 19200| 38400| 57600| 115200

The commands sets the baud rate for both the transmit and the receive direction. *RST has no
influnence on this parameter.
Example: :SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 1200 *RST value is 9600

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS ON | IBFull | RFR

he commands sets the hardware handshake. *RST has no influence on this parameter.
ON Interface line RTS is always active.
IBFull | RFR Input Buffer Full | Ready For Receiving.
Interface line RTS remains active as long as the instrument is ready to receive data
Example: :SYST:COMM:SER:CONT:RTS ON *RST value is RFR

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PACE XON | NONE

The command sets the software handshake. *RST has no influnence on this parameter.
XON Software handshake using the ASCII codes 11h (XON) and 13h (XOFF).
Note: This mode is not recommended for binary data and for baud rates above
9600 bauds.
NONE No software handshake.
Example: :SYST:COMM:SER:PACE NONE *RST value is NONE

:SYSTem:ERRor?
The command queries the entry that has been in the error queue for the longest time. Positive
error numbers denote errors specific of the instrument, negative error numbers denote error
messages specified by SCPI (see annex B). If the error queue is empty, 0, "No error", is returned.
The command is identical to STATus:QUEue:NEXT?
Example: :SYST:ERR? Response: -221, "Settings conflict"

1038.6002.02 3.118 E-13

SME SYSTem

:SYSTem:KLOCk ON | OFF
The command (Keyboard LOCk) disables the keyboard of the SME including the [LOCAL] key or
enables it again (OFF).
Caution: If :SYSTem:SECurity is ON, the keyboard cannot be enabled, i.e., :SYSTem:KLOCk
OFF is not accepted. If the disabling of the command is released by switching over
to :SYSTem:SECurity OFF, data will be lost.
Example: :SYST:KLOC ON *RST value is OFF

:SYSTem:MODE FIXed | MSEQence

The command sets the operating mode of the instrument.
FIXed The overall instrument state can only be switched over using *RCL.
MSEQuence The instrument successively sets the instrument states indicated under
:SYSTem:MSEQuence:RCL. *RST value is FIXed
Example: :SYST:MODE FIX

:SYSTem:MSEQuence
This node follows the SOURce:LIST system. It can manage several memory sequences which
each consist of a list of instrument state numbers and a time list. If :SYSTem:MODE is switched
to MSEQuence, the instrument states stated in the list selected are set successively for the time
stated in the time list in each case.

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:CATalog?
The command queries the memory sequences available. It returns a list, the entries are
separated by means of commas.
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:CAT? Response: "SEQ1", "DEMO", "SEQA"

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:DELete "Name of sequence"

The command deletes the memory sequence indicated.
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:DEL "SEQ1"

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:DELete:ALL
The command deletes all memory sequences. The memory-sequence mode must be switched
off as a selected sequence cannot be deleted (SYSTem:MODE FIXed).
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:DEL:ALL

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:DWELl 50 ms to 60 s{,50 ms to 60 s}
For the memory sequence which has currently been selected, the command transmits a list
indicating the time for which an instrument setting is "held" in each case before the instrument
proceeds to the next setting. If DWELl indicates only one parameter, every item of the instrument
state list is set for the same, indicated time. Lists are not influenced by *RST.
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:DWEL 1s

1038.6002.02 3.119 E-13

SYSTem SME

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:FREE?
The command queries the space available for memory sequences. It returns two values. The first
value indicates the space still vacant, the second the space already occupied.
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:FREE? Response: 20, 236

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:MODE AUTO | STEP

The command indicates in which way the memory sequence is to be processed (by analogy with
:SOURce:SWEep:MODE) .
AUTOEach trigger event triggers a complete cycle of the memory sequence selected.
STEP Each trigger event only triggers one step in processing the memory sequence.
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:MODE AUTO *RST value is AUTO

:SYSTem:MSEQuence[:RCL] 1 to 50 {,1 to 50}

The command transmits the list of the instrument states to be assumed successively. The list
contains integers denoting the states stored by means of *SAV. These instrument states are set
successively using a simulated *RCL (thus the name of the list). The length of the list is not
limited. The values of the list are between 1 and 50 (number of memory locations to be called).
Lists are not influenced by *RST.
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:RCL 30, 31, 32 ,32 ,32 , 33

:SYSTem:MSEQuence[:RCL]:POINts?
The command queries the length of the RCL list selected. The RCL list is user-defined and of
variable length. The maximal length of the list can be queried by means of
:SYSTem:MSEQence:FREE? (addition of the two values)..
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:RCL:POIN? Response: 17

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:SELect "Name of sequence"

The command selects a memory sequence. The name of the sequence may be an arbitrary
character string of up to 7 letters. If there is no memory sequence of the name indicated, the
command creates it, i.e., this command can be used to generate new lists.
Example: :SYST:MSEQ:SEL "SEQA"

:SYSTem:PRESet
The command triggers an instrument reset. It has the same effect as the RESET key of the
manual control or as command *RST. This command triggers an event and hence has no *RST
value.
Example: :SYST:PRES

:SYSTem:PROTect1|2|3
The commands to disable certain instrument functions are under this node. A list of the functions
concerned can be found in the manual control (Section Password Input With Protected
Functions). There are three protection levels which are differentiated by means of a suffix after
PROTect. *RST has no effects on the disabling/enabling of the instrument functions.

1038.6002.02 3.120 E-13

SME SYSTem

:SYSTem:PROTect1|2|3 [:STATe] ON | OFF, password

The command switches a protection level on or off. The passwords are 6-digit numbers. They are
fixedly stored in the firmware. The password for the first level is 123456.
ON disables the functions belonging to this protection level. A password need not be
indicated.
OFF deactivates the disabling again if the correct password is indicated. Otherwise an
error -224, "Illegal parameter value" is generated and STATe remains ON.
Example: :SYST:PROT1:STAT OFF, 123456

:SYSTem:SECurity
The commands setting the security characteristics of the instrument are under this node.

:SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] ON | OFF
The command switches the security state on or off. The command is not influenced by *RST and
*RCL.
ON The following commands cannot be executed:
:DISPlay:ANNotation:ALL ON
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQ ON
:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON
:SYSTem:KLOCk OFF
OFF In the transition from ON to OFF all data existing in the instrument except for the
calibrating data are deleted, especially all status registers, all instrument states and
all lists.
Example: :SYST:SEC:STAT ON

:SYSTem:SERRor?
This command returns a list of all errors existing at the point of time of the query. This list
corresponds to the indication on the ERROR page with manual control (cf. Section Error
Messages).
Example: :SYST:SERR?
Response: -221, "Settings conflict", 153, "Input voltage out of range"

:SYSTem:VERSion?
The command returns the SCPI version number the instrument acts in accordance with. This
command is a query and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :SYST:VERS? Response: 1994.0

1038.6002.02 3.121 E-13

TEST SME

3.6.15 TEST-System
This system contains the commands to execute the selftest routines (RAM?, ROM? and BATTery?) as
well as to directly manipulate the hardware modules (:TEST:DIRect). The selftests return a "0" if the test
has been executed successfully, otherwise a value unequal to "0". All commands of this system do not
have an *RST value.

Caution: The commands under node :TEST:DIRect directly act on the respective hardware module
circumventing any security mechanisms. They are provided for service purposes and
should not be used by the user. Improper use of the commands may damage the module.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:TEST
:DIRect
:ATTC Subaddress, hex data string
:DCOD Subaddress, hex data string
:DSYN0MUX Subaddress, hex data string
:DSYN1MUX Subaddress, hex data string
:FMOD Subaddress, hex data string
:LFGENA Subaddress, hex data string

:LFGENB Subaddress, hex data string

:MGEN Subaddress, hex data string

:OPU1M Subaddress, hex data string

Subaddress, hex data string
:OPU3M
Subaddress, hex data string
:OPU6M
Subaddress, hex data string
:PUM
Subaddress, hex data string
:REFSS
Subaddress, hex data string
:ROSC
Subaddress, hex data string
:SUM
Query only
:RAM?
Query only
:ROM?
Query only
:BATTery[:RAM]?
Query only
:BATTery :XMEM?

:TEST:DIRect
This node contains the commands directly acting on the respective hardware module
circumventing any security mechanisms. The commands under this node have no short form.

:TEST:DIRect:SUM Subaddress, hex data string

The command directly acts on module SUM. A subaddress (0 or 1) must be indicated as a
parameter. The data are indicated as a <string> (i.e., an ASCII character string enclosed in
quotation marks) representing hexadecimal numbers. Thus characters 0 to 9 A to F may occur in
the character string.
Example: :TEST:DIR:SUM 0, "0010AF1F"
Query: :TEST:DIR:SUM? 0

:TEST:DIRect:ATTC Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module ATTC. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

1038.6002.02 3.122 E-13

SME TEST

:TEST:DIRect:DCOD Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module DCOD. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:DSYN0MUX Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module DSYN. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:DSYN1MUX Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module DSYN. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:FMOD Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module FMOD. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:LFGENA Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module LFGENA. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:LFGENB Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module LFGENB. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:MGEN Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module MGEN. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:OPU1M Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module OPU1. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:OPU3M Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module OPU3. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:OPU6M Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module OPU6. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:PUM Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module PUM. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:REFSS Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module REFSS. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:DIRect:ROSC Subaddress, hex data string

The command acts on module ROSC. (cf. :TEST:DIR:SUM)

:TEST:RAM?
The command triggers a test of the RAM.

:TEST:ROM?
The command triggers a test of the main memory (EEPROM).

:TEST:BATTery[:RAM]?
The command triggers a test of the RAM battery voltage. The voltage should be at least 2.1 V.

:TEST:BATTery:XMEM?
The command triggers a test of the XMEM battery voltage. The voltage should be at least 2.1 V.

1038.6002.02 3.123 E-13

TRIGger SME

3.6.16 TRIGger-System
The TRIGger system contains the commands to select the trigger source and to configure the external
trigger socket. The suffix is only important for the SWEEP subsystem and conforms to the numbering of
the SOURce system:
TRIGger1 = RF generator
TRIGger2 = LFGEN2

The trigger system of the SME is a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger system. Compared to
SCPI, the TRIGger system shows the following differences:
• No INITiate command, the instrument behaves as if INITiate:CONTinuous ON was set.
• There are several subsystems denoting the different parts of the instrument under TRIGger (SWEep,
LIST, PULSe, MSEQuence, DM).

Further commands as to the trigger system of the SME can be found in the ABORt system.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:TRIGger1|2
[:SWEep]
[:IMMediate] No query
:SOURce SINGle | EXTernal | AUTO
:DM Option SME-B11
[:IMMediate] No query
:SOURce SINGle | EXTernal | AUTO
:LIS
[:IMMediate] No query

:SOURce SINGle | EXTernal | AUTO

:MSEQuence
No query
[:IMMediate]
SINGle | EXTernal | AUTO
:SOURce
:PULSe
EXTernal | AUTO
:SOURce
POSitive | NEGative
:SLOPe
POSitive | NEGative
:SLOPe

:TRIGger1|2[:SWEep]
All commands to trigger a sweep are under this node. The settings here act on level and
frequency sweeps for RF generator (TRIG1) and LF generator (TRIG2).

:TRIGger1|2[:SWEep][:IMMediate]
The command immediately starts a sweep. Which sweep is executed depends on the respective
MODE setting, e.g. :SOURce:FREQuency:MODE SWEep. The command corresponds to
manual-control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP. This command triggers an event and thus
has no *RST value.
Example: :TRIG:SWE:IMM

1038.6002.02 3.124 E-13

SME TRIGger

:TRIGger1|2[:SWEep]:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal

The command specifies the trigger source. The naming of the parameters directly corresponds to
the different settings with manual control. SCPI uses other designations for the parameters the
instrument accepts as well. These designations are to be preferred if compatibility is important.
The following table provides an overview.

SME designation SCPI designation Command with manual control

AUTO IMMediate MODE AUTO

SINGle BUS MODE SINGLE or STEP

EXTernal EXTernal MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT TRIG STEP

AUTOThe trigger is free-running, i.e., the trigger requirement is permanently met. As soon as a
sweep has been terminated, the next one is started.
SINGle Triggering is effected by means of IEC-bus commands :TRIGger:SWEep
:IMMediate or *TRG. If :SOURce:SWEep:MODE is set to STEP, a step, in the
case of the AUTO setting a complete sweep, is executed.
EXTernal Triggering is effected from outside via the [Link]. socket or by the GET
command via IEC/IEEE-bus (see annex A). The action triggered depends on the
setting of the sweep mode as in the case of SINGle.
Example: :TRIG:SWE:SOUR AUTO *RST value is SINGle

:TRIGger:DM
The commands for the autorun control of digital modulations are under this is node.
These commands are only valid for TRIGger1.

:TRIGger:DM[:IMMediate]
In case of basic digital modulations, this command immediately starts the processing of the data
list of the DM data generator. The command acts on the type of modulation presently set using
SOURce:DM:TYPE.
In case of complex digital modulations (FLEX, ERMes, POCSag), the command immediately
triggers the action set using TACTion (Trigger ACTion, in the subsystem of the corresponding
modulation).
It corresponds to the EXECUTE SINGLE command of the manual control in the associated
DIGITAL MOD menu. This command is an event and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :TRIG:DM:IMM

:TRIGger:DM:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal

The command specifies the valid trigger events. See following table for effect on complex
modulations
AUTOThe trigger condition is always fulfilled. In case of basic digital modulations, the list is
processed repeatedly, the RF signal is continuously DM-modulated.
SINGle The trigger condition can be fulfilled by manual control or by using the commands
TRIG:DM:IMM or *TRG. The list is processed only once. DM is subsequently
inactive.
EXTernal This setting has no effect on the basic digital modulations.

1038.6002.02 3.125 E-13

TRIGger SME

Effect of TRIGger:DM:SOURce and SOURce:ERMes|FLEX|REFL25|POCSag:TACTion on the

sequence of complex digital modulations.

:SOURce:ERM|FLEX|REFl25|POCS:TACTion

TRIGger:DM:SOURce MESSage STARt ONCE

AUTO MODE ALWAYS

The frames are continuously repeated in the set sequence; the setting under
ERMes|FLEX|REFLex25|POCSag:TACTion is irrelevant

SINGle MODE SINGLE

A trigger event (key; IEC/IEEE- – –
bus- command) switches once
from IDLE frame output to
ALPH-, NUM and TONE frame
output.

EXT MODE EXT-SINGLE MODE EXTTRIG-ALWAYS MODE EXTTRIG

An external trigger event An external trigger event starts An external trigger event starts
(signal edge at the trigger digital modulation. the digital modulation. After the
connector) switches once from Subsequently, the frames are output of a cycle
IDLE frame output to ALPH-, continuously repeated in the (FLEX/REFLex25), a time slice
NUM and TONE frame output. set sequence. (POCSAG) or a subsequence
(ERMES) the modulation is
stopped, the SME waits for the
next trigger event.

Example: :TRIG:DM:SOUR AUTO *RST value is AUTO

:TRIGger:LIST
This node contains all commands to trigger a list in the LIST mode.
The commands are only valid for TRIGger1.

:TRIGger:LIST[:IMMediate]
The command immediately starts the processing of a list of the LIST mode. It corresponds to
command EXECUTE SINGLE MODE of the manual control in the LIST menu. This command is
an event and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :TRIG:LIS:IMM

1038.6002.02 3.126 E-13

SME TRIGger

:TRIGger1|2:LIST:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal

The command specifies the trigger source. The naming of the parameters corresponds to the one
with sweep mode. SCPI uses other designations for the parameters the instrument accepts as
well. These designations are to be preferred if compatibility is important. The following table
provides an overview:

SME designation SCPI designation Command with manual control

AUTO IMMediate MODE AUTO

SINGle BUS MODE SINGLE or STEP

EXTernal EXTernal MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT TRIG STEP

AUTOThe trigger is free-running, i.e., the trigger condition is permanently fulfilled. As soon as the
list selected has been finished in the LIST mode, it is started anew.
SINGle Triggering is executed by means of IEC-bus command :TRIGger:LIST :IMM. The
list is executed once.
EXTernal Triggering is carried out from outside via the [Link]. socket or by the GET
command via IEC/IEEE-bus (see annex A). The list is executed once
Example: :TRIG:LIS:SOUR AUTO *RST value is SINGle

:TRIGger:MSEQuence
This node contains all commands to trigger a memory sequence. The commands are only valid
for TRIGger1.

:TRIGger:MSEQuence[:IMMediate]
The command immediately starts a memory sequence. It corresponds to the EXECUTE SINGLE
MODE command of the manual control in the MEMORY SEQUENCE menu. This command is an
event and thus has no *RST value.
Example: :TRIG:MSEQ:IMM

:TRIGger:MSEQuence:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal

The command specifies the trigger source (cf. :TRIGger:SWEep:SOURce)
Example: :TRIG:MSEQ:SOUR AUTO *RST value is SINGle

:TRIGger:PULSe
This node contains all commands to trigger the pulse generator (option SM-B4). The commands
are only valid for TRIGger1.

1038.6002.02 3.127 E-13

TRIGger SME

:TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce EXTernal | AUTO

The command specifies the trigger source.
EXTernal Triggering is effected from outside via the PULSE socket.
AUTOTrigger is free-running (see above) *RST value is AUTO
Example: :TRIG:PULS:SOUR AUTO

:TRIGger:PULSe:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative

The command indicates whether the action triggered is triggered at the positive or the negative
edge of the trigger signal. *RST value is POSitiv
Example: :TRIG:PULS:SLOP NEG

:TRIGger:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative

The command indicates whether the external trigger input only responds to the positive, the
negative or to both edges of the trigger signal. The command acts on TRIGger:SWEep,
TRIGger:LIST and TRIGger:MSEQuence. The pulse generator has an own trigger input and thus
also an own SLOPe command. *RST value is POSitiv
Example: :TRIG:SLOP NEG

1038.6002.02 3.128 E-13

UNIT SME

3.6.17 UNIT-System
This system contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit is indicated in a
command. These settings are valid for the entire instrument.

Command Parameter Default Remark

Unit

:UNIT
:ANGLe DEGRee| DEGree | RADian
:POWer DBM | DBW | DBMW | DBUW | DBV | DBMV | DBUV |
V

:UNIT:ANGLe DEGRee | DEGree | RADian

The command indicates the unit for angles. *RST value is RADian
Example: :UNIT:ANGL DEGR

:UNIT:POWer DBM | DBW | DBMW | DBUW | DBV | DBMV | DBUV | V

The command indicates the unit for power. *RST value is DBM
Example: :UNIT:POW V

1038.6002.02 3.129 E-13

Instrument Model and Command Processing SME

3.7 Instrument Model and Command Processing

The instrument model shown in Fig. 3-2 has been made viewed from the standpoint of the servicing of
IEC-bus commands. The individual components work independently of each other and simultaneously.
They communicate by means of so-called "messages".

Input unit with

IEC bus input buffer

Command
recognition

Data set
Status reporting
system
Instrument
hardware

IEC bus Output unit with

output buffer

Fig. 3-2 Instrument model in the case of remote control by means of the IEC bus

3.7.1 Input Unit

The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC bus and collects them in the
input buffer. The input buffer has a size of 256 characters. The input unit sends a message to the
command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter,
<PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL.
If the input buffer is full, the IEC-bus traffic is stopped and the data received up to then are processed.
Subsequently the IEC-bus traffic is continued. If, however, the buffer is not yet full when receiving the
delimiter, the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and
execution. The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the
command recognition.

1038.6002.02 3.130 E-13

SME Instrument Model and Command Processing

3.7.2 Command Recognition

The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit. It proceeds in the order in
which it receives the data. Only a DCL is serviced with priority, a GET (Group Execute Trigger), e.g., is
only executed after the commands received before as well. Each recognized command is immediately
transferred to the data set but without being executed there at once.
Syntactical errors in the command are recognized here and supplied to the status reporting system. The
rest of a command line after a syntax error is analyzed further if possible and serviced.
If the command recognition recognizes a delimiter or a DCL, it requests the data set to set the
commands in the instrument hardware as well now. Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process
commands again. This means for the command servicing that further commands can already be
serviced while the hardware is still being set ("overlapping execution").

3.7.3 Data Set and Instrument Hardware

Here the expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual
instrument function - signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is not included.

The data set is a detailed reproduction of the instrument hardware in the software.

IEC-bus setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set. The data set management enters the
new values (e.g. frequency) into the data set, however, only passes them on to the hardware when
requested by the command recognition. As this is always only effected at the end of a command line,
the order of the setting commands in the command line is not relevant.

The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware
immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware. If the detection is made that an
execution is not possible, an "execution error" is signaled to the status reporting system. All alterations
of the data set are canceled, the instrument hardware is not reset. Due to the delayed checking and
hardware setting, however, it is permissible to set impermissible instrument states within one command
line for a short period of time without this leading to an error message (example: simultaneous activation
of FM and PM). At the end of the command line, however, a permissible instrument state must have
been reached again.

Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (cf.
Section [Link]). The hardware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state
has settled. This fact can be used to synchronize command servicing.

IEC-bus queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit.

3.7.4 Status Reporting System

The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the
output unit on request. The exact structure and function are described in Section 3.8.

1038.6002.02 3.131 E-13

Instrument Model and Command Processing SME

3.7.5 Output Unit

The output unit collects the information requested by the controller, which it receives from the data set
management. It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer.
The output buffer has a size of 256 characters. If the information requested is longer, it is made
available "in portions" without this being recognized by the controller.
If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from
the data set management, the output unit sends error message "Query UNTERMINATED" to the status
reporting system. No data are sent on the IEC bus, the controller waits until it has reached its time limit.
This behavior is specified by SCPI.

3.7.6 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization

What has been said above makes clear that all commands can potentially be carried out overlapping.
Equally, setting commands within one command line are not absolutely serviced in the order in which
they have been received.

In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order, each command must
be sent in a separate command line, that is to say, with a separate IBWRT()-call.
In order to prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of commands *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
must be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has
been set and has settled. By a suitable programming, the controller can be forced to wait for the
respective action to occur (cf. table 3-3).

Table 3-3 Synchronization with *OPC?, *OPC? And *WAI

Com- Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller
mand

*OPC Setting the operation-complete bit in the ESR - Setting bit 0 in the ESE
- Setting bit 5 in the SRE
- Waiting for service request (SRQ)

*OPC? Writing a "1" into the output buffer Addressing the instrument as a talker

*WAI Executing the next command Sending the next command

Note: The IEC-bus handshake is not stopped

An example as to command synchronization can be found in annex D "Program Examples".

1038.6002.02 3.132 E-13

SME Fast-Restore-Modus

3.8 Status Reporting System

The status reporting system (cf. Fig. 3-4) stores all information on the present operating state of the
instrument, e.g. that the instrument presently carries out an AUTORANGE and on errors which have
occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The status registers
and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus.

The information is of a hierarchical structure. The register status byte (STB) defined in IEEE 488.2 and
its associated mask register service request enable (SRE) form the uppermost level. The STB receives
its information from the standard event status register (ESR) which is also defined in IEEE 488.2 with
the associated mask register standard event status enable (ESE) and registers STATus:OPERation and
STATus:QUEStionable which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument.

The IST flag ("Individual STatus") and the parallel poll enable register (PPE) allocated to it are also part
of the status reporting system. The IST flag, like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a
single bit. The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.

The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the
status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in
Fig. 3-4.

3.8.1 Structure of an SCPI Status Register

Each SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions
(cf. Fig. 3-3). The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware status is assigned a
bit number which is valid for all five parts. For example, bit 3 of the STATus:OPERation register is
assigned to the hardware status "wait for trigger" in all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant bit) is set to
zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive
integer.

15 14 13 12 CONDition part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 EVENt part 3 2 1 0

to higher-order register
& & & & & & & & & & & & & & & &
+ Sum bit & = logical AND

15 14 13 12 ENABle part 3 2 1 0 + = logical OR

of all bits

Fig. 3-3 The status -register model

1038.6002.02 3.133 E-13

SME Status-Reporting-System

CONDition part The CONDition part is directly written into by the hardware or the sum bit of
the next lower register. Its contents reflects the current instrument status. This
register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents is
not affected by reading.

PTRansition part The Positive-TRansition part acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.

NTRansition part The Negative-TRansition part also acts as an edge detector. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides
whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read at will. Its contents is not affected by
reading.
With these two edge register parts the user can define which state transition of
the condition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.

EVENt part The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last
reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events
passed on by the edge filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument.
This part can only be read by the user. During reading, its contents is set to
zero. In linguistic usage this part is often equated with the entire register.

ENABle part The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to
the sum bit (cf. below). Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the
associated ENABle bit (symbol ’&’). The results of all logical operations of this
part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function (symbol ’+’).
ENAB bit =0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENAB bit =1: if the associated EVENT bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as
well.
This part can be written into and read by the user at will. Its contents is not
affected by reading.

Sum bit As indicated above, the sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part
for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of
the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an
event, e.g. a PLL that has not locked, can lead to a service request throughout
all levels of the hierarchy.

Note: The service request enable register SRE defined in IEEE 488.2 can be taken as ENABle
part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be
taken as the ENABle part of the ESR.

1038.6002.02 3.134 E-13

SME Fast-Restore-Modus

3.8.2 Overview of the Status Registers

-&- 15 not used

-&- 14 vacant
-&- 13 vacant
-&- 12 vacant
-&- 11 vacant
-&- 10 Recording
-&- 9 MSEQuencing
-&- 8 vacant
-&- 7 vacant
-&- 6 vacant
-&- 5 W aiting for Trigger
-&- 4 MEASuring
-&- 3 SW Eeping
-&- 2 vacant
SRQ
-&- 1 SETTling
-&- 0 CALibrating

STATus:OPERation register
-&-
RQS/MSS
-&- ESB
-&- MAV
-&-
-&-

-&- 15 not used

STB -&- 14 vacant
SRE
-&- 13 vacant
-&- 12 vacant
-&- 11 vacant
-&- 10 vacant
-&- 9 vacant
-&- 8 CALibration
-&- -&- 7 MODulation
-&- -&- 6 frei
-&- -&- 5 FREQuency
-&- -&- 4 vacant
-&- -&- 3 vacant
-&- -&- 2 vacant
-&- 1 vacant
-&- 0 VOLTage

PPE

IST flag
(Response to parallel poll)
-&- 7 Power on
-&- 6 User Request
-&- 5 Command Error
-&- 4 Execution Error
-&- 3 Device Dependent Error
& = logical AND -&- 2 Query Error
-&- 1 Request Control
= logical OR Error Queue Output buffer
-&- 0 Operation Complete
of all bits
ESE ESR

Fig. 3-4 Overview of the status register

1038.6002.02 3.135 E-13

SME Status-Reporting-System

3.8.3 Description of the Status Registers

[Link] Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STB is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by
collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. It can thus be compared with the CONDition
part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy. A special feature is
that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command "*STB?" or a serial poll.

The STB implies the SRE. It corresponds to the ENABle part of the SCPI registers as to its function.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set in the SRE
and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a Service Request (SRQ) is generated on the
IEC bus, which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further
processed there.
The SRE can be set using command "*SRE" and read using "*SRE?".

Table 3-4 Overview of the status register

Bit no. Meaning

2 Error Queue not empty

The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue.
If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request. Thus an error can
be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error
message. This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with
IEC-bus control.

3 QUEStionable status sum bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to
1.
A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status, which can be specified in greater detail by polling the
QUEStionable status register.

4 MAV-Bit (Message AVailable)

The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read.
This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller (cf. annex D,
program examples).

5 ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in
the event status enable register.
Setting of this bit implies a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status
register.

6 MSS-Bit (Master Status Summary bit)

The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is
set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.

7 OPERation status register sum bit

The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action. The type of action can be determined by
polling the OPERation status register.

1038.6002.02 3.136 E-13

 SME Fast-Restore-Modus

[Link] IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)

By analogy with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can be
queried by means of a parallel poll (cf. Section [Link]) or using command "*IST?".

The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag. The
bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE, with bit 6 being used as well in
contrast to the SRE. The Ist flag results from the ORing of all results. The PPE can be set using
commands "*PRE" and read using command "*PRE?".

[Link] Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
The ESR is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It can be compared with the EVENt part of an SCPI register.
The event status register can be read out using command "*ESR?".
The ESE is the associated ENABle part. It can be set using command "*ESE" and read using command
"*ESE?".

Table 3-5 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register

Bit No. Meaning

0 Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.

2 Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it
does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead. The cause is often a query
which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.

3 Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device-dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between -300 and -399 or a
positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue (cf. annex B,
Error Messages).

4 Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, however, cannot be performed for other reasons.
An error message with a number between -200 and -300, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue (cf. annex B, Error Messages).

5 Command Error
This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received. An error message with a
number between -100 and -200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue (cf.
annex B, Error Messages).

6 User Request
This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key, i.e., when the instrument is switched over to manual control.

7 Power On (supply voltage on)

This bit is set on switching on the instrument.

1038.6002.02 3.137 E-13

SME Status-Reporting-System

[Link] STATus:OPERation Register

In the CONDition part, this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being
executing or, in the EVENt part, information on which actions the instrument has executed since the last
reading. It can be read using commands "STATus:OPERation:CONDition?" or
"STATus:OPERation [:EVENt]?"..

Table 3-6 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register

Bit-No. Meaning

0 CALibrating
This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration.

1 SETTling
This bit is set as long as the new status is settling after a setting command. It is only set if the settling time is
longer than the command processing time.

3 SWEeping
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a sweep.

4 MEASuring
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a measurement.

5 WAIT for TRIGGER

This bit is set as long as the instrument is waiting for a trigger event.

8 LEARning
This bit is set while the instrument is "learning" a list.

9 MSEQuencing
This bit is set while the instrument is performing a memory sequence.

10 RECording
This bit is set while the instrument is recording external data via the DATA input.

1038.6002.02 3.138 E-13

SME Fast-Restore-Modus

[Link] STATus:QUEStionable Register

This register contains information on questionable instrument states. They can occur, e.g. if the
instrument is operated out of its specifications. It can be queried using commands "STATus
:QUEStionable:CONDition?" or "STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?".

Table 3-7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register

Bit-No. Meaning

0 VOLTage
This bit is set if the voltage at an output connector is not correct,
if the voltage is above or below the specified limit values,
if the level limit has responded,
if the overvoltage protection has responded.

5 FREQuency
The bit is set if a frequency at the RF output is not correct or if it is lower or higher than the specified values

7 MODulation
The bit is set if a modulation is not correct or is operated outside the specifications.

8 CALibration
The bit is set if a calibration is not performed properly.

1038.6002.02 3.139 E-13

SME Status-Reporting-System

3.8.4 Application of the Status Reporting Systems

In order to be able to effectively use the status reporting system, the information contained there must
be transmitted to the controller and further processed there. There are several methods which are
represented in the following. Detailed program examples are to be found in annex D, Program
Examples.

[Link] Service Request, Making Use of the Hierarchy Structure

Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually
this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the control program can react with
corresponding actions. As evident from Fig. 3.4 (Section 3.8.2), an SRQ is always initiated if one or
several of bits 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits
combines the information of a further register, the error queue or the output buffer. The corresponding
setting of the ENABle parts of the status registers can achieve that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status
register initiate an SRQ. In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request, all bits should be
set to "1" in enable registers SRE and ESE.

Examples (cf. Fig. 3.4, Section 3.8.2 and Program Examples, annex D as well):

Use of command "*OPC" to generate an SRQ

À Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete)
À Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB)
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.

Indication of the end of a sweep by means of an SRQ with the controller

À Set bit 7 in the SRE (sum bit of the STATus:OPERation register)
À Set bit 3 (sweeping )in the STATus:OPERation:ENABle.
À Set bit 3 in the STATus:OPERation:NTRansition so as to make sure that the transition of
sweeping bit 3 from 1 to 0 (sweep end) is recorded in the EVENt part.
After a sweep has been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.

The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program
should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction. The program
should react appropriately to the service request. A detailed example for a service request routine is to
be found in annex D , Program Examples.

[Link] Serial Poll

In a serial poll, just as with command "*STB", the status byte of an instrument is queried. However, the
query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster. The serial-poll method has already
been defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll
the status byte. The method also works with instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.

The quick-BASIC command for executing a serial poll is "IBRSP()". Serial poll is mainly used to obtain
a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC bus.

1038.6002.02 3.140 E-13

SME Fast-Restore-Modus

[Link] Parallel Poll

In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a
single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated
to each instrument to logically "0" or "1". By analogy to the SRE register which determines under which
conditions an SRQ is generated, there is a parallel poll enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the
STB bit by bit as well considering bit 6. The results are ORed, the result is then sent (possibly inverted)
as a response in the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried without parallel poll by
means of command "*IST".

The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using quick-BASIC command "IBPPC()". This
command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted.
The parallel poll itself is executed using "IBRPP()".

The parallel-poll method is mainly used in order to quickly find out after an SRQ which instrument has
sent the service request if there are many instruments connected to the IEC bus. To this effect, SRE
and PPE must be set to the same value. A detailed example as to the parallel poll is to be found in
annex D, Program Examples.

[Link] Query by Means of Commands

Each part of every status register can be read by means of queries. The individual commands are
indicated in the detailed description of the registers in Section 3.8.3. What is returned is always a
number which represents the bit pattern of the register queried. Evaluating this number is effected by
the controller program.

Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the
SRQ.

[Link] Error Queue Query

Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the error queue
are detailed plain-text error messages which can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control
or queried via the IEC bus using command "SYSTem:ERRor?". Each call of "SYSTem:ERRor?"
provides one entry from the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument
responds with 0, "No error"

The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the
cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially in the test phase of a controller
program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the
instrument are recorded there as well.

1038.6002.02 3.141 E-13

SME Status-Reporting-System

3.8.5 Resetting Values of the Status Reporting Systems

Table 3-8 comprises the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be
reset. None of the commands, except for *RST and SYSTem:PRESet influences the functional
instrument settings. In particular, DCL does not change the instrument settings.

Table 3-8 Resetting instrument functions

Event Switching on
supply voltage DCL,SDC

Power-On-Status- (Device Clear, *RST or STATus:PRESet *CLS

Clear Selected Device SYSTem:PRESet
Clear)

Effect 0 1

Clear STB,ESR  yes    yes

Clear SRE,ESE  yes    

Clear PPE  yes    

Clear EVENt parts of the  yes    yes

registers

Clear ENABle parts of all  yes   yes 

OPERation-and
QUESTionable registers,
Fill ENABle parts of all
other registers with "1".

Fill PTRansition parts with  yes   yes 

„1"
Clear NTRansition parts

Clear error queue yes yes    yes

Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1) 1) 1)

Clear command yes yes yes   

processing and input
buffer

1) Every command being the first in a command line, i.e. immediately following a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>
clears the output buffer.

1038.6002.02 3.142 E-13

SME Fast-Restore-Modus

3.9 Fast Restore Mode

The Fast Restore mode is available with SME03A and units that are equipped with option Fast CPU for
SMIQ SM-B50. Device settings can be saved and recalled very quickly via the IEC/IEEE bus using the
commands described below. 1000 memory locations are available.

In contrast to the SAVE/RECALL function, not the unit parameters but only the setting data of the
modules are stored in the Fast Restore mode. RESTORE by means of the ’:SYSTem:SREStore’ or ’!..’
command has an immediate effect on the module. The database (which stores all entries and delivers
the display data) is bypassed. This allows a very high setup speed.

Commands:
:SYSTem:SSAVe 1...1000
This command saves the current device setting at the memory location indicated.

:SYSTem:SREStore 1...1000
This command loads a device status that was stored using the :SYSTem:SSAVe command
(RESTORE). One of 1000 available memory locations is selected by entering a numeral.

! <least significant byte> <most significant byte>

This command has the same effect as the:SYSTem:SREStore command. The setting time
however is 300 µs less. It is optimized for highest speed and does not comply with the SCPI
syntax regulations. Exactly 3 bytes are transmitted including the '!' (which is the identifier of this
command). With the last byte, EOI has to be activated as delimiter.
The memory location is binary-coded in the 2 bytes indicated.

Example:
RESTORE at memory location 268 (-> 010C hex) corresponds to the following binary
command:
0010 0001 0000 1100 0000 0001
'!' hex 0C hex 01
Binary-coded bytes can usually not be written as printable ASCII characters.
When programmed in C, the above command has the following form:
char sendstring[3] = {'!', 0x0C, 0x01}
In BASIC, the command string to be output is as follows:
'!' + CHR$(12) + CHR$(1)
(The pros for CHR$ are decimal numbers, therefore 12 for 0C hex.)

Since binary-coded bytes may also have the value of the LF (line feed) character which is
interpreted as a delimiter, switch over to 'only EOI' as delimiter by selecting
':SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator EOI' prior to using this command.

1038.6002.02 3.143 E-13

SME Status-Reporting-System

Call-up and termination of operating mode

After a RESTORE, the database does no longer reflect the device setting which means
- the displayed values are no longer relevant,
- the desired result is not obtained by a query of setup values.
- normal setting commands may not be executed properly (see below ’Alternative ...)
It is therefore recommended either
- to use the *RST command or
- to store the device setting prior to using the first RESTORE command by means of the
:SYSTem:SSAVe n command and to restore it after the last RESTORE command using
:SYSTEM:SRESTore n. The database and the device setting will then match again.
No other commands are required to activate or deactivate this mode.
Note: - Since the module setting depends on the temperature of the unit, any temperature variation
of more than 5°C should be avoided between storage and call-up to ensure the accuracy of
the unit.
- If the mechanically switched attenuator is switched over due to a RESTORE command, the
setting time increases by 15 ms. This can be avoided by setting one of the two functions for
interruption-free level setting (:OUTPut:AMODe FIXed) prior to storing the setting.

Effects on device settings:

The Fast Restore commands have an effect on almost all device settings (see table).
Device settings stored and called up by Fast Device settings not stored or called up by Fast
Restore: Restore:
• Frequency incl. reference oscillator • Settings of digital modulation
• Level - incl. mech. switched attenuator, • Functions not regarding the RF output signal,
- incl. user correction, eg commands under :SYSTem:... (except for
- incl. ALC modes SYSTem:PRESet) or
• Analog modulation: AM, FM, PM :UNIT:...
• Switch-on/off of digital modulation • Sweep
• Standard LF generator (4 fixed frequencies) • List mode
• Memory sequence
• Options LF generator (SM-B2) and
multifunction generator (SM-B6) incl.
LF output stereo and VOR/ILS modulation
• Pulse modulation and pulse generator

Alternative use with other IEC/IEEE-bus commands:

The alternative use of the RESTORE commands (’:SYSTem:SREStore’ or ’!..’) and normal IEC/IEEE-
bus commands is
• useful in case of digital modulation:
First, the digital modulation is configured and switched on by means of normal commands. Then,
digital modulation can be switched on/off by means of the RESTORE .
• possible for all commands that do not regard the RF output signal (eg :SYSTem:..., :UNIT:...),
• normally not possible for all the functions listed in the left column of the above table.
In case of doubt, we recommend testing.

Synchronization signal
In the Fast Restore mode a synchronization signal is available at the rear-panel BLANK connector to
synchronize other devices.
The BLANK signal is high during settling of the RF output signal and low in the settled state.

1038.6002.02 3.144 E-13

SME Maintenance and Troubleshooting

4 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance. What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of
the instrument. However, it is recommended to check the rated data from time to time.

4.1 Maintenance

4.1.1 Cleaning the Outside

The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft, line-free dustcloth.
Caution! Do not use solvents such as thinners, acetone and similar things in any case, because
otherwise the front panel labeling or plastic parts will be damaged.

4.1.2 Storage
The storage temperature range of the instrument is -40 to +70 degrees Celsius. If the instrument is to
be stored for a longer period of time, it must be protected against dust.

4.1.3 Exchange of the Lithium Batteries

Caution!
The batteries used in the instrument are power lithium cells. Short-circuit and
charging of the batteries have to be avoided at all costs, as the batteries might
ohterwise explode. Do not open discharged batteries. They have to be disposed
of as hazardous waste.

The instrument contains a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of data in the CMOS-RAM. The battery
is located on the computer PCB.
Option SME B12 also contains a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of the data in the 8-Mbit RAM if
the instrument is switched off or if the option is removed.
The service life of these batteries depends on the operation and the ambient temperature, it is 5 years
on the average.
The battery voltages are checked after power-up of the unit (TEST POINT 0007 = RAM cell, TEST
POINT 1500 = XMEM cell). If the voltage values are below 2.5 V storage of data can no longer be
quaranteed and an error message is displayed.
In order to guarantee a perfect function, a flattened battery is to be replaced by a battery of the same
type:
- SAFT LS3 CNA, (R&S stock no. 565.1687) or
- ELECTROCHE QTC85 1/2AA 3B960, (R&S stock no. 565.1687).

Notes: – When the RAM-battery is exchanged, the stored data (SAVE/RECALL, LIST, MEM
SEQ, UCOR, lists for DIG MOD, IEC-bus address, calibration data) are lost. These
data have to be reprogrammed after the exchange of the battery. The calibration data
are reconstructed using the CALIBRATE ALL ➤ function in the UTILITIES-CALIB-ALL
menu.
– When the XMEM-battery is exchanged, the stored data of the memory extension are
lost and have to be reprogrammed.

1038.6002.02 4.1 E-13

Maintenance and Troubleshooting SME

[Link] Exchange of RAM Battery

Opening the À Remove all cable connections.

instrument
À Screw off front panel (4 Phillips screws at the corners) and tilt towards the
front.
The shielding cover (cf. Fig. 4-1) of the controller and the front panel
modules is now freely accessible.
À Detach cable connection to the IEC bus (Fig. 4-1, pos. 3) and to the RS-232
interface (Fig. 4.1, pos. 4). The connection to the motherboard (Fig. 4-1,
pos. 2) can remain plugged in.
À Screw off cover (6 screws (Fig. 4-1, pos. 1)) and lift off.
The computer PCB is now accessible from the top.

Exchanging the The position of the battery on the computer PCB is evident from Fig.4-2.
battery
ÀDetach jumper X300 (cf. Fig. 4-2, pos. 2).
À Cut off cable tie.
À Unsolder battery.
À Detach cable at plug connector X312 (cf. Fig. 4-2, pos. 1). The remaining
cable connections can remain plugged in.
À Remove 2 fastening screws (cf. Fig. 4-2, pos. 5) on the computer PCB.
À Lift computer PCB and thread new battery clamp.
À Screw on computer PCB (cf. Fig. 4-2, pos. 5), establish plug connection
X312 (cf. Fig. 4-2, pos. 1).
À Fix new battery in position using cable tie.
Caution! Observe the polarity when fixing and soldering the battery (cf. Fig.
4-2 and marking on the PCB). A wrong polarity will lead to the
destruction of components.
À Shorten connection wires to the necessary length and solder battery.
À Plug jumper X300 (cf. Fig. 4-2, pos. 2).

Closing the Closing the instrument is effected in the reverse order as opening it.
instrument
Caution! Ensure that the braided cord in the casing slots is fitted correctly.

1038.6002.02 4.2 E-13

SME Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1 (5x) 2 3

1 Fastening screws X312 3 Cable connection IEC bus

2 Cable connection motherboard 4 Cable connection RS-232 4
Fig. 4-1 Shielding cover of controller and front panel modulel

1 2 3 4 5 (2x)

+ -

CPU

1 Plug-in connection X312 3 Lithium-battery 5 Fastening screws

2 Jumper X300 4 Cable connection to motherboard

Fig. 4-2 Position of the RAM battery on the PCB (side where the components are fitted)

1038.6002.02 4.3 E-13

Maintenance and Troubleshooting SME

[Link] Exchange of XMEM Battery

Removing À Switch off unit and disconnect power plug.

Option SME-B12
À Remove all cable connections.
À Undo the four screws of the rear-panel feet and remove feet.
À Push top panelling towards the rear and remove.
À Turn unit upside down.
À Remove bottom panelling.
À On each locking rail, undo two screws in the oblong holes.
À Push the locking rails towards the front by using a screwdriver.
À Withdraw option SME-B12.

Exchanging For the location of the battery on the computer PCB refer to Fig. 4-3.
the battery
À Unplug jumper X2 (cf. Fig. 4-3, item 1).
À Cut off cable ties.
À Unsolder battery G1 (cf. Fig. 4-3, item 2).
À Fix new battery with cable ties.
Caution! Observe the polarity when fixing and soldering the battery (cf. Fig.
4-3 and marking on the PCB). The solder tag for the positive pole
is located close to jumper X2. A wrong polarity will lead to the
destruction of components.
À Shorten connection wires to the necessary length and solder battery.
À Plug jumper X2 (cf. Fig. 4-3, pos. 1).

Fitting À Shorten connection wires to the necessary length and solder battery.
Option SME-B12
À Plug jumper X2 (cf. Fig. 4-3, pos. 1).
Caution! Ensure that the braided cord in the casing slots is fitted correctly.

1038.6002.02 4.4 E-13

SME Functional Test

1 2

X2

- G1

1 Jumper X2 2 Lithium battery

Fig. 4-3 Position of the XMEM battery on option SME-B12 (side where the components are fitted)

4.2 Functional Test

The SME carries out a selftest on switching on the instrument and permanently during operation. On
switching on, the RAM and ROM contents are checked and the batteries of the non-volatile RAMs and
of the memory extension are tested. If an error is detected, this is indicated through a corresponding
error message. The most important instrument functions are automatically monitored during operation.

If a faulty function is detected in the selftest, ERROR is displayed in the status line. To identify the error,
the ERROR menu, in which the error messages are entered, can be called by pressing the [ERROR]
key (cf. Chapter 2, Section "Error Messages").

The tests can additionally be called via the menu.

Access to the tests is offered by the UTILITIES - TEST menu.

Menu selection: UTILITIES - TEST

FREQ 100. 000 000 0 LEVEL - 30.0 dBm

FREQUENCY SYSTEM TEST EPROM

LEVEL REF OSC TEST RAM
MODULATION PHASE RAM BATTERY
DIGITAL MOD PROTECT
LF OUTPUT CALIB TEST XMEM
SWEEP DIAG XMEM FILL PATTERN 0
LIST TEST FILL XMEM (DESTRUCTIVE!)
MEM SEQ MOD KEY GENERATE XMEM CHECKSUM 07F7F088 H
UTILITIES AUX I/O D/B/A 07F7088 H 00000000 H 00000000 H
HELP BEEPER
XMEM BATTERY

Fig. 4-4 UTILITIES-TEST menu, fitted with Option SME-B11, DM Coder, and SME-B12, Memory
Extension.

1038.6002.02 4.5 E-13

Functional Test SME

TEST EPROM ➤ Tests the EPROM. The test result is displayed in a window.

TEST RAM ➤ Tests the RAM. The test result is displayed in a window.

RAM BATTERY Ð Tests the RAM battery. The test result is displayed in a window.

TEST XMEM Ð Tests the memory of option SME-B12 (8 MBit) without overwriting
the contents. The test result is displayed in a window.

Caution: The unit must not be switched off during the test run.

XMEM FILL PATTERN Input value of the 8-bit pattern to fill the memory of option SME-B12.
This value is entered as a decimal equivalent (0-255). If the input
value = 256, the memory is continuously filled with the sequence
from 0 to 255.

FILL XMEM (DESTRUCTIVE!)Ð Fills the complete memory of option SME-B12 with the 8-bit pattern
entered under XMEM FILL PATTERN.
Caution: Stored data will be overwritten.

GENERATE XMEM CHECKSUM Ð Calculates the checksum of the active memory area of option
SME-B12. The active memory area is fixed by parameters START
ADDRESS, LENGTH and MEM MODE in the submenu CONFIG
XMEM... .
The checksum for the first line applies to the data in the MEM
MODE = 8M*1. The checksums for the second line (D/B/A) apply to
the DATA, BURST and LEV ATT memory in the MEM MODE =
1M*3.

XMEM BATTERY Ð Tests the XMEM battery (Memory extension, option SME-B12). The
test result is displayed in a window.

1038.6002.02 4.6 E-13

SME Test Instruments and Utilities

5 Performance Test

5.1 Test Instruments and Utilities

Table 5-1 Test Instruments and Utilities

Item Type of instrument Specifications required Suitable R&S R&S order no. Application
instrument

1 Frequency counter 1Hz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) 5.2.2

(included item 2) 1Hz to 3 GHz (SME03), 5.2.4
1Hz to 6 GHz (SME06),
Resolution 0.1 Hz

2 RF spectrum analyzer 100 Hz to 5 GHz (SME02/03), FSB 0848.0020.52 5.2.3

100 Hz to 18 GHz (SME06) FSM 1020.7020.52 5.2.5
synthesizer tuning, 5.2.6
dynamic range >80 dB 5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.2.32
5.2.33
5.2.34
5.2.35

3 Storage oscilloscope 100-M samples/s, [Link]

averaging function 5.2.3

4 Controller Industrial standard PC/XT/AT PSA 15 1012.1003.03 5.2.3

with IEC-625 interface 5.2.35
R&S Basic

5 Signal generator of high 0.1 MHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) SME02, 1038.6002.02/03/0 [Link]
spectral purity 0.1 MHz to 3 GHz (SME03), SME03, 6 [Link]
0.1 MHz to 6 GHz (SME06), SME06 [Link]
SSB noise level <-126 dBc 5.2.7
with 1GHz/20 kHz 5.2.8
5.2.12
5.2.14

6 Phase noise test setup Mixer: 5.2.7

10 MHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) 5.2.8
10 MHz to 3 GHz (SME03),
10 MHz to 6 GHz (SME06),
separating filter 2 MHz,
preamplifier with
40-dB changeover switch,
input noise <2nV (1Hz)

7 Oscilloscope Bandwidth > 100 MHz, [Link]

two channels with d.c. coupling 5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.40

8 RF power meter 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) NRVS 1020.1809.02 5.2.11

5 kHz to 3 GHz (SME03), NRVS-Z51 857.9004.02 5.2.13
5 kHz to 6 GHz (SME06),

9 Precision attenuation set Attenuation 0 to 120 dB, DPSP 8334.6010.02 5.2.11

resolution 5 dB RSG

1038.6002.02 5.1 E-13

Test Instruments and Utilities SME

Item Type of instrument Specification required Suitable R&S R&S order no. Application
instrument

10 Low-noise preamplifier 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) 5.2.11

5 kHz to 3 GHz (SME03),
5 kHz to 6 GHz (SME06),
amplification > 20 dB,
noise factor < 10 dB

11 VSWR bridge 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) ZRC 1039.9492.55/52 5.2.12

1 MHz to 3 GHz (SME03/06),
directivity > 40 dB

12 D.c. voltage source Setting range 0 to 10 V NGT 20 117.7133.02 5.2.14

5.2.33

13 RF power amplifier 10 MHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) 5.2.14

10 MHz to 3 GHz (SME03/06),
Power > 1W

14 Audio analyzer Generator up to 100 kHz, UPD 1030.7500.04/05 [Link]

level meter, 5.2.31
distortion meter 5.2.39

15 Modulation analyzer 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) FMB 856.5005.52 [Link]
100 kHz to 3 GHz (SME03/06) [Link]
AM, FM, PhiM, stereo coder,
stereo decoder,
distortion meter
weighting filter CCIR, CCITT

16 Mixer 10 MHz to 1.5 GHz (SME02) [Link]

10 MHz to 3 GHz (SME03), [Link]
10 MHz to 6 GHz (SME06), [Link]
"high level"

17 Pulse generator Pulse repetition frequency AFG 377.2100.02 [Link]

up to 10 MHz, 5.2.32
level TTL 5.2.33
5.2.40

18 Sine-wave generator 10 Hz to 2 MHz, AMS, 1013.0000.02, [Link]

1 V (U peak) ADS, 1013.1494.02,
AFG 377.2100.02

19 AC voltmeter 10 Hz to 2 MHz URE3 350.5315.03 [Link]

5.2.39

20 Broadband FM Delay line discriminator, input [Link]

demodulator frequency 50 MHz, slope 5 [Link]
V/MHz, demodulation
bandwidth 2 MHz

21 RF attenuator pad D.c. to 1.5 GHz (SME02), [Link]

D.c. to 3 GHz (SME03), [Link]
D.c. to 6 GHz (SME06) [Link]
3 dB

22 Lowpass filter Attenuation [Link]

up to 50 MHz < 1 dB [Link]
with 100 MHz > 20 dB [Link]
with 200 MHz > 40 dB

1038.6002.02 5.2 E-13

SME Test Instruments and Utilities

Item Type of instrument Specification required Suitable R&S R&S order no. Application
instrument

23 Demodulator for digital Vector error measurement with FSEA20 with 1065.6000.20 [Link]
modulations QPSK modulation option FSE-B7 1066.4317.02 [Link]
Phase error measurement with
GMSK modulation

25 VSWR directional coupler 3 GHz to 6 GHz (SME06) 5.2.12

26 RF attenuator D.c. to 6 GHz (SME06) [Link]

20 dB

5.1.1 Test Systems to Measure Modulation Characteristics

[Link] Standard Test System

Test equipment - Modulation analyzer (Section 5.1, item 15)
- Oscilloscope for 5.2.35 to 5.2.37 (Section 5.1, item 7)

Test setup
EXT1/EXT2 LF
SME
× Ø RF RF Analyzer

Oscilloscope

[Link] Test System with Audio Analyzer

Test equipment - Modulation analyzer (Section 5.1, item 15)
- Audio analyzer (Section 5.1, item 14)
Test setup LF
Audio
Analyzer

LF
EXT1/EXT2
SME
Analyzer
× Ø RF

1038.6002.02 5.3 E-13

Test Instruments and Utilities SME

[Link] Test System for Broadband FM

Test equipment - Second signal generator (Section 5.1, item 5)
- Mixer (Section 5.1, item 16)
- Sine-wave generator (Section 5.1, item 18)
- AC voltmeter (Section 5.1, item 19)
- Broadband FM demodulator (Section 5.1, item 20)
- RF attenuator pad (Section 5.1, item 21)
- Lowpass filter (Section 5.1, item 23)
Test setup Sine wave
generator
RF

EXT1/EXT2
SME
× Ø
AC- voltmeter

RF

RF LF

Mixer Attenuator pad Low pass filter FM demodulator

IF IF IF
LO

Auxillary
transmitter

[Link] Test System for Pulse Modulation

Test equipment - Second signal generator (Section 5.1, item 5)
- Oscilloscope (Section 5.1, item 7)
- Mixer (Section 5.1, item 16)
- Pulse generator (Section 5.1, item 17)
- RF attenuator pad (Section 5.1, item 21)
-Lowpass filter (Section 5.1, item 23)

Test setup
Pulse generator

EXT1/EXT2
SME
× Ø

RF
RF
Attenuator
Mixer Lowpass filter Oscilloscope
pad
IF IF IF
LO
Auxilliary
transmitter

1038.6002.02 5.4 E-13

SME Test Instruments and Utilities

[Link] Test System for GFSK

Test equipment - Storage oscilloscope (Section 5.1, item 3)
- Second signal generator (Section 5.1, item 5)
- Mixer (Section 5.1, item 16)
- Broadband FM demodulator (Section 5.1, item 20)
- RF attenuator pad (Section 5.1, item 21)
- Lowpass filter (Section 5.1, item 23)

Test setup
SME
× Ø
Oscilloscope
RF
RF LF
Attenuator
Mixer pad Lowpass filter FM demodulator
IF IF IF
LO
Auxiliary
transmitter

[Link] Test System Extension by Down Conversion

Test equipment - Second signal generator (Section 5.1, item 5)
- Mixer (Section 5.1, item 16)
- RF attenuator (Section 5.1, item 21)
- RF attenuator (Section 5.1, item 26)
- Lowpass (Section 5.1, item 23)

Test setup
SME
× Ø

RF

RF

Attenuator pad

Mixer Attenuator pad Lowpass filter

IF IF IF
LO

Auxilliary transmitter

1038.6002.02 5.5 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2 Test Procedure

The rated specifications of the generator are tested after the instrument has warmed up for at least 30
minutes and a total calibration has been carried out (c.f. Section 2.11.8, Calibration). This is the only
way to make sure that the guaranteed data are observed.

The values in the following sections are not guaranteed; only the technical data in the data sheet are
binding.

5.2.1 Display and Keyboard

Testing Display À Switch on instrument.

The basic menu is displayed after several seconds.
À Rotate contrast control (left-hand potentiometer at the lower edge).
The contrast is varied from dark to bright.
À Rotate brightness control (right-hand potentiometer at the lower
edge)
The brightness of the background illumination is varied.
À Press keys and check response at the display.
Keyboard

5.2.2 Frequency Setting

Test equipment Frequency counter (Section 5.1, item 1)

Test principle The frequency setting is checked using a frequency counter whose
reference frequency is synchronized with the one of the SME.

Measurement À Setting at the SME

- Test frequency unmodulated,
- Level 0 dBm
The values measured must be exact within the frame of the
counter resolution.

Test frequencies see table 5-2

recommended

Table 5-2 shows the synthesis-dependent changeover limits. In order to fully test the function of the
instrument, we recommend measurements at these range limits.
Table 5-2a Changeover limits of the SME

Range from to

Doubler1 (SME03\06) 1500.000 000 1 MHz 3000.000 000 0 MHz

(SME03E) 1500.000.000 2MHz 2297.200 000 0 MHz
Doubler2 (SME06) 3000.000 000 1 MHz 6000.000 000 0 MHz
Synthesis octave 750.000 000 1 MHz 1500.000 000 0 MHz

1038.6002.02 5.6 E-13

SME Test Procedure

Divider :2 375.000 000 1 MHz 750.000 000 0 MHz

Divider :4 187.500 000 1 MHz 375.000 000 0 MHz
Divider :8 93.750 000 1 MHz 187.500 000 0 MHz
Mixer range 0.001 000 0 MHz 93.750 000 0 MHz

Mixer range with a large deviation 0.001 000 0 MHz 130.700 000 0 MHz

Table 5-2b Changeover limits of the SME

Range from to

Lowpass filters OPU1 No 0 0 1045.600 000 1 MHz 1500.000 000 0 MHz

1 750.000 000 1 MHz 1045.600 000 0 MHz
2 522.800 000 1 MHz 750.000 000 0 MHz
3 375.000 000 1 MHz 522.800 000 0 MHz
4 261.400 000 1 MHz 375.000 000 0 MHz
5 187.500 000 1 MHz 261.400 000 0 MHz
6 130.700 000 1 MHz 187.500 000 0 MHz
7 93.750 000 1 MHz 130.700 000 0 MHz

Bandpass filters OPU3 No. 1 1500.000 000 1 MHz 1885.200 000 0 MHz
(SME03E/03/06) 2 1885.200 000 1 MHz 2297.200 000 0 MHz
(SME03/06) 3 2297.200 000 1 MHz 3000.000 000 0 MHz

Bandpass filters OPU6 NR. 1 3000.000 000 1 MHz 3770.400 000 0 MHz
(SME06) 2 3770.400 000 1 MHz 4594.400 000 0 MHz
3 4594.400 000 1 MHz 6000.000 000 0 MHz

Oscillators SUM Nr. 1 750.000 000 1 MHz 1100.000 000 0 MHz

2 1100.000 000 1 MHz 1500.000 000 0 MHz

Rectifier before mixer 0.001 000 0 MHz 9.362 500 0 MHz

at output OPU1 9.362 500 1 MHz 1500.000 000 0 MHz
at output OPU3 (SME03E) 1500.000 000 1 MHz 2297.200 000 0 MHz
at output OPU3 (SME03) 1500.000 000 1 MHz 3000.000 000 0 MHz
at output OPU6 (SME06) 1500.000 000 1 MHz 6000.000 000 0 MHz

1038.6002.02 5.7 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.3 Settling Time

Test equipment - Spectrum analyzer with video output (Section 5.1, item 2)
- Storage oscilloscope (Section 5.1, item 3)
- Controller (Section 5.1, item 4)

Test principle The spectrum analyzer is operated as an edge demodulator with a

0-Hz span. A controller transmits starting and stop frequency via the
IEC bus. The storage oscilloscope is connected to the video output of
the analyzer and triggered by the positive edge on the EOI line of the
IEC bus. If the controller switches over from the starting to the stop
frequency, the settling procedure is displayed on the screen of the
storage oscilloscope..
Test setup IEC bus
10-MHz reference

Controller

SME
× Ø RF Analyzer

Video
Oscilloscope

Preparing measurement À Synchronize the reference frequencies of SME and analyzer.

À Establish IEC bus and RF connections.
À Connect storage oscilloscope to the video output of the analyzer.
À Apply trigger connection to the EOI-line (pin 5) of the IEC bus.
À Settings at the SME
- Stop frequency unmodulated
- Level 0 dBm
À Settings at the storage oscilloscope
- Time base 2 ms/div
- Sensitivity corresponding to the video output of the analyzer,
- Trigger free-running with respect to calibration.
- Settings at the spectrum analyzer
- Reference level 5 dBm,
- Amplitude scale 1 dB/div,
- Resolution bandwidth to 3 kHz,
- Video bandwidth 100 kHz,
- Span 10 kHz
À Now increase the center frequency, starting from the stop
frequency, until the visible filter edge runs through the central point
of the screen.
À The span can now be reduced to 0 Hz and the frequency scale be
calibrated at the (free-running) oscilloscope by means of steps of
100 Hz at the SME.

1038.6002.02 5.8 E-13

SME Test Procedure

Measurement À Setting at the storage oscilloscope

- Time base 2 ms/div
- Sensitivity corresponding to the video output of the analyzer
- Triggering externally by the positive edge at 1.5 V.
À Send the starting frequency first and then the stop frequency from
the controller.
The settling curve is displayed on the screen of the oscilloscope
triggered externally.
Relative deviation from the rated frequency after 10 ms <1E-
7
À Repeat measurement with exchanged starting and stop
frequencies.

Recommended measuring Starting frequency Stop frequency

frequencies
749 MHz 751 MHz

751 MHz 1101 MHz

93 MHz 1500 MHz

840 MHz 942 MHz

1350.2 MHz 1351.4 MHz

751 MHz 2200 MHz (SME03E)

751 MHz 3000 MHz (SME03)

751 MHz 6000 MHz (SME06)

Quick-Basic program for the controller

CLS
iecadresse% = 28 IEC-bus address of the SME (28)
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%) Open DEV1 and obtain access number
CALL IBPAD(generator%, iecadresse%) Set IEC-bus address of the DEV1 to 28
iecterm% = &HA ’ Set EOS to LINE FEED
CALL IBEOS(generator%, iecterm% + &H800)
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "POW 0dBm")
DO
INPUT "Start frequency in MHz";F1$
INPUT "Stop frequency in MHz";F2$
DO
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "FREQ" + F1$ + "MHz")
PRINT "frequency:";F1$; "MHz"
DO ’ Wait for key
kbd$ = INKEY$
LOOP UNTIL LEN(kbd$)
SWAP F1$, F2$
LOOP UNTIL kbd$ = CHR$(27) ’ Exit using ESCAPE
INPUT "Repeat (y/n)"; w$
LOOP UNTIL NOT UCASES$(w$) = "y"
END

1038.6002.02 5.9 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.4 Reference Frequency

Caution: Allow the SME to warm up for at least 2 hours before measurement.

Test equipment Frequency counter (Section 5.1, item 1)

Test setup Connect a calibrated frequency counter to output REF (socket at the
rear).

Measurement À Measure frequency.

Relative frequency error in the rated temperature range with
standard.............................<1E-6, per year of service period +2E-6
with option SM-B1..............<1E-9, per year of service period +5E-8

5.2.5 Harmonics Suppression/Subharmonics

Note: As subharmonics occur at frequencies >1.5 GHz, only SME03 and SME06 have to be tested
for subharmonics.

Test equipment Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2)

Test setup Connect the spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME02/03E/03/06

- Test frequencies 5 kHz to 1500/2200/3000/6000 MHz,
unmodulated
- Level 10 dBm or 13 dBm.
À Check the harmonics suppression using the spectrum analyzer.
Make sure that the spectrum analyzer is not overdriven.
Harmonics level
at 10 dBm ................................................................max. -30 dBc
at 13 dBm .............................................................max. . - 26 dBc
À Measure the subharmonics using a spectrum analyzer. Make sure
not to overdrive the spectrum analyzer (only for SME03/06).
Level of subharmonics at
Frequency settings >1.5 GHz .......................................max. -40 dBc
Frequency settings >3.0 GHz .......................................max. -34 dBc

1038.6002.02 5.10 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.6 Suppression of Nonharmonics

Test equipment and setup See Section 5.2.5, Harmonics Suppression.
The test level should be 8.1 dBm unmodulated.

Measurement Nonharmonics level with

Frequency settings ≤ 1.5 GHz ................................................. <-80 dBc
Frequency settings > 1.5 GHz (SME03/03E) ...........................<-74 dBc
Frequency settings > 3.0 GHz (SME06) ..................................<-68 dBc

Recommended settings at the spectrum analyzer

À Span 5 kHz,
À Resolution bandwidth 1 kHz,
À Video bandwidth 30 Hz,
À Synchronize reference frequencies of analyzer and test object.

Recommended test and search frequencies

Nonharmonics of the
step synthesis Setting at the SME Search in the ratio

831.0 MHz 689.6 kHz

832.7 MHz 699.3 kHz

1044.5 MHz 598.8 kHz

1043.0 MHz 591.7 kHz

1139.6 MHz 518.1 kHz

1141.0 MHz 523.5 kHz

1457.5 MHz 917.4 kHz

1349.6 MHz 934.5 kHz

1444.0 MHz 826.4 kHz

1446.0 MHz 840.3 kHz

1430.5 MHz 751.9 kHz

1434.1 MHz 763.4 kHz

1038.6002.02 5.11 E-13

Test Procedure SME

Mixer nonharmonics
of the output part Setting at the SME Search at frequency

93.75 MHz 131.25 MHz

93.75 MHz 37.5 MHz
93.75 MHz 56.25 MHz
70.0 MHz 40.0 MHz

Nonharmonics of the
summing loop Setting at the SME Search in the ratio

1412.9 MHz 300.0 kHz

1305.4 MHz 300.0 kHz
1197.9 MHz 300.0 kHz
1090.4 MHz 300.0 kHz
838.25 MHz 117,6 kHz
380 MHz 425.5 kHz
1495.59 MHz 15.59 MHz
1354.0625 MHz 14.2567 MHz
1354.0625 MHz 28.5133 MHz

5.2.7 SSB Phase Noise

Test equipment - Second signal generator (Section 5.1 item 5),
- Phase noise test system, consisting of mixer with lowpass filter and
preamplifier (Section 5.1 item 6),
- Oscilloscope (Section 5.1 item 7)
- Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1 item 2).

Test principle The two signal generators are set to the test frequency and
synchronized with a phase offset of 90 deg (phase quadrature). Mixing
to 0 Hz suppresses the RF carrier and due to the phase quadrature
the mixer supplies a voltage corresponding to the phase difference
between the input signals. This is measured by the LF spectrum
analyzer and can be converted into SSB phase noise.

Test setup
Signal generator
10-MHz reference
LO
SME LF analyzer
× Ø RF Mixer
preamplifier
Oscilloscope

1038.6002.02 5.12 E-13

SME Test Procedure

Measurement À Set the levels of the two signal generators according to the
specifications of the mixer used (unmodulated)
À For calibration, set the preamplifier to 0 dB and detune a signal
generator by 20 kHz. Measure and note down the reference value
at 20 kHz at the analyzer.
À Cancel the detuning and make the phase quadrature. Call menu
UTILITIES/PHASE to this effect. Observe the output voltage of the
mixer at the oscilloscope and vary the phase until the voltage
becomes 0.
À Set the preamplifier to 40 dB and read the noise voltage at the
analyzer, normalized to a bandwidth of 1 Hz (noise level).

Evaluation À Subtract from the reference value and add 6 dB for the second side
band measured (correlated) and 40 dB for the amplification
switchover to the ratio found. If the signal-to-noise ratio of the
second signal generator is not better than the one of the test object
by at least 10dB, the noise component of the reference transmitter
must be determined and subtracted as well.
Example:
Let the reference level be measured to be 12dBm. A noise level of
-78dBm (1Hz) is determined at 20kHz. The difference is 90dB, in
addition to the correction for the second side band (6dB) and the
amplification switchover (40dB) there is a signal-to-noise ratio of
136dB or a noise level of -136dBc (dB with respect to the carrier
power). If two identical signal transmitters have been used, the result
must be decreased by 3dB for the (uncorrelated) noise power of the
reference transmitter.
The final result is then -139dBc.

The following noise levels should be measured and/or not be

exceeded:

Test frequency Noise in 20-kHz ratio

6000 MHz -110 dBc (only SME06)

3000 MHz -116 dBc (only SME03/06)

2000 MHz -120 dBc (only SME03E/03/06)

1000 MHz -126 dBc

500 MHz -132 dBc

250 MHz -137 dBc

125 MHz -140 dBc

< 93.75 MHz -129 dBc

1038.6002.02 5.13 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.8 Broadband Noise

Test equipment Broadband noise is measured using the test setup of 5.2.7 (SSB
Phase Noise).

Test principle Calibration is effected in the same way as in Section 5.2.7, SSB Phase
Noise. For measurement, the signal generators are detuned until the
difference frequency falls into the stop band of the lowpass filter (> 10
MHz). A 1-MHz section of the sum of the broadband noise powers of
both signal generators is to be measured at the spectrum analyzer
then, which corresponds to the carrier frequency offset from the
difference frequency up to the difference frequency minus 1MHz. Due
to the mirror inversion of the spectrum at the zero line, the power
measured must be halved.

Measurement À Calibration see Section 5.2.7.

À Increase the detuning to the measurement offset frequency
(≥ 10MHz, recommended offset frequency 10MHz).
À Set the preamplifier to 40dB and read the noise voltage at the
analyzer at a center frequency of approx. 100kHz, normalized to a
bandwidth of 1Hz (noise level).

Evaluation À Subtract from the reference level and add 43dB for the
amplification switchover and the mirror image. The measured value
is the sum of the noise powers of both signal generators. If the
signal-to-noise ratio of the second signal generator is not better
than the one of the test object by at least 10dB, the noise
component of the reference transmitter must be determined and
subtracted as well. In the case of two identical transmitters, the
correction is further 3dB.
Corrected measured value ................................................≤-140 dBc

Recommended test see table 5-2.

frequencies

5.2.9 Residual FM

Note: The measurement of SSB phase noise usually makes a measurement of unwanted deviation
superfluous as it is more sensitive.

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME
- 1GHz, unmodulated,
- Level 8.1dBm.
À Settings at the analyzer
- FM, RMS value
Unwanted deviation in the case of CCITT filtering 1Hz and with
a measuring bandwidth of 30Hz to 23kHz .........................≤ 4 Hz

1038.6002.02 5.14 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.10 Residual AM
Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement See Section 5.2.9, but demodulation AM

Residual AM with a measuring bandwidth of
30 Hz to 23 kHz .................................................................. ≤ 0.02 %

5.2.11 Output Level

Test equipment -Power meter (Section 5.1, item 8)
- Precision attenuator (Section 5.1, item 9)
- Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2)
- Low-noise preamplifier (Section 5.1, item 10)

Test Methods for Level in the Measuring Range of the Power Meter

Test setup Connect power meter to the RF output socket.

Measurement À Setting at the SME

- RF level to be measured (see below), unmodulated.
À Measure the level at output frequencies of 5 kHz to 1500 MHz
(2200/3000/6000 MHz with SME03E/03/06).
Deviation of the output level from the rated value
at frequency ≤ 3 GHz....................................................... max. ≤1 dB
at frequency > 3 GHz ...................................................... max. ≤2 dB
Frequency response at 0 dBm (difference between the lowest and
the highest level).............................................................. max. ≤1 dB

Recommended test level 13, 10, 8, 7.9, 5, 0, -5, -10, -20, -30 dBm

Test Methods for Low Levels

Test principle Levels below the measuring range of the power meter can be carried
out by means of a comparison measurement using a precision
attenuator and a sensitive test receiver or spectrum analyzer.

Test setup Connect a precision attenuator to the RF output of the SME and a
spectrum analyzer with screened RF measurement cables to its
output.

1038.6002.02 5.15 E-13

Test Procedure SME

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Test frequency
- Level 10 dBm, unmodulated
À Setting at the analyzer
- Test frequency
À Setting at the attenuator
- Attenuation 120 dB.
À Read the level at the analyzer and note down as a reference value.
It should be approx. -110 dBm. Select the measurement bandwidth
small enough to ensure an exact reading.
À Now repeat the measurement with the settings given in the table.
Deviation of the indication at the analyzer from the reference value,
in each case ...................................................................... max. 1dB

Settings Level at the SME Attenuation of the attenuator

10 dBm 120 dB
5 dBm 115 dB
0 dBm 110 dB
-10 dBm 100 dB
-30 dBm 80 dB
-50 dBm 60 dB
-70 dBm 40 dB
-90 dBm 20 dB
-110 dBm 0 dB

Measurement of Lowest Levels

Caution: No RF leakage of the components used is the prerequisite for a correct measurement

Test setup À Insert a low-noise preamplifier between SME and precision

attenuator.

Measurement À Perform a subsequent calibration with a level already measured

(-30dBm). This allows measuring levels up to the lower setting limit
of the SME.

1038.6002.02 5.16 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.12 Output Reflection Coefficient

Test equipment -VSWR bridge (Section 5.1, item 11)
- VSWR directional coupler (Section 5.1, item 25) for SME06
- Second signal generator (Section 5.1, item 5)
- Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2) .

Test setup Note: For test frequencies >3 GHz use a VSWR directional coupler
instead of a VSWR bridge.
The test port of the bridge or the directional coupler has to be
screwed directly to the DUT.

10-MHz reference

Signal generator

LO

SME
Source refl.
× Ø RF Analyzer
Object output

Bridge (test frequency ≤ 3 GHz)

Directional coupler (test frequency > 3 GHz)

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Test level
- Test frequency, unmodulated.
À Settings at the Spectrum analyzer
- Test frequency
- Test level
- Resolution and video bandwidth 10kHz,
- Span 0 Hz,
- linear scale
- Sweep time 30 ms.
À Settings at the second signal generator
- Detune by 100 Hz compared to the test frequency,
- first minimal level, unmodulated.
À At the spectrum analyzer, now bring the line indicated approx. into
the center of the screen by varying the reference level and read
and note down the level as a reference level.
À Screw off the bridge or the directional coupler from the SME and
increase the level at the second signal generator until the reference
level is measured again at the analyzer.

1038.6002.02 5.17 E-13

Test Procedure SME

À Screw the bridge or the directional coupler onto the SME again.
À A more or less wavy line representing the VSWR of the SME is to
be seen now at the spectrum analyzer. The VSWR is to be
calculated from the maximal and the minimal voltage according to
VSWR = vmax/vmin
VSWR with test levels ≤ 0 dBm, f ≤ 3 GHz ......................... max. 1.5
VSWR with test levels ≤ 0 dBm, f > 3 GHz ......................... max. 2.0
VSWR with test levels > 0 dBm........................................... max. 2.0
VSWR with test levels > 0 dBm, f > 5 GHz, with SM-B9 .... max. 2.5

Passive measurement of the À Settings at the second signal generator

VSWR with output levels of the - Test frequency
SME below -30 dBm
- Level 10 dBm.
À Screw off VSWR bridge or directional coupler from the test object
and note down the level measured at the analyzer as a reference
value.
À Screw on the bridge or directional coupler again and determine the
new level at the analyzer.
À The output reflection coefficient r of the test object is the voltage
ratio test level/reference level. It serves to determine the voltage
standing wave ratio (VSWR) according to the formula
VSWR=(1+r)/(1-r)

5.2.13 Interrupt-free Level Setting (ATTEN FIXED)

Test equipment Power meter (Section 5.1, item 8)

Test setup Connect the power meter to the RF output of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- 1000 MHz, unmodulated,
- Level 8.0 dBm,
- Select FIXED in the LEVEL/LEVEL ATTEN menu.
À Note down the level read at the power meter as a reference level or
set the power meter to 0 dB for relative measurement.
À Now reduce the level in steps of 5 dB at the SME.
The following deviations should not be exceeded:

Attenuation Tolerance

-5 dB ±0.2 dB
-10 dB ±0.4 dB
-15 dB ±0.6 dB
-20 dB ±0.8 dB

1038.6002.02 5.18 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.14 Overvoltage Protection (SME02 and SME03 only)

Caution:
SME06 is not protected against overvoltage. To prevent damages to the unit
– never apply a DC. voltage to the RF output connector
– never apply more than the maximum permissible RF power (30 dBm) to the
RF output connector.

Test equipment - Adjustable d.c. voltage source (Section 5.1, item 12)
- Signal generator (Section 5.1, item 5)
- Power amplifier (Section 5.1, item 13)

Test setup Connect an adjustable d.c. voltage source to the RF output socket of
the SME via a 50-Ohm resistor or a signal generator with a
subsequent power amplifier with a power output of more than 1 Watt.

Testing À Settings at the SME

- 100 MHz, unmodulated,
- Level -120 dBm.
À Apply the d.c. voltage via the 50-Ohm resistance.
The overvoltage protection must respond at a voltage of >4V and
<7V with both polarities.
À Connect the signal generator to the RF output socket of the SME
via the power amplifier and feed frequencies of up to 1500 MHz (in
the case of SME03E/03 2200/3000 MHz).
The overvoltage protection must respond at a supplied RF power of
0.5 to 1W.

5.2.15 Level Monitoring at Input EXT1

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Test setup Connect the generator output of the audio analyzer to external
modulation input EXT1.

Testing À Setting at the SME

- Select EXT1 in the MODULATION/AM/AM SOURCE menu.
Gen. level under 0.98 ±0.01 V(vpeak) .........indication EXT1 LOW
Gen. level over 1.02 ± 0.01 V(vpeak) ......... indication EXT1 HIGH
Gen. level between 0.99 and 1.01 V(vpeak) .............. no indication

1038.6002.02 5.19 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.16 Modulation Depth of AM

Test equipment Test system [Link]
Test system [Link] (SME06)

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Level 0 dBm
- Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION/AM/AM SOURCE INT
menu,
- Modulation depth 0.1% to 80%
(recommended values 30% and 80%)
- Modulation frequency 1 kHz
À Vary the carrier frequency from 5 MHz to 1500 MHz (2200/
3000/6000 MHz with SME03E/03/06). For recommended setting
values, see table 5-2.
À Read off the modulation depth at the modulation analyzer.
Deviation of the modulation depth measured from the setting value m

5.2.17 AM Frequency Response

Test equipment
Test system [Link]
Test system [Link] (SME06)

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Level 0 dBm,
- Select EXT1 in the MODULATION/AM/AM SOURCE menu,
- Modulation depth 60%.
À Vary the carrier frequency from 5kHz to 1500MHz (2200/
3000/6000MHz with SME03E/03/06). For recommended setting
values, see table 5-2.
À Setting at the audio analyzer
- Generator level 1 V(upeak).
À Determine the modulation frequency response (difference between
the highest and the lowest modulation depth) by varying the
generator frequency.
Modulation frequency response from 20 Hz to 50 kHz ....... max.1dB

Note: If option SM-B2 LF generator is fitted, LFGEN2 can be selected in the MODULATION/AM/AM
SOURCE menu and the test frequency be set using the internal generator for this
measurement.

1038.6002.02 5.20 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.18 AM Distortion Factor

Test equipment
Test system [Link].
Test system [Link] (SME06)

Measurement
À Settings at the SME
- Level 0 dBm
- Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION/AM/AM SOURCE INT menu,
- Modulation depth 30%
- Modulation frequency 1 kHz.
À Vary the carrier frequency from 1 MHz to 1500 MHz (2200/
3000/6000 MHz with SME03E/03/06). For recommended setting
values, see table 5-2.
À Read off the distortion factor at the modulation analyzer.
Distortion factor .................................................................. max. 1%
À Repeat measurement with an AM of 80%.
Distortion factor .................................................................. max. 2%

5.2.19 Residual PhiM with AM

Test equipment Test system [Link].
Test system [Link] (SME06)

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Various test frequencies (for recommended setting values, see
table 5-2)
- Level 0 dBm
- Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION/AM/AM SOURCE INT
menu,
- Modulation depth 30%
- Modulation frequency 1 kHz.
À Measure the phase modulation resulting by means of a 23-kHz
lowpass filter and peak weighting at the modulation analyzer.
Unwanted modulation with frequencies ≤ 3 GHz........... max. 0.1 rad
Unwanted modulation with frequencies > 3 GHz........... max. 1.0 rad

1038.6002.02 5.21 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.20 Level Monitoring at Input EXT2 (Option SM-B5)

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Test setup Connect the generator output of the audio analyzer to external
modulation input EXT2.

Testing À Setting at the SME

- Select EXT2 in the MODULATION/FM/FM1 SOURCE menu.
Gen. level under 0.98 ±0.01 V(upeak) ..............indication EXT2 LOW
Gen. level over 1.02 ± 0.01 V(upeak) .............. indication EXT2 HIGH
Gen. level 0,99 to 1,01 V(upeak)..................................... no indication

5.2.21 FM Deviation Setting

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- RF 200 MHz
- Level 0 dBm
- Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION/FM/FM1 SOURCE menu,
- Modulation frequency
- Hub 300 Hz to 250 kHz (see below).
À Read off the FM deviation at the modulation analyzer.
Deviation of the deviation measured from the setting value
..................................................... max. 3 % of the indication +20 Hz

Recommended setting values 300 Hz ,1 , 3, 10, 30, 100 and 250 kHz.

1038.6002.02 5.22 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.22 FM Frequency Response

[Link] FM Frequency Response up to 100 kHz

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Test frequency 100 MHz
- Level 0 dBm
- Select EXT1 in the MODULATION/FM/FM1 SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 50 kHz .
À Setting at the audio analyze
- Generator level 1 V(vpeak) .
À Determine the modulation frequency response (difference between
the highest and lowest modulation depth) by varying the generator
frequency of the audio analyzer from 10Hz to 100kHz.
Modulation frequency response .................................... max. 0.5 dB
À Repeat measurement when frequency is fed at socket EXT2 and
with setting MODULATION/FM/FM2 SOURCE EXT2.

Note: If option SM-B2 LF generator is fitted, LFGEN2 can be selected in the MODULATION/FM FM2
SOURCE menu and the test frequency be set using the internal generator for this
measurement.

[Link] FM Frequency Response up to 2 MHz

Test equipment Test system [Link]
Test system [Link] (SME06)

Measurement
À Setting at the SME
- Select EXT1 in the MODULATION/FM/FM1/SOURCE menu.
À Vary the frequency from 10Hz to 2 MHz and measure the
modulation frequency response (difference between highest and
lowest modulation depth) using an AC voltmeter at the sine-wave
generator.
Modulation frequency response ........................................ max. 3 dB
À Repeat measurement when frequency is fed at socket EXT2 and
with setting MODULATION/FM/FM2 SOURCE EXT2.

Settings recommended

F (RF) 50 MHz 750.1 MHz 1099 MHz 1101 MHz 1500 MHz 3000 MHz 6000 MHz

Deviation 125 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz

Mixer X X X X X X

F (LO) 800.1 MHz 1149 MHz 1151 MHz 1550 MHz 2950 MHz (SME03/06) 5950 MHz (SME06)

1038.6002.02 5.23 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.23 FM Distortion Factor

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 250 MHz
- Level 0 dBm
- Select INT in the MODULATION/FM/FM1 SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 62.5 kHz
- Modulation frequency 1 kHz.
À Read off distortion factor at the modulation analyzer.
Distortion factor ................................................................ max. 0.5%

5.2.24 FM Preemphasis
Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 100 MHz
- Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION/FM/FM1 SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 25 kHz.
À Read off the deviation at the modulation analyzer and note down as
a reference value with a modulation frequency of 100 Hz.
À Switch on preemphasis 50 µs at the SME and at the modulation
analyzer and increase the modulation frequency to 15 kHz.
Deviation of the deviation measured now from the reference value
< 5%
À Repeat measurement with a preemphasis of 75 µs.

5.2.25 Residual AM with FM

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Various test frequencies >10 MHz
(for recommended settings, see table 5-2)
- Level 0 dBm,
- Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION/FM/FM1 SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 40 kHz ,
- Modulation frequency 1 kHz.
À Measure the amplitude modulation resulting by means of a 23-kHz
lowpass filter and peak weighting at the modulation analyzer.
Unwanted modulation measured...................................... max. 0.1%

1038.6002.02 5.24 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.26 Carrier frequency Deviation with FM

Test equipment
Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- 400 MHz
- Level 0 dBm
- Select LFGEN1 in the MODULATION/FM/FM1 SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 0 kHz.
À Setting at the modulation analyzer
- Counter function
À Observe change when switching on and off FM.
Frequency deviation when switching on FM..........................< 50 Hz
À Increase the deviation at the SME to 200 kHz.
Frequency deviation when switching on FM.....................< 2050 Hz.

5.2.27 FM Stereo Modulation

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Test setup Connect the stereo coder output of the modulation analyzer with
socket EXT1 of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequencies 10.7 MHz and 85 MHz to 108 MHz
- Select EXT1, DC coupled, in the MODULATION/FM/FM1
SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 46 kHz.
À Setting at the stereo coder
- Set the level such that neither EXT1 HIGH nor EXT1 LOW is
indicated.
À Modulate both channels with 1 kHz, determine the distortion factor
of both channels using the distortion meter in the modulation
analyzer.
Distortion factor ...................................................................... < 0.1%
À Switch over deviation measurement to relative measurement and
operate both channels without a signal.
À Measure the signal to noise ratio in both channels according to
CCIR.
The unweighted and weighted signal to noise ratio must be more
than 76 dB.
À Modulate only one channel with 1 kHz. Measure the crosstalk
modulation in the unmodulated channel.
It should be more than 50 dB under the reference value of the
wanted modulation.

1038.6002.02 5.25 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.28 PhiM Deviation Setting

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement
À Settings at the SME
- Carrier frequency 1000 MHz
- Level 0 dBm
- Select INT in the MODULATION/PM/PM1 SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 0.03 to 10 rad
- Modulation frequency 1 kHz.
À Read off PhiM deviation at the modulation analyzer.
Deviation of the deviation measured from the setting value
...................................................max. 3% of the indication +0.01 rad

Recommended setting values 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1, 3, 10 rad

5.2.29 PhiM Frequency Response

Note: If option SM-B2 LF generator is fitted, LFGEN2 can also be selected in the MODULATION/PM
PM2 SOURCE menu and the test frequency be set using the internal generator for this
measurement.

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 1000 MHz,
- Level 0 dBm
- Select EXT1, AC coupled, in the MODULATION/PM/PM1
SOURCE menu,
- Select EXT1, AC coupled, in the MODULATION/PM/PM1 5 rad.
À Setting at the audio analyzer
- Generator level 1 V(vpeak).
À Determine the modulation frequency response (difference between th
Modulation frequency response 10 Hz to 100 kHz............ max. 3 dB
À Repeat measurement using setting PM2 SOURCE EXT2.

1038.6002.02 5.26 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.30 PhiM Distortion Factor

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement
À Settings at the SME
- Carrier frequency 1 GHz
- Level 0 dBm
- Select INT in the MODULATION/PM/PM1 SOURCE menu,
- Deviation 5 rad
- Modulation frequency 1 kHz.
À Read off the distortion factor at the modulation analyzer.
Distortion factor .................................................................. max. 1%

5.2.31 Internal Modulation Generator

Test equipment Audio analyzer (Section 5.1, Pos. 14)

Test setup Connect an audio analyzer to socket LF of the SME to test the internal
modulation generator.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Select LFGEN1 in the LF OUTPUT/SOURCE menu,
- Level 1 V.
- subsequently all 4 frequencies of the internal generator.
À Read off the actual frequency at the audio analyzer.
Deviation compared to the rated value...................................... < 3%
À Read off output voltage at the audio analyzer.
Output voltage .................................... 990 to 1010 mV (peak value)

1038.6002.02 5.27 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.32 Pulse Modulation (Option SM-B3/B8/B9)

[Link] ON/OFF - Ratio

Test equipment - Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2)
- Pulse generator (Section 5.1, item 17)

Test setup To determine the ON/OFF ratio, connect a spectrum analyzer to the
RF output socket of the SME and a pulse generator to socket PULSE
at the rear panel of the SME.

Measurement À Setting at the SME

- Select EXT in the MODULATION/PULSE/SOURCE menu.
À Determine the output level of the SME with a present "high" and
"low" signal with various carrier frequencies
Difference of the output level with a "high“ and "low" signal
...........................................................................................>80 dB

[Link] Dynamic Characteristics

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Simultaneously display the input signal from the pulse generator
and the (down-converted) output signal on the dual-trace
oscilloscope (triggering on the input signal).
À Settings at the pulse generator
- Square-wave pulse sequence at a frequency of approx. 10 MHz,
TTL level.
À Settings at the SME
- Carrier frequencies > 50 MHz
- with option SM-B3: level 10 dBm.
- with option SM-B8: level 9 dBm.
- with option SM-B9: level 8 dBm.
À With carrier frequencies > 50 MHz, use mixer and set an IF of
approx. 50 MHz using the auxiliary transmitter.
À Evaluate the modulated RF signal at the oscilloscope.
Rising time = the time between 10% and 90% of the RF amplitude
Fall time = the time between 90% and 10% of the RF amplitude
Pulse delay time = the time between 50% of the input pulse
amplitude and 50% of the RF amplitude
Rising time............................................................................. < 10 ns
Fall time ................................................................................. < 10 ns
Pulse delay time .................................................................... < 70 ns

1038.6002.02 5.28 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.33 GFSK Modulation (Option SME-B11)

[Link] Spectrum

Operating Mode internal

Test equipment - Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2)

- D.c. voltage source (Section 5.1, item 12)
- Pulse generator (Section 5.1, item 17)

Test setup Connect spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 945 MHz,
- Level 0 dBm,
in menu DIGITAL MOD/GFSK
- SOURCE PRBS
- PRBS 23 bit
- SELECT STANDARD DECT
À Settings at the analyzer
- Reference level 0 dBm,
- Span 5 MHz
- Center frequency 945 MHz,
- Resolution bandwidth 30 kHz,
- Video bandwidth 30 Hz.
A spectrum according to Fig. 5-1 must be visible at the spectrum
analyzer.

[dBm] 0

-50

-100
934 944 945 946 947 [MHz]

Fig. 5-1 Spectrum with GFSK

1038.6002.02 5.29 E-13

Test Procedure SME

The signal level with respect to the level at a center frequency

as a function of the offset frequency must be as follows: Offset frequency Level

835 kHz -40 dB ±3 dB

990 kHz -30 dB ±2 dB

1890 kHz -58 dB ±4 dB

Operating Mode External

Test equipment -Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2)

-D.c. voltage source (Section 5.1, item 12)
- Pulse generator (Section 5.1, item 17)

Test setup Connect spectrum analyzer to the RF output of the SME. Connect the
square-wave generator to the CLOCK input and the d.c. voltage
source to the DATA input of the SME.

Measurement À Setting at the SME

- In menu DIGITAL MOD/GFSK/SOURCE EXT
À Settings at the pulse generator
- Frequency 1152 kHz,
- TTL level.
À Settings at the Analyzer
- Set resolution and video bandwidth to COUPLING DEFAULT.
If a "LOW" level at the DATA input is applied, the center frequency
should be 288 ±10 kHz under the unmodulated carrier frequency,
with "HIGH" level they should exceed the frequency by the same
amount.

1038.6002.02 5.30 E-13

SME Test Procedure

[Link] Deviation Error

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Adjust the d.c. voltage at the FM demodulator output to 0 V±10 mV

by means of a fine adjustment of the carrier or LO frequency with
GFSK modulation switched off.
À Adjust the carrier frequency to 253.4 kHz offset to the above
adjustment at the test object, measure the voltage at the FM
demodulator output and note down as Uref.
À Set the original carrier frequency again.
À Now switch on the modulation at the test object again using
SOURCE DATA and enter a "LOW-HIGH sequence" ("01") using
the list editor with DATA and BURST.
Square-wave signal at the DATA output ............................. HC level
............................................................. frequency 576 kHz ±0.1%
Square-wave signal at the BURST output........................... HC level
............................................................. frequency 576 kHz ±0.1%
Square-wave signal at the CLOCK output............................HC level
.......................................................... frequency 1152 kHz ±0.1 %
Diagnostic voltage at test point 301 .....................................6.3 ±1 V
After 10 average sweeps an almost sinusoidal signal must be
measured at the digital oscilloscope whose peak voltage must be
Vref±7%.
À Now enter the sequence "11111111011111111" using the list
editor.
After 10 average sweeps a pulse signal must be measured at the
digital oscilloscope whose voltage peak is about Vref±7%.
À Enter the sequence "00000000111111111" using the list editor.
After 10 average sweeps a square-wave signal with an amplitude
of 1.136×Vref ±3% must be measured at the digital oscilloscope
whose overshoot must be smaller than 5%.

Recommended settings for the measurement using the digital oscilloscope

F (RF) 50 MHz 750.1 MHz 1099 MHz 1101 MHz 1500 MHz 2200 MHz 3000 MHz 6000 MHz

Mixer x x x x x x x

F (LO) 800.1 MHz 1149 MHz 1151 MHz 1550 MHz 2250 MHz 2950 MHz 5950 MHz
(SME03E/03/06) (SME03/06) (SME06)

1038.6002.02 5.31 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.34 QPSK Modulation

[Link] Spectrum

Caution: - The LEVEL-PRESET calibration (see service manual, stock no. 1039.1856.24) must be
carried out before this measurement.
- The delay adjustment for QPSK (see service manual, stock no. 1039.1856.24)
should be checked and renewed if necessary before the measurement.

Test equipment Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2)

Test setup Connect spectrum analyzer to the RF output socket of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 836 MHz, in the case of SME03/06 1513
MHz
- Level 0 dBm,
in menu DIGITAL MOD/QPSK
- SOURCE PRBS,
- PRBS 23 bit,
- SELECT STANDARD NADC
À Settings at the spectrum analyzer
- Center frequency 836 MHz, with SME03/06 1513 MHz,
- Span 300 kHz,
- Resolution bandwidth 3 kHz,
- Video bandwidth 100 Hz.
A spectrum according to Fig. 5-2 must be visible at the spectrum
analyzer which adheres to the tolerances in the following table (The
reference level is at the center frequency):

Offset frequency Level

0 kHz 0 dB (reference)

30 to 50 kHz < -40 dB

> 50 kHz < -50 dB

1038.6002.02 5.32 E-13

SME Test Procedure

[dBm] 0

-50

-100
835,9 945 836,1 [MHz]

Fig. 5-2 Spectrum with QPSK

[Link] Vector Error (NADC Standard IS-54)

Test equipment FSEA with option FSE-B7 (Section 5.1, item 23)

Test setup Connect FSEA to the RF output socket of the SME

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 900 MHz,
- Level 7 dBm,
in menu DIGITAL MOD/QPSK
- SOURCE PRBS,
- PRBS 23 bit,
- SELECT STANDARD NADC .
À Settings at the FSE
- PRESET
- CENTER 900 MHz
- REF 10 dBm
- MODE VECTOR ANALYZER
- DIGITAL STANDARDS NADC ENTER
- TRIGGER FIND BURST OFF
- MODE MEAS RESULTS
- SYMB TABLE/ERRORS

RMS vector error ......................................... <2.5% (1.3% typically)

1038.6002.02 5.33 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.35 GMSK Modulation

[Link] Spectrum
Test equipment Spectrum analyzer (Section 5.1, item 2)

Test setup Connect the spectrum analyzer to the RF output socket of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 900 MHz,
- Level 0 dBm
in menu DIGITAL MOD/GMSK
- SOURCE PRBS
- PRBS 23 bit
- SELECT STANDARD GSM.
À Settings at the spectrum analyzer
- Center frequency 900 MHz,
- Span 1 MHz,
- Resolution bandwidth 10 kHz,
- Video bandwidth 10 Hz.
A spectrum according to Fig. 5-3 must be visible at the spectrum
analyzer.

[dBm] 0

-50

-100
899,5 900 900,5
[MHz]

Fig. 5-3 Spectrum with GMSK

1038.6002.02 5.34 E-13

SME Test Procedure

The signal level with respect to the level at a center

frequency as a function of the offset frequency must Offset frequency Level
adhere to the following tolerances
50 kHz -2 ±1 dB

100 kHz -8.6 dB ±2 dB

150 kHz -20 dB ±3 dB

220 kHz -36 dB ±3 dB

300 kHz -52 dB ±3 dB

[Link] Phase Error

Test equipment FSEA with option FSE-B7 (Section 5.1, item 23)

Test setup Connect FSEA to the RF output socket of the SME

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 890.2 MHz,,
- Level 13 dBm,
in menu DIGITAL MOD/GMSK
- SOURCE DATA
- SELECT STANDARD GSM
- LEVEL ATTEN 60 dB
- LEV ATT MODE GSM SLOPE.
À Enter the following bit pattern using the list editor for DATA:

Bit no.: 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010
Contents: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

Bit no.: 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020
Contents: 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

Bit no.: 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030
Contents: 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

Bit no.: 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 038 040
Contents: 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

Bit no.: 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050
Contents: 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

Bit no.: 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060
Contents: 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Bit no.: 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070
Contents: 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

Bit no.: 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080
Contents: 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

1038.6002.02 5.35 E-13

Test Procedure SME

Bit no.: 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090
Contents: 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

Bit no.: 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100
Contents: 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

Bit no.: 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
Contents: 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Bit no.: 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
Contents: 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Bit no.: 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130
Contents: 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

Bit no.: 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140
Contents: 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

Bit no.: 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150
Contents: 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

Bit no.: 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 158 160
Contents: 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Bit no.: 161 ... 1250

Contents: 111...

À For LEV ATT, enter the following bit pattern:

Bit 1 to 8 must be "1".
Bit 9 to 159 must be "0".
Bit 160 to 1250 must be "1".

À Settings at the FSE

- PRESET
- CENTER 890.2 MHz
- REF 20 dBm
- MODE VECTORANALYZER
- MARKER SEARCH SUM MKR ON
RMS phase error) .............................................. <1° (0.7° typically).
Peak phase error ................................................ <3° (2.7° typically).

1038.6002.02 5.36 E-13

SME Test Procedure

5.2.36 FFSK Modulation

Test equipment Test system [Link]

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Carrier frequency 466 MHz,
- Level 0 dBm,
Select SOURCE DATA, MODE AUTO, SELECT STANDARD
POCSAG in the DIGITAL MOD/FFSK menu.
À Enter a "HIGH sequence" ("1") using the list editor.
À Setting at the modulation analyzer
- Demodulation FM
- Lowpass filter 23 kHz.
Demodulated signal........................................................... sinusoidal
....................................................... Peak deviation of 4 kHz ±3 %
........................................ Modulation frequency of 1200 Hz ±3 %
Distortion factor ....................................................................... <1 %.
À Enter a "LOW sequence" ("0") using the list editor.
Demodulated signal........................................................... sinusoidal
............................................................. Peak deviation 4 kHz±3%
.............................................. Modulation frequency 1800 Hz±3%
Distortion factor ......................................................................... <1%

5.2.37 LF Generator (Option SM-B2)

[Link] Frequency Error

Test equipment Audio analyzer (Section 5.1, item 14)

Test setup Connect the audio analyzer to the LF socket of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

In menu LF OUTPUT
- SOURCE LFGEN2,
- VOLTAGE 1V,
- Vary LFGEN2 FREQUENCY from 20 Hz to 100 kHz.
À Read off the actual frequency at the audio analyzer
Deviation from the rated value..................................................<1E-4
À Read off the distortion factor at the audio analyzer.
Rated value............................................................................. < 0,1%
À Settings at the SME
In MENU LF OUTPUT
- LFGEN2 FREQUENCY 1 kHz
- Vary VOLTAGE from 1 mV to 4 V
À Measure the output level using the audio analyzer.
Deviation from the rated value................................ max. 1% + 1mV.

Recommended settings 3 mV, 10 mV, 30 mV, 100 mV, 300 mV, 1 V, 2 V, 4 V

1038.6002.02 5.37 E-13

Test Procedure SME

[Link] Frequency Response

Test equipment AC voltmeter (Abschnitt 5.1, Pos. 19)

Test setup Connect AC voltmeter to the LF socket of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

In Menu LF OUTPUT
- SOURCE LFGEN2,
- Vary LFGEN2 FREQUENCY from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
Frequency response (difference between the highest and lowest
level) ............................................................up to 100 kHz < 0.3 dB
......................................................................up to 500 kHz <0.5 dB

Note: The setting time is a mere time the computer requires and thus needs not to be remeasured.

5.2.38 Pulse Generator (Option SM-B4)

Test equipment -Oscilloscope (Section 5.1, item 7)
- Pulse generator (Section 5.1, item 17)

Test setup Connect the pulse generator to the PULSE socket.

Connect sockets SYNC and VIDEO to the two channels of the
oscilloscope.
Switch on an input resistance of 50 Ohm at the oscilloscope or use
feed-through termination.

Measurement Single pulses À Settings at the SME

In Menu MODULATION/PULSE
- SOURCE PULSE-GEN,
- PERIOD 100 ns,
- WIDTH 20 ns,
- PULSE DELAY 60 ns,
- DOUBLE PULSE STATE OFF,
- TRIGGER MODE AUTO,
- EXT TRIGGER SLOPE POS.

1038.6002.02 5.38 E-13

SME Test Procedure

À Settings at the Oscilloscope

- Time base 20 ns/div,
- both channels 2 V/div,
- Triggering from the SYNC signal.
SYNC output......Pulse sequence with a pulse width of 40 ns ±10 ns
VIDEO output .....Pulse sequence with a pulse width of 20 ns ±4 ns,
the first edge appears after the first edge of the SYNC signal
by the pulse delay of 60 ns (-13ns,+ 23 ns).
SYNC and VIDEO output............................................ Period 100 ns,

Note: The period is derived from the internal reference frequency

and has its accuracy. There must be no error within the frame
of the measuring accuracy of the oscilloscope.

Double pulses À Settings at the SME

In menu MODULATION/PULSE
- DOUBLE PULSE STATE ON,
- WIDTH 20 ns,
- DOUBLE PULSE DELAY 60 ns
VIDEO output ...................second pulse with a width of 20 ns ±4 ns,
...........................Spacing to the first pulse 60 ns (+23ns, -13ns) .

Ext. triggering À Setting at the SME

In menu MODULATION/PULSE
- TRIGGER MODE EXT
À Settings at the pulse generator
- TTL pulse sequence at 10 MHz
The pulse sequence at the oscilloscope must not change.
À Trigger the oscilloscope on the PULSE input.
The pulse sequence may be offset by maximally 50 ns.
À Repeat the measurements with pulse periods of up to 85s and
pulse widths, pulse delays and double pulse spacings of up to 1s.

1038.6002.02 5.39 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.39 Multi-Function Generator (Option SM-B6)

[Link] Frequency Error, Distortion Factor and Level

Test equipment Audio analyzer (Section 5.1, item 14)

Test setup Connect the audio analyzer to the LF output of the SME.

Measurement À SME settings

In menu LF OUTPUT
- VOLTAGE 1 V
- SOURCE LFGEN2
- LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN
- Vary LFGEN2 FREQ 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
À Read off the actual frequency at the audio analyzer.
The values measured have to be precise within the scope of the
counter resolution (error <0.1 Hz).
À Read off distortion factor at the audio analyzer.
Rated value up to 100 kHz ..................................................... <0. 1%
À Settings at the SME
Menu LF OUTPUT
- SOURCE LFGEN2
- LFGEN2 FREQ 1 kHz
- LFGEN2 SHAPE SIN
- Vary VOLTAGE from 3mV to 4 V (see below)
À Measure the output level using the audio analyzer.
Deviation from rated value...................................... max. 1% + 1mV.

Recommended settings 3 mV, 10 mV, 30 mV, 100 mV, 300 mV, 1 V, 2 V, 4 V

[Link] Frequency Response

Test equipment AC voltmeter (Section 5.1, item 19)

Test setup Connect the AC voltmeter to the LF socket of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

In menu LF OUTPUT
- SOURCE LFGEN2,
- Vary LFGEN2 FREQUENCY from 10 Hz to 500 kHz.
Frequency response (difference between the smallest and largest
level) ............................................................up to 100 kHz < 0.3 dB
.................................................................up to 500 kHz <0.5 dB

Note: The setting time is a mere computer time and thus need not be remeasured.

1038.6002.02 5.40 E-13

SME Test Procedure

[Link] Distortion Factor and Crosstalk Attenuation Stereo

Test equipment Modulation analyzer (Section 5.1, item 15)

Test setup Connect modulation analyzer to the LF output of the SME

Measurement À Settings at the SME

In menu MODULATION STEREO
- MODE R,
- AUDIO FREQ 1kHz,
In menu LF OUTPUT
- STEREO OUTPUT MPX.
À Read distortion factor at the modulation analyzer (signal R)
Rated value.............................................................................. <0,1%
À Measure the modulated signal of the right channel, note down
value
À Measure the demodulated signal of the left channel
À Difference between modulated and demodulated signal
..........................................................................................> 60 dB
À Repeat measurement using setting MODE L

[Link] Pilot Tone Level

Test equipment AC voltmeter (Section 5.1, item 15)

Test setup Connect AC voltmeter to the LF output of the SME.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

In menu MODULATION STEREO
- PILOT STATE ON
In menu LF OUTPUT
- STEREO OUTPUT PILOT
- LF VOLTAGE 1V
À Read AC voltage of the pilot tone
Rated value.......................................................0.707 Veff ± 14mVeff.

1038.6002.02 5.41 E-13

Test Procedure SME

5.2.40 Memory Extension (Option SME-B12)

Note: To ensure a proper functioning of the memory extension (XMEM) the modification status of the
DM coder has to be at least VAR.2/REV.4. Menu UTILITIES-DIAG-CONFIG offers access to
indication of module modification status.

The read/write function via the IEC/IEEE bus and the interplay between the XMEM and the DM coder
during GFSK modulation (high bit rate) are first checked followed by checks of the dibit synchronization
for QPSK and external triggering.

[Link] Read/Write Check via the IEC/IEEE Bus

Measurement
Read in/read out À Call up digital modulation GFSK via the IEC/IEEE bus on the SME
and activate memory extension (in R&S BASIC):
IEC OUT 28, ":DM:TYPE GFSK;STAT ON;SOUR DATA"
IEC OUT 28, ":SOUR:DM:DATA:SEL ’XMEM’"
À Read in first sequence into memory extension:
IEC OUT 28, ":DM:DATA:XMEM:START 88;LENG 3"
IEC OUT 28, ":SOUR:DM:DATA:DATA 1,0,1"
À Read in the three remaining sequences analogously.
À Read out sequences and compare with those sent:
IEC OUT 28, ":DM:DATA:XMEM:START 88;LENG 3"
IEC OUT 28, ":SOUR:DM:DATA:DATA?"
IEC IN 28, "SEQUENCE$": PRINT SEQUENCE$
The sequences read in have to correspond to the sequences read
out.

Recommended bit pattern No. Sequence Sequence length Start address

(LENGTH) (START ADDRESS)

1 101 3 88
2 01010101011010 14 74
3 011101100101011 15 59
4 110011010001010 16 43
1

Measurement After completion of this test XMEM is set so that the fourth sequence
is cyclically repeated and GFSK-modulated, and appears at the RF
Interplay between output.
À Check the spectrum at the RF output according to the following
XMEM and DM coder table. The levels refer to the carrier level with the modulation
switched off:

Offset frequency / 72 kHz 0 -2 -6 -8 2 4 6 8

Level/ dB ±3 dB -12.3 -11.0 -16.4 -24.0 -18.4 -12.2 -25.2 -24.0

Measurement
Battery back-up À The unit has to be switched off for at least 10 seconds and then to
be switched on again.
The above-mentioned spectrum has to be measured.

1038.6002.02 5.42 E-13

SME Test Procedure

[Link] Dibit Synchronization

For modulations QPSK and 4FSK a symbol is coded with two successive bits (dibit), i.e. the X bit and
the Y bit. The X bit is at the beginning of the sequence at the START ADDRESS as per definition. To
ensure this allocation the DM coder and XMEM have to be synchronized when the modulation is
switched on.

Measurement À Read in bit pattern No. 3 in the XMEM via IEC/IEEE bus as
described in the previous section.
À Settings at the SME
- Level 0 dBm
- RF-frequency 900 MHz
in menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK
- SOURCE DATA
- CLOCK MODE BIT
- SELECT LIST XMEM
- CONFIG XMEM START ADDRESS 59
- CONFIG XMEM LENGTH 4.
À Vary the bit rate in the menu DIGITAL MOD QPSK from 30 kbps to
48 kbps in 1-kbps steps.
At 900 MHz ±BITRATE/4 there should be a spectral line exceeding
the level at 900 MHz by 4 dB ±2 dB.

[Link] External Triggering

Test setup Feed in a positive pulse at the input TRIGGER (rear connector) (pulse
duration >100 ns). Tap signal at the DATA output.

Measurement À Settings at the SME

- Level 0 dBm
- RF-frequency 900 MHz
in menu DIGITAL MOD GMSK
- SOURCE DATA
- CLOCK MODE BIT
- SELECT LIST XMEM
- CONFIG XMEM START ADDRESS 59
- CONFIG XMEM LENGTH 4
- CONFIG XMEM EXT TRIGGER ON.
After triggering, the DATA output should change from HIGH to
LOW for approx. 3.7us.

1038.6002.02 5.43 E-13

Performance Test SME

5.3 Performance Test

ROHDE&SCHWARZ SIGNAL GENERATOR SME 1038.6002. ........

Serial number:

Person testing:

Date:

Signature:

Table 5-3 Test report

Item Characteristic Measurem. Min. Actual Max. Unit

acc. to
Section

1 Display and keyboard 5.2.1 checked ........... - -

2 Frequency setting 5.2.2 checked ........... - -
3 Setting time 5.2.3 - ............ 10 ms
4 Reference frequency 5.2.4 - ............
5 Harmonics 5.2.5
Level ≤ 10 dBm - ............ -30 dBc
Level without overrange - ............ -26 dBc

Subharmonics
- ............ -40 dBc
f > 1.5 GHz
- ............ -34 dBc
f > 3.0 GHz

6 Spuriae 5.2.6
RF > 3.0 GHz (SME06) - ........... -68 dBc
-74
RF > 1.5 GHz (SME03E/03/06) - .......... dBc
-80
RF ≤ 1.5 GHz - ........... dBc

7 SSB phase noise 5.2.7

RF = 90 MHz - ........... -129 dBc (1 Hz)
RF = 125 MHz - ........... -140 dBc (1 Hz)
RF = 250 MHz - ........... -137 dBc (1 Hz)
RF = 500 MHz - ........... -132 dBc (1 Hz)
RF = 1000 MHz - ........... -126 dBc (1 Hz)
RF = 2000 MHz (SME03E/03/06) - ........... -120 dBc (1 Hz)
RF = 3000 MHz (SME03/06) - .......... -110 dBc (1 Hz)
RF = 6000 MHz (SME06) - ........... -116 dBc (1 Hz)

8 Broadband noise 5.2.8 - ........... -140 dBc (1 Hz)

9 Residual FM with RF=1 GHz 5.2.9 - ........... 4 Hz
10 Residual AM 5.2.10 - ........... 0.02 %

1038.6002.02 5.44 E-13

SME Performance Test

Item Characteristic Measurem. Min. Actual Max. Unit

acc. to
Section

11 Output level 5.2.11

Frequency response - ........... 1 dB
Deviation from the rated value
RF ≤ 3 GHz - ........... 1 dB
RF > 3 GHz - ........... 1 dB
12 Output reflection coefficient 5.2.12
Test level ≤ 0 dBm, f ≤ 3 GHz - ........... 1.5 (VSWR)

Test level ≤ 0 dBm, f > 3 GHz - ........... 2.0 (VSWR)

Test level > 0 dBm - ........... 2.0 (VSWR)

Test level > 0 dBm, f > 5 GHz, with SM- - ........... 2.5 (VSWR)
B9
13 Interrupt-free level setting 5.2.13
-5 dB
-10 dB -5.2 .............. -4.8 dB
-15 dB -10.4 .............. -9.6 dB
-20 dB -15.6 .............. -14.4 dB
-20.8 .............. -19.2 dB
14 Overvoltage protection 5.2.14
(SME02/03 only)
D.c. voltage 4 .............. 7 V
RF supply 0.5 .............. 1 W
15 Level monitoring EXT1 5.2.15
lower limit 0.97 .............. 0.99 V
upper limit 1.01 .............. 1.03 V
16 AM modulation depth 5.2.16
80% 75.8 .............. 84.2 %
30 % 27.8 .............. 32.2 %
17 AM frequency response 5.2.17
20 Hz to 50 kHz - .............. 1 dB
18 AM distortion factor 5.2.18
with AM 30% - .............. 1 %
with AM 80% - .............. 2 %
19 Residual PhiM with AM 5.2.19
RF ≤ 3 GHz - ............. 0.1 rad

RF > 3 GHz - ............. 1.0 rad

20 Level monitoring EXT2 5.2.20

lower limit 0.97 .............. 0.99 V
upper limit 1.01 .............. 1.03 V

1038.6002.02 5.45 E-13

Performance Test SME

Item Characteristic Measurem. Min. Actual Max. Unit

acc. to
Section

21 FM deviation setting 5.2.21

with 300 Hz 271 .............. 31 Hz
9
with 1 kHz 0.95 ............. kHz
1.0
with 3 kHz 2.89 ............... 5 kHz
with 10 kHz 9.68 .............. 3.1 kHz
with 30 kHz 29.08 ............. 1 kHz
with100 kHz 96.98 .............. 10. kHz
32
with 250 kHz 242.5 .............. kHz
30.
92
10
3.02
25
7.5
22 FM frequency response 5.2.22
EXT1 10 Hz to 100 kHz - .............. 0.5 dB
EXT2 10 Hz to 100 kHz - .............. 0.5 dB
EXT1 10 Hz to 2 MHz - .............. 3 dB
EXT2 10 Hz to 2 MHz - .............. 3 dB
23 FM distortion factor 5.2.23 - ............ 0.5 %
24 FM preemphasis 5.2.24
50 µs - ............ 5 %
75 µs - ............ 5 %
25 Residual AM with FM 5.2.25 - ............. 0.1 %
26 Frequency deviation with FM 5.2.26
Deviation 0 Hz - ............. 50 Hz
Deviation 200 kHz - ............. 2050 Hz
27 FM stereo modulation 5.2.27
Distortion factor - .............. 0.1 %
External voltage suppression 76 .............. - dB
Noise voltage suppression 76 .............. - dB
Channel separation 50 .............. - dB
28 PhiM deviation string 5.2.28
with 30 mrad 19 .............. 41 mrad
with 0.1 rad 0.087 .............. 0.113 rad
with 0.3 rad 0.281 .............. 0.319 rad
with 1.0 rad 0.96 .............. 1.040 rad
with 3.0 rad 2.90 .............. 3.10 rad
with 10 rad 9.69 .............. 10.31 rad
29 PhiM frequency response 5.2.29
EXT1 - .............. 3 dB
EXT2 - .............. 3 dB

1038.6002.02 5.46 E-13

SME Performance Test

Item Characteristic Measurem. Min. Actual Max. Unit

acc. to
Section

30 PhiM distortion factor 5.2.30 - .............. 1 %

31 Int. modulation generator 5.2.31
Frequency 400 Hz 388 .............. 412 Hz
Frequency 1 kHz 970 .............. 1030 Hz
Frequency 3 kHz 2910 .............. 3090 Hz
Frequency 15 kHz 14.55 .............. 15.45 kHz
Level 990 .............. 1010 mV
32 Pulse modulation 5.2.32
ON/OFF ratio 80 .............. - dB
Rising time - .............. 10 ns
Fall time - .............. 10 ns
Delay time - .............. 70 ns
33 GFSK modulation 5.2.33
Spectrum checked .............. - kHz
Deviation external "LOW" -298 .............. -278 kHz
Deviation external "HIGH" +278 .............. +298
Level DATA checked .............. - kHz
Frequency DATA 575.4 .............. 576.6
Level BURST checked .............. - kHz
Frequency BURST 575.4 .............. 576.6
Level CLOCK checked .............. - kHz
Frequency CLOCK 1150.85 .............. 1153.15 %
Deviation error - .............. 7
Square-wave signal %
Amplitude -3 .............. +3 %
Overshoot .............. 3
34 QPSK modulation 5.2.34
Spectrum checked .............. -
Vector error - .............. 2.5 %
35 GMSK modulation 5.2.35
Spectrum checked .............. -
Phase error RMS - .............. 1 %
Phase error peak - .............. 3 %

1038.6002.02 5.47 E-13

Performance Test SME

Item Characteristic Measurem. Min. Actual Max. Unit

acc. to
Section

36 FFSK modulation 5.2.36

"HIGH" sequence
Peak deviation 3880 ............ 4120 Hz
Modulation frequency 1164 ............ 1236 Hz
Distortion factor - ............ 1 %
"LOW" sequence
Peak deviation 3880 ............ 4120 Hz
Modulation frequency 1746 ............ 1854 Hz
Distortion factor - ............ 1 %
37 LF generator 5.2.37
Frequency error - .............. 1E-04 -
Distortion factor - .............. 0,1 %
Level 3 mV 2 .............. 4 mV
Level 10 mV 8.9 .............. 11.1 mV
Level 30 mV 28.7 .............. 31.3 mV
Level 100 mV 98.0 .............. 102.0 mV
Level 300 mV 296 .............. 304 mV
Level 1 V 0.989 .............. 1.011 V
Level 2 V 1.979 .............. 2.021 V
Level 4 V 3.959 .............. 4.041 V
Frequency resp. up to 100 kHz - .............. 0.3 dB
Frequency resp. up to 400 kHz - .............. 0.5 dB
38 Pulse generator 5.2.38
Pulse period checked .............. -
Pulse width -5% -3 ns .............. +5% +3 ns
Pulse delay -5% -3 ns .............. +5% +3 ns
Double pulse spacing -5% -10 ns .............. +5% +20 ns
Trigger delay - .............. 50 ns

1038.6002.02 5.48 E-13

SME Performance Test

Item Characteristic Measurem. Min. Actual Max. Unit

acc. to
Section

39 Multi-function generator 5.2.39

Frequency error - .............. 1E04 -
Distortion factor - .............. 0.1 %
Level ..............
3 mV 2 .............. 4 mV
10 mV 8.9 .............. 11.1 mV
30 mV 28.7 .............. 31.3 mV
100 mV 98.0 .............. 102.0 mV
300 mV 296 .............. 304 mV
1V 0.989 .............. 1.011 V
2V 1.979 .............. 2.021 V
4V 3.959 .............. 4.041 V
Frequency resp. up to 100 kHz - .............. 0.3 dB
Frequency resp. up to 500 kHz - .............. 0.5 dB
Stereo ..............
Crosstalk attenuation 60 .............. - dB
Distortion factor - .............. 0.1 %
Pilot-tone level 0.693 .............. 0.721 V
40 Memory extension 5.2.40
(option SME-B12)
Read in/read out checked .............. - -
Dibit synchronization checked .............. - -
External triggering checked .............. - -

1038.6002.02 5.49 E-13

SME IEC/IEEE Bus Interface

Annex A

IEC/IEEE Bus Interface

The instrument is equipped with an IEC/IEEE-bus connection as a standard. The mating connector
according to IEEE 488 is at the rear of the instrument. A controller for remote control can be connected
via the interface. The connection is effected using a shielded cable.

Characteristics of the Interface

ì 8-bit parallel data transfer

ì bidirectional data transfer
ì three line handshake
ì high data transfer rate of max. 350 kByte/s
ì up to 15 devices can be connected
ì maximal length of the connecting cables 15 m (single connection 2m)
ì wired OR if several instruments are connected in parallel.

ATN IFC NRFD EOI DIO3 DIO1

shield SRQ NDAC DAV DIO4 DIO2

12 1
24 13

logic GND GND(10) GND(8) GND(6) REN DIO7

GND(11) GND(9) GND(7) DIO8 DIO6 DIO5

Fig. A-1 Contact Assigment of the IEC-bus socket

Bus Lines

1. Data bus with 8 lines DIO 1 to DIO 8.

The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. DIO1 is the bit of lowest order,
DIO8 the bit of highest order.

1038.6002.02 6A.1 E-12

IEC/IEEE Bus Interface SME

2. Control bus with 5 lines.

IFC (Interface Clear),
active low resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting.

ATN (Attention),
active low signals the transmission of interface messages
inactive high signals the transmission of device-dependent messages.

SRQ (Service Request),

active low enables a device connected to send a service request to the controller.

REN (Remote Enable),

active low permits the switchover to remote control.

EOI (End or Identify),

has two functions in connection with ATN:
active low marks the end of data transmission with ATN=high
active low triggers a parallel poll with ATN=low.

3. Handshake bus with three lines.

DAV (Data Valid),
active low signals a valid data byte on the data bus.

NRFD (Not Ready For Data),

active low signals that one of the device connected is not ready for data transfer.

NDAC (Not Data Accepted),

active low as long as the instrument connected is accepting the data present on the data bus.

Interface Functions
Instruments which can be remote-controlled via IEC bus can be equipped with different interface
functions. Table A-1 lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument.

Table A- 1 Interface function

Control Interface function

character

SH1 Handshake source function (source handshake)

AH1 Handshake drain function (acceptor handshake)
L4 Listener function.
T6 Talker function, ability to respond to serial poll
SR1 Service request function (Service Request)
PP1 Parallel poll function
RL1 Remote/Local switchover function
DC1 Resetting function (Device Clear)
DT1 Trigger function (Device Trigger)

1038.6002.02 6A.2 E-12

SME IEC/IEEE Bus Interface

Interface Messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the attention line being
active (LOW). They serve to communicate between instrument and controller.

Universal Commands
The universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They are effective for all
instruments connected to the bus without addressing them before.

Table A- 2 Universal Commands

Command QuickBASIC commandl Effect on the instrument

DCL (Device Clear) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(20)) Aborts the processing of the commands just received
and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
setting.

IFC (Interface Clear) IBSIC (controller%) Resets the interfaces to the default setting.

LLO (Local Lockout) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(17)) The LOC/IEC ADDR key is disabled.

SPE (Serial Poll Enable) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(24)) Ready for serial poll

SPD (Serial Poll Disable) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(25)) End of serial poll

PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure) IBCMD (controller%, CHR$(21)) End of the parallel-poll polling state

Addressed Commands
The addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex. They are only effective for
instruments addressed as listeners.

Table A- 3 Addressed Commands

Command QuickBASIC commandl Effect on the instrument

SDC (Selected Device IBCLR (device%) Aborts the processing of the commands just received
Clear) and sets the command processing software to a
defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
setting.

GET (Group Execute IBTRG (device%) Triggers a previously active device function (eg a
Trigger) sweep). The effect of the command is the same as
with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input.

GTL (Go to Local) IBLOC (device%) Transition to the "Local" state (manual control)

PPC (Parallel Poll IBPPC (device%, data%) Configure instrument for parallel poll. The
Configure) QuickBASIC command additionally executes PPE /
PPD.

1038.6002.02 6A.3 E-12

RS-232-C Interface SME

RS-232-C Interface

The instrument is fitted with an RS-232-C interface as standard. The 9-pin connector is at the rear
panel. A controller can be connected via this interface for remote control.

Interface characteristics

ì Serial data transmission in asynchronous mode

ì Bidirectional data transmission via two separate lines
ì Transmission rate selectable from 1200 to 115200 baud
ì Logic 0 signal from +3 V to +15 V
ì Logic 1 signal from -15 V to -3 V
ì An external instrument (controller) can be connected
ì Software handshake (XON, XOFF)
ì Hardware handshake
RxD DTR
TxD

1 5

6 9

RTS
DSR CTS

Fig. A-2 Pin assigment of RS-232-C connector

Signal lines

RxD (Receive Data),

Data line, transmission from external controller to instrument.

TxD (Transmit Data),

Data line, transmission from instrument to external controller.

DTR (Data terminal ready),

Output (log. 0 = active). With DTR, the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data. The
DTR line controls whether the instrument is ready for reception or not.

GND,
Interface ground, connected to instrument ground.

DSR (Data set ready),

(Instead of the CTS line, the DSR connector is used for instruments with a VAR2 REV3 front
module.)

RTS (Request to send),

Output (log 0 = active). With RTS, the instrument indicates that it is ready to receive data. The
RTS line controls whether the instrument is ready for reception or not.

CTS (Clear to send),

Input (log 0 = active). CTS tells the instrument that the opposite station is ready to receive data.

1038.6002.02 6A.4 E-12

SME RS-232-C Interface

Transmission parameters
To ensure an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the instrument and the
controller should have the same settings. The parameters are set in menu UTILITIES-SYSTEM-RS232.

Transmission rate The following baud rates can be set in the instrument:
(baud rate) 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200.

Data bits Data transmission is in 8-bit ASCII code. The first bit transmitted
is the LSB (Least Significant Bit).

Start bit Each data byte begins with a start bit. The falling edge of the start
bit indicates the beginning of the data byte.

Parity bit A parity bit is not used.

Stop bit The transmission of a data byte is terminated by a stop bit.

Example:
Transmission of character A (41 hex) in the 8-bit ASCII code.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

Bit 01 = Start bit Bit 02...09 = Data bits Bit 10 = Stop bit
Bitduration= 1/baud rate

Interface functions
For interface control, some control characters defined from 0 to 20 hex of the ASCII code can be
transmitted via the interface (see Table A-4).

Table A- 4 Interface functions (RS-232-C)

Control character Interface function

<Ctrl Q> 11 hex Enables character output (XON)

<Ctrl S> 13 hex Inhibits character output (XOFF)

Break (at least 1 character only log 0) Reset instrument

0Dhex, 0Ahex Terminator <CR>, <LF>

Switchover between local/remote

1038.6002.02 6A.5 E-12

RS-232-C Interface SME

Handshake

Software handshake
The software handshake with the XON/XOFF protocol controls data transmission. If the receiver wishes
to inhibit data entry, it sends XOFF to the transmitter. The transmitter then interrupts the data output
until it receives a XON. The same function is provided at the transmitter side (controller).

Note: Software handshake is not suitable for transmission of binary data. Use the hardware handshake.

Hardware handshake
In case of a hardware handshake the instrument signals that it is ready for reception via line DTR and
RTS. A logic 0 means "ready" and a 1 means "not ready". Whether the controller is ready for reception
or not is signalled to the instrument via lines CTS or DSR (see signal lines). The transmitter of the
instrument is switched on by a 0 and off by a 1. Line RTS remains active as long as the serial interface
is active. Line DTR controls whether the instrument is ready for reception or not.

Connection between instrument and controller

Connection of the instrument with the controller is via a so-called 0-modem cable. In this case, the data,
control and signalling lines have to be cross-connected. For a controller with a 9-pin or 25-pin connector
the following circuit diagram applies.

SME Controller SME Controller

9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 25 pin
1 ------------------------------------- 1 1 ------------------------------------- 8
2 ------------RxD / TxD--------------- 3 2 ------------RxD / TxD--------------- 2
3 ------------TxD / RxD--------------- 2 3 ------------TxD / RxD--------------- 3
4 ------------DTR /DSR--------------- 6 4 ------------DTR /DSR--------------- 6
5 ------------GND / GND------------- 5 5 ------------GND / GND------------- 7
6 ------------DSR / DTR-------------- 4 6 ------------DSR / DTR-------------- 20
7 ------------RTS / CTS-------------- 8 7 ------------RTS / CTS-------------- 5
8 ------------CTS / RTS-------------- 7 8 ------------CTS / RTS-------------- 4
9 ------------------------------------- 9 9 ------------------------------------- 22

Fig. A-3 Wiring of data, control and signalling lines for hardware handshake

1038.6002.02 6A.6 E-12

SME List of Error Messages

Annex B

List of Error Messages

The following list contains all error messages for errors occurring in the instrument. The meaning of
negative error codes is defined in SCPI, positive error codes mark errors specific of the instrument.

The table contains the error code in the left-hand column. In the right-hand column the error text being
entered into the error/event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face. Below the error text, there
is an explanation as to the respective error.

SCPI-Specific Error Messages

No Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

0 No error
This message is output if the error queue does not contain entries.

Command Error - Faulty command; sets bit 5 in the ESR register

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-100 Command Error

The command is faulty or invalid.

-101 Invalid Character

The command contains an invalid sign.
Example: A header contains an ampersand, "SOURCE&".

-102 Syntax error

The command is invalid.
Example: The command contains block data the instrument does not accept.

-103 Invalid separator

The command contains an impermissible sign instead of a separator.
Example: A semicolon is missing after the command.

-104 Data type error

The command contains an invalid value indication.
Example: ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting.

-105 GET not allowed

A Group Execute Trigger (GET) is within a command line.

-108 Parameter not allowed

The command contains too many parameters.
Example: Command SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency permits only one frequency indication.

1038.6002.02 7B.1 E-11

List of Error Messages SME

Continuation: Command Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-109 Missing parameter

The command contains too few parameters.
Example: Command SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency requires a frequency indication.

-112 Program mnemonic too long

The header contains more than 12 signs.

-113 Undefined header

The header is not defined for the instrument.
Example: *XYZ is undefined for every instrument.

-114 Header suffix out of range

The header contains an impermissible numeric suffix.
Example: SOURce3 does not exist in the instrument.

-123 Exponent too large

The absolute value of the exponent is larger than 32000.

-124 Too many digits

The number contains too many digits.

-128 Numeric data not allowed

The command contains a number which is not allowed at this position.
Example: Command SOURce:FREQuency:MODE requires the indication of a text parameter.

-131 Invalid suffix

The suffix is invalid for this instrument.
Example: nHz is not defined.

-134 Suffix too long

The suffix contains more than 12 signs.

-138 Suffix not allowed

A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command.
Example: Command *RCL does not permit indicating a suffix.

-141 Invalid character data

The text parameter either contains an invalid sign or it is invalid for this command
Example: write error with parameter indication; SOURce:FREQuency:MODE FIKSed.

-144 Character data too long

The text parameter contains more than 12 signs.

-148 Character data not allowed

The text parameter is not allowed for this command or at this position of the command.
Example: Command *RCL requires a number to be indicated.

-158 String data not allowed

The command contains a valid character string at a position which is not allowed.
Example: A text parameter is set in quotation marks, SOURce:FREQuency:MODE "FIXed"

-161 Invalid block data

The command contains faulty block data.
Example: An END message was received before the expected number of data had been received.

1038.6002.02 7B.2 E-11

SME List of Error Messages

Execution Error - Error in executing the command; sets bit 4 in the ESR register

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-168 Block data not allowed

The command contains valid block data at an impermissible position.

-178 Expression data not allowed

The command contains a mathematical expression at an impermissible position.

-203 Command protected

The desired command could not be executed as it was protected with a password. Use command
SYSTem:PROTect OFF, <password> to enable the command.
Example: The command CALibrate:PULSe:MEASure? is protected with a password.

-211 Trigger ignored

The trigger (GET, *TRG or trigger signal) was ignored due to device timing considerations.

-221 Settings conflict

There is a settings conflict between two parameters.
Example: FM1 and PM1 cannot be switched on at the same time.

-222 Data out of range

The parameter value is out of the range permitted by the instrument.
Example: Command *RCL only permits entries in the range of 0 to 50

-223 Too much data

The command contains too many data.
Example: The instrument does not have sufficient storage space.

-224 Illegal parameter value

The parameter value is invalid.
Example: An invalid text parameter is indicated, TRIGger:SWEep:SOURce TASTe

-225 Out of memory

The storage space available in the instrument is exhausted.
Example: An attempt is made to create more than 10 Memory Sequence lists.

-226 Lists not of same length

The parts of a list have different lengths. This error message is also displayed if only part of a list has
been transmitted via IEC bus. All parts of the list have to be transmitted always before it is executed.
Example: The POWer list content is longer than the FREQuency list content, or only the POWer content
is transmitted.

-230 Data corrupt or stale

The data are incomplete or invalid.
Example: The instrument has aborted a measurement.

-240 Hardware error

The command cannot be executed due to problems with the instrument hardware.

-241 Hardware missing

The command cannot be executed due to missing hardware.
Example: An option is not fitted.

-255 Directory full

The list management cannot accept any more lists as the maximum number of lists has already be
attained.
Example: Only 10 MEM SEQ lists can be created.

1038.6002.02 7B.3 E-11

List of Error Messages SME

Device Specific Error - sets bit 3 in the ESR register.

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-310 System error

This error message suggests an error within the instrument. Please inform the R&S Service.

-311 Memory error

Error in the instrument memory.

-313 Calibration memory lost

Loss of calibration data stored. The calibration data of VCO SUM, LEVEL PRESET and PULSE GEN
can be restored by internal routines (see Chapter 2, Section Calibration).

-314 Save/recall memory lost

Loss of the non-volatile data stored using *SAV? command.

-315 Configuration memory lost

Loss of the non-volatile configuration data stored by the instrument.

-330 Self-test failed

The selftest could not be executed.

-350 Queue overflow

This error code is entered into the queue instead of the actual error code if the queue is full. It indicates
that an error has occurred but not been accepted. The queue can accept 5 entries.

-360 Communication error

An error has occurred during the transmission or reception of data on the IEC/IEEE bus or via the
RS-232 interface.

Query Error - Error in data request; sets bit 2 in the ESR register.

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

-410 Query INTERRUPTED

The query has been interrupted.
Example: After a query, the instrument receives new data before the response has been sent completely.

-420 Query UNTERMINATED

The query is incomplete.
Example: The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data.

-430 Query DEADLOCKED

The query cannot be processed.
Example: The input and output buffers are full, the instrument cannot continue operation.

1038.6002.02 7B.4 E-11

SME List of Error Messages

SME-Specific Error Messages

Device-dependent Error - device-specific error; sets bit 3 in the ESR register.

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

105 Frequency underrange

The frequency is below the limit value guaranteed.

106 Frequency overrange

The frequency is beyond the limit value guaranteed.

110 Output unleveled

The level control loop is deactivated.

115 Level overrange

The level is above the limit value guaranteed.

116 Level underrange

The level is below the limit value guaranteed.

117 Dynamic level range exceeded

The difference between the maximal and minimal value of a level list is above 20 dBm. An exact level
setting is no longer guaranteed.

120 Signal output /ERMES setting mismatch - use RECALCULATE ➤

ERMES settings have been changed during operating mode ERMES. However, the signal output is still
based on the old settings. The output signal is recalculated from the current settings by selecting
RECALCULATE ➤ in manual control or ERMES:STATe OFF; STATe ON via IEC bus.

121 ERMES: Channel/Frequency mismatch

The RF has been readjusted and does no longer match the frequency indicated in the ERMES menu
under CHANNEL.
Setting ERMES CHANNEL does not only determine the RF but also influences the structure of the
ERMES message. Thus the channel cannot simply be changed by readjusting the RF but only via
ERMES CHANNEL and RECALCULATE ➤.

125 Signal output /FLEX setting mismatch - use RECALCULATE ➤

FLEX settings have been changed during operating mode FLEX. However, the signal output is still based
on the old settings. The output signal is recalculated from the current settings by selecting
RECALCULATE ➤ in manual control or FLEX:STATe OFF; STATe ON via IEC bus.

130 FM modulator VCO unlocked

FM modulator VCO is not synchronized.

131 AM modulation frequency out of range

The AM modulation frequency is out of the permissible range.

132 PM modulation frequency out of range

The PM modulation frequency is out of the permissible range.

140 This modulation forces other modulations OFF

A modulation has been switched on which cannot be used at the same time as an already active
modulation. The previous modulation has been switched off.

152 Input voltage out of range; EXT1 too high

The input voltage at the EXT1 socket is too high.

153 Input voltage out of range; EXT1 too low

The input voltage at the EXT1 socket is too low.

1038.6002.02 7B.5 E-11

List of Error Messages SME

Continuation: Device-dependent Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

154 Input voltage out of range; EXT2 too high

The input voltage at the EXT2 socket is too high.

155 Input voltage out of range; EXT2 too low

The input voltage at the EXT2 socket is too low.

161 Output protection tripped

The overvoltage protection has responded (cf. Section 2.5.8).

162 LF output overdriven

The dependency of the LF output voltage on other parameters in stereo operation has caused that the LF
output would have to supply more than 4 volts. However, the voltage has been limited to 4 volts.

171 Oven cold

The reference oscillator has not yet reached its operating temperature.

172 Reference frequency 100 MHz VCXO unlocked

The 100-MHz quartz oscillator of the reference frequency has not been synchronized.

173 Step synthesis unlocked

The step synthesis has not been synchronized.

180 Calibration failed

Calibration could not be executed.

181 REF OSC calibration data not used because ADJUSTMENT STATE is ON
The reference-oscillator calibration data are not used as long as ADJUSTMENT STATE is activated.

182 Calibration data missing

Calibration data are missing in the device memory. The calibration data have to be generated first by an
internal or external calibration or to be loaded into the device.

200 Cannot access hardware

The data transmission to a module was unsuccessful.

201 Function not supported by this hardware revision

A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the function selected.

202 Diagnostic A/D converter failure

Diagnostic A/D converter has failed.

211 Summing loop unlocked

The PLL of the summing loop has not been synchronized.

221 Digital synthesis buffer VCO unlocked

The VCO of the buffer loop has not been synchronized.

231 DATA coder clock unlocked

The clock oscillator of the data coder has not been synchronized.

232 Cannot access data coder RAM

No data can be sent to the data coder. The data coder cannot be used as a source for a digital
modulation.

240 Invalid list; odd number of elements

The list selected contains an odd number of elements. Some lists, such as DM data for QPSK, however,
must contain an even number of elements.

1038.6002.02 7B.6 E-11

SME List of Error Messages

Continuation: Device-dependent Error

Error code Error text in the case of queue poll

Error explanation

241 No list defined

There is no list defined..

242 List not learned; execute LEARn command

The instrument has been switched to LIST mode and a list has been selected. However, command
LEARn has not been executed.

243 Dwell time adjusted

A dwell time given on a list cannot be processed by the unit. The setting was automatically adjusted.

251 No User Correction Table; zero assumed

An attempt has been made to switch on user correction, but no UCOR table has been stored in the
instrument yet. The instrument behaves as if a table was called which only contains 0-values.

260 Invalid keyboard input ignored

An invalid input via the keyboard is not considered.

265 This parameter is read only

An attempt has been made to change a fixedly specified value.

270 Data output aborted

Data output was aborted on the IEC/IEEE-bus.
Example: The key [LOCAL] was pressed.

304 String too long

A character string which is too long was received via the IEC bus. The names of lists may have a length
of maximally seven letters.

305 Fill pattern too long; trunctated

More data have been entered with block function FILL in the list editor than the filling range (RANGE) set
permits. The exceeding data are ignored.

306 No fill pattern specified

An attempt was made to execute a filler function without having to indicate a filler pattern.

1038.6002.02 7B.7 E-11

SME List of Commands

Annex C
List of Commands (with SCPI Conformity Information
The SME supports SCPI version 1994.0. For remote control, commands which were specified or
accepted in this SCPI version have been used to a large extent. Commands which are not part of the
SCPI specification are marked "not-SCPI" in the SCPI info.

Structure and Syntax of messages are explained in Chapter 3.5, and a detailled description of
commands is to be found in Chapter 3.6.

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

:ABORt:DM not-SCPI 3.17

:ABORt:LIST not-SCPI 3.17

:ABORt:MSEQuence not-SCPI 3.17

:ABORt[:SWEep] not-SCPI 3.17

:ABORt:XMEM not-SCPI 3.17

:CALibration:LEVel:DATA? not-SCPI 3.19

:CALibration:LEVel:FRANge NORMal | MIXer not-SCPI 3.19

:CALibration:LEVel:PMODulator ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.19

:CALibration:LEVel:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.19

:CALibration:LPReset:DATA? not-SCPI 3.19

:CALibration:LPReset[:MEASure]? not-SCPI 3.19

:CALibration:PULSe:DATA? not-SCPI 3.20

:CALibration:PULSe[:MEASure]? not-SCPI 3.20

:CALibration:QPSK:STORe not-SCPI 3.18

:CALibration:QPSK[:DATA] 0 to 10 000 ns | DEFault not-SCPI 3.18

:CALibration:ROSCillator[:DATA] 0 to 4095 not-SCPI 3.20

:CALibration:VSUMmation:DAC? not-SCPI 3.20

:CALibration:VSUMmation:KOS? not-SCPI 3.20

:CALibration:VSUMmation[:MEASure]? not-SCPI 3.20

:CALibration:VSUMmation:OFFS? not-SCPI 3.20

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:ATTenuator 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6? 3.21

:DIAGnostic:INFO:CCOunt:POWer? 3.22

1038.6002.02 8C.1 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

:DIAGnostic:INFO:MODules? 3.22

:DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe? 3.22

:DIAGnostic:INFO:SDATe? 3.22

:DIAGnostic[:MEASure]:POINt? 3.22

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:ATTenuate? not-SCPI 3.23

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:BURSt? not-SCPI 3.23

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:CALCulate not-SCPI 3.22

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum:DATA? not-SCPI 3.23

:DIAGnostic:XMEM:CHECksum[:TOTal]? not-SCPI 3.23

:DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL] ON | OFF 3.24

:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude ON | OFF 3.24

:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency ON | OFF 3.24

:FORMat:BORDer NORMal | SWAPped 3.25

:FORMat:DATA ASCii | PACKed 3.25

:MEMory:NSTates? 3.26

:OUTPut:AMODe AUTO | FIXed not-SCPI 3.26

:OUTPut:BLANk:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.27

:OUTPut:IMPedance? 3.27

:OUTPut:PROTection:CLEar 3.27

:OUTPut:PROTection:TRIPped? 3.27

:OUTPut[:STATe] ON | OFF 3.27

:OUTPut[:STATe]:PON OFF | UNCHanged not-SCPI 3.27

:OUTPut2:SOURce 0|2 not-SCPI 3.28

:OUTPut2:SOURce:STEReo MPX | PILot not-SCPI 3.28

:OUTPut2[:STATe] ON | OFF 3.28

:OUTPut2:VOLTage 0 V to 4 V not-SCPI 3.28

[:SOURce]:AM[:DEPTh] 0 to 100 PCT 3.30

[:SOURce]:AM:EXTernal:COUPling AC | DC 3.30

1038.6002.02 8C.2 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or 3.31

0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to1 MHz

[:SOURce]:AM:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.31

[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce EXT | INT1|2 | EXT, INT1|2 3.31

[:SOURce]:AM:STATe ON | OFF 3.31

[:SOURce]:CORRection[:STATe] ON | OFF 3.32

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.32

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] ’Name of table’ not-SCPI 3.32

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency 5 kHz to 1.5/2.2/3/6 GHz not-SCPI 3.33

{,5 kHz to 1.5/2.2/3/6 GHz}

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer -40dB to 6dB {,-40dB to 6dB} not-SCPI 3.33

[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete ’Name of table’ not-SCPI 3.33

[:SOURce]:DM:MGRoup? not-SCPI 3.35

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:TYPE GMSK | GFSK | QPSK | FSK | FSK4 | not-SCPI 3.36

FFSK

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:STATe ON | OFF 3.36

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:SOURce EXTernal | PRBS | DATA 3.36

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:CLOCk:MODE BIT | SYMBol not-SCPI 3.36

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:CLOCk:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.36

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:CLOCk:SOURce INTernal | COUPled not-SCPI 3.37

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.37

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DELete ’Name’ not-SCPI 3.37

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DELete:ALL not-SCPI 3.37

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:FREE? not-SCPI 3.37

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:SELect ’Name’ not-SCPI 3.37

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DATA 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1} not-SCPI 3.38

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:DATA:POINts? not-SCPI 3.38

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ATTenuate 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1} not-SCPI 3.38

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ATTenuate:POINts? not-SCPI 3.38

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:BURSt 0 | 1 {, 0 | 1 not-SCPI 3.38

1038.6002.02 8C.3 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:BURSt:POINts? not-SCPI 3.38

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ALEVel 0 to 60 dB not-SCPI 3.39

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:ALEVel:MODE NORM | MAX not-SCPI 3.39

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:STARt 1 to 8388478 (XMEM:MODE = DATA) | not-SCPI 3.39

1 to 1048558 (XMEM:MODE = ALL)

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:LENGth 3 to 8388480 (XMEM:MODE = DATA) | not-SCPI 3.39

3 to 1048560 (XMEM:MODE = ALL)

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:LENGth:AUTO ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.39

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:MODE DATA | ALL not-SCPI 3.39

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:RECord not-SCPI 3.40

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:TRIGger ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.40

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:DATA:XMEM:TRIGger:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative not-SCPI 3.40

[:SOURce]:DM[:BASic]:PRBS:LENGth 9 | 15 | 20 | 21 | 23 not-SCPI 3.40

[:SOURce]:DM:COMPlex:CLOCk:SOURce INT | EXT not-SCPI 3.40

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:STANdard GSM |PCN | CDPD | MC9 | MOBitex | not-SCPI 3.41

MD24N | MD24W | MD36N | MD36W |
MD48N | MD48W | MD80W | MD96N |
MD96W | MD100W | MD120W | DSRR |
DSRR4K

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:BRATe 2.4 kb/s to 1000 kb/s not-SCPI 3.42

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:DCODer ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.42

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:FILTer 0.2 | 0.25 | 0.3 | 0.4 | 0.5 not-SCPI 3.42

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:GSLope ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.43

[:SOURce]:DM:GMSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.43

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:STANdard DECT | CT2 | CT3 not-SCPI 3.43

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:BRATe 10 to 585 kb/s and 640 to 1170 kb/s not-SCPI 3.43

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:DEViation 14 | 14.4 | 18 | 20.0 | 25.2 | 160 | 180 | not-SCPI 3.44

202 | 259 | 288 | 317 | 403 kHz

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:FILTer 0.4 | 0.5 | 0.6 | 0.7 not-SCPI 3.44

[:SOURce]:DM:GFSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.44

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:STANdard NADC | PDC | TFTS | TETRa | APCO | not-SCPI 3.44

MSAT | INMarsat

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:TYPE PSK | 0QPSk | PI4Qpsk | PI4Dqpsk not-SCPI 3.45

1038.6002.02 8C.4 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:BRATe 1 to 24.3 kb/s and 27.0 to 48.6 kb/s not-SCPI 3.45

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:CODing NADC | PDC | TFTS | TETRa | APCO | not-SCPI 3.45

MSAT | INMarsat

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:FILTer COSine|SCOSine , 0.35|0.4|0.5|0.6 | not-SCPI 3.46

COSine, 0.2

[:SOURce]:DM:QPSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.46

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:STANdard POCSag512| POCSag1200| not-SCPI 3.46

POCSag2400| CITYruf512|
CITYruf1200| CITYruf2400 | FLEX1600 |
FLEX3200

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:BRATe 0.05 to 1900 kb/s (with FILTer OFF), not-SCPI 3.47

0.05 to 90 kb/s (with FILTer switched on)

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:DEViation 0 to 400 kHz not-SCPI 3.47

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:FILTer GAUSs, 2.73 | BESSel, 1.22 | not-SCPI 3.47

BESSel, 2.44 | OFF

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.47

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:STANdard ERMes | APCO | MODacom | FLEX3200 not-SCPI 3.47

| FLEX6400

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:BRATe 1 to 24.3 kb/s | 27.0 to 48.6 kb/s not-SCPI 3.48

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:CODing ERMes | APCO | MODacom | FLEX not-SCPI 3.48

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:DEViation 0.01 to 400 kHz not-SCPI 3.48

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:FILTer BESSel, 1.22|1.25|2.44 | COS|SCOS, not-SCPI 3.48

0.2

[:SOURce]:DM:FSK4:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.48

[:SOURce]:DM:FFSK:STANdard POCSag not-SCPI 3.48

[:SOURce]:DM:FFSK:BRATe 0.05 to 90 kb/s not-SCPI 3.48

[:SOURce]:DM:FFSK[:DEViation] 1.5 kHz | 2.0 kHz | 3.0 kHz | 3.5 kHz | not-SCPI 3.48
4.0 kHz | 4.5 kHz

[:SOURce]:ERMes:CHANnel 0 to 15 not-SCPI 3.50

[:SOURce]:ERMes:ERRor:BATCh A to P {,A to P} not-SCPI 3.50

[:SOURce]:ERMes:ERRor:MASK 0 to 1073741823 not-SCPI 3.50

[:SOURce]:ERMes:ERRor:WORD 0 to 153 (0 to 189 for long batch) not-SCPI 3.50

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA ’String’ not-SCPI 3.51

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] ²FOX | ALPHA | USER1 to 4" 3.51

1038.6002.02 8C.5 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric | NUMeric | TONE not-SCPI 3.51

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:IA | IADDress 0 to 262143 not-SCPI 3.51

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:NUMeric ’ String’ not-SCPI 3.51

[:SOURce]:ERMes:MESSage:TONE 0 to 15 not-SCPI 3.52

[:SOURce]:ERMes:NINFormation:OPERator 0 to 7 not-SCPI 3.52

[:SOURce]:ERMes:NINFormation:PA | PARea 0 to 63 not-SCPI 3.52

[:SOURce]:ERMes:NINFormation:ZCOuntry 0 to 799 not-SCPI 3.52

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SEQuence:DBATch A to P not-SCPI 3.52

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:BAI ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.52

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:DOMonth 1 to 31 not-SCPI 3.53

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:ETI ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.53

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:FSI 0 to 30 not-SCPI 3.53

[:SOURce]:ERMes:SI|SINFormation:TIME 00.00 to 23.59 not-SCPI 3.53

[:SOURce]:ERMes:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.49

[:SOURce]:ERMes:STATe:AUTO ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.50

[:SOURce]:ERMes:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE not-SCPI 3.53

[:SOURce]:FLEX:CYCLe 0 to 14 not-SCPI 3.55

[:SOURce]:FLEX:DEViation 2.0 to 10.0 kHz not-SCPI 3.55

[:SOURce]:FLEX:ERRor:MASK 0 to 4294967295 not-SCPI 3.55

[:SOURce]:FLEX:ERRor:WORD 0 to 87 not-SCPI 3.55

[:SOURce]:FLEX:FCONtent ’X | blank spaces | O | A [,X| blank not-SCPI 3.56

spaces | O | A ]’

[:SOURce]:FLEX:FCONtent:AUTO ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.56

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.58

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA ’String’ not-SCPI 3.58

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] ’FOX’ | ’ALPHA’ | ’USER1’ | ’USER2’ | not-SCPI 3.57

’USER3’ | ’USER4’

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:BLENgth 1 to 16 not-SCPI 3.58

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.58

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:DATA ’0 | 1 [,0 | 1]’ not-SCPI 3.58

1038.6002.02 8C.6 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary:TYPE LEFT | RIGHt | TRANsparent | THEader not-SCPI 3.58

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:BINary[:SELect] ’USER1 3.58

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:CAPCode ’Capcode string’ not-SCPI 3.57

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:CATegory ALPHanumeric | SECure | BINary | not-SCPI 3.57

NUMeric | SNUMeric | TONE

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:MDRop ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.59

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:MNUMbering ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.59

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:NUMeric ’String’ not-SCPI 3.59

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:REPeats 0 to 3 not-SCPI 3.59

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MESSage:TONE 0 to 7 not-SCPI 3.59

[:SOURce]:FLEX:MODulation 1600, FSK2 | 3200, FSK2 | 3200,FSK4 | not-SCPI 3.56

6400,FSK4

[:SOURce]:FLEX:PHASe A | B | C | D | AB | AC | AD | BC | BD | not-SCPI 3.56

CD | ABC | ABD | ACD | BCD | ABCD

[:SOURce]:FLEX:PHASe:AUTO ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.57

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation:COLLapse 0 to 7 not-SCPI 3.59

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation:CZONe 0 to 31 not-SCPI 3.60

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation:DATE Year, month, day not-SCPI 3.60

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation:LCHannel 0 to 511 not-SCPI 3.60

[:SOURce]:FLEX:SI|SINFormation:TIME 00,00 to 23,59 not-SCPI 3.60

[:SOURce]:FLEX:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.55

[:SOURce]:FLEX:STATe:AUTO ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.55

[:SOURce]:FLEX:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE not-SCPI 3.60

[:SOURce]:FM1|2[:DEViation] 0 to 1 MHz; 3.61

SME03/03E: 0 to 2 MHz;
SME06: 0 to 4 MHz

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:EXTernal1|2:COUPling AC | DC 3.61

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:INTernal:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or 3.62

0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:PREemphasis 0 | 50 us | 75 us 3.62

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 3.62

[:SOURce]:FM1|2:STATe ON | OFF 3.62

1038.6002.02 8C.7 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:CENTer 5 kHz to1.5 GHz 3.63

(SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:MANual 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz 3.64

(SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST 3.64

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:OFFSet -50 to +50 GHz 3.64

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:SPAN 0 to 1.5 GHz 3.64

(SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:STARt 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz 3.64

(SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] 0 to 1 GHz 3.65

[:SOURce]:FREQuency:STOP 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz 3.65

(SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] 5 kHz to1.5 GHz 3.63

(SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to 2.2/3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:RCL INCLude | EXCLude 3.63

[:SOURce]:ILS:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.67

[:SOURce]:ILS:SOURce INT2 | INT2, EXT not-SCPI 3.67

[:SOURce]:ILS:TYPE GS|GSLope | LOCalize not-SCPI 3.67

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.68

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz not-SCPI 3.68

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.68

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:CURRent - 685 uA to + 685 uA not-SCPI 3.68

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:DIRection UP | DOWN not-SCPI 3.68

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM:LOGarithmic] - 999.9 dB to + 999.9 dB not-SCPI 3.68

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:DDM[:DEPTh] - 0.8 to+ 0.8 not-SCPI 3.68

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:LLOBe[:FREQuency] 100 to 200 Hz not-SCPI 3.69

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:MODE NORM | ULOBe | LLOBe not-SCPI 3.67

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLOpe]:PHASe 0 to 120 deg not-SCPI 3.69

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:PRESet not-SCPI 3.69

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:SODepth 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.69

[:SOURce]:ILS[:GS|GSLope]:ULOBe[:FREQuency] 60 to 120 Hz not-SCPI 3.69

1038.6002.02 8C.8 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.70

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz not-SCPI 3.70

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.70

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:CURRENT -387 to +387 uA not-SCPI 3.71

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:DIRection LEFT | RIGHt not-SCPI 3.71

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM:LOGarithmic -999.9 dB to +999.9 dB not-SCPI 3.71

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:DDM[:DEPTh] -0.4 to +0.4 not-SCPI 3.71

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:LLOBe[:FREQuency] 60 to 120 Hz not-SCPI 3.71

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:MODE NORM | LLOBe | RLOBe not-SCPI 3.70

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:PHASe 0 to 120 deg not-SCPI 3.72

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:PRESet not-SCPI 3.72

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:RLOBe[:FREQuency] 100 to 200 Hz not-SCPI 3.72

[:SOURce]:ILS:LOCalizer:SODepth 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.72

[:SOURce]:LIST:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.73

[:SOURce]:LIST:DELete ‘ Name of list’ not-SCPI 3.73

[:SOURce]:LIST:DELete:ALL not-SCPI 3.73

[:SOURce]:LIST:DWELl 1 ms to 1 s {, 1 ms to 1 s} 3.74

[:SOURce]:LIST:DWELl:POINts? 3.74

[:SOURce]:LIST:FREE? 3.74

[:SOURce]:LIST:FREQuency 5 kHz to1.5 GHz {, 5 kHz to1.5 GHz}| 3.74

block data (SME03/06: 5 kHz to3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts? 3.74

[:SOURce]:LIST:LEARn not-SCPI 3.74

[:SOURce]:LIST:MODE AUTO | STEP not-SCPI 3.75

[:SOURce]:LIST:POWer -144 to16 dBm {, -144 to16 dBm} | 3.75

block data

[:SOURce]:LIST:POWer:POINts? 3.75

[:SOURce]:LIST:SELect ’Name of list’ not SCPI 3.75

[:SOURce]:[:FSWeep]:AMPLitude ON | OFF 3.76

[:SOURce]:[:FSWeep]:AOFF 3.76

1038.6002.02 8C.9 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:[:FSWeep]:FREQuency 5 kHz to 1.5 GHz 3.76

(SME03E/03/06: 5 kHz to F/3/6 GHz)

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep][:STATe] ON | OFF 3.77

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep:AOFF not-SCPI 3.77

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep:POWer -144 dBm to+16 dBm not-SCPI 3.77

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:PSWeep[:STATe] ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.77

[:SOURce]:MARKer1|2|3:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.77

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.78

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz not-SCPI 3.78

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.78

[:SOURce]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.78

[:SOURce]:MBEacon[:MARKer]:FREQuency 400 Hz | 1300 Hz | 3000 Hz not-SCPI 3.78

[:SOURce]:MBEacon:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.78

[:SOURce]:PHASe[:ADJust] -360 deg to +360 deg not-SCPI 3.79

[:SOURce]:PHASe:REFerence not-SCPI 3.79

[:SOURce]:PM1|2[:DEViation] -360 to +360 deg 3.80

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:EXTernal1|2:COUPling AC | DC 3.80

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:INTernal:FREQuency 400 kHz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or 3.81

0.1 Hz to500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to1 MHz

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 3.81

[:SOURce]:PM1|2:STATe ON | OFF 3.81

[:SOURce]:POCSag:BRATe 512bps | 1200bps | 2400bps not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:DEViation 1.5 | 2.0 | 3.0 | 3.5 | 4.0 | 4.5 kHz not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:ERRor:MASK 0 to 4294967295 not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:ERRor:WORD 0 to 16 not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:LBATches 0 to 100 not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ADDRess 0 to 209715 not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.84

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA ’String’ not-SCPI 3.84

1038.6002.02 8C.10 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] 3.84

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:CATegory NUMeric | TONE | ALPHanumeric not-SCPI 3.83

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:NUMeric ’String’ not-SCPI 3.84

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:SWORd POCSag | INForuf not-SCPI 3.84

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MESSage:TONE A|B|C|D not-SCPI 3.84

[:SOURce]:POCSag:MODulation FSK | FFSK not-SCPI 3.82

[:SOURce]:POCSag:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.85

[:SOURce]:POCSag:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.82

[:SOURce]:POCSag:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE not-SCPI 3.85

[:SOURce]:POCSag:TSLice 2 to 120 sec not-SCPI 3.85

[:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth | BWIDth:AUTO ON | OFF | ONCE not-SCPI 3.86

[:SOURce]:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth|BWIDth 100 kHz | 500 kHz not-SCPI 3.86

[:SOURce]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] ON | OFF 3.87

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] -144 to+16 dBm 3.87

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:OFFSet -100 to+100 3.87

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:RCL INCLude | EXCLude 3.87

[:SOURce]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] -144 to +16 dBm 3.88

[:SOURce]:POWer:MANual -144 to + 16 dBm 3.88

[:SOURce]:POWer:MODE FIXed | SWEep | LIST 3.88

[:SOURce]:POWer:STARt -144 to +16 dBm 3.88

[:SOURce]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] 0.1 to 10 dB 3.88

[:SOURce]:POWer:STOP -144 to +16 dBm 3.88

[:SOURce]:PULM:EXTernal:IMPedance 50 Ohm | 10 kOhm not-SCPI 3.89

[:SOURce]:PULM:INTernal:FREQuency 0.01176 Hz to10 MHz not-SCPI 3.89

[:SOURce]:PULM:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.89

[:SOURce]:PULM:SOURce EXTernal | INTernal not-SCPI 3.89

[:SOURce]:PULM:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.89

[:SOURce]:PULSe:DELay 40 ns to 1 s not-SCPI 3.90

1038.6002.02 8C.11 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:PULSe:DOUBle:DELay 60 ns to 1 s 3.90

[:SOURce]:PULSe:DOUBle[:STATe] ON | OFF 3.90

[:SOURce]:PULSe:PERiod 100 ns to 85 s 3.90

[:SOURce]:PULSe:WIDTh 20 ns to 1s 3.90

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:AADaptation ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.96

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:DEViation 2.0 to 10.0 kHz not-SCPI 3.92

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:ERRor:MASK 0 to 4294967295 not-SCPI 3.95

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:ERRor:WORD 0 to 351 not-SCPI 3.95

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:FCONtent ’I|A|N|T|S|R|B|F|O|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9 not-SCPI 3.96

[,I|A|N|T|S|R|B|F|O|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9]

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.93

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:ALPHanumeric:DATA 3.93

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:ALPHanumeric[:SELect] 3.93

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:NUMeric 3.93

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:PADDress 16777216 to 1073741823 not-SCPI 3.92

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MESSage:RREQuired ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.93

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:MODulation 1600, FSL2 | 3200, FSK2 | 3200,FSK4 | not-SCPI 3.92

6400,FSK4

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:FCHannel:ANUMber 0 to 2047 not-SCPI 3.94

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:FCHannel:ANUMber 0 to 2047 not-SCPI 3.94

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:FCHannel:BASE 0 to 8191 MHz not-SCPI 3.94

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:FCHannel:SPEed 800 | 1600 | 6400 | 9600 not-SCPI 3.95

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:FSPacing 0 to 102350 not-SCPI 3.95

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:PROVider 0 to 16383 not-SCPI 3.94

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:RCHannel:BASE 0 to 8191 MHz not-SCPI 3.94

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:SCIBase 0 to 127 not-SCPI 3.95

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:SCICollapse 0 to 7 not-SCPI 3.95

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:SZONe 0 to 127 not-SCPI 3.94

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:SI|SINFormation:ZONE 0 to 4091 not-SCPI 3.93

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.92

1038.6002.02 8C.12 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:STATe:AUTO ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.92

[:SOURce]:REFLex25:TACTion MESSage | STARt | ONCE not-SCPI 3.96

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency 1 to 16 MHz 3.97

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.97

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue 0 to 4095 not-SCPI 3.97

[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal not-SCPI 3.97

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:BK[:CODE] A|B|C|D|E|F not-SCPI 3.100

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI[:DEViation] 0 Hz to10 kHz not-SCPI 3.100

[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:TYPE BK | DK | OFF not-SCPI 3.100

[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio[:FREQuency] 0.1 Hz to 15 kHz not-SCPI 3.99

[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio:MODE RIGHt | LEFT | RELeft | REMLeft not-SCPI 3.99

[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio:PREemphasis OFF | 50 us | 75 u not-SCPI 3.99

[:SOURce]:STEReo[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 100 kHz not-SCPI 3.98

[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot[:DEViation] 0 Hz to 10 kHz not-SCPI 3.99

[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot:PHASe 0 to 360 deg not-SCPI 3.99

[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.99

[:SOURce]:STEReo:SIGNal AUDio | ARI not-SCPI 3.98

[:SOURce]:STEReo:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.98

[:SOURce]:SWEep:BTIMe NORMal | LONG not-SCPI 3.101

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl 10 ms to 5 s not-SCPI 3.101

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP not-SCPI 3.102

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts Number not-SCPI 3.102

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic not-SCPI 3.102

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic 0.01 to 50 PCT not-SCPI 3.102

[:SOURce]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear 0 to 1 GHz not-SCPI 3.102

[:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl 1 ms to 5 s not-SCPI 3.103

[:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP not-SCPI 3.103

[:SOURce]:SWEep:POWer:STEP:LOGarithmic 0 to 10 dB not-SCPI 3.103

1038.6002.02 8C.13 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

[:SOURce]:VOR[:BANGle] 0 to 360 deg not-SCPI 3.105

[:SOURce]:VOR[:BANGle]:DIRection FROM | TO not-SCPI 3.105

[:SOURce]:VOR:COMid:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.106

[:SOURce]:VOR:COMid:FREQuency 0.1 to 20 000 Hz not-SCPI 3.106

[:SOURce]:VOR:COMid[:STATe] ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.106

[:SOURce]:VOR:MODE NORM | VAR | SUBCarrier not-SCPI 3.105

[:SOURce]:VOR:PRESet not-SCPI 3.106

[:SOURce]:VOR:REFerence[:DEViation] 0 to 960 Hz not-SCPI 3.106

[:SOURce]:VOR:SOURce INT2 | INT2, EXT not-SCPI 3.104

[:SOURce]:VOR:STATe ON | OFF not-SCPI 3.104

[:SOURce]:VOR:SUBCarrier:DEPTh 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.105

[:SOURce]:VOR:SUBCarrier[:FREQuency] 5 to 15 kHz not-SCPI 3.105

[:SOURce]:VOR:VAR:FREQuency 20 to 40 Hz not-SCPI 3.105

[:SOURce]:VOR:VAR[:DEPTh] 0 to 100 PCT not-SCPI 3.105

:SOURce0|2:FREQuency[:CW | :FIXed] 400 Hz | 1 kHz | 3 kHz | 15 kHz or 3.108

0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz

:SOURce0|2:FREQuency:MANual 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz 3.108

:SOURce0|2:FREQuency:MODE CW | FIXed | SWEep 3.108

:SOURce0|2:FREQuency:STARt 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz 3.108

:SOURce0|2:FREQuency:STOP 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz or 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz 3.108

:SOURce0|2:FUNCtion[:SHAPe] SINusoid | SQUare | TRIangle | PRNoise 3.109

| SAWTooth

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:FREQuency 0.1 Hz to 500 kHz 3.110

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep]:AOFF 3.110

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3[:FSWeep][:STATe] ON | OFF 3.110

:SOURce2:MARKer1|2|3:POLarity NORMal | INVerted not-SCPI 3.110

:SOURce2:SWEep:BTIMe NORMal | LONG not-SCPI 3.111

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl 1 ms to 1 s not-SCPI 3.111

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO | MANual | STEP not-SCPI 3.111

1038.6002.02 8C.14 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts Number not-SCPI 3.112

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic not-SCPI 3.112

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] 0 to 500 kHz not-SCPI 3.112

:SOURce2:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic 0.01 to 50PCT not-SCPI 3.112

:STATus:OPERation:CONDition? 3.113

:STATus:OPERation:ENABle 0 to 32767 3.114

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition 0 to 32767 3.113

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition 0 to 32767 3.113

:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? 3.113

:STATus:PRESet 3.114

:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? 3.114

:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 0 to 32767 3.114

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 0 to 32767 3.114

:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition 0 to 32767 3.114

:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? 3.114

:STATus:QUEue [:NEXT]? 3.114

:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe ON | OFF 3.115

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 1 to 30 3.116

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD 1200| 2400| 4800| 9600| 19200| 38400| 3.116

57600| 115200

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:CONTrol:RTS ON | IBFull | RFR 3.116

:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PACE XON | NONE 3.116

:SYSTem:ERRor? 3.116

:SYSTem:KLOCk ON | OFF 3.117

:SYSTem:MODE FIXed | MSEQence not-SCPI 3.117

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:CATalog? not-SCPI 3.117

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:DELete ’Name of sequence’ not-SCPI 3.117

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:DELete:ALL not-SCPI 3.117

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:DWELl 50 ms to 60 s{,50 ms to 60 s} not-SCPI 3.117

1038.6002.02 8C.15 E-12

List of Commands SME

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:FREE? not-SCPI 3.118

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:MODE AUTO | STEP not-SCPI 3.118

:SYSTem:MSEQuence:SELect ’Name of sequence’ not-SCPI 3.118

:SYSTem:MSEQuence[:RCL] 1 to 50 {,1 to 50} not-SCPI 3.118

:SYSTem:MSEQuence[:RCL]:POINts? not-SCPI 3.118

:SYSTem:PRESet 3.118

:SYSTem:PROTect1|2|3[:STATe] ON | OFF, password not-SCPI 3.119

:SYSTem:SECurity[:STATe] ON | OFF 3.119

:SYSTem:SERRor? not-SCPI 3.119

:SYSTem:VERSion? not-SCPI 3.119

:TEST:BATTery:XMEM? 3.121

:TEST:BATTery[:RAM]? 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:ATTC Subaddress, {,hex data string} not-SCPI 3.120

:TEST:DIRect:DCOD Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:DSYN0MUX Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:DSYN1MUX Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:FMOD Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:LFGENA Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:LFGENB Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:MGEN Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:OPU1M Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:OPU3M Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:OPU6M Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:PUM Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:REFSS Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:ROSC Subaddress {,hex data string} 3.121

:TEST:DIRect:SUM Subaddress {,hex data string} not-SCPI 3.120

:TEST:RAM? 3.121

1038.6002.02 8C.16 E-12

SME List of Commands

Command Parameter SCPI Page

info

:TEST:ROM? 3.121

:TRIGger:DM:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal not-SCPI 3.123

:TRIGger:DM[:IMMediate] not-SCPI 3.123

TRIGger:LIST[:IMMediate] not-SCPI 3.124

:TRIGger:LIST:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal not-SCPI 3.125

:TRIGger:MSEQuence:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal not-SCPI 3.125

:TRIGger:MSEQuence[:IMMediate] not-SCPI 3.125

:TRIGger:PULSe:SLOPe POSitive | NEGative not-SCPI 3.126

:TRIGger:PULSe:SOURce EXTernal | AUTO not-SCPI 3.126

:TRIGger:SLOPe not-SCPI 3.126

:TRIGger1|2[:SWEep][:IMMediate] not-SCPI 3.122

:TRIGger1|2[:SWEep]:SOURce AUTO | SINGle | EXTernal not-SCPI 3.123

:UNIT:ANGLe DEGRee | DEGree | RADian 3.127

:UNIT:POWer DBM | DBW | DBMW | DBUW | DBV | 3.127

DBMV | DBUV | V

1038.6002.02 8C.17 E-12

SME Programming Examples

Annex D

Programming Examples

The examples explain the programming of the instrument and can serve as a basis to solve more
complex programming tasks.

QuickBASIC has been used as programming language. However, the programs can be translated into
other languages.

1. Including IEC-Bus Library for QuickBasic

REM ----------- Include IEC-bus library for quickbasic ----------------
’$INCLUDE: ’c:\qbasic\[Link]

2. Initialization and Default Status

The IEC bus as well as the settings of the instrument are brought into a defined default status at the
beginning of every program. Subroutines "InitController" and "InitDevice" are used to this
effect.

2.1. Initiate Controller

REM ------------ Initiate Instrument -----------
REM InitController
iecaddress% = 28 ’IEC-bus address of the instrument
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%) ’Open port to the instrument
CALL IBPAD(generator%, iecaddress%) ’Inform controller on instrument address
CALL IBTMO(generator%, 11) ’Response time to 1 sec
REM ************************************************************************

2.2. Initiate Instrument

The IEC-bus status registers and instrument settings of the SME are brought into the default status.

REM ------------ Initiate Instrument --------------

REM InitDevice
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*CLS") ’Reset status register
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*RST") ’Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "OUTPUT ON") ’Switch on RF output
REM*************************************************************************

1038.6002.02 9D.1 E-11

Programming Examples SME

3. Transmission of Instrument Setting Commands

Output frequency, output level and AM modulation are set in this example. The settings correspond to
the sample setting for first users in manual control. By analogy to the step width setting of the rotary
knob, the step width is additionally set for the alteration of the RF frequency in the case of UP and
DOWN.
REM -------- Instrument setting commands -------------
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "FREQUENCY 250E6") ’RF Frequency 250 MHz
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "POWER -10") ’Output power -10 dBm
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM 80") ’AM with modulaton index of 80%
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:INTERNAL1:FREQUENCY 3KHZ") ’Modulation frequency 3kHz
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:SOURCE INT1") ’Modulation source LF generator 1
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "FREQUENCY:STEP 12500") ’Step width RF frequency 12.5kHz
REM ***********************************************************************

4. Switchover to Manual Control

REM -------- Switch instrument over to manual control -----------
CALL IBLOC(generator%) ’Set instrument to Local state
REM ***********************************************************************

5. Reading out Instrument Settings

The settings made in example 3 are read out here. The abbreviated commands are used.
REM --------------- Reading out instrument settings -----------------------
RFfrequency$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables with 20 characters
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "FREQ?") ’Request frequency setting
CALL IBRD(generator%, RFfrequency$) ’Read value

RFlevel$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables with 20 characters

CALL IBWRT(generator%, "POW?") ’Request level setting
CALL IBRD(generator%, RFlevel$) ’Read value

AMmodulationdepth$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables with 20 characters

CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM?") ’Request setting of modulation depth
CALL IBRD(generator%, AMmodulationdepth$) ’Read value

AMfrequency$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables with 20 characters

CALL IBWRT(generator%, "AM:INT1:FREQ?") ’Request modulation frequency setting
CALL IBRD(generator%, AMfrequency$) ’Read value

Stepwidth$ = SPACE$(20) ’Provide text variables with 20 characters

CALL IBWRT(generator%, "FREQ:STEP?") ’Request step width setting
CALL IBRD(generator%, stepwidth$) ’Read value

REM ---------------------- Display values on the screen ---------------

PRINT "RF frequency: "; RFfrequency$,
PRINT "RF level: "; RFlevel$,
PRINT "AM modulationdepth:"; AMmodulationdepth$,
PRINT "AM frequency: "; AMfrequency$,
PRINT "Step width: "; stepwidth$
REM **********************************************************************

1038.6002.02 9D.2 E-11

SME Programming Examples

6. List Management
REM ----------------------------- Example of list management -------------------------
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "LIST:SELECT "+CHR$(34)+"LIST1"+CHR$(34))
’Select list "LIST1", is generated if necessary
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "LIST:POWER -30,-15,-10,-5,0,0.1)
’Fill power list with values
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "LIST:FREQ 575MHz,235MHz,123MHz,456MHz,735MHz,333MHz"
’Fill frequency list with values
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "LIST:DWELL 0.2") ’200ms per item
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "TRIGGER21:LIST:SOURCE AUTO") ’Permanently repeat list automatically
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "POWER:MODE LIST") ’Switch over instrument to list mode
REM **********************************************************************

7. Command synchronization
The possibilities for synchronization implemented in the following example are described in Section
3.7.6, Command Order and Command Synchronization.
REM ----------------------- Examples of command synchronization ----------------------
REM Command ROSCILLATOR:SOURCE INT has a relatively long execution time
REM (over 300ms). It is to be ensured that the next command is only executed
REM when the reference oscillator has settled.

REM First possibility: Use of *WAI ---------------------------------------------

CALL IBWRT(generator%, "ROSCILLATOR:SOURCE INT; *WAI; :FREQUENCY 100MHZ")

REM Second possibility: Use of *OPC? -------------------------------------------

OpcOk$ = SPACE$(2) ’Space for *OPC? - Provide response
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "ROSCILLATOR:SOURCE INT; *OPC?")
REM ----------- here the controller can service other instruments ----------------------
CALL IBRD(generator%, OpcOk$) ’Wait for "1" from *OPC?

REM Third possibility: Use of *OPC

REM In order to be able to use the service request function in conjugation with a National
REM Instruments GPIB driver, the setting "Disable Auto Serial Poll" must be changed to "yes"
REM by means of IBCONF.
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*SRE 32") ’Permit service request for ESR
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*ESE 1") ’Set event-enable bit for operation-complete bit
ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady ’Initialization of the service request routine
PEN ON
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "ROSCILLATOR:SOURCE INT; *OPC")
REM Continue main program here
STOP ’End of program

OpcReady:
REM As soon as the reference oscillator has settled, this subroutine is activated
REM Program suitable reaction to the OPC service request.
ON PEN GOSUB OpcReady ’Enable SRQ routine again
RETURN
REM **********************************************************************

1038.6002.02 9D.3 E-11

Programming Examples SME

8. Service Request

The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument in which the respective
bits of the transition and enable registers are set.
In order to be able to use the service request function in conjugation with a National Instruments GPIB
driver, the setting "Disable Auto Serial Poll" must be changed to "yes" by means of IBCONF.
REM -------- Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors --------------
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*CLS") ’Reset status reporting system
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*SRE 168") ’Permit service request for STAT:OPER-,
’STAT:QUES- and ESR register
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*ESE 60") ’Set event-enable bit for command, execution,
’device-dependent and query error
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767") ’Set OPERation enable bit for all events
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "STAT:OPER:PTR 32767") ’Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767") ’Set questionable enable bits for all events
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "STAT:OPER:PTR 32767") ’Set appropriate questionable Ptransition bits
ON PEN GOSUB Srq ’Initialization of the service request routine
PEN ON
REM Continue main program here
STOP ’End of program

A service request is then processed in the service request routine.

Note: The variables userN% and userM% must be pre-assigned usefully.

Srq:
REM ------------------- Service request routine ----------------------------
DO
SRQFOUND% = 0
FOR I% = userN% TO userM% ’Poll all bus users
ON ERROR GOTO nouser ’No user existing
CALL IBRSP(I%, STB%) ’Serial poll, read status byte
IF STB% > 0 THE ’This instrument has bits set in the STB
SRQFOUND% = 1
IF (STB% AND 16) > 0 THEN GOSUB Outputqueue
IF (STB% AND 4) > 0 THEN GOSUB Failure
IF (STB% AND 8) > 0 THEN GOSUB Questionablestatus
IF (STB% AND 128) > 0 THEN GOSUB Operationstatus
IF (STB% AND 32) > 0 THEN GOSUB Esrread
END IF
nouser:
NEXT I%
LOOP UNTIL SRQFOUND% = 0
ON ERROR GOTO error handling
ON PEN GOSUB Srq: RETURN ’Enable SRQ routine again;
’End of SRQ routine

1038.6002.02 9D.4 E-11

SME Programming Examples

Reading out the status event registers, the output buffer and the error/event queue is effected in
subroutines.

REM ---------------- Subroutines for the individual STB bits --------------

Outputqueue: ’Reading the output buffer
Message$ = SPACE$(100) ’Make space for response
CALL IBRD(generator%, Message$)
PRINT "Message in output buffer :"; Message$
RETURN

Failure: ’Read error queue

ERROR$ = SPACE$(100) ’Make space for error variable
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SYSTEM:ERROR?")
CALL IBRD(generator%, ERROR$)
PRINT "Error text :"; ERROR$
RETURN

Questionablestatus: ’Read questionable status register

Ques$ = SPACE$(20) ’Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "STATus:QUEStionable:EVENt?")
CALL IBRD(generator%, Ques$)
IF (VAL(Ques$) AND 128) > 0 THEN PRINT "Calibration ?" ’Calibration is questionable
IF (VAL(Ques$) AND 1) > 0 THEN PRINT "Voltage ?" ’Output level is questionable
RETURN

Operationstatus: ’Read operation status register

Oper$ = SPACE$(20) ’Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "STATus:OPERation:EVENt?")
CALL IBRD(generator%, Oper$)
IF (VAL(Oper$) AND 1) > 0 THEN PRINT "Calibration"
IF (VAL(Oper$) AND 2) > 0 THEN PRINT "Settling"
IF (VAL(Oper$) AND 8) > 0 THEN PRINT "Sweeping"
IF (VAL(Oper$) AND 32) > 0 THEN PRINT "Wait for trigger"
RETURN

Esrread: ’Read event status register

Esr$ = SPACE$(20) ’Preallocate blanks to text variable
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*ESR?") ’Read ESR
CALL IBRD(generator%, Esr$)
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 1) > 0 THEN PRINT "Operation complete"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 4) > 0 THEN GOTO Failure
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 8) > 0 THEN PRINT "Device dependent error"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 16) > 0 THEN GOTO Failure
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 32) > 0 THEN GOTO Failure
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 64) > 0 THEN PRINT "User request"
IF (VAL(Esr$) AND 128) > 0 THEN PRINT "Power on"
RETURN
REM
**********************************************************************

REM --------------------------- Error routine --------------------------------

Error handling:
PRINT "ERROR" ’Output error message
STOP ’Stop software

1038.6002.02 9D.5 E-11

SME Index

Bit errors (ERMES) ............................................... 2.105, 3.51

Index Bit rate
4FSK modulation ................................................ 2.98, 3.48
FFSK modulation .............................................. 2.101, 3.49
FLEX ................................................................ 2.100, 3.57
4 FSK modulation .................................................. 2.95, 3.47
GFSK modulation................................................ 2.90, 3.44
4FSK modulation ..................................................... 2.97, 3.48
GMSK modulation............................................... 2.88, 3.43
A POCSAC .......................................................... 2.128, 3.85
QPSK modulation ............................................... 2.93, 3.46
Abort REFLEX............................................................ 2.116, 3.93
digital data recording ....................................................2.83 Bit sequence (PRBS) .............................................. 3.40, 3.41
triggered actions...........................................................3.17 BK (area code) ...................................................... 2.64, 3.102
Active edge BLANK
external trigger output........................................... 2.13, 2.136, 2.144, 2.166
PULSE input ................................................. 2.62, 3.128 time............................................................................ 3.103
TRIGGER input......................... 2.83, 2.166, 3.40, 3.128 Block data ........................................................................ 3.25
Address Boolean parameter............................................................. 3.9
IEC-bus ............................................................... 3.3, 3.118 Brief instructions................................................................. 3.1
pager Brightness
ERMES......................................................... 2.104, 3.52 control (oscilloscope) ................................................. 2.137
FLEX ............................................................ 2.110, 3.58 display .................................................................... 1.2, 2.9
POCSAG ...................................................... 2.128, 3.85 Broadband noise .............................................................. 5.14
REFLEX............................................... 2.116, 3.93, 3.94 Broadcasting code (DK) ........................................ 2.64, 3.102
start (XMEM)....................................................... 2.83, 3.39 BURST
Addressed commands ..................................................... A6.3 input.................................................................... 2.13, 2.86
Airplane position ...............................................................2.66 memory............................................................... 2.79, 3.39
Alphanumeric message .................................................. 2.104 output.................................................2.13, 2.79, 3.36, 3.39
Alternate switching off of modulations...............................2.51 BxT filter
AM GFSK modulation................................................ 2.90, 3.44
distortion factor.............................................................5.21 GMSK modulation............................................... 2.88, 3.43
frequency ............................................................ 2.55, 3.31
frequency response......................................................5.20 C
modulation depth..........................................................5.20
Calibration
noise ............................................................................2.46
disable .............................................................2.158, 3.120
polarity ................................................................ 2.55, 3.31
level .................................................................. 2.158, 3.19
residual PhiM ...............................................................5.21
level preset ....................................................... 2.159, 3.19
Amplitude
password .........................................................2.158, 3.121
marker (RF sweep)............................................ 2.139, 3.78
pulse generator................................................. 2.160, 3.20
modulation (AM) .................................................. 2.54, 3.30
QPSK ............................................................... 2.161, 3.18
modulator (calibration)................................................ 2.159
VCO SUM......................................................... 2.158, 3.20
Antenna lobe
Call (instrument settings)......................................... 2.39, 3.14
frequency
Capcode of the pager (FLEX)................................ 2.110, 3.58
ILS-GS............................................................ 2.69, 3.71
Carrier frequency deviation with FM ................................. 5.25
ILS-LOC.......................................................... 2.74, 3.73
Caution messages.......................................................... 2.170
phase
CDPD (Cellular Digital Packet Data) ................................ 2.78
ILS-GS............................................................ 2.70, 3.71
Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
ILS-LOC.......................................................... 2.74, 3.74
Center frequency (RF sweep) ............................... 2.138, 3.65
APCO25 (Association of Public Safety Communications
Character data ................................................................... 3.8
Officers, Project 25) .....................................................2.78
Checksum (XMEM) ................................................... 3.22, 4.6
Radio network ..............................................................2.86
CITYRUF (German pager system) ................................... 2.78
Area code (BK) ...................................................... 2.64, 3.102
Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
ARI traffic channel ................................................. 2.63, 3.102
Cleaning the outside........................................................... 4.1
ASCII character (#) ...........................................................3.11
Clock................................................................................ 2.95
Asterix ..............................................................................3.11 bit clock .............................................................. 2.92, 3.36
Attenuator.................................................................. 1.5, 2.44 edge.................................................................... 2.92, 3.37
circuits (indication) ..................................................... 2.164 input/output ............................... 2.11, 2.79, 2.86, 2.92, 3.36
Audio signal ........................................................... 2.63, 3.100 source
Avionics systems ..............................................................2.64 ERMES ........................................................ 2.131, 3.50
B FLEX ............................................................ 2.131, 3.55
POCSAG...................................................... 2.106, 3.84
Bandwidth (level control) ......................................... 2.46, 3.88 REFLEX ....................................................... 2.131, 3.93
Batch symbol clock ....................................................... 2.82, 3.36
ERMES ............................................................. 2.105, 3.51 CMOS-RAM ....................................................................... 1.2
POCSAG........................................................... 2.130, 3.85 Coding
Battery 4FSK modulation ................................................ 2.99, 3.49
exchange .......................................................................4.1 GMSK modulation............................................... 2.88, 3.43
self test ...................................................................... 3.123 QPSK modulation ............................................... 2.93, 3.46
Baud rate (RS232)........................................... 2.153, 3.118, 5 Colon seperates ............................................................... 3.11
Beeper................................................................. 2.167, 3.117 COM/ID signal (communication/identification signal)2.66, 2.70
Bit clock pulse ......................................................... 2.92, 3.36 ILS-GS................................................................ 2.70, 3.69

1038.6002.02 I.1 E-13

Index SME

ILS-LOC .............................................................. 2.74, 3.72 FM ............................................................................... 2.57

Marker Beacon.................................................... 2.76, 3.80 PM ............................................................................... 2.59
VOR .................................................................. 2.66, 3.108 Difference coding (GSM)......................................... 2.88, 3.43
Command Difference in depth of modulation (DM)
addressed ................................................................... 8C.3 ILS-GS................................................................ 2.69, 3.70
parameter.......................................................................3.9 ILS-LOG ............................................................. 2.73, 3.73
recognition.................................................................. 3.131 Digit cursor....................................................................... 2.18
seperates .....................................................................3.11 Digital modulation (DM) ........................................... 2.78, 3.34
sequence ................................................................... 3.132 Digital synthesis ................................................................. 1.5
structure .................................................................. 3.6, 3.8 Disabling
synchronization .......................................................... 3.132 calibration ........................................................2.158, 3.120
syntax elements ...........................................................3.11 indication .........................................................2.164, 3.110
universal...................................................................... 8C.3 keyboard.................................................................... 3.119
Common commands.................................................. 3.5, 3.14 DK (Broadcasting code) ........................................ 2.64, 3.102
Condition register............................................................ 3.134 DM
Contrast (display) ........................................................ 1.2, 2.9 coder..................................................................... 1.9, 2.78
Counter (indication) ........................................................ 2.164 data generator ............................................................. 2.79
Country code (ERMES) ....................................................3.53 data source......................................................... 2.78, 3.36
Coupling delays .......................................................................... 2.86
EXT1/2 .........................................................................3.30 list ....................................................................... 2.79, 3.37
AM .................................................................. 2.54, 3.30 memory extension (XMEM)................................. 2.81, 3.39
FM .................................................................. 2.56, 3.63 radio network data ....................................................... 2.86
PM .................................................................. 2.59, 3.82 Trigger ....................................................2.95, 2.101, 3.125
Course Sector (ILS-LOC)..................................................2.74 Double pulse ........................................................... 2.62, 3.92
CTx (Cordless Telephony) ................................................2.78 DSRR (Digital Short Range Radio)
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
Current of the ILS indicating instrument . 2.69, 2.73, 3.70, 3.73 Duration blank signal...................................................... 2.166
Dwell list
D LIST.................................................................. 2.151, 3.76
Data MSEQ ...................................................2.146, 2.148, 3.119
generator (DM) .................................................... 2.79, 3.37 Dwell time
input ........................................................... 2.11, 2.86, 3.36 level sweep......................................................2.140, 3.105
memory ............................................................... 2.79, 3.38 LF sweep .........................................................2.142, 3.103
output ......................................................... 2.11, 2.79, 3.36 RF sweep ........................................................2.139, 3.104
sequence length (XMEM) .................................... 2.83, 3.39 E
source (DM) ........................................................ 2.86, 3.36
Data bits RS232 ......................................................... 2.153, 5 Edge
Data lines (IEC/IEEE-bus) ............................................... A6.1 clock ............................................................................ 3.37
Data source DM................................................................2.78 external trigger
DCL ................................................................................ 3.130 PULSE input................................................. 2.62, 3.128
DDM (Difference in Depth of Modulation) ................ 2.69, 2.73 TRIGGER input .........................2.83, 2.166, 3.40, 3.128
ILS-GS ................................................................ 2.69, 3.70 Edit list ............................................................................. 2.31
ILS-LOC .............................................................. 2.73, 3.73 EMF ................................................................................. 2.49
Decimal point............................................................... 2.3, 3.9 Enable register ............................................................... 3.134
DECT (Digital European Cordless Telephony)..................2.78 EOI (command line) ........................................................... 3.8
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 ERMES(European Radio Message System) .................... 2.78
Delay Radio communication service ........................... 2.102, 3.50
calibration QPSK........................................................ 2.161 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
DM ...............................................................................2.86 Error messages.......................................... 2.170, 3.121, 7B.1
double pulse........................................................ 2.62, 3.92 Error queue ...............................................3.116, 3.118, 3.141
pulse modulation ................................................. 2.62, 3.92 ESE (event status enable register)................................. 3.137
Delete ETI (External Traffic Indicator Bit) ......................... 2.104, 3.54
all data stored............................................................. 2.154 Event status enable register (ESE) ................................ 3.137
list entry........................................................................2.35 Exponent............................................................................ 3.9
Delimiter ......................................................................... 3.130 EXT1/2
Delta phase ........................................................... 2.156, 3.81 coupling ........................... 2.54, 2.56, 2.59, 3.30, 3.63, 3.82
Detuning (external) ......................................................... 2.155 input............................................................................. 2.11
Deviation External
4FSK modulation................................................. 2.98, 3.49 data recording.............................................................. 3.40
FFSK modulation............................................... 2.101, 3.49 detuning..................................................................... 2.155
FLEX ................................................................. 2.108, 3.56 modulation ................................................................... 2.50
FM....................................................................... 2.56, 3.63 reference .......................................................... 2.155, 3.99
FSK modulation................................................... 2.95, 3.47 trigger
GFSK MODULATION.......................................... 2.90, 3.44 LIST ............................................................2.144, 3.126
pilot tone ........................................................... 2.64, 3.101 memory extension XMEM............................... 2.82, 3.40
PM ...................................................................... 2.58, 3.82 MSEQ .........................................................2.150, 3.127
POCSAG........................................................... 2.128, 3.85 PULSE input (active edge) ........................... 2.62, 3.128
REF signal (VOR).............................................. 2.66, 3.108 pulse modulation ................................................... 3.127
REFLEX ............................................................ 2.116, 3.93 sweep.................................................................... 3.124
stereo MPX signal ............................................. 2.63, 3.100 TRIGGER input (active edge)...............2.83, 3.40, 3.128
Deviation Limits

1038.6002.02 I.2 E-13

SME Index

F Functional test.................................................................... 4.5

Fast Restore Mode ......................................................... 3.143 G
FFSK modulation................................................... 2.100, 3.49
testing ..........................................................................5.37 GET (Group Execute Trigger) ........................................ 3.131
Filler data GFSK modulation.................................................... 2.89, 3.43
ERMES ...................................................................... 2.105 testing.......................................................................... 5.29
FLEX .......................................................................... 2.113 GMSK modulation ................................................... 2.87, 3.41
POGSAG ........................................................ 2.130, 2.131 testing.......................................................................... 5.34
Filter GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications)
4FSK modulation................................................. 2.99, 3.49 Personal Communication System ................................ 2.78
FSK modulation................................................... 2.96, 3.48 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
GFSK modulation ................................................ 2.90, 3.44 H
GMSK modulation ............................................... 2.88, 3.43
QPSK modulation................................................ 2.93, 3.46 Handshake RS232 ...........................................2.153, 3.118, 6
Fitting option.......................................................................1.4 Harmonics suppression.................................................... 5.10
FLEX (Flexible High Speed Paging System).....................2.78 Header (commands)........................................................... 3.6
radio communication service ............................. 2.107, 3.55 Header field display.......................................................... 2.18
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 Heterodyne.............................................................. 2.57, 2.59
FM
carrier (VOR)..................................................... 2.66, 3.107 I
carrier frequency deviation ...........................................5.25 IEC/IEEE-bus
coupling............................................................... 2.56, 3.63 address.....................................................2.152, 3.3, 3.118
deviation.............................................................. 2.56, 3.63 interface.............................................................. 2.17, A6.1
deviation limits..............................................................2.57 language.................................................................... 2.155
deviation setting ...........................................................5.22 ILS (Instrument Landing System)
distortion factor.............................................................5.24 glide slope modulation ........................................ 2.68, 3.69
frequency ............................................................ 2.56, 3.64 GS default........................................................... 2.70, 3.71
modulator .............................................................. 1.7, 2.56 LOC default......................................................... 2.74, 3.74
preemphasis............................................... 2.57, 3.64, 5.24 localizer modulation ............................................ 2.72, 3.72
residual AM ..................................................................5.24 transmitting frequencies ............................................... 2.70
stereo modulation.........................................................5.25 Incompatible modulations................................................. 2.51
Format data (IEC bus) ......................................................3.25 Indentations ..................................................................... 3.12
Frequency Indication
accuracy.........................................................................1.2 attenuator circuits ............................................2.157, 2.164
AM ...................................................................... 2.55, 3.31 counter indication....................................................... 2.164
antenna lobe error messages ................................................2.170, 3.116
ILS-GS............................................................ 2.69, 3.71 modules ............................................................ 2.162, 3.22
ILS-VOR ..................................................................3.73 operating-hours counter .................................... 2.164, 3.22
audio signal ....................................................... 2.63, 3.101 serial number ...................................................2.157, 2.164
COM/ID signal software version................................................ 2.164, 3.22
ILS-GS............................................................ 2.68, 3.70 suppressed ....................................................... 2.154, 3.22
ILS-LOC.......................................................... 2.74, 3.72 Initial Status ....................................................................... 1.2
MARKER-BEACON ........................................ 2.76, 3.80 INMARSAT-M (International Maritime Satellite)................ 2.78
VOR.............................................................. 2.66, 3.108 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
FM....................................................................... 2.56, 3.64 Input................................................................................. 2.50
FM carrier (VOR)............................................... 2.66, 3.107 buffer ......................................................................... 3.130
indication............................................................. 2.18, 3.54 BURST ............................................................... 2.13, 2.86
indication suppressed................................................. 2.154 CLOCK ..................................... 2.11, 2.86, 2.92, 3.37, 3.41
LF generator.................................................... 2.133, 3.110 correction..................................................................... 2.23
LF sweep ........................................................ 2.141, 3.110 DATA ..........................................................2.11, 2.86, 3.36
list ..................................................................... 2.143, 3.76 EXT1/2......................................................................... 2.11
offset ................................................................... 2.41, 3.66 modulations ................................................................. 2.50
PM ...................................................................... 2.58, 3.83 PULSE......................................................2.15, 2.60, 3.128
pulse modulation ................................................. 2.60, 3.91 REF ............................................................................. 2.15
REF signal (VOR).............................................. 2.66, 3.107 resistance .................................................................... 2.11
RF output signal .................................................. 2.41, 3.65 TRIGGER ...........................................................................
RF sweep.......................................................... 2.138, 3.66 ................. 2.13, 2.82, 2.136, 2.144, 2.150, 2.166, 3.128
setting (testing)...............................................................5.6 TUNE................................................................ 2.15, 2.155
VAR signal (VOR) ............................................. 2.66, 3.107 Insert list entry.................................................................. 2.34
Frequency marker Installation MARKER (output)......................................... 2.168
LF sweep ........................................................ 2.142, 3.112 Instrument states (reset) ............................................... 3.120
RF sweep.......................................................... 2.139, 3.78 Instrument current ................................................... 2.69, 2.73
Frequency modulation (FM)..................................... 2.56, 3.63 Instrument settings
Frequency of the COM/ID signal call ...................................................................... 2.39, 3.14
Marker Beacon.............................................................2.76 reset ................................................................... 2.37, 3.19
Frequency sweep store ................................................................... 2.39, 3.16
LF ................................................................... 2.141, 3.113 Interface
RF ................................................................... 2.138, 3.103 functions (IEC bus) ......................................................A6.2
Front unit ............................................................................1.5 functions (RS232) ........................................................A6.5
FSI (Frequency Subset Indicator) .......................... 2.104, 3.54 messages (IEC bus) ....................................................A6.3
FSK modulation ....................................................... 2.94, 3.47 Intermodulation ratio......................................................... 2.46

1038.6002.02 I.3 E-13

Index SME

Interrupt .......................................................................... 3.136 dwell

Interrupt-free level setting ........................................ 2.45, 5.18 LIST ........................................................................ 3.76
IST flag.............................................................................3.15 MSEQ .........................................................2.148, 3.119
edit............................................................................... 2.31
K entry
Key delete ...................................................................... 2.35
-/ ⇐ insert ....................................................................... 2.34
[ASSIGN] .....................................................................2.21 fill 2.32
[ERROR] .................................................................... 2.170 frequency.......................................................... 2.143, 3.76
[FREQ] .........................................................................2.41 function LEARN ................................................ 2.143, 3.76
[G/n] ...............................................................................2.5 generate ...................................................................... 2.29
[HELP]........................................................................ 2.169 inputs/outputs ............................................................ 2.144
[k/m] ...............................................................................2.5 instrument states (MSEQ).......................................... 3.120
[LEVEL]........................................................................2.43 level (LIST) ....................................................... 2.143, 3.77
[LOCAL] .........................................................................3.3 level correction (UCOR) ...................................... 2.47, 3.32
manual processing of the list...................................... 2.144
[M/µ ]..............................................................................2.5
memory extension (XMEM)................................. 2.81, 3.39
[MENU1/2] ...................................................................2.21
mode.......................................................................... 3.126
[MOD ON/OFF] ................................................. 2.52, 2.165
open............................................................................. 2.29
[PRESET].......................................................................1.3
operating modes ..............................2.143, 3.75, 3.77, 3.90
[RCL]............................................................................2.39
select ........................................................................... 2.29
[RETURN] ....................................................................2.19
store ............................................................................ 2.31
[RF ON / OFF]..................................................... 2.22, 2.49
Load external data................................................... 2.83, 3.40
[SAVE] .........................................................................2.39
Long form (commands) ...................................................... 3.7
[SELECT] .....................................................................2.19
Lower-case (commands) .................................................... 3.7
[STATUS]................................................................... 2.169
[X1/Enter] .......................................................................2.5 M
Key words (commands) ......................................................3.6
Keyboard disabling ......................................................... 3.119 Maintenance....................................................................... 4.1
Mantissa............................................................................. 3.9
L Marker
level sweep....................................................... 2.136, 3.78
LEARN (LIST mode).............................................. 2.143, 3.76
LF sweep .........................................................2.142, 3.112
Length
RF sweep ......................................................... 2.139, 3.78
bit sequence (PRBS)........................................... 2.78, 3.41
Marker Beacon modulation...................................... 2.76, 3.80
data sequence (XMEM)....................................... 2.83, 3.39
MARKER output......................................................................
Sweep ........................................................................ 3.103
................................ 2.13, 2.137, 2.144, 2.166, 3.79, 3.112
LEV-ATT memory .................................................... 2.79, 3.38
Maximal deviation
Level
FM ............................................................................... 2.57
calibration.......................................................... 2.159, 3.19
PM ............................................................................... 2.59
control ................................................................. 2.46, 3.88
Maximum value (commands).............................................. 3.9
correction (list UCOR) ......................................... 2.47, 3.32
MC9 (French Communication network) ............................ 2.78
indication......................................................................2.18
Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
EMF.........................................................................2.49
MDxxx (Standards nach ETS-Spezifikationen)
resolution .................................................................2.44
Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
suppressed ................................................... 2.154, 3.19
Memory capacity data generator (DM) ............................. 2.79
limit ..................................................................... 2.44, 3.90
Memory delet ................................................................. 2.154
list ..................................................................... 2.143, 3.77
Memory extension (XMEM) ..................................... 1.11, 3.39
marker............................................................... 2.136, 3.79
checksum ............................................................. 3.22, 4.6
monitoring .................................................. 2.71, 5.19, 5.22
memory depth..................................................... 2.81, 3.40
offset ................................................................... 2.43, 3.89
sequence length ................................................. 2.83, 3.39
presetting (calibration)....................................... 2.159, 3.19
start address ....................................................... 2.82, 3.39
reduction (DM) .................................................... 2.79, 3.39
testing.......................................................................... 5.42
RF output ............................................................ 2.43, 3.89
trigger ................................................................. 2.82, 3.40
setting (interrupt-free).......................................... 2.45, 5.18
Memory list (MSEQ)....................................................... 3.120
sweep................................................................ 2.140, 3.79
Memory location............................................................... 2.35
unit ........................................................... 2.22, 2.43, 3.129
Memory sequence (MSEQ) ..................................2.148, 3.119
Start level ....................................................................... 2.140
Menu
Stop level........................................................................ 2.140
call ............................................................................... 2.21
Sweep ............................................................................ 2.140
cursor........................................................................... 2.18
LF
DIGITAL MOD - 4FSK ................................................. 2.97
generator.................................1.6, 2.53, 2.133, 3.28, 3.109
DIGITAL MOD - ERMES............................................ 2.102
frequency.................................................... 2.133, 3.110
DIGITAL MOD - FFSK ............................................... 2.100
signal shape........................................................... 2.133
DIGITAL MOD - FSK ................................................... 2.94
testing......................................................................5.37
DIGITAL MOD - GFSK................................................. 2.89
waveform ...................................................... 2.56, 3.111
DIGITAL MOD - QPSK ................................................ 2.91
output .............................................. 2.11, 2.13, 2.132, 3.28
DIGITAL MOD - ReFLEX ........................................... 2.119
sweep......................................................................... 3.110
DIGITAL-MOD-POCSAG ........................................... 2.127
List
DIGITAL-MOD-QPSK-CLOCK ..................................... 2.92
attenuate (DM) .............................................................3.38
ERROR...................................................................... 2.170
burst (DM) ....................................................................3.38
fields ............................................................................ 2.18
data (DM) ............................................................ 2.79, 3.38
FREQUENCY .............................................................. 2.41
delete ...........................................................................2.30

1038.6002.02 I.4 E-13

SME Index

HELP.......................................................................... 2.169 QPSK .......................................................................... 3.45

LEVEL - ALC................................................................2.46 REFLEX............................................................ 2.120, 3.94
LEVEL - EMF ...............................................................2.49 sources ........................................................................ 2.50
LEVEL - LEVEL............................................................2.43 stereo................................................................ 2.63, 3.100
LEVEL - UCOR ............................................................2.47 VOR.................................................................. 2.65, 3.106
LF OUTPUT ............................................................... 2.132 Modulation depth
LIST ........................................................................... 2.145 30-Hz VAR signal (VOR)............................................ 3.107
MEM SEQ .................................................................. 2.150 AM ...................................................................... 2.54, 3.30
MODULATION - PM.....................................................2.58 BK..................................................................... 2.64, 3.102
MODULATION - PULSE...............................................2.61 COM/ID signal ............................................................. 3.70
MODULATION - STEREO............................................2.63 ILS-GS ........................................................... 2.70, 3.69
MODULATION- AM......................................................2.54 ILS-LOC ......................................................... 2.74, 3.72
MODULATION ILS - LOC.............................................2.72 Marker Beacon ............................................... 2.76, 3.80
MODULATION MKR-BCN............................................2.76 VOR ............................................................. 2.66, 3.108
MODULATION-FM .......................................................2.56 difference (DDM).......................................................... 3.73
MODULATION-ILS-GS.................................................2.68 DK .................................................................... 2.64, 3.102
MODULATION-VOR ....................................................2.65 FM carrier (VOR) .............................................. 2.66, 3.107
path..............................................................................2.18 PM ...................................................................... 2.56, 3.82
quick selection..............................................................2.21 Modulation generator (testing).......................................... 5.27
Status......................................................................... 2.169 Module indication .................................................. 2.162, 3.22
store.............................................................................2.21 MSAT (Mobile Satellite).................................................... 2.78
summary ......................................................................2.40 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
SWEEP - FREQ ......................................................... 2.138 MSEQ operating modes ........................................ 2.148, 3.17
SWEEP - LEVEL........................................................ 2.140 Multifunction generator.............................................. 1.9, 2.53
SWEEP - LF GEN2 .................................................... 2.141 testing.......................................................................... 5.40
TILITIES - DIAG - TPOINT......................................... 2.163 Multi-transmitter ............................................................... 2.46
TILITIES -YSTEM -PIB .............................................. 2.152
UTILITIES - AUX I/O .................................................. 2.166 N
UTILITIES - BEEPER................................................. 2.167 NADC (North American Digital Cellular) ........................... 2.78
UTILITIES - CALIB - LEV PRESET............................ 2.159 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
UTILITIES - CALIB - QPSK........................................ 2.161 Name of sequence (MSEQ) ........................................... 3.120
UTILITIES - CALIB - VCO SUM ................................. 2.158 NAN ................................................................................... 3.9
UTILITIES - DIAG - CONFIG...................................... 2.162 Network information (ERMES) ......................................... 3.53
UTILITIES - DIAG - PARAM....................................... 2.164 New Line (command line)................................................... 3.8
UTILITIES - INSTALL................................................. 2.168 NINF .................................................................................. 3.9
UTILITIES - MOD KEY............................................... 2.165 NTRansition register....................................................... 3.134
UTILITIES - PHASE ................................................... 2.156 Numeric
UTILITIES - PROTECT .............................................. 2.157 input (field)..................................................................... 2.3
UTILITIES - REF OSC ............................................... 2.155 suffix .............................................................................. 3.7
UTILITIES - SYSTEM - RS232................................... 2.153 values ..................................................................... 2.3, 3.9
UTILITIES - SYSTEM LANGUAGE ............................ 2.155
UTILITIES - SYSTEM-SECURITY ............................. 2.154 O
UTILITIES - TEST ..........................................................4.5
Menu keys ..........................................................................2.5 Offset
Message frequency............................................................ 2.42, 3.65
ERMES .................................................. 2.104, 2.105, 3.51 level .................................................................... 2.43, 3.89
FLEX ................................................................. 2.111, 3.58 ON/OFF - ratio ................................................................. 5.28
POCSAG........................................................... 2.128, 3.85 Opening the casing ............................................................ 1.4
REFLEX ............................................................ 2.120, 3.94 Operating modes............................................................ 2.135
remote control ................................................................3.4 Operating-hours (indication) .................................. 2.164, 3.22
Minimum value (commands) ...............................................3.8 Option
MKR-BCN (Marker Beacon modulation) .................. 2.76, 3.80 fitting.............................................................................. 1.4
MOBITEX (Mobile data system) .......................................2.78 SM-B1 - Reference oscillator OCXO................... 1.5, 2.155
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 SM-B2 - LF generator ...................................1.6, 2.53, 2.58
MODACOM (Mobile Data Communication).......................2.78 SM-B3 - Pulse modulator ...................................... 1.7, 2.61
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 SM-B4 - Pulse generator....................................... 1.7, 2.60
Modulation SM-B5 - FM/PM-modulator ...........................1.7, 2.56, 2.58
4FSK ................................................................... 2.97, 3.48 SM-B6 - Multifunction generator............................ 1.9, 2.53
AM ...................................................................... 2.54, 3.30 SM-B8 - Pulse modulator 3 GHz .................................... 1.7
FFSK................................................................. 2.100, 3.49 SM-B9 - Pulse modulator 6 GHz .................................... 1.7
FM....................................................................... 2.56, 3.63 SME-B11 - DM coder............................................ 1.9, 2.78
FSK..................................................................... 2.94, 3.47 SME-B12 - memory extension ............................ 1.11, 2.81
generators .................................................. 2.50, 5.23, 5.25 SME-B19 - Rear panel connections for RF and LF ...... 1.11
GFSK .................................................................. 2.89, 3.43 SME-B41 - FLEX .............................................. 1.11, 2.107
GMSK ................................................................. 2.87, 3.41 SME-B42 - POCSAG ........................................ 1.11, 2.127
ILS-GS ....................................................... 2.68, 2.75, 3.68 SME-B43 - ReFLEX25............................................... 2.116
ILS-LOC .............................................................. 2.72, 3.72 Output
incompatible .................................................................2.51 BLANK......................................... 2.13, 2.136, 2.144, 2.166
inputs ...........................................................................2.50 buffer ......................................................................... 3.132
Marker Beacon.............................................................2.76 BURST ..............................................2.13, 2.79, 3.36, 3.39
PM ...................................................................... 2.58, 3.82 CLOCK ..................................... 2.11, 2.79, 2.92, 3.37, 3.41
pulse ................................................................... 2.60, 3.91 DATA ..........................................................2.11, 2.79, 3.36

1038.6002.02 I.5 E-13

Index SME

level RF........................................................................2.43 FSK modulation .................................................. 2.96, 3.48

LF ................................................... 2.11, 2.13, 2.132, 3.28 GFSK modulation................................................ 2.90, 3.45
MARKER..................2.13, 2.137, 2.144, 2.166, 3.79, 3.112 GMSK modulation............................................... 2.88, 3.43
REF................................................................... 2.15, 2.155 marker signal ............................................................. 2.166
reflection coefficient .....................................................5.17 pulse modulation................................................. 2.62, 3.91
RF .............................................................. 2.11, 3.27, 3.65 QPSK modulation ............................................... 2.93, 3.46
SYNC ...........................................................................2.15 signal ......................................................................... 2.166
VIDEO................................................................. 2.15, 2.60 Power supply .............................................................. 1.1, 1.5
voltage ....................................................................... 2.132 PPE (Parallel poll enable register).................................. 3.137
X-AXIS .............................................................. 2.13, 2.136 PRBS generator ...................................................... 2.80, 3.40
OVEN COLD ......................................................................1.2 Preemphasis
Overlapping execution .................................................... 3.131 FM ..............................................................2.57, 3.64, 5.24
Overload protection ..........................................................2.49 stereo modulation ............................................. 2.64, 3.101
Overmodulation ..................................... 2.51, 2.57, 2.71, 2.75 Preset ..................................................................... 1.3, 3.120
Overview Programming Examples ...................................................9D.1
DM Protection level............................................................... 3.121
modulations .............................................................2.50 Protective circuit............................................................... 3.27
radio network data ...................................................2.78 PTRansition register....................................................... 3.134
menus ..........................................................................2.40 Pulling range .................................................................. 2.155
modulation sources ......................................................2.50 Pulse
status register.................................................. 3.115, 3.135 delay ................................................................... 2.62, 3.92
syntax elements ...........................................................3.11 generator ......................................................1.7, 2.60, 3.92
Overvoltage protection (testing)........................................5.19 calibration..................................................... 2.160, 3.20
testing ..................................................................... 5.38
P input............................................................................. 2.60
Paging modulation .......................................................... 2.60, 3.91
ERMES ........................................... 2.104, 3.50, 3.52, 3.53 polarity............................................................ 2.62, 3.91
FLEX ................................................................. 2.108, 3.58 modulator.............................................................. 1.7, 2.61
POCSAG........................................................... 2.128, 3.85 testing ..................................................................... 5.28
REFLEX ................................................... 2.116, 3.94, 3.95 period.................................................................. 2.62, 3.92
Parallel poll enable register (PPE) ....................... 3.137, 3.141 width ................................................................... 2.62, 3.92
Parameter (commands) ......................................................3.9 PULSE input ......................................................... 2.15, 3.128
Parity (RS232) ............................................................ 3.118, 5 Putting into operation ......................................................... 1.1
Password............................................................. 2.157, 3.121 Q
Path (commands) ...............................................................3.6
Pattern setting (list editor).................................................2.35 QPSK
PCN (Personal Communication System) calibration ......................................................... 2.161, 3.18
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 Modulation .......................................................... 2.91, 5.32
PDC (Pacific Digital Cellular) ............................................2.78 testing.......................................................................... 5.32
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 Query ................................................................................. 3.5
Performance test ..............................................................5.44 responses ...................................................................... 3.8
Period ...............................................................................2.62 Question........................................................................... 3.11
Phase Quick selection
antenna lobe menu............................................................................ 2.21
ILS-GS............................................................ 2.70, 3.71 parameter .................................................................... 2.21
ILS-LOC.......................................................... 2.74, 3.74 Quotation marks............................................................... 3.11
pilot tone ......................................................................2.64
RF output .......................................................... 2.156, 3.81 R
Phase angle (VOR)...........................................................2.66 Rack 19" .......................................................................... 1.12
Phase modulation .................................................... 2.58, 3.82 Radio network data (DM).................................................. 2.86
PhiM Radiocommunication Service
deviation setting ...........................................................5.26 ERMES............................................................. 2.102, 3.41
distortion factor.............................................................5.27 FLEX ................................................................ 2.107, 3.41
frequency response......................................................5.26 POCSAG .......................................................... 2.127, 3.41
Physical quantities..............................................................3.8 ReFLEX25 ........................................................ 2.116, 3.41
Pilot tone ........................................... 2.64, 2.133, 3.28, 3.101 RCL list (MSEQ)............................................................. 3.120
PM Recording of external data ...................................... 2.83, 3.40
coupling............................................................... 2.59, 3.82 REF
deviation.............................................................. 2.58, 3.82 input/output ......................................2.15, 2.66, 2.155, 3.65
deviation limits..............................................................2.59 signal (VOR) ..................................................... 2.64, 3.106
frequency ............................................................ 2.58, 3.83 Reference
generator............................................................. 2.58, 3.83 10-MHz ........................................................................ 2.15
modulator ..................................................... 1.7, 2.58, 3.82 50-MHz ........................................................................ 1.12
POCSAG (Post Office Code Standardization Advisory Group) external............................................................. 2.155, 3.99
.....................................................................................2.78 input/output .................................................................. 3.99
Radio network ..............................................................2.86 internal......................................................................... 3.99
radiocommunication .......................................... 2.127, 3.41 oscillator OCXO ..........................................1.5, 2.155, 3.99
Polarity step synthesis................................................................ 1.5
4FSK modulation................................................. 2.99, 3.49 ReFLEX25 radiocommunication service......................... 2.116
AM ...................................................................... 2.55, 3.31 REMOTE............................................................................ 3.2
BLANK signal ...............................................................3.27 Remote-control interface

1038.6002.02 I.6 E-13

SME Index

IEC-bus ........................................................... 2.15, 2.17, 1 QUEStionable register .....................................3.116, 3.139

RS-232........................................................................ A6.4 Status byte (STB)........................................................... 3.136
Remove paneling................................................................1.4 Status line ........................................................................ 2.18
Reset status reporting system ........................................ 3.142 STATUS page ................................................................ 2.169
Residual Status register overview ................................................. 3.135
AM ...............................................................................5.15 Status reporting system.................................................. 3.133
AM with FM ..................................................................5.24 STB (status byte) ........................................................... 3.136
FM................................................................................5.14 Step width
PhiM with AM ...............................................................5.21 DDM value with rotary knob ......................................... 2.74
Responses to queries .........................................................3.8 level sweep....................................................... 2.140, 3.90
RF LF sweep .........................................................2.142, 3.114
channel (ERMES).............................................. 2.103, 3.51 RF sweep ......................................................... 2.138, 3.67
frequency ............................................................ 2.41, 2.68 rotary knob
output .................................................................. 2.11, 3.27 carrier frequency ............................................ 2.67, 2.75
output level.......................................................... 2.43, 3.89 frequency variation .................................................. 2.41
sweep.............................................................. 2.138, 3.103 level variation .......................................................... 2.44
RF OFF ............................................................................2.49 Stereo modulation ................................................. 2.63, 3.100
Rotary knob ............................................................... 2.7, 2.19 Stereo multiplex signal .......................2.63, 2.133, 3.28, 3.100
RS232 interface................................................. 2.15, 2.153, 4 Stop bit (RS232)......................................................... 3.118, 5
Stop frequency
S LF sweep .........................................................2.142, 3.110
Sample setting..................................................................2.23 RF sweep ......................................................... 2.138, 3.67
Sample-and-hold operation...............................................2.46 Stop level (level sweep) ........................................ 2.140, 3.90
SCPI Storage .............................................................................. 4.1
Information .................................................................. 7B.1 Store
Introduction ....................................................................3.5 instrument settings....................................................... 2.39
Scrollbar ...........................................................................2.19 list ................................................................................ 2.31
Select Structure
1-out-of-n......................................................................2.20 command ....................................................................... 3.6
mark .............................................................................2.18 command line ................................................................ 3.8
Self test .......................................................... 3.16, 3.122, 4.5 Subcarrier (VOR).............................................................. 2.66
Semicolon seperates ........................................................3.11 Subharmonics .................................................................. 5.10
Sensitivity per percent modulation depth ................. 2.71, 2.75 Sum bit........................................................................... 3.134
Sequence length Sum deviation .................................................................. 2.51
PRBS .................................................................. 2.78, 3.41 Sum modulation depth...................................................... 2.51
XMEM ................................................................. 2.83, 3.39 ILS-GS signal contents ................................................ 2.69
Serial number ........................................................ 2.164, 3.15 ILS-LOC signal contents .............................................. 2.73
Serial poll........................................................................ 3.140 two-tone modulation..................................................... 2.51
Service request (SRQ)........................................... 3.16, 3.140 Summing loop ......................................................... 1.5, 2.158
Service request enable (SRE) ............................... 3.16, 3.136 Sweep............................................................................ 2.134
Setting commands ..............................................................3.5 level .................................................................. 2.140, 3.90
Setting value.....................................................................2.20 LF2.141, 3.112
Settling bit....................................................................... 3.138 outputs....................................................................... 2.136
Short form (commands) ......................................................3.7 RF....................................................................2.138, 3.103
Sign ....................................................................................3.9 run
Signal shape (LF generator) ................................ 2.133, 3.111 level sweep .................................................2.140, 3.105
Simultaneous modulation..................................................2.51 LF sweep.....................................................2.142, 3.113
Single-pulse delay ............................................................2.62 RF sweep ....................................................2.138, 3.104
Slots ...................................................................................1.5 trigger ........................................................................ 3.124
Software Switchover to remote control .............................................. 3.2
indication.................................................................... 2.164 Symbol ............................................................................. 2.21
option ................................................................ 1.11, 2.164 Symbol clock........................................................... 2.92, 3.36
version .............................................................. 2.168, 3.22 SYNC output .................................................................... 2.15
Source resistance.............................................................2.49 Synthesis range ...................................................... 2.57, 2.59
Span RF sweep .............................................................. 2.138 T
Special characters ............................................................3.13
Spectral purity.......................................................... 2.57, 2.59 Temperature dependence of oscillator ........................... 2.160
Square brackets .................................................................3.7 TEST points .......................................................... 2.163, 3.22
SRE (service request enable register) ............................ 3.136 TETRA (Trans European Trunked Radio)......................... 2.78
SRQ (service request) ........................................... 3.16, 3.140 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
SSB phase noise ..............................................................5.14 TFTS (Terrestrial Flight Telephone System)..................... 2.78
STANDBY mode................................................... 1.1, 1.2, 2.9 Radio network.............................................................. 2.86
Start address (XMEM) ............................................. 2.83, 3.39 Traffic area code .............................................................. 2.64
Start bit (RS-232-C) ......................................................... A6.5 Trigger
Start frequency action........................................................................... 2.21
LF sweep ........................................................ 2.142, 3.110 active edge
RF sweep.......................................................... 2.138, 3.66 PULSE input................................................. 2.62, 3.128
Start level (level sweep)......................................... 2.140, 3.90 TRIGGER input .........................2.83, 2.166, 3.40, 3.128
State...................................................................................3.2 DM.................................................................... 2.95, 2.101
STATus
OPERation register ......................................... 3.115, 3.138

1038.6002.02 I.7 E-13

Index SME

input ....................................................................................
2.13, 2.62, 2.82, 2.83, 2.136, 2.144, 2.150, 2.166, 3.40,
3.128
LIST ................................................................ 2.144, 3.126
memory extension (XMEM) ................................. 2.82, 3.40
MSEQ ............................................................. 2.150, 3.127
oscilloscope ............................................................... 2.136
pulse modulation ............................................... 2.62, 3.127
sweep.............................................................. 2.136, 3.124
XY recorder ................................................................ 2.136
Truth values........................................................................3.8
TUNE input ............................................................ 2.15, 2.155
Tuning voltage ................................................................ 2.156
Two-tone modulation ........................................................2.51
U
UCOR (level correction)........................................... 2.47, 3.32
Unit................................................................... 2.5, 3.8, 3.129
Universal commands ....................................................... 8C.3
Useful data FLEX ........................................................... 2.113
User correction (UCOR)........................................... 2.47, 3.32
V
VAR signal (VOR).................................................. 2.66, 3.107
VCO summing loop (calibration) ............................ 2.159, 3.20
Ventilation ducts .................................................................1.4
VHF ..................................................................................2.66
VIDEO output .......................................................... 2.15, 2.60
Voltage
external modulation signal............................................2.51
LF output........................................................... 2.132, 3.28
VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Range) ... 2.65, 2.67, 3.106, 3.108
W
Waveform (LF generator).............................. 2.56, 2.58, 3.111
White space......................................................................3.11
X
X-AXIS output........................................................ 2.13, 2.136
XMEM (memory extension) ..................................... 2.81, 3.39
checksum.............................................................. 3.22, 4.6
sequence length.................................................. 2.83, 3.39
start address ....................................................... 2.83, 3.39
trigger................................................................ 2.103, 3.40
XY recorder .................................................................... 3.103

1038.6002.02 I.8 E-13